Docstoc

Kick off meeting at the EDSG in

Document Sample
Kick off meeting at the EDSG in Powered By Docstoc
					       VOLUME 3




TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS




                           1
3.1. GENERAL PROJECT INFORMATION

3.1.1. PROJECT BACKGROUND

The National Food Reference Laboratory (NFRL) aims to ensure food safety and increase the effective
implementation and enforcement of the food control system in Turkey.

„The objective of the project is strengthening legal and organizational structures of the Ministry of
Agriculture and Rural Affairs (MARA) at central and decentralized levels and improving co-operation with
the private sector to ensure food safety and increase effective implementation and enforcement of food
control system in Turkey.‟

„The purpose of the project is meeting EU accession requirements for official food control and developing
sustainable laboratory strategy for effective implementation and enforcement of food control system
through establishing National Food Reference Laboratory and strengthening the institutional capacity.‟

3.1.2. DESCRPTION OF THE PROJECT

National Food Reference Laboratory main building (building A) has 2 blocks. The two blocks are separated
from each other according to their stories by seismic joint. The block which is a two story building has
training room, conference hall, cafeteria/lounge, support, storage at first story. At second story it has quality
management, risk assessment, financial unit, mechanical room, and directors‟ offices. Second block is a
laboratory building. There will be chromatography, microbiology, molecular biology, origin/adulteration,
inorganic and physical-chemical analysis laboratories. Each block has a story height of 4.50 m. The spacing
between axes is 7.00 m, 8.00 m, 12.00 m horizontal and 7.00 m, 9.00 m vertical at two blocks.

B block is designed to serve the technical areas as gas storage, pressure tank, storages for domestic water
and fire water. The chiller-air cooled units are placed on the top of this building.

C and D blocks are the security control buildings which are housed to provide the control of main entrance
and service entrance.

3.1.3. SITE

The site is located at one of the main boulevards of Ankara, which is Fatih Sultan Mehmet Boulevard (also
known as Istanbul-Ankara highway) it is a huge area of Poultry Research Institute land belonging to
MARA.

The size of the lot was evaluated to 27.926 m2 according to the NFRL requirements and considering future
expansion needs. The selected size is enough to accommodate the laboratory and its future expansion as
well as the required access roads, receiving areas and parking spaces for personnel and also for recreational
facilities.

Access to site is provided from the (south) boulevard and also from the other side (north) via Sehit Cem
Ersever Street. Fatih Sultan Mehmet Boulevard (south) is selected as the main entrance for visitor‟s


                                                                                                               2
entrance, employees, pedestrians and vehicles. Sehit Cem Ersever Street is preferred as the service gate,
which is located at the north side. Visitor and employee parking areas are designed as two groups at the
main entrance providing 43 car parking spaces.

One of the main considerations in site planning was security that is provided by the control of two entries.



3.1.4. SCOPE OF THE WORK

The following works will be realized under this contract:

       Demolition of Existing Structures
       Excavation for all designed Structures
       Transformer Building (ready-made)
       Structural, architectural, mechanical, and electrical works detailed with drawings and technical
        specifications for all buildings
    - NFRL Building (A Block)
    - Technical Building (B Block)
    - Main Gate Security Control Building (C Block)
    - Service Gate Security Control Building (D Block)
     Structural landscaping for the lot
    - Pedestrian walkways
    - Surrounding wall
    - Security fencing
    - Car-parking area
    - Inner roads
     Outdoor lightning
     Electronic barrier for vehicles
     Fire alarm system
     CCTV system
     CATV system
     Public Announcement system
     Security and card access system




                                                                                                               3
Table of contents
         Technical specifications For Structural Works                                                                                       …………...19
1     Earthworks for buildings                                                                                                                                  19
   1.1General………………………………………………………………………………………………...19
   1.2Definitions............................................................................................................................................. 19
   1.3Materials ............................................................................................................................................... 20
   1.4Workmanship ........................................................................................................................................ 21
      1.4.1Starting Foundation Excavation                                                                                                                       21
      1.4.2Methodology of Opening Foundations                                                                                                                   21
      1.4.3Appropriate Excavation Material                                                                                                                      21
      1.4.4Last Leveling of Ground and protection of Base for Concrete                                                                                          21
      1.4.5Preparation of Foundation Soil                                                                                                                       22
      1.4.6Removal of Soft Parts                                                                                                                                22
      1.4.7Tests                                                                                                                                                23
      1.4.8Support                                                                                                                                              24
      1.4.9Drainage                                                                                                                                             25
      1.4.10Removing Excavation Material                                                                                                                        25
      1.4.11Exported Granular Fill                                                                                                                              26
      1.4.12Backfill                                                                                                                                            26
      1.4.13Rock Excavation                                                                                                                                     27
      1.4.14Protection of Existing Service Lines and Structures                                                                                                 27
      1.4.15Leveling                                                                                                                                            27
      1.4.16Transportation of Earthworks                                                                                                                        27
2     Concrete works                                                                                                                                            27
   2.1Concrete works ..................................................................................................................................... 27
   2.2Concrete ................................................................................................................................................ 28
      2.2.1Standards and Rules                                                                                                                                  28
      Record of Concreting                                                                                                                                      28
      2.2.3Classes of Concrete                                                                                                                                  29
      2.2.4Organization of Concrete Production at the Site                                                                                                      29
      2.2.5Ready Mixed Concrete                                                                                                                                 29
      2.2.6Materials and Testing                                                                                                                                30
      2.2.7Mixing and Testing                                                                                                                                   33
      2.2.8Placing and Compaction of Concrete                                                                                                                   38
      2.2.9Construction Joints                                                                                                                                  45
   2.3 Shuttering and Concrete Finishes ........................................................................................................ 45
      2.3.1General                                                                                                                                              46
      2.3.2Drawings and Calculations                                                                                                                            46
      2.3.3Materials for Shuttering                                                                                                                             46
      2.3.4Fixing of Shuttering                                                                                                                                 46
      2.3.5Coating to Prevent Adhesion                                                                                                                          47
      2.3.6Access Holes                                                                                                                                         47
      2.3.7Cleaning and Re-Using of Shuttering                                                                                                                  47
      2.3.8Removal of Shutters                                                                                                                                  47
      2.3.9Finish to Concrete Surfaces                                                                                                                          48
      2.3.10Dimension and Surfaces of In-Situ Concrete                                                                                                          48
      2.3.11Remedial Treatment of Concrete Surfaces                                                                                                             48
3. Steel reinforcement                                                                                                                                          49
   3.1Types, Quality and Storage ................................................................................................................... 49
   Bending and Cutting Schedules ................................................................................................................. 49
   3.3Protection and Cleaning ........................................................................................................................ 50
   Bending of Bars ......................................................................................................................................... 50
   3.5Cutting of Wire Fabrics......................................................................................................................... 50
   3.6Lapping of Bars and Wire Fabrics ........................................................................................................ 50
   3.7Fixing of Reinforcement ....................................................................................................................... 51


                                                                                                                                                                4
3.8Thickness of Cover ............................................................................................................................... 51
3.9Tolerances ............................................................................................................................................. 51
3.10Approval before Concreting................................................................................................................ 51
Technical specifications For Architectural works ................................................................................ 52
4General ..................................................................................................................................................... 52
4.1Aluminum Doors and Windows ........................................................................................................... 53
4.1.1Applicable Publications: .................................................................................................................... 53
4.1.2Design: ............................................................................................................................................... 53
4.1.2.1Field Measurements: ....................................................................................................................... 53
4.1.3 Submittals: ........................................................................................................................................ 54
4.1.3.1 Certificates of Compliance: ........................................................................................................... 54
4.1.3.2 Descriptive Data:............................................................................................................................ 54
4.1.4 Storage: ............................................................................................................................................. 54
4.1.5Products: ............................................................................................................................................ 55
4.1.5.1Heat Insulated Aluminum Windows ............................................................................................... 56
4.1.5.2Heat Insulated Aluminum Doors .................................................................................................... 56
4.1.6Installation: ........................................................................................................................................ 56
4.1.6.1Adjustments: ................................................................................................................................... 57
4.1.7Cleanıng: ............................................................................................................................................ 57
4.2Brickwork and Blockwork .................................................................................................................... 57
4.2.1General ............................................................................................................................................... 57
4.2.2Lintels ................................................................................................................................................ 58
4.2.3Jointing and Pointing ......................................................................................................................... 58
4.2.4Bonding to Concrete .......................................................................................................................... 59
4.2.5Centering and Lagging ....................................................................................................................... 59
4.2.6Bricklaying and Blocklaying in Cold Weather .................................................................................. 59
4.3 Carpentry and Joinery .......................................................................................................................... 59
4.3.1 Joinery Timber .................................................................................................................................. 59
4.3.2 Synthetic Resin Adhesives ................................................................................................................ 60
4.3.3 Installation......................................................................................................................................... 60
4.4 Carpet Tiling ........................................................................................................................................ 60
4.4.1 General .............................................................................................................................................. 60
4.4.2 Material: ............................................................................................................................................ 61
4.4.3 Installation: ....................................................................................................................................... 62
4.5 Cementeous finishes ............................................................................................................................ 63
4.5.1 Surface Finishes Produced Without Formwork ................................................................................ 63
4.5.2 Surface Finishes Produced With Formwork ..................................................................................... 63
4.6 Ceramic Tile......................................................................................................................................... 64
4.6.1 Applicable Publications: ................................................................................................................... 64
4.6.2 Submittals: ........................................................................................................................................ 64
4.6.3 Delivery and Storage:........................................................................................................................ 65
4.6.4 Environmental Requirements:........................................................................................................... 65
4.6.5 Materials: .......................................................................................................................................... 65
4.6.5.1 Acid Resistant tiles......................................................................................................................... 66
4.6.6 Installation: ....................................................................................................................................... 66
4.6.6.1 General Installation Requirements: ................................................................................................ 67
4.6.6.2 Installation of Wall Tile: ................................................................................................................ 67
4.6.6.3 Installation of Floor Tile: ............................................................................................................... 68
4.6.6.4 Control Joints: ................................................................................................................................ 68
4.6.7 Cleaning and Protecting: ................................................................................................................... 68
4.7 Compact Laminated Toilet Partitions .................................................................................................. 69
4.7.1 Material ............................................................................................................................................. 69
4.7.2 Submittals ......................................................................................................................................... 69
4.7.3 Installation......................................................................................................................................... 69
4.7.4 Field Quality Requirements .............................................................................................................. 70


                                                                                                                                                               5
4.7.5 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................ 70
4.7.6 Protection .......................................................................................................................................... 70
4.8 Demolition Works ................................................................................................................................ 70
4.9 Doors .................................................................................................................................................... 70
4.9.1 Door Frames...................................................................................................................................... 71
4.9.2 Internal Timber Doors ....................................................................................................................... 71
4.9.3 Fire Resistant Doors .......................................................................................................................... 71
4.10 Drywall Partition Systems (Gypsum Wallboards) ............................................................................. 72
4.10.1 Scope:.............................................................................................................................................. 72
4.10.2 General: ........................................................................................................................................... 72
4.10.3 Materials: ........................................................................................................................................ 72
4.10.4 Submittals: ...................................................................................................................................... 72
4.10.5 Delivery and Storage:...................................................................................................................... 73
4.10.6 Environmental Requirements:......................................................................................................... 73
4.10.7 Scheduling: ..................................................................................................................................... 73
4.10.8 Installation: ..................................................................................................................................... 73
4.10.9 Cleaning: ......................................................................................................................................... 75
4.10.10 Protection: ..................................................................................................................................... 75
4.11 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies .................................................................................................... 75
4.12 Exterior Natural Stone Cladding ........................................................................................................ 76
4.12.1 General: ........................................................................................................................................... 76
4.12.2 Materials: ........................................................................................................................................ 76
4.12.3 Installation: ..................................................................................................................................... 78
4.12.4 Adjusting and Cleaning................................................................................................................... 79
4.13 Geosynthetic Material ........................................................................................................................ 79
4.14 Glazing Works ................................................................................................................................... 80
4.14.1 General: ........................................................................................................................................... 80
4.14.2 Applicable Publications: ................................................................................................................. 80
4.14.3 Submittals: ...................................................................................................................................... 80
4.14.4 Materials: ........................................................................................................................................ 81
4.14.5 Installation: ..................................................................................................................................... 81
4.14.6 Acceptance: ..................................................................................................................................... 82
4.15 Granite Ceramic (Porcelain) .............................................................................................................. 82
4.15.1 Material ........................................................................................................................................... 82
4.15.2 Workmanship .................................................................................................................................. 82
4.16 Gypsum Board Suspended Ceilings ................................................................................................... 83
4.17 Handrails and Balusters ..................................................................................................................... 84
4.18 Joint Sealing Compounds and Sealants.............................................................................................. 85
4.19 Joint Seals and Lubricants.................................................................................................................. 85
4.20 Ladders............................................................................................................................................... 86
4.21 Natural Stone Finishes ....................................................................................................................... 86
4.21.1 Applicable Publications: ................................................................................................................. 86
4.21.2 General Requirements: .................................................................................................................... 87
4.21.3 Materials: ........................................................................................................................................ 87
4.21.4 Submittals: ...................................................................................................................................... 88
4.21.5 Sampling and Testing: .................................................................................................................... 88
4.21.6 Handling and Storage: ..................................................................................................................... 89
4.21.7 Mortars: ........................................................................................................................................... 89
4.21.8 Setting Marble (travertine) and Stone Flooring: ............................................................................. 90
4.21.9 Cleaning: ......................................................................................................................................... 90
4.21.10 Protection of Work: ....................................................................................................................... 90
4.22 Paints and Painting Material for Buildings ........................................................................................ 91
4.22.1 Applicable Publications .................................................................................................................. 91
4.22.2 General ............................................................................................................................................ 91
4.22.3 Submittals ....................................................................................................................................... 91


                                                                                                                                                               6
   4.22.4 Quality Assurance ........................................................................................................................... 92
   4.22.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ..................................................................................................... 92
   4.22.6 Project Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 92
   4.22.7 Paint Materials ................................................................................................................................ 93
   4.22.8 Execution ........................................................................................................................................ 93
   4.22.9 Application ...................................................................................................................................... 95
   4.23 Plastering............................................................................................................................................ 98
   4.23.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 98
   4.23.2 External Rendering ......................................................................................................................... 99
   4.23.3 Expanded Metal Lathing ................................................................................................................. 99
   4.23.4 Plastering in Cold Weather ............................................................................................................. 99
   4.24 PVC Flooring ..................................................................................................................................... 99
   4.24.1 Scope of Work: ............................................................................................................................... 99
   4.24.2 Submittals: ...................................................................................................................................... 99
   4.24.3 Delivery and Storage:.................................................................................................................... 100
   4.24.4 Scheduling: ................................................................................................................................... 100
   4.24.5 Materials: ...................................................................................................................................... 100
   4.24.6 Installation Materials..................................................................................................................... 100
   4.24.7 Execution ...................................................................................................................................... 101
   4.24.8 Cleaning and Protection ................................................................................................................ 103
   4.25 Roads................................................................................................................................................ 103
   4.25.1 Granular Sub-base Material .......................................................................................................... 103
   4.25.2 Road Base Material ....................................................................................................................... 104
   4.25.3 Bitumen ......................................................................................................................................... 106
   4.25.4 Aggregates .................................................................................................................................... 107
   4.25.5 Execution ...................................................................................................................................... 109
   4.25.5.1 General ....................................................................................................................................... 109
   4.25.5.2 Prime Coat ................................................................................................................................. 110
   4.25.5.3 Tack Coat ................................................................................................................................... 110
   4.25.5.4 Asphaltic Concrete ..................................................................................................................... 110
   4.25.6 Precast Concrete Kerbs, Channels, Edgings and Quadrants ......................................................... 114
   4.26 Roofs ................................................................................................................................................ 114
   4.26.1 Roof Coverings ............................................................................................................................. 114
   4.26.2 Rainwater Pipes and Gutters ......................................................................................................... 115
   4.26.3 Nuts, Screws, Washers and Bolts.................................................................................................. 115
   4.26.4 Roofing Materials ......................................................................................................................... 116
   4.26.4.1 Mineral Aggregates for Flat Roofs ............................................................................................ 116
   4.26.4.2 SBS Bitumen .............................................................................................................................. 116
   4.26.4.3 Trapezoidal aluminum panel roofing ......................................................................................... 116
   4.26.5 Guarantee on roofing work ........................................................................................................... 116
   4.27 Security Fencing .............................................................................................................................. 116
   4.28 Suspended Ceilings .......................................................................................................................... 117
   4.28.1 Scope:............................................................................................................................................ 117
   4.28.2 General: ......................................................................................................................................... 117
   4.28.3 Submittals: .................................................................................................................................... 117
   4.28.4 Materials: ...................................................................................................................................... 117
   4.28.5 Installation: ................................................................................................................................... 118
   4.28.6 Cleaning: ....................................................................................................................................... 119
Technical specifications For Infrastructural works
4.29 EARTH WORKS                                                                                                                                               134
   4.29.1 General ......................................................................................................................................... 134
      4.29.1.1 Works Included                                                                                                                                  134
      4.29.1.2 Classification of Soils                                                                                                                         134
      4.29.1.3 Excavation Methods                                                                                                                              134
      4.29.1.4 Backfill Materials                                                                                                                              134


                                                                                                                                                                7
      4.29.1.5 Location and Protection of Underground Utilities                                                                                             135
      4.29.1.6 Safety in Working                                                                                                                            135
      4.29.1.7 Working in Public Roads                                                                                                                      135
   4.29.2 Excavation..................................................................................................................................... 136
      4.29.2.1 Excavation Method                                                                                                                            136
      4.29.2.2 Trench Excavation                                                                                                                            136
      4.29.2.3 Keeping Excavations Free from Water                                                                                                          137
      4.29.2.4 Supporting Excavations                                                                                                                       137
      4.29.2.5 Shoring                                                                                                                                      137
      4.29.2.6 Maintaining of Other Services and Structures                                                                                                 138
   4.29.3 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 138
      4.29.3.1 Filling Materials                                                                                                                            138
      4.29.3.2 Sand Bedding                                                                                                                                 139
      4.29.3.3 Bedding Material for Concrete Pipes                                                                                                          139
      4.29.3.4 Graded Aggregates                                                                                                                            139
      4.29.3.5 Drainage Fill and Filter Materials                                                                                                           139
      4.29.3.6 Reuse of Excavated Material                                                                                                                  139
   4.29.4 Backfilling ..................................................................................................................................... 140
      4.29.4.1 Embedding of Pipes                                                                                                                           140
      4.29.4.2 Backfilling of Trenches to Surface                                                                                                           140
      4.29.4.3 Backfilling Sundries                                                                                                                         141
         Backfilling around Manholes                                                                                                                        141
         Backfilling in Streambeds                                                                                                                          141
         Field Drains                                                                                                                                       141
   4.29.5 Reinstatement and Maintenance ................................................................................................... 141
      4.29.5.1 Reinstatement of Paved Surfaces                                                                                                              141
      4.29.5.2 Reinstatement of Unpaved Surfaces                                                                                                            142
         Surface Reinstatement in Agricultural Fields                                                                                                       142
         Reinstatement of Existing Services                                                                                                                 142
         Reinstatement of Hedges, Fences and Walls                                                                                                          142
         Maintenance of Backfilled Surfaces                                                                                                                 142
   4.29.6 Testing Of Earth Works................................................................................................................. 143
      4.29.6.1 General                                                                                                                                      143
      4.29.6.2 Main Tests and Standards                                                                                                                     143
      4.29.6.3 Compaction of Soils                                                                                                                          143
      4.29.6.4 Testing of Compaction                                                                                                                        143
4.30 PIPE WORKS                                                                                                                                             144
   4.30.1 General ......................................................................................................................................... 144
      4.30.1.1 Scope                                                                                                                                        144
      4.30.1.2 Method Statement for Pipe Laying                                                                                                             144
      4.30.1.3 Supply of Materials                                                                                                                          145
      4.30.1.4 Potable Water Certification                                                                                                                  145
      4.30.1.5 Inspection by the Supervisor                                                                                                                 145
      4.30.1.6 Fittings and Adapters                                                                                                                        145
      4.30.1.7 Toxic Materials                                                                                                                              145
   4.30.2 Pipe Materials ............................................................................................................................... 145
      4.30.2.1 General                                                                                                                                      145
      4.30.2.2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes and Fittings                                                                                          146
      4.30.2.3 Polyvinyl-Chloride Pipes                                                                                                                     146
      4.30.2.4 Lining of Pipes and Fittings                                                                                                                 147
      4.30.2.5 Pipe Joints                                                                                                                                  148
      4.30.2.6 Shipping, Packaging, Protection                                                                                                              148
   4.30.3 Pipeline Appurtenances ................................................................................................................ 148
      4.30.3.1 General Requirements                                                                                                                         148
   4.30.4 Testing Of Materials ..................................................................................................................... 149


                                                                                                                                                             8
      4.30.4.1 Testing at Place of Manufacture                                                                                                              149
      4.30.4.2 Storage and Testing on Site                                                                                                                  149
   4.30.5 Handling and Storage of Pipes ..................................................................................................... 149
      4.30.5.1 Handling and Transport of Pipes                                                                                                              150
      4.30.5.2 Stacking of Pipes                                                                                                                            150
      4.30.5.3 Distribution at the Site                                                                                                                     150
      4.30.5.4 Inspection before Installation                                                                                                               150
      4.30.5.5 Lowering into Trench                                                                                                                         151
   4.30.6 Pipe Laying ................................................................................................................................... 151
      4.30.6.1 Routing of Pipelines                                                                                                                         151
      4.30.6.2 General Requirements for Pipe Laying                                                                                                         151
      4.30.6.3 Cutting of Pipes                                                                                                                             152
         Polyvinyl-Chloride and HDPE Pipes                                                                                                                  152
         Closing Lengths                                                                                                                                    152
      4.30.6.4 Laying of Polyethylene Pipes                                                                                                                 152
   4.30.7 Testing and Disinfection of Pipelines ........................................................................................... 153
      4.30.7.1 Pressure Testing of Pipelines                                                                                                                153
      4.30.7.2 Sterilization of Pipelines                                                                                                                   154
      4.30.7.3 Repairs and Making Good of Defaults                                                                                                          154
4.31 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE WORKS                                                                                                                            155
   4.31.1 General ......................................................................................................................................... 155
      4.31.1.1 Scope                                                                                                                                        155
      4.31.1.2 Materials and Standards                                                                                                                      155
      4.31.1.3 Method Statement for Sewerage Works                                                                                                          155
      4.31.1.4 Supply of Materials                                                                                                                          156
      4.31.1.5 Inspection by the Supervisor                                                                                                                 156
   4.31.2 Pipes and Fittings ......................................................................................................................... 156
      4.31.2.1 General Requirements                                                                                                                         156
      4.31.2.2 Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Pipes and Fittings                                                                                                  156
      4.31.2.3 Concrete Pipes                                                                                                                               157
      4.31.2.4 HDPE Pipes                                                                                                                                   157
      4.31.2.5 Testing at Place of Manufacture                                                                                                              157
      4.31.2.6 Third Party Control                                                                                                                          157
      4.31.2.7 Storage and Testing on Site                                                                                                                  158
      4.31.2.8 Alternative Materials                                                                                                                        158
   4.31.3 Manholes and House Connections ................................................................................................ 158
      4.31.3.1 Manholes                                                                                                                                     159
         Manhole Covers                                                                                                                                     159
         Steps                                                                                                                                              159
         Construction of Manholes                                                                                                                           159
      4.31.3.2 House Connections                                                                                                                            160
      4.31.3.3 Stormwater Inlets                                                                                                                            160
   4.31.4 Handling of Pipelines and Materials ............................................................................................ 160
      4.31.4.1 Handling and Transport                                                                                                                       160
      4.31.4.2 Stacking of Pipes                                                                                                                            160
      4.31.4.3 Distribution at the Site                                                                                                                     161
      4.31.4.4 Inspection before Installation                                                                                                               161
      4.31.4.5 Lowering into Trench                                                                                                                         161
   4.31.5 Pipe Laying ................................................................................................................................... 161
      4.31.5.1 Routing of Pipelines                                                                                                                         161
      4.31.5.2 General Requirements for Pipe Laying                                                                                                         161
      4.31.5.3 Laying of GRP, PVC and Ductile Iron Pipes                                                                                                    162
      4.31.5.4 Laying of Concrete Pipes                                                                                                                     162
      4.31.5.5 Laying of HDPE Pipes                                                                                                                         163
      4.31.5.6 Manholes and Inspection Chambers                                                                                                             163


                                                                                                                                                             9
      4.31.5.7 Measurement                                                                                                                                     163
   4.31.6 Testing of Sewers .......................................................................................................................... 163
      4.31.6.1 Extent of Testing                                                                                                                               163
      4.31.6.2 Tests for Straightness and Obstructions                                                                                                         164
      4.31.6.3 Checks on Infiltration                                                                                                                          164
      4.31.6.4 Tests for Watertightness                                                                                                                        164
      4.31.6.5 Repairs and Making Good of Defaults                                                                                                             165
Technical Specifications for Mechanical works
5. Summary of work                                                                                                                                             166
   5.1 Work Covered By Tender Documents ............................................................................................... 166
   5.2 Mechanical Work Explanation........................................................................................................... 166
   5.3 General Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 168
   5.4 Products, Execution of Works ........................................................................................................... 168
   5.5 Units and abbreviations ...................................................................................................................... 169
   5.6 General ............................................................................................................................................... 169
      5.6.1 Introduction                                                                                                                                       170
      5.6.2 General Description                                                                                                                                170
   5.7 Codes And Standards ......................................................................................................................... 170
   5.8 Special Tool And Test Equipment List .............................................................................................. 170
      5.8.1 Submission Preliminary Parts List                                                                                                                  170
   5.9 Samples .............................................................................................................................................. 171
   5.10 Compliance to Rules and Regulations ............................................................................................. 171
   5.11 Material Testing ............................................................................................................................... 172
   5.12 Supervision, Inspection and Tests .................................................................................................... 172
   5.13 Quality Management ........................................................................................................................ 172
   5.14 Covering Up Of Works .................................................................................................................... 173
   5.15 Training ............................................................................................................................................ 173
6. General standards                                                                                                                                           173
   6.1 General Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 173
      6.1.1 Alternative Standards                                                                                                                              174
      6.1.2 Availability                                                                                                                                       174
   6.2 Design Standards ............................................................................................................................... 174
7. Plumbing fixtures and equipment                                                                                                                             175
   7.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 175
      7.1.1 Section Include                                                                                                                                    175
      7.1.2 Related Work                                                                                                                                       175
      7.1.3 References                                                                                                                                         175
      7.1.4 Submittals                                                                                                                                         175
   7.2 Product Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 175
      7.2.1 General Requirements                                                                                                                               175
   7.3 Plumbing Equipment.......................................................................................................................... 176
      7.3.1 Water Supply Pump                                                                                                                                  176
         Type and Components                                                                                                                                   176
         Accessories                                                                                                                                           177
         Capacity Requirement                                                                                                                                  177
         Equipment Schedule                                                                                                                                    177
      7.3.2 Pressure Tank                                                                                                                                      177
         Type and Component                                                                                                                                    177
         Accessories                                                                                                                                           177
         Equipment Schedule                                                                                                                                    177
      7.3.3 Domestic & Fire Water Storage Tank                                                                                                                 178
         Accessories                                                                                                                                           178
         Capacity Requirement                                                                                                                                  178
      7.3.4 Duplex Water Softening System                                                                                                                      178
         Technical Characteristics of the Unit                                                                                                                 179


                                                                                                                                                              10
   7.3.5 Domestic Water Deionization Unit                                                                                                                 179
      Full Automatic Multimedia Sand Filter                                                                                                               179
      Full Automatic Active Carbon Filter                                                                                                                 179
      Reverse Osmosis Unit                                                                                                                                180
   7.3.6 Neutralization Tank                                                                                                                              180
   7.3.7 Domestic Water Headers                                                                                                                           181
      Type and Component                                                                                                                                  181
      Accessories                                                                                                                                         181
7.4 Plumbing Fixtures .............................................................................................................................. 182
   7.4.1 General Requirements                                                                                                                             182
   7.4.2 Sanitary Fixture Schedule                                                                                                                        182
      Water Closets And Cistern                                                                                                                           183
      Western Water Closets                                                                                                                               183
      Eastern Water Closets                                                                                                                               183
      Urinal And Spreader                                                                                                                                 183
      Wash Basins and Sinks                                                                                                                               183
      Wash Basin                                                                                                                                          183
      Service Sink                                                                                                                                        183
      Fabricated Accessory Items                                                                                                                          184
      Liquid Soap Dispenser                                                                                                                               184
      Soap Dish and Holder                                                                                                                                184
      Towel Bar                                                                                                                                           184
      Toilet Paper Holder                                                                                                                                 184
      Floor Drain                                                                                                                                         184
      Floor Cleanout                                                                                                                                      184
      Trench and Grill                                                                                                                                    184
7.5 Execution ........................................................................................................................................... 184
   7.5.1 Wall Mounted Items                                                                                                                               185
   7.5.2 Floor Mounted Items                                                                                                                              185
   7.5.3 Installation of Fixtures                                                                                                                         185
   7.5.4 Sealant Work                                                                                                                                     185
7.6 Domestic Water & Drainage Piping .................................................................................................. 186
   7.6.1 General                                                                                                                                          186
      Related Work                                                                                                                                        186
      References                                                                                                                                          186
      Submittals                                                                                                                                          186
   7.6.2 Product Requirements                                                                                                                             186
      General Requirements                                                                                                                                186
      Domestic Water And Drainage Piping                                                                                                                  186
      7.6.2.2.1Pipes And Fittings                                                                                                                         186
      7.6.2.2.2Domestic Cold Water Piping                                                                                                                 186
      7.6.2.2.3Domestic Hot Water Piping                                                                                                                  187
      7.6.2.2.4Sewer, Waste and Vent Piping                                                                                                               187
      7.6.2.2.5Storm Water Piping                                                                                                                         187
7.7 Valves And Strainers ......................................................................................................................... 188
   7.7.1 Ball valves                                                                                                                                      188
   7.7.2 Butterfly Valves                                                                                                                                 188
   7.7.3 Check Valves                                                                                                                                     188
   7.7.4 Pressure Relief Valves                                                                                                                           189
   7.7.5 Strainers                                                                                                                                        189
   7.7.6 Flexible Joints                                                                                                                                  189
   7.7.7 Water Meters and Gages                                                                                                                           189
      Water Meters                                                                                                                                        189
      Pressure Gages And Compound Gages                                                                                                                   189
      Water Level Gages                                                                                                                                   189


                                                                                                                                                          11
      7.7.8 Water Hammer Arrestors                                                                                                                             190
      7.7.9 Eye Wash Units                                                                                                                                     190
      7.7.10 Auxiliary Materials and Accessories                                                                                                               190
   7.8 Execution ........................................................................................................................................... 192
      7.8.1 Installation                                                                                                                                       192
         Water Piping                                                                                                                                          192
         Deionozed Water Piping, Chemical Treatment & Testing                                                                                                  192
         Sewer Water And Storm Drain                                                                                                                           193
      7.8.2 Piping Insulation                                                                                                                                  194
         General                                                                                                                                               194
         Application                                                                                                                                           194
         Insulation Schedule                                                                                                                                   194
         Exposed piping                                                                                                                                        194
         Concealed piping                                                                                                                                      194
         Under floor or piping pit                                                                                                                             195
      7.8.3 Pipe Sleeves                                                                                                                                       195
      7.8.4 Hydrostatic Tests                                                                                                                                  196
         Hydrostatıc Test For Water Pipe Work                                                                                                                  196
         Hydrostatic Tests Of Above Ground Drainage System                                                                                                     196
8. Fire fighting system                                                                                                                                        197
   8.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 197
   8.2 Fire Water Piping Materials .............................................................................................................. 197
      8.2.1 Pipes and Fittings                                                                                                                                 198
      8.2.2 Valves                                                                                                                                             198
      8.2.3 Insulation                                                                                                                                         198
   8.3 Fire Fighting Equipment .................................................................................................................... 198
      8.3.1 Pump Specifications                                                                                                                                198
      8.3.2 Pump Performance                                                                                                                                   199
      8.3.3 Components                                                                                                                                         199
      8.3.4 Jockey Pump                                                                                                                                        200
      8.3.5 Pump Pipe and Component Sizes                                                                                                                      200
      8.3.6 Electrical panels                                                                                                                                  201
      8.3.7 Fire Department Connection                                                                                                                         202
      8.3.8 Fire Hose Cabinets                                                                                                                                 202
      8.3.9 Fire Hose                                                                                                                                          203
      8.3.10 Hose Reel                                                                                                                                         203
      8.3.11 Nozzle                                                                                                                                            203
   8.4 Fire Extinguisher and Bracket............................................................................................................ 204
      8.4.1 General                                                                                                                                            204
      8.4.2 Bracket                                                                                                                                            204
      8.4.3 Fire Extinguisher                                                                                                                                  204
   8.5 Execution ........................................................................................................................................... 204
9. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning equipment                                                                                                         204
   9.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 204
      9.1.1 Section Includes                                                                                                                                   204
      9.1.2 Related Work                                                                                                                                       204
      9.1.3 References                                                                                                                                         204
      9.1.4 Submittals                                                                                                                                         205
   9.2 Air Conditioning Equipment Product Requirements ......................................................................... 205
      9.2.1 Materials                                                                                                                                          205
      9.2.2 Air Conditioning Equipment                                                                                                                         205
         Air Cooled Screw Chiller                                                                                                                              205
         Air Conditioning Pumps                                                                                                                                209
         Accessories                                                                                                                                           209
         Pump Types                                                                                                                                            210


                                                                                                                                                              12
        Equipment Requirement                                                                                                                                211
     9.2.3 Boilers                                                                                                                                           211
     9.2.4 Natural Gas Burner                                                                                                                                212
     9.2.5 Boiler Trim                                                                                                                                       212
     9.2.6 Natural Gas System                                                                                                                                212
        Equipment Schedule                                                                                                                                   213
     9.2.7 Chilled And Hot Water Headers                                                                                                                     213
        Type and Components                                                                                                                                  213
        Accessories                                                                                                                                          213
     9.2.8 Closed Type Expansion Tank                                                                                                                        214
        Components                                                                                                                                           214
        Accessories                                                                                                                                          214
        Equipment Requirement                                                                                                                                214
     9.2.9 Automatic filling of systems                                                                                                                      214
     9.2.10 Air Handling Units                                                                                                                               214
        Panel Construction                                                                                                                                   214
        Air Control Dampers                                                                                                                                  215
        Filter Sections                                                                                                                                      215
        Attenuator Sections                                                                                                                                  216
        Hot Water Coil Sections                                                                                                                              216
        Chilled Water Coil Sections                                                                                                                          216
        Fan Section                                                                                                                                          217
        Equipment Requirement                                                                                                                                218
        Cav Terminal Boxes                                                                                                                                   218
        Diffusers with DIN Class 1 HEPA Filter and Plenum                                                                                                    218
        Diffusers With DIN Plenum                                                                                                                            219
        Constant Air Volume Dampers                                                                                                                          219
        Shut-Off Dampers                                                                                                                                     219
        Precision A/C Unit                                                                                                                                   220
        Panel Type Radiators                                                                                                                                 220
  9.3 Ventilation Equipment ....................................................................................................................... 221
     9.3.1 Roof Fans                                                                                                                                         221
     9.3.2 Polyproplene Exhaust Fans                                                                                                                         221
     9.3.3 Chemical Fume Hood                                                                                                                                221
     9.3.4 Execution                                                                                                                                         222
10. HVAC air distribution                                                                                                                                    223
  10.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 223
     10.1.1 Section Includes                                                                                                                                 223
     10.1.2 Related Work                                                                                                                                     223
     10.1.3 References                                                                                                                                       223
     10.1.4 Submittals                                                                                                                                       223
  10.2 Air Conditioning Piping ................................................................................................................... 224
     10.2.1 Pipes and Fittings                                                                                                                               224
        Chilled Water and Hot Water Piping in Building                                                                                                       224
        Drain Piping                                                                                                                                         224
        Make Up Water Piping                                                                                                                                 224
     10.2.2 Valves and Piping Accessories                                                                                                                    224
        Butterfly Valves                                                                                                                                     224
        Check Valves                                                                                                                                         224
        Pressure Relief Valves                                                                                                                               225
        Strainers                                                                                                                                            225
        Flexible Joint                                                                                                                                       225
        Expansion And Contraction Of Pipework                                                                                                                225
        Expansion Loops and Bends                                                                                                                            225
        Expansion Joints                                                                                                                                     227


                                                                                                                                                             13
      Guides                                                                                                                                              228
      Air Vents                                                                                                                                           229
      Automatic Air Vents                                                                                                                                 229
      Air Tubes                                                                                                                                           229
      Flexible Metal Hoses                                                                                                                                229
  Gages                                                                                                                                                   230
  Auxiliary Materials                                                                                                                                     230
      Pipe Hangers                                                                                                                                        230
      Gaskets                                                                                                                                             230
      Sealing Tapes                                                                                                                                       230
      Welding Rods                                                                                                                                        231
  Execution                                                                                                                                               231
      Installation                                                                                                                                        231
      Chilled Water Piping                                                                                                                                231
      Condensate Drain Piping                                                                                                                             231
      Drip Drain Piping                                                                                                                                   231
      Foundation And Vibration Isolation                                                                                                                  231
10.3 Air Conditioning and Ventilation Duct ............................................................................................ 233
  Rectangular Ducts                                                                                                                                       233
      Duct Construction                                                                                                                                   233
      Duct Bend                                                                                                                                           234
      Air Extractor                                                                                                                                       235
      Flexible Connection                                                                                                                                 235
      Flexible Ducts                                                                                                                                      235
      Non-Insulated flexible ducts                                                                                                                        235
      Insulated flexible ducts                                                                                                                            235
      Ductwork Accessories                                                                                                                                235
      Volume Control Damper                                                                                                                               235
      Fire Damper                                                                                                                                         236
      Diffuser and Register                                                                                                                               236
      Access Door                                                                                                                                         237
      Duct Hanger                                                                                                                                         237
      Air Filter                                                                                                                                          237
10.4 Insulation.......................................................................................................................................... 238
  10.4.1 General                                                                                                                                          238
      Glass Wool lacquered aluminum foil secured                                                                                                          238
      Elastomeric rubber foam insulation material aluminum foil secured                                                                                   238
  Thermal Insulation In Voids, Shafts And Ducts                                                                                                           238
      Pipe work :                                                                                                                                         238
      Description                                                                                                                                         238
      Physical Properties                                                                                                                                 238
      Pipework Fittings :                                                                                                                                 241
      Valves                                                                                                                                              241
  Ductwork                                                                                                                                                241
      Ductwork Fittings                                                                                                                                   241
      Duct not requiring insulation                                                                                                                       241
  Thermal Insulation Externally                                                                                                                           242
      Thermal Insulation Protection                                                                                                                       242
      Valves                                                                                                                                              242
      Ducts                                                                                                                                               242
  Acoustic Standards for Mechanical Installation                                                                                                          243
      General                                                                                                                                             243
      Grilles, Registers And Diffusers                                                                                                                    243
      Acoustical Treatment Of Duct Systems                                                                                                                243
      Pumps Systems‟ Piping Noise                                                                                                                         244


                                                                                                                                                          14
  10.5 Painting ............................................................................................................................................ 244
     10.5.1 General                                                                                                                                          244
     Painting In Plant Room                                                                                                                                  244
     Painting Externally                                                                                                                                     245
     Protective Painting                                                                                                                                     245
  10.6 Identification Of Systems ................................................................................................................. 245
11. Buıldıng management & automatıon system                                                                                                                  247
  11.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 247
  11.2 Building Automation Equipment .................................................................................................... 248
     Central Console                                                                                                                                         248
     Direct Digital Controllers                                                                                                                              250
  11.3 DDC Controller Resident Software Features ................................................................................... 253
  11.4 Application Specific Controllers (ASC) .......................................................................................... 258
  11.5 System points ................................................................................................................................... 264
  11.6 Control Materials : ........................................................................................................................... 264
     Actuators                                                                                                                                               264
     Control Valves                                                                                                                                          265
     Damper Operators:                                                                                                                                       267
     Dampers                                                                                                                                                 267
     Room Thermostats                                                                                                                                        267
     Duct Mounted and Immersion Thermostats                                                                                                                  268
     Immersion and Duct Mounted Temperature Detectors:                                                                                                       268
     Duct Mounted Low Limit Temperature / “Frost” Protection Thermostats                                                                                     268
     Humidisdats                                                                                                                                             268
     Duct Mounted Humidity Detectors                                                                                                                         268
     Pressure Switches for Pipework:                                                                                                                         269
     Pressure Switches for Air systems                                                                                                                       269
     Air Flow Switches                                                                                                                                       269
     11.6.1 Water Flow Switches                                                                                                                              269
     11.6.2 Level Switches                                                                                                                                   269
     Duct Smoke Detectors:                                                                                                                                   270
     Gas Detectors                                                                                                                                           270
     Watt-Hour Transducers                                                                                                                                   270
     Differential Pressure Transmitters                                                                                                                      270
     Annubars:                                                                                                                                               271
  11.7 Electrical Wiring And Materials ..................................................................................................... 272
  11.8 Electrical Wiring Installation ......................................................................................................... 274
  11.9 On-Site Testing ................................................................................................................................ 276
  11.10 Service and Guarantee ................................................................................................................... 277
  11.11 Training .......................................................................................................................................... 278
12. Testıng adjustıng and balancıng                                                                                                                          279
  12.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 279
     Section Includes                                                                                                                                        280
     Related Work                                                                                                                                            280
     References                                                                                                                                              280
     Submittals                                                                                                                                              280
  12.2 Execution ......................................................................................................................................... 280
     General                                                                                                                                                 280
     Pressure Test For Water Pipe Work                                                                                                                       281
     Sterilization And Flushing Of Installation                                                                                                              282
     Underground Drainage System                                                                                                                             282
     Above Ground Drainage System                                                                                                                            283
  12.3 Testing, Balancing and Commissioning. ......................................................................................... 283
     Performance of testing                                                                                                                                  283
        General                                                                                                                                              283


                                                                                                                                                             15
     Measurements                                                                                                                                            284
        Air System                                                                                                                                           284
        Chillers:                                                                                                                                            284
        Return and Extract Fans                                                                                                                              285
        Pumping equipment                                                                                                                                    285
        Heat exchangers:                                                                                                                                     285
        Water systems (piping & Control Valves)                                                                                                              285
        Motor data                                                                                                                                           286
        Controls                                                                                                                                             286
        Sound Levels                                                                                                                                         286
Technical Specifications for Electrical Works
13. Electrical Work General Instructions                                                                                                                     287
  13.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 287
     13.1.1 Scope of Work                                                                                                                                    287
     13.1.2 Definitions                                                                                                                                      287
     13.1.3 Electrical Work Standards                                                                                                                        288
14. Basic Materials and Methods                                                                                                                              289
  14.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 289
  14.2 Products............................................................................................................................................ 289
     14.2.1 Conduits                                                                                                                                         289
     14.2.2 Outlet Boxes                                                                                                                                     290
     14.2.3 Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes                                                                                                                    290
     14.2.3 Floor Boxes                                                                                                                                      290
     14.2.5 Cable Tray                                                                                                                                       290
     14.2.6 Branch Circuit Conductors and Connectors                                                                                                         291
     14.2.7 Switches and Receptacles                                                                                                                         291
     14.2.8 Faceplates for Switches and Receptacles                                                                                                          291
     14.2.9 Identification Nameplates                                                                                                                        291
  14.3 Execution ......................................................................................................................................... 291
     14.3.1 Conduit Installation                                                                                                                             291
     14.3.2 Provisions for Services Crossing Building Expansion Joints                                                                                       293
     14.3.3 Installation of Outlet Boxes                                                                                                                     293
     14.3.4 Installation of Pull boxes and Junction Boxes                                                                                                    294
     14.3.5 Installation of Branch Circuit and Low Voltage Conductors                                                                                        294
     14.3.6 Cable Tray                                                                                                                                       295
     14.3.7 Installation of Switches and Receptacles                                                                                                         295
     14.3.8 Installation of Sleeves                                                                                                                          296
     14.3.9 Supply of Access Doors                                                                                                                           296
     14.3.10 Installation of fasteners for Conduit, Raceway, etc., and Equipment Hangers and Supports 297
     14.3.11 Installation of Identification of Nameplates                                                                                                    297
     14.3.12 Equipment Bases and Supports                                                                                                                    297
15. Electrical Service and Distribution                                                                                                                      297
  15.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 297
  15.2 Product ............................................................................................................................................. 297
     15.2.1 Secondary Switchboard                                                                                                                            297
     15.2.2 Distribution Panel boards                                                                                                                        298
     15.2.3 Lighting and Power Panel boards                                                                                                                  298
     15.2.4 Circuit Breakers                                                                                                                                 298
     15.2.5 A.C. Contactors                                                                                                                                  299
     15.2.6 Disconnected Switches                                                                                                                            299
     15.2.7 Fuses                                                                                                                                            299
  15.3 Execution ......................................................................................................................................... 299
     15.3.1 Description of Electrical Service and Distribution Work                                                                                          299
     15.3.2 Work Required For Incoming Electric Service                                                                                                      300
     15.3.3 Installation of Switchboard                                                                                                                      300


                                                                                                                                                             16
     15.3.4 Installation of Utility Meters                                                                                                                   300
     15.3.5 Installation of Distribution Panel boards                                                                                                        300
     15.3.6 Installation of Lighting and Power Panel boards                                                                                                  300
     15.3.7 Installation of Ground Fault Breakers                                                                                                            300
     15.3.8 Grounding                                                                                                                                        301
     15.3.9 Lightning Protection System                                                                                                                      301
     15.3.10 Electric Service and Distribution Testing and Coordination Study                                                                                301
     15.3.11 Installation of Safety Switches (Disconnect Switches)                                                                                           302
     15.3.12 Installation of Fuses                                                                                                                           302
     15.3.13 Electrical Connections for Mechanical and Laboratory Equipment                                                                                  302
     15.3.14 Elevator Equipment Power Connections                                                                                                            303
     15.3.15 Uninterruptible Power Provisions                                                                                                                303
16. Lighting                                                                                                                                                 303
  16.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 303
  16.2 Products............................................................................................................................................ 303
     16.2.1 Lighting fixtures and lamps                                                                                                                      303
     16.2.2 Wall Box Dimmers                                                                                                                                 304
     16.2.3 Photo Cells and Timers                                                                                                                           304
     16.2.4 Lighting Dimming Equipment                                                                                                                       304
  16.3 Execution ......................................................................................................................................... 304
     16.3.1 Installation of Lighting Fixtures and Lamps                                                                                                      304
     16.3.2 Installation of Wall Box Dimmers                                                                                                                 305
     16.3.3 Outside Lighting Control                                                                                                                         305
17. Telephone System                                                                                                                                         305
  17.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 305
     17.1.1 System Description                                                                                                                               305
         17.1.1 Design Characteristics of PABX                                                                                                               306
  17.2 Products............................................................................................................................................ 308
     17.2.1 System Features                                                                                                                                  308
     17.2.2 Numbering plan                                                                                                                                   310
     17.2.3 Documentation                                                                                                                                    310
     17.2.4 Training                                                                                                                                         311
     17.2.5 MDF (Main Distribution Frame)                                                                                                                    311
18. Fire Alarm System                                                                                                                                        311
  18.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 311
     18.1.1 System Description                                                                                                                               311
  18.2 Products............................................................................................................................................ 312
     18.2.1 Equipments                                                                                                                                       312
     18.2.2 System Components                                                                                                                                314
     18.2.3 Batteries and External Charger                                                                                                                   316
     18.2.4 Emergency and Exit Luminaries                                                                                                                    316
     18.2.5 Spare Parts and Tools                                                                                                                            316
  18.3 Execution ......................................................................................................................................... 316
     18.3.1 Installation                                                                                                                                     316
     18.3.2 Typical Operation                                                                                                                                316
19. Satellite Main Antenna TV System (Smatv)                                                                                                                 317
  19.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 317
  19.2 Products............................................................................................................................................ 317
     19.2.1 General                                                                                                                                          317
     19.2.2 Equipment                                                                                                                                        318
     19.2.3 VHF Antennas                                                                                                                                     318
     19.2.4 UHF Antenna                                                                                                                                      318
     19.2.5 FM Antenna                                                                                                                                       319
     19.2.6 VHF Pre-amplifiers                                                                                                                               319
     19.2.7 UHF Pre-amplifiers                                                                                                                               320


                                                                                                                                                             17
     19.2.8 Active channel Combiner (High Output)                                                                                                            320
     19.2.9 Outlets and Termination                                                                                                                          321
     19.2.10 Coaxial Cable                                                                                                                                   321
20. Sound System                                                                                                                                             321
  20.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 321
  20.2 Products............................................................................................................................................ 321
     20.2.1 Central Sound System                                                                                                                             321
  20.3 Execution ......................................................................................................................................... 322
     20.3.1 Central Sound System                                                                                                                             322
21. CCTV System                                                                                                                                              322
  21.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 322
  21.2 Products............................................................................................................................................ 322
     21.2.1 Digital Recording and switching Unit                                                                                                             322
     21.2.2 Monitor                                                                                                                                          323
     21.2.3 Camera                                                                                                                                           323
22. Card Access, Security and Car Barrier System                                                                                                             323
  22.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 323
  22.2 Products............................................................................................................................................ 324
     22.2.1 Central System                                                                                                                                   324
     22.2.2 Proximity Card Reader                                                                                                                            324
     22.2.3 Electrical Lock Fail Safe/Fail Secure                                                                                                            324
     22.2.4 Siren with Flashing Lamp                                                                                                                         324
     22.2.5 Addressing Units for Security Equipment                                                                                                          325
     22.2.6 Magnetic Contacts for Doors                                                                                                                      325
     22.2.7 Car Barriers                                                                                                                                     325
23. Data and Voice System                                                                                                                                    325
  23.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 325
  23.2 Products............................................................................................................................................ 325
     23.2.1 Horizontal Distribution                                                                                                                          326
     23.2.2 Vertical Distribution – Backbone                                                                                                                 326




                                                                                                                                                             18
                      Technical specifications For Structural Works
1      Earthworks for buildings

1.1    General
This specification consists of; excavation for all buildings and other structures, described in the
excavation plans; backfill, compaction of backfill and transportation of excavated material under
conditions written in this document and according to the drawings or with the directives of the
Supervisor.

All excavation, fill and soil bent works must comply with directions figured out in the drawings,
slopes and elevations or the Supervisor‟s directives will be followed.

In case the amount of excavation exceeds the amount described, the contractor is responsible
fiscally. Addition to this the extra amount of excavation will be filled according to the
requirements with compacted soil, crushed stone or concrete with the directives of the Supervisor,
by the contractor without any additional payment.

Before starting the earthworks, contractor must study the layout plan, elevation plan, and
topographic map of the area which is given by the Contracting Authority and complete all of the
controls. The contractor must prepare the excavation plans, sections, and calculations to be
checked and investigated by the Supervisor for all buildings.

The contractor will clean the area and the ground surface, trees and roots, before starting the
earthworks. Cleaning includes all the organic wastes and other rubble to be removed out from the
site. The brushwood and other plants to be carried away from site area must have to be cut at the
ground elevation level or under. This process will be done by the Supervisor‟s directives and the
plants will be cut carefully. The disassembly process includes trees having a diameter greater than
7.5 cm and the ones which have roots that tied to each other forming a wire shape. With these
materials mentioned above, tree-stumps, other organic and non-organic wastes will be taken by a
surface scan, otherwise 60 cm, from the natural ground elevation, excavation is required.
The tree-stump, roots brushes appeared out after cleaning and disassembly processes the organic
and the non-organic wastes will be carried away from the site by the contractor. Vegetable soil is
going to be deposited in a different area. Disassembling and cleaning and carry away processes are
included in the excavation item unit cost. Thus the contractor will not be paid additionally.

1.2    Definitions
      - Appropriate materials are classified in TS 1500 as GW, GP, SW, GM, SP, SM, and SC
GW : Well graded gravels, sandy gravels with little or no fines.
GP : Poorly graded gravels, sandy gravels with little or no fines.
SW : Well graded sands, gravely sands with little or no fines.
GM : Silty gravels, silty sandy gravels
SP : Poorly graded sands, gravely sands with little or no fines.


                                                                                                 19
SM : Silty sands
SC : Clayey sands

      -    Inappropriate materials are classified in TS 1500 as PT, OH, ML and OL. If the materials
           listed in the above statement are encountered during excavation the Supervisor has the
           responsibility to remove these materials.

PT : Peat and other highly soils.
OH : Organic clays of high plasticity
ML : Inorganic silts, silty or clayey fine sands with slight plasticity.
OL : Organic Silts and organic silty clays of low plasticity

      -    Cohesionless materials are listed in TS 1500 as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive
           materials are listed as GC, SC, ML, and CH. The materials classified as GM, and SM
           can only be defined as cohesionless materials in case their fine content contains no
           plasticity.
      -    Compaction degree; required Modified Proctor Test compaction degree is expressed as
           the percentage of max dry density. (TS 1900)

      -    Confined ground water table; is the permanent or temporary water table existing over the
           ground water table, isolated by an imperable soil layer.

      -    Accumulated water; the accumulated water exists between the foundation walls and
           granular fill and can be seen in a suspended form in the relatively less permeable fine
           graded soil.

1.3       Materials

      -    The selected fill material will be used around the foundations under structures, excluding
           structural foundations. The above selected material must not contain roots or similar
           organic materials, waste, rubble, and shoes greater than 7.5 cm. It must be compactable.
           Contents of this material have gradation passing percentage %10 from sieve no200
           (0.075mm)

      -    The capilar water barrier will be constructed under the foundation slabs and will be
           formed of crushed stone or natural gravel. Maximum size of the particle must not be
           greater than 4 cm and the total weight of passing percentage from sieve #4. will not be
           greater than %2

      -    If there are local weak areas and voids under the foundations, with the order of the
           Supervisor, these areas will be filled with 150 dosage lean concrete or granular fill
           material.



                                                                                                   20
1.4    Workmanship

1.4.1 Starting Foundation Excavation

Contractor will make application of structures and check the correctness of the process.

Following the approval of the excavation plan by the Supervisor, according to the excavation plan,
first the vegetable soil part will be removed and stored in place in the borders of the site. Then
those stored material will be used for landscape purposes by the contractor. The foundation
excavation will be made according to the directives of the Supervisor and related drawings with
the earthwork and also as in the specifications.

1.4.2 Methodology of Opening Foundations

Earthwork will comply with the defined dimensions and elevations for the structure. The
excavation area will have the adequate distance from the walls and foundation piers that allows to
establishment of the services and control, locate the establishment of forms and remove them and
also will have no addition cost to the Contracting Authority. The only exception of this condition
is the allowance of lean concrete and gravel-sand fill material casted directly, adjacent to the
excavation surfaces. There will not be any excavation under the defined levels. If the excavations
made without the Supervisor‟s particular instructions, the additional cost will not be reflected to
the Contract Authority and the selected fill material will be used for the compaction again and will
be filled.

1.4.3 Appropriate Excavation Material

The appropriate excavated material will be stored and used in the backfill in the project. If the
amount of appropriate excavated material is greater than amount of backfill, the contractor with
the help of Supervisor‟s directives will transport this excessiveness without bringing any
additional cost to the Contracting Authority. In case there is an over excavation, the excavated fill
material will be taken away from site like other inappropriate materials in a same manner.

1.4.4 Last Leveling of Ground and protection of Base for Concrete

It is only allowed for a large size scale of excavation for foundations up to 20-30 cm over the
designated base elevations. The last 20-30 cm of natural ground elevation will be excavated under
the control of the Supervisor and care will be taken to ground soil not to be disturbed. The surface
of soil must be protected from getting wet and drying. Whole incompact and compacted surfaces
under the foundation piers will be approved before concrete is casted. When the required level of
elevation for foundation of structures is reached, 10 cm of lean concrete will coat the level under
the foundation base and overflows 10 cm from both sides, immediately.


                                                                                                   21
1.4.5 Preparation of Foundation Soil

The last leveling operation is made and if required, soft parts of soil is excavated and filled with an
appropriate material and prepared.

The elevation difference between two points on the foundation soil must not exceed 1.5 cm and
this will be controlled by a gauge rod of 5m length. Addition to these restrictions, the foundation
elevation changes‟ must be in an interval of  2 cm tolerance according to the drawings.

The base of excavation area must be leveled in the above mentioned statement. The locations that
have an elevation difference greater than 2 cm will be excavated and filled as mentioned in the
related paragraphs. These works are included into foundation excavation works and additional cost
can not be demanded from administration.

The Supervisor has to be informed for checking the works done, and to approve them. If
necessary for recording data, before the final excavation elevations are reached and starting of next
process. Besides, Supervisor has the authority to control the works done.

1.4.6 Removal of Soft Parts

Although the processes are followed there may be still soft parts or cracks found in the excavation
base. These will be excavated by hand and will be filled with appropriate material described below
and these works will be measured. Then payment will be made according to the related unit costs.

Removal of Soft Parts Under The Foundations:

To remove the soft parts under the foundations, 150 kg/m3 of lean concrete or granular fill
material will be used as an appropriate material. The Supervisor must approve the selected
material. The concrete fill preparation, casting, compaction, curing and testing will be made
regarding the concrete specification and Supervisors instructions.

Removal of Soft Parts Under Non-Structural Sections:

The selected fill material will be used as an appropriate fill material for the excavated soft parts
under non-structural sections. The arrangement, location, compaction and testing procedure will
be done as described below.

Fill and Compaction:

Fill material will be laid in the form of horizontal layers and the thickness of the material laid will
not exceed 20 cm in the loose state. Then it will be compacted. Fill material will not be laid in


                                                                                                     22
muddy surfaces in any conditions. The fill will be straight and compacted in a stabilized way to
avoid the formation of eccentric loading and shear forces in the places adjacent to structures. The
sloped surfaces consist of barriers and terraces will be constructed to prevent sliding of fill
materials. During the process of backfill and construction of barriers, machines that may exert
additional loads to structures will not be used for compaction.

Depending on the Supervisor‟s approval, compaction operation will be done with the help of
vibrated cylinders, cylinders with steel wheels or other machines certified for that type of
operation. If required, material will be moisturized to obtain desired compaction degree and also
ventilated. All layers will be compacted to a degree of not less than a maximum density ratio
percentage as tabulated below:

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Compacted Layer                                       Dry density ratio %
                                                  According to Modified Proctor Test

                                              Cohesive          Cohesionless
                                              Materials           Materials

Fills and backfills under the                             90                     95
Buildings, slabs of the buildings

Fills under walkways and open areas                        85                    90

Under building sidewalks                                  90                     95
For top 30 cm




Rearrangement of Foundation Excavation Bases

The approved foundation bases may be damaged due to the weather conditions, because of a
contractor‟s interference or any unexpected situation. In this case before starting the construction,
soil will be controlled and additional cost to administration will not be reflected. Underground
installation compaction will be made by hand.

1.4.7 Tests

There will be no payment for sampling, testing and reporting the test results to contractor.

The laboratory tests concerning moisture density relationships will be made according to the
procedure regarding the compaction of fills mentioned in the above statements.


                                                                                                   23
Preparing samples in accordance with the laboratory tests dos not include any additional payment
to contractor. Field tests are also carried out in accordance with TS1900 to check whether the
compaction conditions are verified the tests made by contractor must be in a Supervisor certified
laboratory. The copy of test results following 24 hours after the tests were made will be given to
Supervisor.

The fill and backfill not compacted as defined will be excavated to the depth that Supervisor
decides and the degree of density conditions will be provided with no additional cost to
administration. These re-compacted locations are going to be checked whether the conditions are
satisfied by the tests. Also these tests will be out of payment procedure. The test type and
frequency intervals are listed in the below table:

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TEST FREQUENCY AND TYPE OF THE TEST
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test Type                                Frequency
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Field Moisture                                 1 test for each layer of material laid

Classification,                                1 density test for each fill and
Gradation and Atterberg                        once for compaction test
Limits

Field Moisture and Density                     (sand cone and water balloon method)
                                               Once for each layer of material laid

TS 1900                                        if the material is homogenous and sam,
Modified Proctor Test                          for each 200 m2 once (1)
                                               (Check the used material types)
                                               Density / Moisture
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1.4.8 Support

There will be no additional payment to contractor for support work items.

If required, protection by supports is an obligation for; safety of workers, adjacent fills and
structures, installations, etc… Support walls, plates and supports will be dismantled without
causing any collapse of soil in the working area. The contractor is responsible for all type of
accidents and damages to workers and structures, respectively that may be happened because of a
collapse near the excavation area or any other reason that may cause collapsing of the soil. These


                                                                                                24
types of damages must be prevented by providing adequate slopes along the surfaces of excavation
or the sides of the excavation area must be supported by the contractor. Support procedure will be
done by taking care of soil‟s state of nature.

The method for strengthening the sides of the excavation area must be approved by the Supervisor.
But this approval does not abrogate the contractor‟s responsibility. If Supervisor desires the
supports remain unchanged in their places for safety reasons at the stage of re-filling after
foundation excavation or piping works, contractor will not have any rights to request a payment
for that application.

The re-arrangements or any changes in the support system made by the contractor or the
Supervisor‟s directives will not change the initial unit costs.

1.4.9 Drainage

There will be no additional payment for drainage because these works are included in excavation
item.

The excavation works will be carried on with effective and continuous drainage. There will not be
any permission of water accumulation in the site for any reason. Until concrete and filling works
are being completed water accumulated in the foundation or installation holes and also surface
run-offs will be drained temporarily by pumping, drainage or other certified methods.

Any change occurred in the drainage systems do not make any change affecting the related unit
costs given by the contractor.

1.4.10 Removing Excavation Material

The excess of excavation material which the Supervisor judged to transport from the site area is
carried to an adequate area that is decided by the contractor, Supervisor and local administration
together. The permission for transporting materials from site to the selected area is under the
contractor‟s responsibility. After all the excavation is completed all temporary storage and stack
areas must be cleaned, drainage slopes are set and the site is remained in a good view according to
the local administration rules.

Transportation and unloading procedures will be done without giving any disturbance to
environment. The trucks will be prepared covered to prevent rubble pouring, according to the
traffic rules.

It may be not convenient to transport some of the trees in the site. In this case these will be stacked
in a suitable place that the Supervisor shows. These stacks as an asset will belong to the
Beneficiary.


                                                                                                     25
1.4.11 Exported Granular Fill

Granular fill is used between foundations. Fill material will be in the form as defined in the
capillary water paragraph or in the re-arrangement of bases and loading paragraph.
Borrow materials for the use of granular fill requirements will be selected whether or not the
capillary barrier exists. Borrow material is obtained outside from the site from a specific location
chosen by contractor and approved by the Supervisor. Obtaining granular fill material,
transportation and similar costs are included in the related items.
Sieve Analysis of granular fill:
Grain Size                                            Passing the Sieve (% Percentage)
75 mm                                                               100
35.5 mm                                                             85-100
10 mm                                                               40-70
5 mm                                                                25-45
600 micron                                                          8-22
75 micron                                                           0-5

1.4.12 Backfill

Backfill process will not begin before; the approval of construction under the final level, control of
underground installation systems and their testing, removing form, cleaning the area from wastes
and rubbles.

The above mentioned construction under the final leveling includes water insulation over the faces
of exterior basement walls, protection walls but not limited with these.

Fill will not be placed over the wetted surfaces of soil. Fill material will be placed and compacted
as described in the related paragraphs.

Laying fill materials and compaction will not be applied with the heavy work machines to
foundations and retaining walls at a distance smaller than the height between the foundation
system structure and fill level. The compaction work between these distances will be made with
appropriate hand compactors of layers having a compacted thickness of not greater than 20 cm.
Fill material will be placed carefully without giving any harm to covers around pipes. To place the
fill material around walls, 7 days must be passed over the construction time. Backfill will be
placed around the walls at equal amounts and level will be rised up. Also for the drainage of water,
slope will be given to the surfaces in an applicable ratio. Care must be taken to the locations under
the building entrance, slabs and sidewalks. Compaction tests will be made according to the tests
paragraph.




                                                                                                    26
For the compaction of fill under building entrance slab and sidewalk great care must be examined.
Compaction tests will be made as specified in “Tests” paragraph.

1.4.13 Rock Excavation

If rock is encountered during excavation, no additional payment will be done. In rock excavations
appropriate machines will be used but explosives are not permitted.

1.4.14 Protection of Existing Service Lines and Structures

Contractor is responsible from protection of existing service lines and structures against damaging.
In case of any damage occurrence its rehabilitation is also under contractors guarantee.

1.4.15 Leveling

The areas outside the building will be leveled according to project parameters and drainage will be
maintained. Finally after the last control the area will be kept clean.

Addition to these the upper soil layer may be compacted and dirtied by lime or cement because of
the working machines. Then it must be cleaned and ventilated.

The stored vegetable soil will be placed into the ventilated, cleaned and leveled layers.

Leveling costs belong to contractor without any additional payment.

1.4.16 Transportation of Earthworks

No additional or directly payment for transportation will be made in any part of the work.
2      Concrete works


2.1    Concrete works


Concrete mixes shall be designed by the Contractor to achieve the          characteristic
compressive strengths shown in the following table:


Concrete Places of Usage                28 days (Cylinder)     28 days (cubic) Minimum
Classes                                 Project Strength       Project StrengthAmount of
                                        N/mm²                  N/mm²           Cement
                                                                               Kg/m³
NS1        Foundation bottom as         -                      -               200



                                                                                                  27
            leveling lean concrete
BS30        In all foundations and      30                    35                400
            superstructure as bearing
            concrete


2.2     Concrete

Concrete Works as specified hereunder shall include the supply of materials, mixing of concrete,
formwork, reinforcement, placing, compaction and curing of concrete and site clearance after
completion of works. In general, TS 1247 or DIN 1045 shall be respected when mixing, placing
and curing concrete.


The prices entered in the price proposal shall fully include the value of works described shall cover
the cost of all labour, subsidence, traveling, materials, admixtures, temporary works, yards and
stockpiles, sampling and testing and any other expenses whatsoever together with all risks,
liabilities and obligations set forth or implied in the Contract Documents.


2.2.1 Standards and Rules

The Contractor shall carry out the works described in accordance with below described local or
international standards.


Record of Concreting

The Contractor shall keep accurate and up to date records of concreting showing for each day when
sections of the works were concreted:


      Date, time, weather and temperature;
      Results of all concrete tests including identification for which part of works the sampled
       material is representative;
      Number of batches produced, weight and kind of cement used, volume of concrete placed,
       number of batches wasted or rejected;
      Class of concrete, volume of concrete placed and number of batches used for each location.


The laboratory where concrete test have to be carried out shall be approved by the Supervisor and
be accessible for him at any time.




                                                                                                  28
2.2.3 Classes of Concrete


Concrete mixes shall be designed by the Contractor to achieve the         characteristic
compressive strengths shown in the following table:


Concrete                                   28 days          28 days (cubic) Minimum
Classes      Places of Usage               (Cylinder)       Project StrengthAmount of
                                           Project Strength N/mm²           Cement
                                           N/mm²                            Kg/m³
NS1          Foundation bottom as                  -                -           200
             leveling lean concrete
BS30         In all foundations and                30                35               400
             superstructure as bearing
             concrete


2.2.4 Organization of Concrete Production at the Site

At the commencement of the Contract the Contractor shall submit for the approval of the
Supervisor a Method Statement detailing his proposals for the organization of concreting activities
at the site. The concrete to be used for Works should preferably be ready mix.


The Method Statement shall include the following items:


      Plant proposed and layout of concrete production facility.
      Proposed method of organization of the concrete production facility.
      Quality control procedures for concrete and concrete materials.
      Transport and placing of concrete.
      Details of formwork including striking times and procedure for temporary support of beams
       and slabs.
      Protection and curing.


2.2.5 Ready Mixed Concrete


Concrete obtained from a supplier of ready-mixed concrete may be used in the Works subject to
the written approval of the Supervisor. Such approval will not be given until the Supervisor is
satisfied that the organization and control of the manufacture and delivery of all ready-mixed
concrete is satisfactory. Ready mixed concrete will comply with TS 11222.



                                                                                                 29
2.2.6 Materials and Testing

Type of Cement:
The type of cement used in each of the various works shall be standard brand Portland cement
from a single approved source conforming to the requirements of TS 19 Type I or II or approved
equal, or Portland cement class PZ 25-NW or class PZ 35-L in accordance to DIN 1164.


Tests of Cement:
The Contractor shall submit to the Supervisor, test certificates showing conformance with TS
3114, relating to each consignment of cement. Each certificate shall show that a sample of the
consignment has been tested by the manufacturer or by an approved laboratory.


When required by the Supervisor, the Contractor shall supply samples of cement taken on delivery
to site, or during storage on the site, for testing at a nominated laboratory free of charge. No
cement from any consignment shall be used without the approval of the Supervisor and the
Contractor shall maintain a record of the locations of the concrete made from each consignment
which record shall be available for inspection by the Supervisor.


If for any reason the Contractor shall decide to vary the source of supply, country or manufacture
in respect of any type of cement already approved by the Supervisor at any time during the
Contract, than he shall give adequate notice of every such variation to the Supervisor. The
Contractor shall carry out all the tests called for by the Supervisor‟s written approval of such
variation before ordering any material from the new source or supplier.


If cement has been stored on the site for more than 40 days or in the opinion of the Supervisor is of
doubtful quality, new tests may be required, at the Contractor‟s expense, to check whether the
cement is still conforming to the requirements.
Delivery and Storage of Cement:
Cement shall be delivered in quantities sufficient to ensure the proper progress of the Works and
the quantities held in stock on site shall be to the approval of the Supervisor. Such approval shall
not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for providing cement. Cement from
abroad, shall be packed in sealed plastic bags and placed inside paper bags.


Cement when being conveyed to the site in lorries or other vehicles, shall be adequately protected
from the weather and from contamination by dust, sand or any organic materials. Any cement,
which shall prove to have been exposed to damage by water, will be rejected upon delivery. It is
not permitted to store bags to a greater height than 2 meters.


                                                                                                  30
After they have been approved by the Supervisor, consignments shall be used in the order in which
they were delivered. No cement shall be taken from the storage unless it is needed for immediate
use.


Cement Measured by Weight:
All cement used in the Works shall be measured by weight. Cement from partly filled or unsealed
bags shall not be used.


Rejection of Cement:
Notwithstanding the receipt of the test certificate and the approval of the Supervisor, the
Supervisor may reject any cement as a result of further tests. The Supervisor may also reject
cement, which has deteriorated as a result of inadequate protection or other causes or in any other
case where the cement is not to his satisfaction. The Contractor shall remove all rejected cement
from the site without delay at his own expense.


Quality of Water:
The water used for all purposes throughout the Works shall be potable, clean, fresh and free from
objectionable quantities of silt, organic matters, alkali, salt or other impurities, and shall comply
with the requirements of TS 1247 or DIN 1045 and DIN 4030.


The water used for mixing concrete and mortar, washing of aggregates and for curing the concrete,
shall be from an approved source and shall contain no deleterious matter which significantly
affects the reinforcement, setting time, strength or durability of the concrete or which has any
effect on the appearance of the hardened concrete by discoloration or efflorescence. For concrete
mixing the water shall enter the mixer with the lowest possible temperature and shall not exceed
30°C.


The Contractor shall deliver to the Supervisor, free of charge, samples of the water proposed for
use on the Works for the Supervisor to carry out such tests he may require to confirm its suitability.
Samples will be delivered sufficiently in advance of the work for completion of the tests before the
water is required for use and at such other times during the course of the Contract as the Supervisor
may direct. If required by the Supervisor, the Contractor shall at no extra cost, treat the water taken
from any other source to such a degree as may be necessary in order to render it suitable for mixing
concrete and mortar.


Fine and Coarse Aggregates:




                                                                                                    31
Fine and coarse aggregates for concrete shall be obtained from sources approved by the
Supervisor. Fine aggregates shall consist of natural sand unless otherwise approved. Aggregates for
all types of concrete shall be from natural sources. They shall be hard, strong and durable and shall
not contain harmful material of sufficient quantity to affect adversely the strength or durability of
the concrete or, in the case of reinforced concrete, to attack the reinforcement. The aggregates shall
be obtained from an approved source and shall conform to the requirements of TS 706 and TS 707
or DIN 1045 and DIN 1084. Fine and coarse aggregates shall comply with the following chemical
requirements:


      Fine and coarse aggregates shall not contain more than 0.10% and 0.05% by weight of
       chlorides (as NaCl).
      Fine and coarse aggregates shall not contain more than 0.40% by weight of acid soluble
       sulfate (as SO3).
      Coarse aggregates shall be a minimum of 85% by weight calcium carbonate.
      Fine and coarse aggregates shall not be potentially reactive with alkalis.
      Fine and coarse aggregates in concrete elements exposed to wastewater shall be equivalent
       to the high sulfate resistance of the cement. Appropriate aggregates are siliceous sand and
       gravel.

If this requirement cannot be met the Contractor shall adopt constituents for his concrete such that
either:


      the cement material shall have a reactive alkali content not exceeding a maximum value of
       0.6% by mass when defined and tested in accordance with the method prescribed, or
      the total mass of reactive alkali in the concrete mix shall not exceed 3 kg per m3 of concrete
       when defined, tested and calculated in accordance with the method prescribed.


The Contractor shall notify the Supervisor of his proposals for complying with this requirement at
the time of commencement of the Works.
Storage of Aggregates:
Each size of fine and coarse aggregate shall be stored in separate bins or on areas covered with
steel plate, concrete other hard and clean surface, which shall be self draining and protected from
contamination by earth or other deleterious matter. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be stored in
such a way so as to avoid the two materials from becoming intermixed.


Tests on Aggregates:
The Contractor shall submit to the Supervisor samples of the fine and coarse aggregates proposed
for use in the Works. Samples shall be of a size sufficient to carry out all preliminary tests
specified which the Supervisor may order in addition to the concrete tests specified in Section 2-2-


                                                                                                   32
7 under “Concrete Testing”. The Contractor shall provide the 50 kg sample for comparison
purposes described below. The samples shall then be tested in the presence of the Supervisor by
the Contractor as the Supervisor may direct.


If the source of aggregates is changed at the Contractor‟s request and with the approval of the
Supervisor at any time during the course of the Works, all sampling and testing described in the
relevant Sections shall be repeated at the Contractor‟s expense. After approval has been given for
any particular aggregate, a sample weighing at least 50 kg of the approved aggregate shall be
retained by the Supervisor as a standard against which all future samples shall be compared.
During the course of the Contract, fine and coarse aggregates shall be tested at site as often as
required by the Supervisor and at the Contractors expense.


Delivery of Samples:
Samples of cement, water and fine and coarse aggregates called for in the foregoing Sections shall
be delivered to the Supervisor for testing by the Contractor before concreting. Specimen tests shall
be completed before work is due to start.


2.2.7 Mixing and Testing

Concrete Mixers:
Concrete mixers may be stationary mixers, truck mixers, or paving mixers of approved design.


The mixers shall have a rated capacity of at least 0.75 cu.m of mixed concrete and shall not be
charged in excess of the capacity recommended by the manufacturer. Mixers shall be capable of
combining the materials into a uniform mixture and of discharging this mixture without
segregation. Stationary and paving mixers shall be provided with an acceptable device to lock the
discharge mechanism until the required mixing time has elapsed. Truck mixers shall be equipped
with accurate revolution counters. The mixers or mixing plant shall include a device for
automatically counting the total number of batches of concrete mixed. The mixers shall be
operated at the drum speed designated by the manufacturer on the nameplate. The mixing periods
specified herein are based on proper control of the speed of rotation of the mixer drum, and on
proper introduction of the materials into the mixer. The mixing time will be increased when such
increase is necessary to secure the required uniformity and consistency of the concrete, or when
test samples of concrete, taken from the front, centre and back of the mixer show a difference of
more than 10 percent in sand cement or water cement ratio. Excessive over mixing requiring
addition of water will not be permitted. The mixers shall be maintained in satisfactory operating
condition and mixer drums shall be kept free of hardened concrete. Mixer blades shall be replaced
when worn down more than 10 percent of their depth. The use of any mixer that at any time
produces unsatisfactory results shall be promptly discontinued until mixer is repaired.



                                                                                                 33
Stationary Mixers:
The mixing time for each batch, after all solid materials are in the mixer drum and provided that all
of the mixing water is introduced before 25 % of the mixing time has elapsed, shall be not less than
1 minute for mixers having a capacity of 0.75 cu. m; for mixers of larger capacities; the minimum
mixing time shall be increased 15 seconds for each additional 0.40 cu. m or fraction thereof of
additional concrete mixed. When a stationary mixer is used for partial mixing of the concrete
(shrink mixed) the mixing time in the stationary mixer may be reduced to the minimum necessary
to mix the ingredients (about 30 seconds). No agitating equipment for transporting central mixed
concrete may be used when authorized in writing by the Supervisor. Methods and equipment for
handling and depositing the concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Supervisor.


Truck Mixers:
Truck mixers may be used when the equipment and methods are approved in writing by the
Supervisor. Concrete so manufactured shall conform in every respect to the requirements of these
specifications. When a truck mixer is used either for complete mixing (transit mixed) or to finish
the partial mixing or is a stationary mixer, each batch of concrete shall be mixed not less than 35
nor more than 75 revolutions of the drum for horizontal discharge type mixers, both at the rate of
rotation designated by the manufacturer of the equipment, as agitating speed. When necessary for
proper control of the concrete, mixing of transit mixed concrete will not be permitted until the
truck mixer is at the site of the concrete placement.


Ready Mixed Concrete:
The Supervisor may permit the use of ready mixed concrete provided complete details of the mix
proportions and workability have been submitted for prior Approval.


The Contractor must have taken the necessary steps, well ahead of the time of casting concrete to
prove to the Supervisor that the ready mixed concrete complies with these specifications, and
capable of producing for each class of concrete the minimum specified strengths, by taking
samples and testing. Such permission shall only be given for as long as the Supervisor is satisfied
that the concrete complies with the specification and the recommendations of TS 500.


The Supervisor will require a slump test, to be in conformity with TS 2871, and may require test
cylinders from each truck load prior to the concrete being placed. Each load shall be accompanied
by a delivery note stamped with the time of mixing and stating the consignee and quantities of each
material including water and additives and class of concrete.


Concrete Classes:
The classes of Concrete to be used in the works are described in Section 2-2-3



                                                                                                  34
Proportions of Materials:
The proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates and water proposed by the Contractor for
the use in the Works shall be determined in accordance with the requirements set in TS 802 or DIN
1045. The Supervisor shall approve for each class the concrete as a result of satisfactory
preliminary tests.


Water-Cement Ratio and Compressive Strength:
The minimum compressive strength and cement content shall be not less than required in TS 802
or DIN 1045. If necessary to obtain the required strength, the Supervisor may order the cement
content of any class to be increased over the quantity specified in the standard. The Contractor at
no additional cost, if so ordered, shall furnish such increased quantities of cement. The maximum
water-cement ratio shall be less than 55 lt of water per 100 kg of cement.


Limits of Salt Contents:
All concrete mixes shall contain less than 0.6% total chlorides (as chloride ions) and less than 4.0%
total acid soluble sulfate (as sulfide ions).



Consistency:
The quantity of water added to a batch of concrete shall be in accordance with TS 802 or DIN
1045, just sufficient to produce a concrete which in the judgment of the Supervisor can be placed
properly without segregation and which can be compacted by vibration to give the desired density,
non permeability and smoothness of surface. The quantity of water shall be changed as necessary,
with variations in the nature or moisture content of the aggregates, to maintain uniform production
of a desired consistency. The consistency of the concrete shall be determined in accordance with
TS 500 or DIN 1048.


Concrete Mix Design:
No concrete shall be placed in the Works until the relevant mix has been approved by the
Supervisor. Approval will not be given to any concrete mix until it has been successfully subjected
to Preliminary Mix Tests.


The Contractor shall carry out Preliminary Mix Tests as specified hereinafter in order to determine
for each class of concrete the minimum practicable water/cement ratio and the required mix
proportions of the fine and coarse aggregate the necessary allowance being made for the moisture
content of the aggregate. After the value of the water/cement ratio and the mix proportions have
been approved by the Supervisor, Trial Mixes shall be carried out by the Contractor as specified
hereinafter. The water/cement ratio and mix proportions which have been approved as a result of



                                                                                                  35
the Preliminary Mix Tests shall be used throughout the course of the Works. The Contractor shall
ensure that specimen crushing strengths satisfies the compliance requirements specified
hereinafter.


Further tests shall be carried out if any feature of materials or mixes is changed during the course
of the work.


Preliminary Mix Tests:
The proportions of cement aggregate and water determined by the Contractor in his mix designs
shall be used in preliminary mixes of concrete made in the presence of the Supervisor and tested
for strength, workability and surface finish under laboratory conditions observing the appropriate
requirements of the heading herein entitled ”Concrete Testing” and to satisfy the Supervisor on
these qualities. Preliminary mixes shall be repeated with adjusted proportions as necessary until
concrete mixes meeting the relevant requirements.

Trial Mixes of Concrete:
Trial mixes of concrete shall be prepared and tested at the site by the Contractor in this presence of
the Supervisor after Preliminary Mix Tests have been completed and when the Supervisor has
approved the Contractor‟s mix design for each class of concrete. Trial mixes of concrete shall be
mixed for the same time and handled by means of the same type of plant as the Contractor
proposes to use in the Works. Sampling and testing of trial mixes shall be in accordance with the
relevant sections of the Section herein entitled „Concrete Testing‟.


One separate batch of concrete shall be made for each class of concrete. Each batch shall comprise
not less than 0.5 m3 of concrete, unless otherwise approved by the Supervisor. Three specimens
shall be made from each batch of concrete. The average strength of the specimens made for each
class of concrete and tested after 28 days shall exceed the specified characteristic strength by at
least margins mentioned in Section 2.2.3
Unless otherwise approved by the Supervisor the Contractor shall carry out practical tests on the
site with Trial moulds shall be made for reinforced and plain concrete with dimensions typical of
the Works. The formwork face to the trial mould/s for each class of concrete shall be designed to
display all the relevant surface finishes intended for use in the Works and specified in the Section
2-2-9 In making, transporting, placing, compacting and curing the Trial Mix concrete in the trial
moulds the Contractor shall observe all the relevant requirements of the Technical Specifications.
When curing has been completed the trial moulds shall be stripped and the concrete thus revealed
shall be submitted for the approval of the Supervisor.




                                                                                                   36
When a proposed mix has been approved, no variation shall be made in the mix proportions, or in
the type, size, grading zone or source of any of the constituents without the consent of the
Supervisor, who may require further trial mixes to be made.


Where the Contractor intends to purchase factory-made pre-cast concrete units, trial mixes may be
dispensed with, provided that evidence is given to satisfy the Supervisor that the factory regularly
produces concrete which complies with the Technical Specifications. The evidence shall include
details of mix proportions, water /cement ratio, workability and strength obtained at 28 days.


Concrete Testing:
For the concrete all common site tests have to be carried out especially slump tests of the concrete
must be taken. If the specimens fail to attain the required compressive strength as specified the
concrete which they represent shall be cut out, removed and replaced with concrete complying
with the Technical Specifications to the satisfaction of the Supervisor.


All specimens shall be marked at the time of casting, with the date, Class of concrete and other
necessary markings to identify the part of the Works, from which they are taken. Specimens shall
be made and cured in conformance with TS 3068 and tested in conformance with TS 3114.


For each FPO and concrete class, the Contractor shall provide for test purposes one set of test
specimens taken under the supervision of the Supervisor. Each set shall consist of three test
specimens, and shall be made from a separate batch if applicable. Test specimens will be evaluated
by the Supervisor for meeting strength level requirements for each class of concrete indicated and
specified in conformance with TS 500. The standard age of test shall be 28 days, but 7 day test
may be used with the permission of the Supervisor provided that the relation between 7 day and 28
day strengths of the concrete is established by tests for the materials and proportions used.


Mix not Approved:
Approval of a mix may be withheld or withdrawn under the following circumstances:


      The grading of the aggregate changes such that the fraction of aggregate retained on any
       sieve differs from the corresponding fraction of aggregate in the approved mix by more
       than 2% of the total quantity of fine and coarse aggregates.
      The source of supply of aggregate or cement is changed.


In the event that approval of a mix for any class of concrete is withdrawn for any reason the
Contractor shall carry out such further trials and tests in order to achieve a satisfactory mix for that
particular class of concrete.



                                                                                                     37
Water Content:
A check on the moisture content of the aggregate shall be made before concreting is commenced.
For the propose of assessing the amount of free water to be added at the mixer, the Contractor shall
provide himself with a chart, a copy of which shall be given to the Supervisor for approval, relating
moisture content in the aggregate to water to be added at the mixer for all Classes of concrete in
use.


The amount of water introduced into the mix shall be strictly controlled and shall be the minimum
amount consistent with complete compaction. The device for measuring water shall show
accurately the quantity and be so designed that the water supply will be automatically cut off while
water is being discharged into the mix.


Transporting Concrete:
Concrete shall be handled from the place of mixing to the place of final deposit as rapidly as
practicable by means, which will prevent the segregation or loss of any ingredient. Wherever
practicable concrete shall be emptied from a mixer directly into a skip which shall then be
transported to the place of final deposit and the concrete shall be discharged as close as possible to
its final position to avoid re-handling or flowing.


Should the Contractor propose to use concrete pumps for the transporting and placing of concrete
he shall submit full details of the equipment and operating techniques he proposes to use for the
approval of the Supervisor.


Where concrete is conveyed by chuting or pumping the plant used shall be designed to ensure
continuous and unimpeded flow in the chute or pipe. The delivery end of the chute or pump shall
be thoroughly flushed with water before and after each working period and shall be kept clean.
Water used for this purpose shall be discharged away from any permanent works.


2.2.8 Placing and Compaction of Concrete

Preparatory Work:
The Supervisor‟s approval in writing shall always be obtained before any concrete is placed in the
Works. All constructional plant and materials required, or which may be required during the
concreting work and for curing shall be on site and the Contractor shall be fully prepared for the
work. The Supervisor‟s approval to place concrete will only be given after such preparations and
other relevant requirements of the Technical Specifications have been carried out and complied
with.



                                                                                                   38
If necessary and/or directed by the Supervisor, the Contractor shall cool any shuttering that has
become overheated or exceptionally dry through prolonged exposure to the sun. The Contractor
shall ensure that all shuttering retains a sufficient amount of humidity and has not become shrunk
or warped. All soaking or spraying of shuttering shall be done with potable water.


When concreting in hot weather the requirements set out under the heading “Concreting in Hot
Weather” shall be complied with. The Supervisor may completely forbid the placing of concrete in
any shuttering, which he believes has become too and/or dry and the condition of which could
harm the quality and strength of concrete. No extra payment for cooling or soaking of shuttering
shall be made. Pursuant to Section 2-3-7 all shuttering, area of deposition, reinforcement and
exposed surfaces of adjoining concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from dust,
debris, oil any other substance that may be harmful to fresh concrete.




Depositing in Work:
The methods of conveying and depositing concrete shall be such as to prevent segregation of the
materials and shall be approved by the Supervisor before concreting begins. The placing and
compaction of concrete shall be carried out under the direct supervision of a competent member of
the Contractor‟s staff.


Concrete shall be placed directly in the Works as soon as possible without the need for re-handling
and not more than 45 minutes after mixing and in any case, before the initial setting has taken
place. If any delay has occurred after mixing and the concrete has begun to set, it shall not be used
in the Works and shall be removed from the site. Unless otherwise agreed by the Supervisor on the
basis of satisfactory site trials concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height exceeding 1,5
meters.


Concreting of any section or unit shall be carried out in one continuous operation up to the
construction joints. No interruption of the concreting will be allowed without the approval of the
Supervisor. Where deposition of concrete has to be interrupted, precautions shall be taken to ensure
satisfactory adhesion of later batches of concrete to that previously placed.


Where delays of more than one hour has occurred between concreting operations in one section or
unit of work, concreting shall only be resumed when, in the opinion of the Supervisor, the
previously placed concrete has had ample time to harden and the resulting joint shall be treated as a
Construction Joint within the meaning and description of Section 2-2-9. At all times when concrete




                                                                                                   39
is being placed, a competent steel fixer shall be in continuous attendance to adjust and correct the
position of any reinforcement, which may become displaced.


Transportation of concrete directly over fixed reinforcement steel during concreting shall not be
allowed unless proper provisions are made to avoid displacing or damage to the reinforcement.


Depositing in Layers:
Concrete shall be deposited in approved quantities and horizontal layers of such depth as to permit
thorough incorporation with the layers below by vibration, spading, ramming and working. If, for
unforeseen reasons, it is necessary to stop concreting before completion of a section, then
construction joints as specified shall be formed and further concreting shall be suspended for at
least 24 hours.



Concrete Placed in Water:
Concrete shall not be placed under water without the written approval of the Supervisor. The
Contractor shall submit his detailed proposals of the plant and method for underwater concreting.


The quantity of cement in any concrete placed in water shall, if necessary, be increased so that the
free water/cement ratio is not more than 0.02 from the values given in Section 2-2-7. The method
of placing concrete under water shall be such as to keep as much as possible of the concrete being
placed out of direct contact with the water so as to avoid any rapid movement or agitation of
exposed surfaces. The work shall where possible be carried out in one operation. Where this is
impracticable, laitance, washed out aggregate or foreign matter which may have accumulated on
the previously placed concrete shall be completely removed prior to additional concrete being
placed. This concrete shall then be placed directly on the cleaned surface. Tremie pipes shall be
smooth bored, watertight and fitted with quick release joints and have an adequate cross-section for
the size of aggregate to be used. Bottom opening skips shall be straight sided, perfectly smooth,
and fitted with externally operated bottom opening double doors and overlapping canvas flaps.
Toggle bags shall be used only for small pours and for depositing small discrete quantities of
concrete. Bagged concrete shall not be used for permanent work.


During and after concreting underwater, pumping or dewatering operations in the immediate
vicinity shall be suspended until the Supervisor permits them to be continued.


Concreting in Hot Weather:




                                                                                                 40
The Contractor's attention is drawn to TS 1248 or ACI 305 entitled "Hot Weather Concreting". The
Contractor's methods shall comply with the recommendations in that document as modified and
supplemented below.


The Contractor shall take great care during hot weather to prevent the cracking or crazing of
concrete. The Contractor shall arrange for concrete to be placed in the early morning or late
evening as directed by the Supervisor.


The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the requirements specified herein for curing.
Formwork shall be shaded from direct exposure to the sun both prior to placing of the concrete and
during its settings. The Contractor shall take appropriate measures to ensure that reinforcement in
the section to be concreted is maintained at the lowest temperature practicable.


Concrete at placing shall have a temperature of not more than 32°C. If necessary the Contractor
shall cool the aggregates and mixing water by methods approved by the Supervisor.


Where necessary the Contractor shall design, install and operate a cooling system by which cooling
water is pumped through a piping system in order to decrease the heat of hydration during
concreting. The proposal for such a cooling system shall be submitted to the Supervisor for his
approval well in advance of the concreting operations.


The temperatures of ambient air, concrete at various levels and intervals not exceeding 5 meters
and cooling water where applicable shall be measured by means of thermocouples and recorded.


Concreting in Cold Weather:
Cold weather is defined as the situation existing at the Works, where either or both of the following
conditions existing:
      The air temperature at the time considered is below 2°C;
      The mean daily air temperature over three or more successive days has dropped below 5°C.
Under no circumstances may concrete be placed in contact with frozen ground or formwork, or in
contact with ice, snow or frost on the ground or on formwork or reinforcement. Concrete shall not
be made with frozen materials.


Concreting may proceed in cold weather provided special precautions are taken to ensure that the
surface temperature of the concrete at the time of placing is not less than 5°C for a succeeding
period of at least:



                                                                                                  41
4 days when the cement used in the concrete is ordinary Portland cement;
2 days when the cement used in the concrete is rapid hardening Portland cement.


Such precautions may include the following:


      Warming the aggregates and heating the water, provided that the temperature of either does
       not exceed 60°C. Water and aggregates shall be mixed for a period sufficiently long for
       them to acquire a uniform temperature before cement is added.
      Completely surrounding the freshly placed concrete with a cover and heating the enclosed
       air, which shall be kept moist. Draughts of hot or dry air shall not be directed at surfaces.
      Insulating the formwork and finished concrete surfaces.
      Providing screens to protect the concrete from air currents.

The Contractor shall provide the Supervisor with details of the precautions he proposes to take to
protect the concrete from the effects of low temperatures and with details of the methods he
proposes to use assess the correct timing at which such protection may be removed. No concreting
shall be done in cold weather prior to the approval the Supervisor for the proposed measures.

Concreting in Unfavorable Weather:
Concreting will not be permitted during heavy rain or snowfall, or when the air temperature falls
below 2°C, or when the concrete temperature rises above 32°C. When the air temperature exceeds
25°C, concreting will only be permitted after special precautions, approved by the Supervisor, have
been taken to prevent early setting of the concrete, such as lowering the temperature of the water to
be used in the mix or by means of a cooling-system, keeping the aggregates and shutters
continuously sprayed with water and erection of temporary sun shades over the working area.
During concreting operations the temperature of the placed concrete shall be recorded.

Compaction of Concrete:
The Contractor shall regard the compacting of the concrete to be of fundamental importance for the
objects which he shall produce. A watertight concrete of maximum density and strength must be
obtained.
Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted during the operation of placing and shall be thoroughly
worked around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork and
moulds.

Mechanical vibrators shall be of the immersion type with a frequency of not less than 8000
vibrations per minute and as approved by the Supervisor. A sufficient number of vibrators shall be
used to handle the maximum rate of concrete production with a 50% allowance for stand-by units
during any period of concreting. All operators handling vibrators shall be trained in their operation.



                                                                                                   42
Vibrators shall be inserted into the not compacted concrete vertically and at regular intervals.
Where the not compacted concrete is in a layer above freshly compacted concrete the vibrator shall
be allowed to penetrate vertically for about 100 mm into the previous layer. Vibrators shall be
withdrawn slowly from the mass of concrete so as to leave no voids. Internal type vibrators shall
not be placed in the concrete in a random or haphazard manner nor shall concrete be moved from
one part of the work to another by means of the vibrators. Vibration shall not be applied directly or
through the reinforcement to sections or layers of concrete which have hardened to the degree that
the concrete flow in the formwork over distances so great as to cause segregation.

Every care shall be taken to see that reinforcement and fittings attached to the shuttering are not
disturbed, and that no damage is caused to concrete that has already set or to the internal face of the
shuttering by using immersion type vibrators. In areas of congested reinforcement, it may be
necessary to use small diameter pokers and the Contractor shall supply suitable sizes of pokers for
each part of the work. Vibration of concrete by hammering the shuttering with hand tools is not
permitted.

When placing concrete against horizontal or inclined elements of waterstops they shall be lifted
and the concrete placed and compacted to a level slightly higher than the underside of the
waterstop before releasing the waterstop to ensure complete compaction of the concrete around the
waterstop.

The duration of vibration shall be limited to that required to produce satisfactory compaction
without causing segregation. Vibration shall not be continued after water or excess grout has
appeared on the surface.

Concrete shall not be disturbed after compaction and placing in its final position. Concrete that has
partially set before final placing shall not be used and shall be removed from the site.

Placing Concrete on Previously Executed Work:
Where concrete is to be poured against or on top of previously executed work, the surface of the
old concrete shall be thoroughly wire brushed, hacked and cleaned with water and air under
pressure to expose the surface of the aggregate and to remove all laitance. Special care shall be
taken to ensure that the new concrete is thoroughly compacted and rammed against the old.

Protection and Curing of Concrete:
Water used for curing shall comply with TS 1247 and TS 1248. Concrete shall be protected from
damage by climatic conditions (direct sunlight, rain, snow or frost), running water or mechanical
damage during curing. All methods to be used for curing and protection of freshly placed concrete
shall be subject to the prior approval of the Supervisor.

The maximum and minimum ambient temperatures and humidity shall be measured and recorded
each day by the Contractor. The records shall be made available for the Supervisor's inspection.


                                                                                                    43
All exposed surfaces shall as finishing proceed be covered with a wet hessian sheet followed by a
reflective polythene sheet. These shall be securely fastened around the edges and supported in
order not to damage the finished concrete surface. As soon as practicable the hessian and polythene
shall be lowered into close contact with the concrete and securely weighted or fastened down to
prevent wind blowing underneath. The hessian sheet shall be maintained in a moist condition at all
times and shall be inspected at intervals not exceeding 6 hours. Concrete shall be kept moist on
exposed surfaces for a period of not less than 72 hours or as approved by the Supervisor.

Alternative methods of protecting and curing concrete, such as ponding in which the water is to be
maintained at least 50mm deep, may be approved by the Supervisor. In any case liquid curing
membranes shall not be used on exposed surfaces or where laitance is to be removed and aggregate
exposed to provide satisfactory bond for placing further concrete or mortar screeds. Liquid curing
membranes shall not be used where mortar, resin mortar, or joint sealant is to be applied.
Sufficient methods to afford full protection to a concrete pour shall be available at the place of
work prior to the commencement of concreting.

During very hot weather conditions, the Contractor may be required to cool formwork containing
concrete by spraying with water. This shall be carried out where directed notwithstanding and
whatever other measures the Contractor may have employed for the curing of the concrete. All
materials spray equipment and an ample supply of water for curing shall be ready on site before
any concreting starts.

Record of Concreting:
The Contractor shall keep complete records of the works on site, showing the time and date when
concrete was placed in each part of the Works. The record shall be available at all times for
inspection by the Supervisor.

Faulty Work:
Any portion of the work which is honeycombed or otherwise inferior shall on the written
instruction of the Supervisor, be immediately cut out and reconstructed in an approved manner
without extra charge. Plastering of defective work will not be permitted. Any leaks or cracks shall
be sealed by injection with a synthetic resin or other appropriate methods approved by the
Supervisor.

Blinding Concrete (Sub-base):
A blinding layer of minimum 100 mm lean concrete shall be placed under foundations where
shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Supervisor. The blinding layer shall be allowed to harden
before the structural concrete for the ground slab is placed.

Blinding of trimmed surfaces in excavations and trenches includes placing, compaction and
screening of surfaces as specified in the Technical Specifications.


                                                                                                44
Blinding will be measured net by square meters, referring to minimum trench width as specified
for earth works and to the size of structures as shown on approved Drawings.

Loading of Concrete Structures:
No external load of any kind shall be applied to any part of a concrete structure until the concrete
has matured for at least 7 days and then only with the approval of the Supervisor and after
confirmation those 7 days specimen strengths as agreed by the Supervisor have been met.

2.2.9 Construction Joints

A construction joint is defined as a joint in the concrete introduced for convenience in construction
at which special measures are taken to achieve subsequent continuity without provision for further
relative movement.
The Contractor shall submit to the Supervisor for his approval not less than 3 days before the
commencement of concreting, Drawings showing his proposals for placing concrete on which the
position of all construction joints and lifts shall be shown. No concreting shall be started until the
Supervisor has approved the method of placing, the positions and form of the construction joints
and the height of lifts. The construction joints shall be located so as not to impair the strength of
the structure. Rebates, keys or notches shall be formed and water stops inserted as specified or as
the Supervisor may require. The position of construction joints and the size of formwork panels
shall be coordinated so that where possible the line of any construction joints coincides with the
line of a formwork joint and that in any case all construction joint lines and formwork joint lines
appear as a regular and uniform series. For all exposed horizontal joints and purposely inclined
joints, a uniform joint shall be formed with a batten of approved dimensions to give a straight and
neat line secured to the shuttering to ensure an exact straight finish.
Shuttering for construction joints shall incorporate continuous shear keys of substantial proportions
to produce watertight joints. Stop-ends shall be freely fixed, made grout-tight and be closely fitted
to the reinforcement or other fixtures.
Concrete placed to form the face of a construction joint shall have all laitance removed and the
aggregate exposed prior to the placing of fresh concrete. The laitance shall wherever practicable be
removed by spraying the concrete surface with water under pressure and brushing whilst the
concrete is still green. Where the laitance cannot be removed whilst the concrete is still green, the
whole of the concrete surface forming part of the joint shall be hacked to expose the aggregate.
Where aggregate is damaged during hacking it shall be removed from the concrete face by further
hacking. All loose matter shall be removed and the exposed surface thoroughly cleaned by wire
brushing, air blasting or washing, and the surface to which fresh concrete is applied shall be clean
and damp.


2.3 Shuttering and Concrete Finishes




                                                                                                   45
2.3.1 General

Shuttering shall include all temporary moulds for forming the concrete together with all temporary
constructions required to support such moulds.

2.3.2 Drawings and Calculations

The Contractor shall submit Drawings showings details of the shuttering he intends to use for the
approval of the Supervisor. The Drawings shall show the materials proposed and indicate details of
construction such as size of members, pacing and position of walling, struts, bolts and wedges.
Shuttering shall not be constructed until the Drawings and calculations, (if applicable) have been
approved by the Supervisor. But such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
for the adequacy and performance of the shuttering. Any changes or modifications to the shuttering
required by any the Supervisor shall be carried out at no extra cost.
Shuttering shall be of suitable design and adequate construction to carry the loads without
excessive bulging, distortion or deflection. Shuttering shall be constructed so as to prevent loss of
water or grout from the concrete. Special attention shall be paid to shuttering where poker or
shutter vibrators are used to compact the concrete.

2.3.3 Materials for Shuttering

Shuttering shall be made from good quality timber, free from loose knots, shakes and warped
surfaces. Timber for shuttering shall not be less than 30 mm in thickness, and the board faces in
contact with concrete and the board edges shall be planed smooth. Shutters used to have fair faced
concrete shall be appropriate for this purpose.

Alternatively, with the approval of the Supervisor, shuttering may be made from:
      metal with accurately aligned and close fitting joints
      plywood or hardboard 5 mm in thickness supported by close boarded timber
      plywood not less than 17.5 mm in thickness. The plywood or hardboard shall be resistant to
       deterioration by water, and shall be fixed and jointed in such a manner as to give a perfectly
       smooth and even finish to the concrete.

2.3.4 Fixing of Shuttering

Shuttering shall be fixed to perfect line and level and be truly plane with no crevices at joints, and
shall be securely braced, supported and wedged so as to retain its position without displacement or
deflection during the placing and compaction of the concrete. All joints shall be either horizontal or
vertical.




                                                                                                   46
2.3.5 Coating to Prevent Adhesion

All shuttering in contract with concrete shall be treated with an approved mould oil or solution
before usage to prevent the adhesion of the concrete. Such oil or solution shall be carefully applied
in such a manner that there is no contamination of the reinforcement or previously placed concrete
by the oil or solution. Any materials which will adhere to or discolor the concrete shall not be used.

2.3.6 Access Holes

Adequate access holes shall be left for the purpose of cleaning the shutters and for placing and
compaction of the concrete.

2.3.7 Cleaning and Re-Using of Shuttering

Before any concrete is placed, the shutters shall be properly cleaned and washed out with water
and air under pressure to remove sawdust, shavings and all other foreign matter. All water shall
then be drained and mopped out from the shutter.
In no case shall concrete be placed in shuttering before the shuttering has been approved by the
Supervisor. If shutters or moulds are to be re-used, all surfaces shall be cleaned and shall be
completely free from remnants of concrete or mortar. If in the opinion of the Supervisor, shutters
or moulds are not acceptable for reuse, they shall be either properly repaired or substituted with
new shutters or moulds which shall comply with the requirements of Section 2.3.3.

2.3.8 Removal of Shutters

Formwork shall be designed as to permit easy removal without resorting hammering or levering
against the surface.
The period of time elapsing between the placing of the concrete and the striking of the formwork
shall be as approved by the Supervisor and shall be in any case not less than the period stated in TS
500 or DIN 1045. If not otherwise directed, the striking times for side formwork for slabs shall be
3 days.

At all times the Contractor shall delay the removal of the shutter if in the opinion of the Supervisor
the concrete contained therein has not attained sufficient hardness.
In cases of average temperatures being below 4°C, the period of removal shall be extended by the
number of days the temperature has been lower than 4°C. The periods given in days are days of 24
hours duration.
Alternatively, the removal of shutters shall be determined by the demanded compressive strength
of the concrete with Section 2.2.3




                                                                                                   47
2.3.9 Finish to Concrete Surfaces

All surfaces shall be free from cracks, sand runs, honeycombing, porosity and grout/matrix loss.

2.3.10 Dimension and Surfaces of In-Situ Concrete

Workmanship in formwork and concreting shall be such that concrete shall normally require no
making good, surfaces being perfectly compacted, smooth and with no irregularities. Concrete
surfaces for the various finishes shall in any event never exceed the maximum permitted tolerances
stated below:

    Line and level: ±12 mm
    Dimension: ±12

2.3.11 Remedial Treatment of Concrete Surfaces

Any remedial treatment to concrete surfaces shall be agreed with the Supervisor following
inspection immediately after the stripping of formwork and shall be carried out without delay.
Any concrete surface which is found to have been treated before inspection by the Supervisor shall
be rejected.
Any minor surface blemishes shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Supervisor immediately
after completion of curing. Remedial measures may include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:

      Holes left for formwork supports shall be thoroughly cleaned out to remove all loose
       material and the sides shall be roughened, if necessary, to ensure a satisfactory bond. They
       shall then be filled with dry-pack mortar.
      Fins, pinhole bubbles, surface discoloration and minor defects may be rubbed down with
       sacking and cement immediately the formwork is removed.
      Abrupt and gradual irregularities may be rubbed down with carborundum and water after
       the concrete has been fully cured.
      Small defects and minor honeycombing shall be chipped out perpendicular to the face of
       the concrete to a depth of at least 25 mm and filled with dry-pack mortar.
      Fissures shall be repaired by using epoxy based materials or by using materials approved by
       the Supervisor.

All other defects will be regarded as too extensive to permit satisfactory repair and the concrete
containing the defect shall be broken out and replaced.




                                                                                                   48
3. Steel reinforcement


3.1    Types, Quality and Storage

Steel reinforcement for concrete shall consist of steel bars or steel wire fabric. Steel bars shall
consist of deformed bars of type ST III (S420a (with a characteristic tensile strength of 420 MPa))
as specified in TS 500 and TS 708 or DIN 488 T1 and DIN 488 T2. Steel wire fabric reinforcement
shall be in accordance with TS 4559 or DIN 488 T4.
The Contractor shall submit reinforcement detail Drawings and calculations to the Supervisor for
his approval.
The Contractor shall prepare test specimens of steel reinforcement to be used in the Works. Test
specimens shall be taken in the presence of the Supervisor and shall be of a size sufficient to carry
out the tests as described below. They shall be tested in an approved laboratory and the certified
copies of the results of the tests shall be submitted to the Supervisor. The specimens shall be tested
for bending and tensile properties and the wire fabric also for weld shear strength. The methods
and requirements for testing shall be carried out in accordance with TS 4559 and TS 802 or DIN
488 T3, 488 T5 and 488 T6. No steel reinforcement shall be used in the Works until the testing
results have been approved by the Supervisor. If ordered by the Supervisor, test procedures shall be
repeated at the Contractor's expense for any new supply of reinforcement during the course of the
Works.
Storage of reinforcement shall be on racks or supports clear of the ground. Different types and
sizes of reinforcement shall be kept separate.


Bending and Cutting Schedules

The Contractor shall prepare for his own use bar bending schedules and bar lists, cutting schedules
and sheet lists for wire fabrics for each individual structure from the information given in the
approved working Drawings, and shall be responsible for ensuring that correct information is given
when ordering reinforcement. Copies of these schedules, lists and orders shall be submitted to the
Supervisor for his approval. Steel bar supports shall be included in the bending schedules.


The approval of the bar bending and cutting schedules, list, and orders shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to execute the reinforcement fixing in accordance with the
Drawings and/or according to the requirements specified in TS 500 and DIN 1045.




                                                                                                   49
3.3    Protection and Cleaning

Reinforcement shall be protected at all times from damage, and when placed in the structure shall
be free from dirt, loose mill scale, rust scale, paint, oil or other foreign substance. All reinforcing
steel shall be carefully cleaned of all set or partially set concrete, shutter oil or paint which may
have been deposited during the construction of adjacent works.


Bending of Bars

Steel reinforcement shall be cut from straight bars free from kinks and bends or other damage and
shall be bend cold by experienced competent workmen. Bars of diameter greater than 12 mm shall
be bent in a bending machine designed for the purpose and approved by the Supervisor. Any
reinforcing bar that has already been bent shall not be re-bent at the place of the previous bend.

3.5    Cutting of Wire Fabrics


Wire fabric reinforcement shall be cut straight from the sheets. The use of off-cuts will not be
permitted.

3.6    Lapping of Bars and Wire Fabrics

Lapping bars and wire fabrics is permitted when necessary and approved by the Supervisor. No
welding of reinforcement shall be carried out unless authorized by the Supervisor, welding and
testing for reinforcement shall comply with the requirements specified in TS 500 or DIN 4099 T1.


Unless otherwise specified, lap length of bars shall be at least forty (40) times the diameter of the
larger bar, and laps shall be positioned in a staggered pattern.


Laps on adjacent section of wire fabrics shall generally be carried out as follows:
      End to end by lapping the two pieces one full mesh (measured from the ends of the
       longitudinal wires in the other piece) and securing the two pieces together with wire ties
       placed at intervals of about 450 mm.
      Side by side by placing the two selvage wires (the longitudinal wires at the edges of the
       fabric) one alongside and lapping the other, and by securing the two pieces together with
       wire ties placed at intervals of about 900 mm.




                                                                                                    50
3.7    Fixing of Reinforcement

All reinforcement steel shall be accurately placed and fixed in position and retained in that position
during the placing of the concrete.
Spacer blocks for holding the reinforcement from contact with the forms, or adjacent
reinforcement, shall be of dense pre-cast concrete blocks of approved shapes and dimensions. The
blocks shall be fitted with a semi-circular hollowing and double bent poured-in binding wires. The
water tightness of these blocks must be at least similar to the concrete into which they are
concreted. The use of pebbles, pieces of broken stone or brick or other materials will not be
permitted. Steel shall be bound and tied in its correct position using steel wire. Apart from any
other requirement, the reinforcement, the reinforcing steel shall be fixed in such a manner that it
will support its own weight and any loads which may be imposed upon it during construction
without displacement, deflection, or movement of any kind.
In slabs provided with two or more layers of reinforcement the parallel layers of steel bars shall be
supported in position by the use of steel chairs. Spacer blocks shall be placed at each chair to
support the layers of reinforcement from the blinding concrete or shuttering.
The distance between any two parallel bars except at laps shall not be less than 5 mm greater than
the nominal aggregate size.
All reinforcement exposed to the weather for long periods before concreting is commenced shall be
covered with polythene blinding tape, cement grout or other materials to the surrounding concrete.
Should in spite of these precautions rust staining occurs on any permanently visible surfaces, it
shall be removed at once to the satisfaction of the Supervisor.



3.8    Thickness of Cover

The thickness of cover for the reinforced concrete ground slab shall be 50 mm. For external works,
water retaining structures and casting of concrete in/under water, it will be 75 mm.

3.9    Tolerances

Tolerances in placing reinforcement shall be +/- 10 mm.


3.10   Approval before Concreting

All reinforcement, after having been fixed in position, shall be inspected and approved by the
Supervisor before any concrete is placed. Any concrete placed contrary to this requirement shall, if
ordered by the Supervisor, be removed together with the reinforcement and replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense.



                                                                                                   51
                        Technical specifications For Architectural works

4      General

All goods and materials used in the Works shall comply with international standards (EN, BS or
ISO) or those of the appropriate national standards where no other standard is given, for both
manufacturing and testing. Where no comment is made against an item the Contractor shall
assume that these standards are to be complied with.

All goods and materials to be provided by the Contractor and incorporated in the Works shall be
new, unused, and of the most recent or current design and specification, and incorporate all recent
improvements in design and materials, unless provided for otherwise in the Contract.

At least 28 days prior to use, the Contractor shall submit to the Supervisor a list of his proposed
suppliers and sources of materials required for the execution of the Works. Samples shall also be
submitted at the request of the Supervisor.

The materials subsequently supplied shall conform to the quality of samples which have been
inspected by the Supervisor.

Names of additional suppliers and sources may be submitted by the Contractor during the
execution of the Contract, but no source of supply shall be changed without the Supervisor's
approval.

Materials and components shall be stored in such a manner as to preserve their quality and
condition to the standards required by the Contract.

Materials and components shall be handled in such a manner as to avoid any damage or
contamination, and in accordance with all applicable recommendations of the manufacturers.

Unless otherwise described in the Contract, the use, installation, application or fixing of materials
and components shall be in accordance with all applicable recommendations of the manufacturers.
Where appropriate, the Contractor shall make use of any technical advisory services offered by
manufacturers.

Where not covered by the mechanical and electrical specification, all items of mechanical and
electrical plant shall be installed on a reinforced concrete plinth at least 150 mm thick.

Reinforcement for plinths shall be adequate to resist static and dynamic loads imposed on them
including stresses arising from changes in temperature.




                                                                                                   52
4.1       Aluminum Doors and Windows


4.1.1 Applicable Publications:


The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

Turkish Standards Institute (TS):
TS 410     Composition of Aluminum Alloy Casting
TS 709     Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
TS 996     Mechanical Characteristics of Extruded Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys
TS 1164 Aluminum Alloy Extruded Profiles
TS 2349 Aluminum Alloys

Where TS standards are not available or applicable, aluminum work shall comply with associated
ISO, DIN, ASTM, EN standards and shall be as specified in drawings. Should products conform to
standards other than those outlined above, the Contractor shall provide the Client with
manufacturer's test certificate illustrating the materials' compliance with the requirements.

4.1.2 Design:

Doors and frames shall be of the type, size and design indicated on drawings and shall be factory
fabricated from aluminum profiles with thermal insulation. The glass of the windows and glazed
doors shall be not less than such areas of the window or door indicated. The next larger standard-
stock size shall be furnished where windows larger than the openings indicated are required to
meet this requirement, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide proper sized
openings where windows varying in size from those indicated are furnished. Glass and glazing
materials shall conform to SECTION: GLAZING. Closed Top Edges: Exterior doors shall have
top edges closed flush and sealed against water penetration.

4.1.2.1    Field Measurements:


The Contractor shall verify all measurements at the building site and shall be responsible for
dimensions fitting and the proper attachment of items directly connected with the door installation.




                                                                                                  53
4.1.3 Submittals:

Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. A Door Schedule and a Window
Schedule showing the location of each door and window shall be submitted with the shop
drawings. Shop drawings shall indicate elevations of units, full-size section, thicknesses of metal,
fastenings, methods of installation and anchorage, size and spacing of anchors, method of glazing,
locations of operating hardware, mullion details, method and material for weather stripping,
method of attaching screens, details of installation, and connections with other work and window
schedules showing location of each window and door unit. Units shall not be delivered to the
project site prior to approval of shop drawings.


4.1.3.1     Certificates of Compliance:


Certificates of compliance stating that the windows and doors conform to the specified
requirements shall be submitted. Certificates submitted shall include:
GOST
TÜV CERTIFICATE (ISO 9001-ISO 14001)
GSB
QUALICOAT
AAMA
ROSENHEIM TEST REPORTS


4.1.3.2     Descriptive Data:


Manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions shall be submitted for approval.


4.1.4     Storage:


Windows and doors shall be stored out of contact with the ground and under weathertight covering
permitting good air circulation. To provide protection during shipment, welded unit type frames
shall be strapped together in pairs with heads at opposite ends or provided with temporary
aluminum spreaders at the bottom of each frame and knockdown type frames shall be securely
strapped in bundles. Prior to shipment from the factory, finished surfaces of aluminum shall
receive protective covering. Covering shall not chip, peel or flake due to temperature or weather
and shall protect the units against discoloration and surface damage from transportation storage and


                                                                                                 54
construction activities. Covering shall be readily removable without affecting the finish. Covering
shall either be adhesive paper, waterproof type or strippable plastic.



4.1.5 Products:


Alümil System or equal insulating profiles shall be used in the construction of all aluminum
windows and doors. The aluminum alloy used in the profiles shall be Al Mg Si 0.5 type 6060/6063
T5 F22. All materials, accessories, anchorage elements etc. used in the system shall be the original
products of the profile manufacturer. Profiles shall be electrostatic painted in RAL colors. Color
shall be as approved by the Beneficiary.


The profiles shall have thermal separation of minimum 18 mm polyamide. The 2.1 K value should
be certified with test reports.


Profile dimensions should be minimum 50 mm for frame profiles and minimum 57 mm for
window and door leaves.


3 rows of EPDM gasket should be used at frame and leave connection to provide 52 db sound
insulation.


Corner elements and T-junctions shall be 6060/6063 extruded aluminum. All corner joints shall be
45° angled and insulated with epoxy.


A single opening accessory shall be used in the windows. Hinges and handles shall be the same
color as the profiles. Hinges shall be interlocking system and no screws shall be visible.


Minimum 2 hinges for windows and minimum 3 hinges for doors shall be used.


Mullions: Mullions shall be provided between multiple-window units where indicated. Mullions
shall be designed to withstand a uniform load of 97.61 kg/m2 without deflecting more than 1/175
of the span. Mullions shall be secured to adjacent window units to form a watertight joint and to
allow for expansion and contraction. Mullion covers of manufacturers' stock design shall be




                                                                                                 55
provided on the interior to completely close the space between the window jambs and to present a
neat appearance.
Mastic: Metal to metal joints between members of metal windows, metal frames, and mullion
covers shall be set in mastic of the type recommended by the window manufacturer to provide
completely watertight joints. Excess mastic shall be removed before the mastic hardens.


Fixed Sash: Where fixed-sash sections are used in combination with ventilator sections, the fixed
sash shall be of same type as the ventilators.


4.1.5.1    Heat Insulated Aluminum Windows


Aluminum producers must have quality certificate of TS 5247 or TS EN 755-1. All aluminum
profiles of windows shall be natural, anodic oxidation applied according to TS 4922. They must be
heat insulated. The thermo panes of windows shall be 4+12+4 mm. Gaskets of the aluminum
profiles must be produced with EPDM material according to TS-7510.


4.1.5.2    Heat Insulated Aluminum Doors


Aluminum producers must have quality certificate of TS 5247 or TS EN 755-1. All aluminum
profiles of doors shall be natural, anodic oxidation applied according to TS 4922. They must be
heat insulated. The thermo panes of doors shall be 4+12+4 mm. Main entrance door whose
dimension is 2.10 x 2.45 m. must be sliding and photo celled. Gaskets of the aluminum profiles
must be produced with EPDM material according to TS-7510.


4.1.6 Installation:


Installation shall be done by the manufacturer or his authorized representative in accordance with
the approved installation instructions. Units shall be securely anchored in place to a straight,
plumb, and level condition without distortion. Final adjustment for proper operation of ventilating
unit shall be made after glazing. Where aluminum surfaces are in contact with, or fastened to
dissimilar materials, except stainless steel or zinc, the aluminum surface shall be protected from
dissimilar materials. Surfaces in contact with sealants after installation shall not be coated with any
type of protective material. The manufacturing and installation of aluminum doors and frames shall
be coordinated with the work program of other installations at the site.



                                                                                                    56
4.1.6.1        Adjustments:


Adjustments shall be made to operating sash to assure smooth operating and units shall be
weathertight where locked closed.


4.1.7 Cleanıng:


Units shall be cleaned on both the inside and outside of all mortar, plaster, paint, and other foreign
matter to present a neat appearance and prevent fouling of weathering surfaces, weatherstripping,
or the operation of hardware. In addition, aluminum parts shall be washed with soap and water and
thoroughly rinsed with clear water. Where aluminum parts have become stained or discolored, they
shall be cleaned. Stained, discolored, or abraded windows and doors, which cannot be satisfactorily
repaired, shall be replaced with new at the Contractor's expense.

4.2        Brickwork and Blockwork

4.2.1 General

The moisture content of bricks shall be adjusted so that excessive suction is not exerted on the
mortar.

The mortar for building block walling shall be of 1:6 mix (one part of ordinary Portland cement to
six parts of sand).

Mortar, if not mixed by a mechanical mixer, shall be thoroughly mixed two times when dry and
two times after adding water on a clean watertight platform. Mortar will be mixed in small
quantities and used fresh. Mortar that has begun to set or has been mixed for more than 30 minutes
shall not be used or remixed.

Bricks in each course shall break joint correctly with the bricks below. The courses shall be laid
parallel with joints of uniform thickness and shall be kept straight or regularly curved as required.
Brickwork shall be gauged to rise 300 mm in 4 courses. Vertical joints shall be in alignment as
required by the bond and shall have an average thickness of 10 mm. Bricks forming reveals,
internal or external angles, shall be selected for squareness and built plumb.

Bricks with single frogs shall be laid frog upwards.




                                                                                                   57
Brickwork and blockwork shall rise uniformly; corners and other advanced work shall be raked
back and not raised above the general level more than 1 m. No brickwork shall be carried up
higher than 1.5 m in one day. No bats or broken bricks shall be incorporated in the work unless
essential for bond. Where cut blocks are required, all cutting shall be carried out using a
mechanical disk cutter.

Completed brickwork and blockwork shall be protected at all times from scaffold splash, mortar
droppings, and grout leakage from suspended slabs and other harmful effects.

Brickwork and blockwork shall be allowed to set hard before cutting and chasing is carried out.

The bond shall be to suit local requirements.

The Contractor shall allow for preparing a 1 meter square sample panel of facing brickwork.

The panels shall be completed and the mortar allowed curing for two days minimum before being
presented for approval.

 Approval to the sample panels must be obtained from the Supervisor before brickwork is
      commenced.
 The final approved sample panels will be used as a quality guide for the facing work and any
      facing work which does not meet the standard of the approved panels will be condemned.
      The sample panels shall be sited where they can be protected, and shall be removed only
      after the completed facework has been approved.
 Should the sample panel be insufficient to achieve a satisfactory standard of workmanship, then
      additional panels may be required to achieve an approval.

4.2.2 Lintels

Concrete, steel or timber prefabricated lintels shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS
5977: Part 2.

4.2.3     Jointing and Pointing

Bricks and blocks shall be laid in mortar properly bedded and jointed and all joints filled with
mortar at every course.

Where the surface of walling does not provide an adequate key, the joints on faces of walls to be
plastered shall be raked out 12 mm deep.

Facing brickwork shall be finished in accordance with local building practices.




                                                                                                  58
Brickwork or blockwork for internal surfaces which are not to be rendered or plastered shall be
finished flush.

For both brickwork and blockwork, the Contractor shall build in vertical contraction/expansion
joints in accordance with the requirements of acceptable international (or equivalent local)
standards or practices.

4.2.4    Bonding to Concrete

Where brickwork or blockwork is to be bonded to concrete, this shall be achieved by means of
metal ties evenly placed at 3 per square meter, and brickwork and blockwork shall be brought up
subsequent to the concrete.

Masonry facing shall be bonded to new and existing concrete surfaces using cast-in or grout-in
anchors in accordance with the specification or to the approval of the Supervisor.

Grout-in ties shall be installed and grouted in using an approved strong mixture not less than two
days before laying masonry around them.

4.2.5    Centering and Lagging

Centering and lagging used for the construction of brickwork and blockwork shall remain in place
for such time as is necessary for the brickwork and blockwork to develop sufficient strength to
prevent sagging or cracking of joints.

4.2.6    Bricklaying and Blocklaying in Cold Weather

Materials used in bricklaying and blocklaying shall be frost free and no bricks or blocks shall be
laid when the ambient temperature is below 3 deg. C, unless special precautions are taken.

The Contractor shall ensure that any additive used in the mortar does not cause a variation in the
colour of the joints. Completed work shall be protected adequately during cold weather.

During bricklaying/blocklaying, contemporary weather records shall be kept including maximum
and minimum temperatures.

4.3      Carpentry and Joinery

4.3.1 Joinery Timber

Timber for joinery shall comply with the relevant provisions of EN 942.




                                                                                                59
The sizes of sawn and processed softwood and hardwood shall comply with the relevant
provisions of EN 1313.

All timber used in the permanent works shall be new. Timber of structural use shall be of general
structural grade. Softwood to be used for structural purposes shall only include those general
structural grade timbers in strength to EN 338.

All structural timber shall be double vacuum pressure treated with an approved preservative.

Softwood for carpentry shall be straight, free from insect or fungus attack, sapwood, shakes,
twisting and warping.

Timber shall be stored clear of the ground and under cover so as to allow circulation of air.

4.3.2 Synthetic Resin Adhesives

Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood and wood shall be phenolic and aminoplastic and comply
with EN 301 and EN 302.

4.3.3 Installation

Wherever possible, cutting and shaping of all timber shall be completed before preservative
treatment is carried out. Where any cutting or shaping has to be carried out after treatment, the cut
and worked surfaces shall be given 2 coats of preservative. After treatment, timber shall be
thoroughly dried out before use.

The whole of the joinery shall be cut and framed together as soon as possible after the
commencement of work. Except where work is described in the Contract as being to finished
sizes, 3 mm shall be allowed for each wrot face. Frames, casings and other joinery fittings shall be
secured to hardwood fixing slips built in for the purpose. Where hardwood fixing slips have not
been provided, receiving surfaces shall be plugged with hardwood plugs or approved proprietary
plugs.

Manufactured units to be painted shall be primed at the place of manufacture.

4.4      Carpet Tiling


4.4.1 General


Materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer‟s original unopened containers with
brand name and type clearly marked. Materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover
in dry and waterproof enclosures.


                                                                                                   60
Floors where demolishing work has affected the surface shall be prepared for carpet tiling with
self-leveling concrete. Floors shall be repaired where necessary and floor surfaces shall be smooth
and clean. All sub-floor preparation work and interior work such as painting shall be complete and
dry before installation of carpet tiles.

4.4.2 Material:


Carpet Tiles: Carpet tiles shall be ESCO, Escomilatm or approved equal and meet or exceed the
following minimum requirements:
Construction: Tufted two tone velour
Gauge: 1/10‟‟
Stitch rate: 43±1 per 10cm.
Tuft density: 169,000±2.5%
Pile yarn: 100% Polyamide
Pile weight: 850g/m2±3%
Pile thickness: 4.0mm.
Backing: Polyscan Computer, Glas Polyver, conductive modified bitumen incorporating glass
fiber reinforcement with PP/PES carrier;
Total Weight: 4600g/m2±5%
Thickness: 7.5mm±0.5mm.
Tile Size: 50 x 50 cm
Category of use: Class 4 heavy contract (EN 1307)
Durability: Vetterman Drum test: 3.5 (ISO/TR 10361),
             Castor chair test: 2.5 (EN 985)
Dimensional Stability (EN 986): Max.-0.15%±0.05%
Static Electricity: Strolltest (ISO/TR6356): <2kV at 25% RH and 230 C,
                     Electrical Resistance (I.B.M. and I.C.L.): >5x105Ω <2x1010Ω
                     Horizontal and Vertical Resistance (BS 6654): <108Ω
Flammability Tests: Hot metal nut (BS 4790/5287): Low radius of effects of ignition,
                     Radiant Panel (ASTM E648):Cat.1(>0.5W/cm2), (DIN4102 part 14): B1
Acoustic Behavior: Impact Sound Insulation (ISO 140-8): 37 dB-1000Hz
Sound Absorption (ISO 354):
                     Frequency (Hz)           250        1000       2000     4000
                  Absorption coefficient : 0.03          0.25       0.35     0.45
                   N.C.R.(250-2000 Hz)        0.18
Colourfastness: To light (ISO 105-B02): min 7
                  To water (ISO 105-E01): min 4
                  To rubbing (ISO-X12), dry: min 4, wet: min 4
                  To shampoo (BS 1006: UK-TB): min 4
 Samples for color and patterns shall be submitted for approval.




                                                                                                 61
4.4.3 Installation:

Acclimatization: Installation of tiles shall take place as close to those of the building when
occupied. The tiles shall be unpacked at least 24 hours prior to installation and allowed to
acclimatize to room temperature. The tiles shall be installed at a minimum room temperature of
15° C with a maximum relative humidity of 65%. Floor temperature of at least 10° C shall be
maintained.

The sub-floor: Self-leveling concrete shall be applied in strict accordance with its manufacturer‟s
instructions and recommendations. Before applying carpet tiles, the floor must be structurally
sound, dry, clean and free of any foreign substances such as wax, paint, oil, etc… Commercial
vacuum cleaners shall be used to remove all dirt and dust. Any ridges and high spots in the floor
shall be leveled to prevent excess wear of carpet tiles. Concrete shall be dry when tested with a
hygrometer. Humidity shall not be higher than 65% or alternatively give a protimeter value of
5.5%.

Tile Installation: Double sided adhesive tape 10 cm wide shall be used on every 5th row.
Manufacturer‟s installation instructions and recommendations shall be strictly followed. Until the
area being tiled is completed with all perimeter tiles adhered in position, there shall be no walking
on or movement of heavy furniture over the partly completed installation. Carpet tiles shall be
installed in accordance with best industry practice and by skilled and experienced craftsman. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for installing the correct carpet tiling as specified herein and
as indicated on the contract drawings. The Contractor shall submit a certificate of installation
given by the manufacturer unless the Contractor uses a certified agent or representative of the
manufacturer as a sub-contractor or employs full time during installations a technical supervisor
appointed by a certified agent of the manufacturer..

Carpet joints: All carpet joints (carpet to carpet where direction of tiling has changed, carpet to
marble (travertine), carpet to vinyl, and carpet to ceramic) shall be made with double sided
adhesive strips of 10cm. wide. In carpet to carpet joints the two sided adhesive strips shall be
applied continuously to overlap each edge of carpet by 5cm. and jointing shall be completed by
adjoining the two carpet sides on double sided adhesive strip simultaneously. After carpet edge is
adhered to the sub-floor in this manner, coated aluminum strip joint profiles shall be installed over
all carpet joints, as shown on the detail drawings.

Extra Tiles: The contractor shall provide the Bank with extra tiles of amount equal to 3 % of the
amount used for the project at the completion of the work of each color of carpet tiles used for the
project.

Final Clean-Up: On completion of work, all equipment and all rubbish resulting from the work
shall be removed, and the surface of the carpet shall be cleaned with a commercial vacuum cleaner
and properly covered with nylon sheets for protection.


                                                                                                    62
4.5       Cementeous finishes

Sands for floor screeds shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 882.

4.5.1 Surface Finishes Produced Without Formwork

Screed Finish: The concrete shall be leveled and screeded to produce a uniform plain or ridged
surface as required. No further work shall be applied to the surface unless it is a first stage for a
Wood Float or Steel Trowel Finish.

Wood Float Finish: The Screeded Finish shall be wood floated under light pressure to eliminate
surface irregularities.

Steel Trowel Finish: When the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent laitance from being worked to the surface, the surface to the Wood Float
Finish shall be steel-trowelled under firm pressure to produce a dense, smooth uniform surface
free from trowel marks.

Where the type of finish is not given: hidden surfaces shall be „screeded finish‟ and exposed
surfaces “steel trowel” finish.

4.5.2     Surface Finishes Produced With Formwork

Rough Finish: This finish shall be obtained by the use of moulds or properly designed forms of
closely-jointed sawn boards. The surface shall be free from substantial voids, honeycombing or
other large blemishes.

Fair Finish: This finish shall be obtained from forms designed to produce a hard smooth surface
with true, clean arises. Only very minor surface blemishes shall be permitted and there shall be no
staining or discoloration. Any projections shall be removed and the surface made good.

Fair Worked Finish: This finish shall be obtained by first producing a Fair Finish and then filling
all surface blemishes with a fresh, specially prepared cement and fine aggregate paste whilst the
concrete is still green where possible. After the concrete has been properly cured, the faces shall be
rubbed down, if required, to produce a smooth and even surface. If the surface is to be exposed in
the final work, every effort shall be made to match the colour of the concrete.

The following standard of concrete finish shall be achieved:

                     Surface Type                            Type of Surface Finish
        External vertical surfaces below ground                  Rough Finish



                                                                                                    63
      External horizontal surfaces below ground                    Rough Finish
               Internal vertical surfaces                           Fair Finish
                      Slab soffits                                  Fair Finish
       All other vertical, horizontal and sloping                   Fair Finish
                        surfaces

4.6      Ceramic Tile

4.6.1 Applicable Publications:


The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extended references.

The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

Turkish Standards Institute (TS):
TS 19       Portland cement
TS 21       White Portland cement
TS 30       Hydrated Lime for Structural Purposes
TS 202      Glazed Ceramic Tiles
TS 706      Concrete Aggregate
TS 2717     Sand for Mortar
TS 3450     Ceramic titles for Exterior
TS 4037     Ceramic Tiles for Interior

4.6.2 Submittals:

Certificates of Compliance: The Contractor shall furnish certificates, of compliance stating the
chemical and physical composition and quality of the tile and indicating compliance with the
specified requirements. Labels on containers shall be marked to correspond with the marks on the
signed certificates. Certificates of compliance shall be submitted.

Samples: Samples of the following tiles and accessories shall be furnished for approval before
materials represented by the samples are delivered to the project site. Samples shall be of
sufficient size to show color range, pattern, and tile type, as applicable.

Non-Skid Type Floor Tiles: Duplicate panels of tile, for each size as shown on contract drawings,
showing colors and patterns of each type, class and form.
Ceramic Wall Tile: Duplicate panels of tile, for each size as shown on contract drawings, showing
colors and patterns of each type, class and form.
Ceramic Border: Duplicate panels of each type of border showing colors and patterns of each type.




                                                                                               64
4.6.3   Delivery and Storage:


Materials shall be delivered to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with
seals unbroken and labels and hallmarks intact and shall not be opened until inspected by the Site
Supervisor. Materials shall be kept dry, protected from weather, and stored under cover.


4.6.4   Environmental Requirements:

Ceramic tile work shall not be performed unless the ambient temperature is at least 10 degrees C,
and rising. Temperature shall be maintained above 10 degrees C while the work is being
performed and for at least 3 days after completion of the work. Adequate ventilation shall be
provided to take off fumes from heating equipment used to maintain the temperature specified.
4.6.5 Materials:


Ceramic tiles shall be as available from a certain manufacturer with an established reputation for
the production of quality ceramic tiles and marble (travertine) over a period of at least five years.

Tile shall be produced from any suitable combination of thoroughly mixed clays, shale, flints,
feldspars or other inorganic materials. Tile shall be the best selection possible. Tile shall be
thoroughly and evenly matured and free from defects which affect appearance or serviceability.
Tile with chips, cracks, or other defects will not be acceptable. The following general
requirements shall apply to all tiles:

All tiles shall have an abrasive hardness not less than 25, as determined in accordance with TS
202.

Water Absorption shall be determined in the following manner: Five samples weighing at least
100 grams shall be immersed and boiled vigorously in distilled water for two hours. The samples
shall remain immersed until the total boiling and immersion time is 24 hours. The samples shall
then be removed from the water, the surface wiped with a clean, damp cloth, and immediately
weighed. The samples shall be dried to constant weight in an oven at 105 degrees to 120 degrees
C. cooled and reweighed. The water absorption shall be calculated by means of the following
formula:


         WA=       Ws - Wd x 100
                     Wd
Where:
WA = Water Absorption, percentage per weight.
Ws = Weight, after boiling and immersion.
Wd = Weight, dry.




                                                                                                   65
Non-slip ceramic floor tile shall be glazed, except that silicon shall be incorporated. Tile shall be
33x33 cm, and 20x20 in size, and 6 mm thick and shall contain not less than 7-1/2% by weight of
abrasive. Tile shall have a smooth, non-slip surface, unaffected by moisture, freezing, or cleaning
solutions. Colors shall be as selected from manufacturer's standard colors and approved by the
Project Manager but may be slightly darker and grayer in tone than corresponding colors without
abrasive. Water absorption shall not exceed 3%.

Ceramic wall tile and trimmers for wall facing and wainscots shall be approximately 9 mm thick.
Glazed wall tile shall be 25x33 cm, and 20x25 cm, and trimmers shall have matte glazed finish on
exposed-to-view surfaces. Stops, returns, trimmers, caps and special shapes shall be provided as
required for sills, jambs, recesses, offsets, and other conditions so as to provide a complete and
neatly finished installation. Colors and design shall be as selected from manufacturer's standard
colors and approved by the project Manager. Glazed ceramic wall tile shall be free from dark
spots over 1.6 mm in diameter, fractures of the glaze, heavy accumulations of glaze, spots
insufficiently glazed, frosted or crystalline appearance, or rough spots. Water absorption shall be
within the range of 7 to 18%.

4.6.5.1      Acid Resistant tiles


33x33 cm dimensioned 3 mm. elastic joint filled acid resistant tiles Technical Specifications is as
follows:

Colour: Light grey or light brown
Water absorption: 0,05 %
Bending Strenght: < 27 N/mm2
Mohs Hardness: < 6o Mohs
Strength to deep abrasion: < 205 mm2
Thermal expansion coefficient: 9x10-6/0C1
Strength to thermal shock: Not effected
Strength to crack: Wanted
Strength to cold: Must not make any trace on the surface
Color Strength to light: Must not make any visible change
Strength to chemicals: Must not have any chemical traces
Strength to stains: Wanted
Strength to house chemicals: Wanted
Friction Coefficient: >R9



4.6.6     Installation:


 Ceramic tiles shall be applied to floors and walls using adhesive mortar. The adhesive compound
shall be the recommended product of the Ceramic tile manufacturer.


                                                                                                   66
4.6.6.1     General Installation Requirements:

Tile work shall not be started until roughing in for mechanical and electrical work has been
completed and tested, and built-in items requiring membrane waterproofing have been installed
and tested. Floor tile installation shall not be started in spaces requiring wall tile until after wall
tile has been installed. Tile in colors and patterns indicated shall be applied in the area shown on
the drawings. Tile shall be installed with the respective surfaces in true even planes to the
elevations and grades shown. Special shapes shall be provided as required for sills, jambs,
recesses, offsets, external corners, and other conditions to provide a complete and neatly finished
installation.



4.6.6.2     Installation of Wall Tile:

 Adhesive shall be used within one hour after mixing and re-tempering will not be permitted.
Adhesive shall be applied in sufficient quantity and with sufficient pressure to cover the entire area
and to form good keys, shall be deeply scored or scratched and cross-scratched, and shall be
protected and kept moist during the curing period

 Setting Tile: Joints shall be straight, level, perpendicular, and of even width not exceeding 1.6
mm. Wainscots shall be built of full courses, which may extend to a greater height, but in no case
more than 4 cm lower than the height shown. Vertical joints shall be maintained plumb for the
entire height of the tile work. Each tile shall be brought to true level and plane by uniformly
applied pressure under a straightedge of rubber-faced block. Tiles that are out of a true plane or
misplaced shall be removed and reset. Damaged or defective tile shall be replaced. Before
setting, tile shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water and drained so that no free moisture remains
on the back of tile.

 Grouting: Joints in wall tile, after the edges of tiles have been thoroughly wet, shall be grouted
full with a plastic mix of neat, colored waterproofed ready mixed grout compound immediately
after a suitable area of tile has been set. The joints shall be tooled slightly concave and the excess
mortar shall be cut off and wiped from the face of tile. Interstices or depressions in the mortar
joints after the grout has been cleaned from the surface shall be roughened at once and filled to the
spring line of the cushion edge before the mortar begins to harden. Tile bases or covers shall be
solidly backed with mortar. Joints between wall tile and plumbing or other built-in fixtures shall
be made with a light colored calking compound. Grout colors will be as approved by the Project
Manager.

 Curing: Immediately after the grout has had its initial set, tile wall surfaces shall be given a
protective coat of non-corrosive soap or other approved method of protection and joints damp-
cured for 72 hours.


                                                                                                     67
4.6.6.3      Installation of Floor Tile:

Floor tile operations in spaces requiring wall tile, shall not be started until after the wall tile
installation been completed and all mechanical and electrical work is completed and tested.
Surfaces to receive the various applications of materials shall be clean and free of dirt, dust, oil,
grease, or other objectionable matter. Concrete fill where required, and tile shall be installed with
their respective surfaces screened and tamped to true planes, level or pitched to drain as required
by the drawings, so that the surface of the completed flooring will be at the elevations and grades
shown. Re-tempering of adhesive will not be permitted. Tile shall be laid out from the centerlines
of each space outward and adjustments made along walls, partitions, and borders, if any, so as to
symmetries the pattern with a minimum of cut tiles. Joints between tiles shall be uniform width
and as specified. The tile strip shall be provided between tile flooring and fixed vertical surface.
Tile shall be cut with a suitable cutting tool and rough edges shall be rubbed smooth. Cut tile
misfits shall be replaced with properly cut tile. Straightedges shall be accurately set to the lines
established and rest at suitable intervals to keep the joints parallel over the entire area. Tile shall
be laid to the straightedges.

 Grouting: After a suitable area of tile has been set sufficiently, thick creamy slurry of neat
colored waterproofed Portland cement and a minimum amount of water shall be brushed over the
floor until all joints are thoroughly filled. The surface of the floor shall be cleaned, and the floor
shall be rubbed with burlap to clean the tile and finish the joints. Temporary joint filler strips shall
then be removed, and the spaces shall be filled flush with mastic cement.

 Curing: Floors shall be covered with waterproofed paper with all joints lapped at least 10 cm and
the laps tape-sealed or held down with planks or other weights, and allowed to damp-cure for at
least 72 hours before foot traffic is permitted thereon.

4.6.6.4     Control Joints:

Joints shall be formed as indicated on contract drawings.

Walls: Control joints shall be provided at control joints in backing material. Wherever backing
material changes a control joint shall be formed to separate the different materials.

 Floors: Control joints shall be provided over construction joints, control joints, and expansion
joints in concrete slabs. Control joints shall also be provided where tile abuts restraining surfaces
such as perimeter walls, curbs and columns and at intervals of 7.5 m to 11.0 m each way in large
floor areas. Expansion joints shall extend through setting-beds and fill.

4.6.7     Cleaning and Protecting:




                                                                                                      68
Upon completion, tile surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned in a manner not to affect tile surfaces.
Acid shall not be used for cleaning glazed tile. Floor tile with factory mixed grout shall be cleaned
in accordance with instructions of the grout manufacturer. After the grout has set, tile wall
surfaces shall be given a protective coat of a noncorrosive soap or other approved method of
protection. Tiled floor areas shall be covered with building paper before foot traffic is permitted
over the finished tile floors. Board walkways shall be laid on tiled floors that are to be
continuously used as passageways by workmen. Tiled floor areas to bear truck traffic shall have
suitably constructed continuous plank runways of required width installed over the building paper.
Damaged or defective flooring shall be replaced. Provide additional 5 percent of quantity of tile
installed to the Client for storage at the building site.

4.7      Compact Laminated Toilet Partitions

4.7.1 Material

Toilet partitions shall be with both faces Quarry textured with no pattern, 12.5 mm. thick, high
pressurized laminated (HPL) massive panels complying with EN 438 and as specified.

Provide panels that have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to maintain performance
criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.

All metal accessories shall be of stainless steel, including door hinges, locks, handles and the like.

4.7.2 Submittals

Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including edge
conditions, panel joints, fixture location, anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and
textures.

Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures.

Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and
physical properties.

4.7.3 Installation

Install solid phenolic wall panels‟ plumb and level and accurately spaced in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations and approved submittals.

Fasten solid phenolic wall panels to supporting substrate with fasteners and Adhesive approved for
use with adjoining construction.




                                                                                                     69
Accessory Items: Install corner profiles, gaskets and trim and all necessary accessories with
fasteners and adhesive appropriate for use with adjoining construction as indicated on drawings
and as recommended by manufacturer.

4.7.4 Field Quality Requirements

Manufacturers Field Services: Upon Employers request, provide manufacturers field service
consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product
installation in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

4.7.5 Cleaning

Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged
installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturers‟ instructions prior to
Employers acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris

4.7.6 Protection

Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.

4.8      Demolition Works

Structures shall be demolished to 1m below ground level. Tanks, sumps and basements shall have
holes broken through to allow equalization of water levels. Structures extending below 1m depth
shall be filled with compacted hardcore. Above 1m depth fill shall be selected material from
demolition or imported fill with particle size not exceeding 150 mm.

4.9      Doors

Doors shall incorporate ironmongery to include opening and closing arrangements, latching,
locking, staying, checking, self-closing and other devices necessary for the proper functioning of
doors as appropriate to their particular use, in accordance with the door types and ironmongery
schedules given hereinafter and the Drawings.

The detailed selection of ironmongery and door furniture and accessories specially provided for
the handicapped shall also be included, as shown in the appropriate Schedules.

All exterior doors are to be provided with the proper acoustical weather stripping all around leaves
and frames to insure sealing.




                                                                                                  70
4.9.1 Door Frames

Door frames shall be fitted into prepared openings, drilled and plugged at 3 points per jamb and
shall have 100 mm by 12 mm diameter galvanized steel dowels to posts let into flooring and
bedded in non-shrink or epoxy grout.

The joint between external door frames and adjacent walls shall be continuously pointed with gun
applied butyl or other approved non-setting mastic.

4.9.2 Internal Timber Doors

All internal doors shall be flush doors, both faces min. 1 mm thick matt finished laminate covered
and shall comply with BS EN 1634 for fire-rated doors.

Timber doors shall be composite wood core of minimum 45mm thickness and may be of greater
thickness where higher grades of fire resistance or special finishes are required.

Flush doors for general use shall be of soft wood (pinewood), and rails forming a solid timber
core, with lock rail, kicking rail and other furnishings according to Drawings and Schedules.

Unless otherwise directed, flush doors shall be hung on three side hinges at least and fitted with
approved mortise lock and handles, as indicated in the door types and ironmongery schedule.

Double-leaved doors shall be fitted with top, middle and bottom flush bolts wherever applicable.

Glazed apertures in flush doors shall be made in accordance with the detailed Drawings, and shall
be provided with hardwood glazing beads on both sides, neatly mitred and of twice rebated
section.

All vision panel glazing shall be single glazing.

Doors shall be installed in accordance with the best workmanship practices, conforming to BS
1186, Part 2. No scuffed, scratched or damaged doors will be accepted.

4.9.3 Fire Resistant Doors


Fire resistant doors that shall be installed to fire exits shall be 1.00 x 2.10 m in dimension. It
should have a special system that lets the door shut down automatically and do not let the smoke
and fire to spread when the inner temperature reaches 74° C which is the beginning temperature of
a fire. Because of its spring system it should be re closed automatically when it is opened because
of any reason. It should not let the fire to cross the other side of the door for 3 hours. It should



                                                                                                   71
have a system that can be connected the fire alarm system and other security systems of the
building. Panel must permit installation of pane according to demand of the Supervisor.

4.10     Drywall Partition Systems (Gypsum Wallboards)


4.10.1 Scope:


The work covered by this section consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies
and transportation and performing all operations in connection with drywall partition systems,
complete, in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and applicable drawings and
to the terms and conditions of the contract.


4.10.2 General:


Drywall partition systems hereinafter specified shall be installed in locations indicated on the
drawings and where required by other specification sections. All the panels, aluminum studs,
runners, and all other miscellaneous accessories, materials and connections necessary for
completion of the drywall partition systems described on the drawings shall be provided in order
to ensure the wall systems meet their manufacturer performance specifications.


4.10.3 Materials:


Gypsum Wallboard: Gypsum drywall systems shall be a reputable manufacturer. Gypsum
wallboards shall be 12.5 mm thick, factory-fabricated glass fiber reinforced gypsum boards
composed of a fireproof gypsum core encased in a heavy, finished paper. All gypsum drywall
partitions shall have fire rating in accordance with the Uniform Building Code and applicable
publications. The face paper shall be folded around the long edges to reinforce and protect the
core. Short edges must be square-cut, and not covered with paper. Wallboard thickness shall be as
indicated in the contract drawings.

Accessories: Accessories like runners, reinforcement studs, furring channels, corner beads, trims,
clips, and angles shall be the standard products of the manufacturer.

Tools: Tools for erection and finishing of drywall shall be standard tools recommended by the
manufacturer.


4.10.4 Submittals:


Samples: Two samples of each type of wallboard and one linear meter of accessories like runners,
furring channels, corner beads, trims, clips, angles shall be submitted for the approval.


                                                                                                72
 Certificate of Manufacturer's Authorization; entitling the Contractor for the erection of drywall
systems is required unless the work is subcontracted to a certified agent of the manufacturer.

4.10.5 Delivery and Storage:

 Materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with
brand name and type clearly marked. Materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover
in dry watertight enclosures. As much as possible, the panels shall be carried on their long sides.
Immediately before installation, wallboards, accessories and tools shall be stored for not less than
24 hours at the same temperature and relative humidity as the space where they will be installed.

4.10.6 Environmental Requirements:

Contractor shall perform the erection work in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
temperature and humidity requirements.


4.10.7 Scheduling:


 Drywall erection shall be performed and coordinated with other work. Mechanical, Electrical and
other work that will remain inside the gypsum board wall construction shall be completed.


4.10.8 Installation:


Drywall Partition System shall be comprised of galvanized steel horizontal runners at floor,
ceiling, and interim at horizontal panel joints; vertical studs; furring channels, corner beads, trims,
clips, angles fabricated from hot dip galvanized steel and glass fiber reinforced gypsum
wallboards which are attached in single or double layers with self drilling drywall screws. Drywall
system shall be erected in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to have a durable
surface suitable for most types of decorative treatment. The joints between adjacent gypsum
boards shall be concealed with the recommended system leaving the wall surface complete
without sign of joints or fastener heads. All joints, edges, corners and fastener heads shall be
discreetly concealed using the manufacturer's approved joint compound and embedding tape in
accordance with the manufacturer's erection instructions and in a manner acceptable by the
Contracting Officer. The erection of drywall partition systems shall be performed by a certified
and experienced crew.

Runner Installation: Floor and ceiling runners shall be attached to structure below and above
respectively by use of stub nails, shielded screws or power-driven fasteners, and to gypsum
wallboards by use of expandable expanded roset, at every 600 mm.




                                                                                                     73
Stud Erection: Floor to ceiling height studs shall be inserted between runners by twisting them into
position and fastened to the horizontal runners. Space studs shall be placed maximum 600 mm. on
centers. Studs and runners shall be cut to right lengths by using an electrical circular saw and sheet
metal cutting snips. Where applicable, studs shall be in direct contract with all abutting partitions.
If studs need to be lengthened, a 600 mm. long piece of runner shall be cut of the same dimension
as studs. Stud ends shall be joined and overlap the joint with equal length of runner. Splice studs
and runners with screws type wafer.

Gypsum Wallboard Fitting: Straight-line cuts shall be made across the full width or length of
board by scoring face paper. The board shall be bent over a sharp edge and cutting shall be
completed by running knife through back paper. Blade should always be kept sharp, so that score
will be made through paper into score of gypsum wallboards.

Gypsum Board Erection: Apply 1 gypsum board with long dimensions parallel to studs. Use
maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints. Position board so all abutting end edges will be
located in center of stud flanges except edges with horizontal application. Ensure joints are neatly
fitted and staggered on opposite sides of the partition so that they occur on different studs. Walls
shall be coated with white matte water based emulsion paint. Colors shall be in accordance with
drawing A17 Materials Schedule or as approved by COR. Wall structure shall consist of 12.5 mm
thick gypsum panel on each side with 5cm insulation mineral wool and 2.5 cm air space in
between. The space in between two wallboards shall be partially filled with insulation material. At
all conference and meeting rooms, one more layer of 12.5 mm gypsum wallboard shall be added to
the wall structure on the room side to insure additional sound insulation as shown on detail
drawings.

Installation of Wallboards:

Conduiting and Fixtures: After covering with gypsum boards on the first side of wall all fixtures
are to be carried out. Cut necessary openings in boards to accept electrical switches, outlet boxes
etc. Openings are to be cut by utility saw. Along the exterior corners, corner beads shall be used as
reinforcement.

Installation of Accessories: In the communications room where wall mounted equipment shall be
installed, wood blocking shall be provided between studs behind gypsum wallboards. No wall
equipment shall be fastened direct to gypsum wallboards.

Joint Treatment Application: Joint treatment application shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturer‟s instructions.

Spackling compound shall be a plaster produced specifically for filling joints. Spackling
compound shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in three coats with joint
sealing tape in between the first and the second coat.


                                                                                                    74
4.10.9 Cleaning:


Drywall surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of binding materials, dirt and other soiling and shall
be left in a satisfactory condition. Every foreign material shall be removed. The uses of solvents
which may damage the finished surface are prohibited.

4.10.10 Protection:


Drywall surfaces shall be protected by an approved method before the final surface treatment is
applied. Contractor shall be responsible to take necessary precautions where subsequent building
operations might damage the drywall system. Wallboards that become loose, broken, damaged, or
curled prior to acceptance shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor‟s
expense.



4.11     Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

The Contractor shall provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile, materials,
and operation indicated. The Contractor shall select units to accommodate joint size, variations in
adjacent surfaces, and structural movement. The cover units shall be furnished in longest
practicable lengths to minimize number of end joints. Hairline metered corners shall be provided
where joint changes directions or abuts other materials. Closure materials and transition pieces,
tee-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories shall be included as required to
provide continuous joint cover assemblies.

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing full extent of expansion joint cover
assemblies; include large-scale details indicating profiles of each type of expansion joint cover
assembly, splice joints between sections, jointure with other types, special end conditions,
anchorages, fasteners, and relationship to adjoining work and finishes.

The Contractor shall include description of materials and finishes, and submit product data inform
of manufacturer‟s product specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations
for each type of expansion joint cover assembly indicated.

The Contractor shall submit samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type of
expansion joint cover assemblies, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics
to the approval of the Supervisor.

The Contractor shall obtain expansion joint cover assemblies from a single manufacturer, together
with manufacturer‟s standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible vapor seals and filler



                                                                                                   75
materials, drain tubes, adhesive, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as
indicated or required for complete installation.

The Contractor shall prepare substrate in accordance with the instructions and recommendations of
the manufacturer‟s coordinate and furnish anchorages and fasteners where necessary for securing
expansion joint cover assemblies to in-place construction. The Contractor shall provide fasteners
of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction, and shall perform all cutting, drilling, and
fitting required for installation of expansion joint covers. Joint cover assemblies shall be installed
in true alignment and proper relation ship to expansion joints and adjoining finished surfaces
measured from established lines and levels. Covers shall be set at elevations to be flush with
adjacent finished floor materials.

The Contractor shall maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with end joints held
to a minimum and cut and fit ends to produce joints that will accommodate thermal expansion and
contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames.

Fire barriers shall be installed, including transition and end joints to provide continuous fire
resistance in accordance with manufacturer‟s instructions.

Strippable protective material shall not be removed until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
When protective material is removed, exposed metal surfaces shall be cleaned to comply with
manufacturer‟s installation.

4.12     Exterior Natural Stone Cladding

4.12.1 General:

The work defined in this section consists of an exterior wall covering system of dimension stone
panels together with the anchors, backup structure, fasteners, and sealants used to secure the stone
to the building structure and to produce a weather-resistant covering.
4.12.2 Materials:

Stone, general:
Quarry stone in a manner to ensure that as-quarried block orientations yield finished stone with
required characteristics.
Make quarried blocks available for examination by Supervisor for appearance characteristics.
Andezite stone will conform to TS 10835/T1.
Anchors and Backup Structure
Fabricate anchors, including shelf angles, from stainless steel, BS EN 10258 /59, Type 304,
temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses.


                                                                                                    76
Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; BS EN
ISO 3506-1, 2.
Backup Structure: Fabricate components not in contact with stone from hot-rolled steel shapes
complying with BS 4360 or from steel sheet not less than 2.7 mm thick complying with BS 1449.
Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication to comply with BE 729. Fabricate components in contact with
stone from same material specified for anchors.
Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Type indicated below, with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6
times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per BS 5080- 1&2 , conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Chemical anchors, torque-controlled expansion
anchors, made from stainless-steel components complying with BS EN ISO 3506-1, 2 for bolts
and nuts; BS EN 10258 /59 or BS EN 10272 Type 304 or 316, for anchors.
Metal Grid System:
Provide manufacturer's standard integrated system that combines metal struts, fittings, fasteners,
and stone anchors and that is engineered expressly for mechanically installing dimension stone
cladding and that complies with the following requirements:
Struts: Roll-formed steel channels, of size and shape required for application indicated, formed
from steel sheet not less than 2.7 mm thick and complying with BS 1449, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication to comply with BS 729.
Fittings and Fasteners: System manufacturer's standard components of design, size, and material
required to securely attach struts to building structure, by method indicated or selected, and stone
anchors to struts, as well as to prevent galvanic corrosion. Fabricate components in contact with
stone from same material specified for anchors.
Stone Anchors: Shapes and sizes standard with system manufacturer.
Stone Accessories:
Setting Buttons: Lead or resilient plastic buttons, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint
thicknesses and bed depths of stone units without intruding into required depths of joint sealants or
causing third-side adhesion between sealant and setting button.
Setting Shims: Strips of resilient plastic or vulcanized neoprene, 50 to 70 Shores a durometer,
nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thicknesses and depths of stone supports without intruding
into required depths of joint sealants or causing third-side adhesion between sealant and setting
shims.
Sealant Products: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants that are
compatible with requirements indicated below:
Sealant for Joints in Dimension Stone Cladding: Multicomponent, nonsag, low-modulus, urethane
sealant.



                                                                                                   77
Sealant for Filling Kerfs: Single-component, nonsag, urethane sealant for Use T.
4.12.3 Installation:


Examine surfaces to receive dimension stone cladding and conditions under which dimension
stone cladding will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Cover tops of dimension stone cladding installation with nonstaining, waterproof sheeting at end
of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend
cover a minimum of 600 mm down both sides and hold securely in place.
Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, sealants, and other sources. Immediately remove
such materials without damaging stone.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground
and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar and sealant droppings.
Clean stone surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before
setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear
water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.
Execute dimension stone cladding installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone
fitters at Project site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
Contiguous Work: Provide reveals, reglets, and openings as required to accommodate contiguous
work.
Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Install
anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure dimension
stone cladding in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately
in locations indicated with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned
according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated.
Keep expansion joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
Install concealed flashing at continuous shelf angles, lintels, ledges, and similar obstructions to
downward flow of water to divert water to building exterior.
Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of stone units and backup wall;
do not fill cavities with mortar or grout.
Attach anchors securely to stone and to backup surfaces.             Comply with manufacturer‟s
recommendations and BS EN 8298.
Attach framing for stone support system to structural frame of building, at connection points
indicated, by welding or bolting to comply with the following:


                                                                                                   78
Attach framing to concrete members only. Do not attach to aerated concrete masonry units.
Weld stainless steel connections to comply with BS EN 1011-3.
Fabricate joints to exclude water or to permit its escape to building exterior, at locations where
water could accumulate because of condensation or other causes.
For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing
to comply with ASTM A 780 or approved equivalent European standards.
For shop-painted surfaces, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas immediately
after erection. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.
Fill anchor holes with sealant.
Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of
dowels.
Set stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of
thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of stone a
distance at least equal to width of joint.
4.12.4 Adjusting and Cleaning


Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone, defective joints, and
dimension stone cladding that does not match approved samples [and mockups]. Damaged stone
may be repaired if Supervisor approves methods and results.
Replace in a manner that, results in dimension stone cladding's matching approved samples [and
mockups], complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding as work progresses. Remove mortar fins
and smears before tooling joints.
Clean dimension stone cladding no fewer than six days after completion of pointing and sealing,
using clean water and stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not uses wire brushes, acid-type cleaning
agents, cleaning agents containing caustic compounds or abrasives, or other materials or methods
that could damage stone.


4.13     Geosynthetic Material

The geotextile referred to on the drawings shall be in the form of a manufactured sheet of prime
quality, non-woven needle punched material in virgin polypropylene containing 1% active carbon
black UV inhibitor. It shall have the following properties (minimum > or maximum <):

      Static puncture strength (CBR) to BS EN ISO 12236 =         >2kN
      Push-through displacement to BS EN ISO 1`2236 =             >75mm
      Tensile strength to BSEN ISO 10319 =                        >7kN/m


                                                                                                79
      Tensile elongation to BSEN ISO 10319 =                         >50%
      Cone drop to BS EN 918 =                                       >13mm
      Thickness at 2kPa to BS EN 964-1 =                            >3mm
      Apparent pore size 90% finer to EN ISO 12956 =                <300um
      Waterflow to EN ISO 11058 =                                   >150 l/s/m2
      Coefficient of permeability to EN ISO 11058 =                 >10 m/3x10-3
      Roll width                                                    >4m
  
Unless otherwise specified, all building works in this section shall be carried out in accordance
with best international practices (or equivalent local practices), local building regulations (where
relevant), bylaws, or in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4.14      Glazing Works

4.14.1 General:


The work covered by this section consist of furnishing all labor, materials, supplies and
transportation and performing all operations in connection with installation of transparent double
glazing, in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and applicable drawings and to
the terms and conditions of the contract.

The glazing herein after specified shall be installed in the location indicated on the drawings.
Frame shall be as specified in relevant sections of this specification. However, all frame parts that
are damaged in any way during installation of glazing or in any other manner and all other
miscellaneous accessories, materials and connections necessary for completion of glazing work as
indicated on the drawings shall be provided in order to ensure that installed glazing meet their
performance specifications.

4.14.2 Applicable Publications:

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only:
TS 347 Sheet Glass

4.14.3 Submittals:

Samples: 20 x 20 cm. samples of all types of glass shall be submitted for the approval.

Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. Shop drawings shall show the sizes of the glass
panels, plans, elevations, thickness of members, method of fastening, details of hardware and other
information as is necessary to fully describe the items to be furnished, their installation and



                                                                                                   80
specifications for the required finish. Installation and assembly details shall be indicated on shop
drawings in appropriate scales.

Certificates of Compliance: Certificates of compliance attesting that the glass meets the
requirements specified shall be furnished. Labels or marking affixed to the glass will be accepted
in lieu of certificates.

Delivery & Storage: Glazing compounds shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer's
unopened containers. Glass shall be stored in safe, dry locations and shall not be unpacked until
needed for installation.




4.14.4 Materials:

 Single glazing: The single glazing to be used on glazed doors shall be 6 mm monoblock tempered
glass. Glass shall be transparent, flat glass having a glossy, fire-finished, apparently plane and
smooth surface. The central area of light shall be free from defects and the appearance of the light
as a whole shall be such that there is not perceptible interference with the vision. Glass shall meet
or exceed the standards of TS 347.

Double Glazing: Double glazing shall consist of 4mm + 4mm sheet glass with heat insulation.
Double glazing shall be the product of a licensed manufacturer.

Setting Materials:
Glazing compound and preformed glazing sealants: Suitable type approved for the application and
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation unless specified otherwise. The use of non-
skinning compound, nonresilient-type gaskets will not be permitted. Metal sash putty will not be
permitted, but compound conforming to specification TS 347 will be permitted. Materials used
with aluminum frames shall be aluminum colored, nonstaining, and not require painting. Other
materials which will be exposed to view and unpainted shall be gray or neutral color.

 Glazing Accessories: As required to supplement the accessories provided with the items to be
glazed and to provide a complete installation, including glazing points, clips, shims, angles, beads,
setting blocks and spacer strips. Ferrous metal accessories which will be exposed in the finished
work shall have a finish that will not corrode or stain while in service.

4.14.5 Installation:

The new glazing shall be mounted according to construction drawings. The sizes to provide the
required edge clearances shall be determined by measuring the actual opening to receive the glass.
All edges of glass that will be exposed in finish work shall be ground smooth. Labels shall be left



                                                                                                   81
in place until the installation is approved. Glass shall be cut and set with the visible lines or waves
running with horizontal dimensions.

4.14.6 Acceptance:


All glass surfaces shall be protected against any damage. After inspection any label, paint smears
and spots shall be removed from the glass and the glass shall be washed clean. Damaged or
broken glass shall be removed and replaced before acceptance at no additional cost to the Client.
Glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned with labels, paint spots; putty and other defacement
removed, and shall be clean at the time the work is accepted.



4.15     Granite Ceramic (Porcelain)


4.15.1 Material

Technical Specifications of 33 x 33 cm and 40 x 40 cm granite ceramic is as follows:

Water absorption: 0,05 %
Bending Strenght: < 27 N/mm2
Mohs Hardness: < 60 Mohs
Strength to deep abrasion: < 205 mm2
Thermal expansion coefficient: 9x10-6/0C1
Strength to thermal shock: Not effected
Strength to crack: Wanted
Strength to cold: Must not make any trace on the surface
Color Strength to light: Must not make any visible change
Strength to chemicals: Must not have any chemical traces
Strength to stains: Wanted
Strength to house chemicals: Wanted
Friction Coefficient: >R9


4.15.2 Workmanship


Before the construction of any floor to which a finish is to be supplied, the details of the proposed
finish shall be considered and submitted to the Supervisor for approval. Any screed required for
the installation of the floor finish as specified or required by the manufacturer or installer of the
floor finish shall be incorporated in the floor where the proposals are approved by the Supervisor.

All floor finishes shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer‟s instructions, observing all
laying procedures and precautions.


                                                                                                     82
Mortar: Mortar for ceramic tile floor bedding shall be mixed in the proportions of one part
Portland cement, 5 parts dry sand, and 1/10 part hydrated lime, by volume. Mortar for ceramic tile
wall bedding shall be mixed in the proportions of one part Portland cement, 4 to 5 parts dry sand,
and 1/2 to one part hydrated lime. Mortar shall be machine mixed and shall be low slump. Mortar
shall be mixed and placed only as required by the tile setter. Mortar, which has reached its initial
set, shall be discarded. No remixing with additional water, cement, or other materials will be
permitted (tile cement can also be used).
A float coat of mortar approximately 12 mm thick shall be applied to the wall surfaces to be
covered with tile. A skim coat of neat Portland cement approximately 1.5 mm thick shall be
applied over the float coat or to the back of the tile. The tile shall be thoroughly beaten into the
setting mortar while the skim coat is still plastic. The surfaces of the tile shall be uniform with
edges of adjacent tile at the same plane.

Surface Preparation: Surfaces to be covered with tile shall be cleaned of all dirt, dust, plaster, oil,
grease, wax, paint, or other foreign substances. Surfaces to receive tile set in mortar shall be kept
saturated for 24 hours before tile is placed. Cement screed shall be applied on floors, which is not
true enough to provide the exact alignment after installation. Materials and workmanship shall
comply with Section 4 of the Specifications for this thin concrete layer.

Wall Tile Installation: All ceramic tiles shall be set in a bed of mortar. Wall tiles shall beset in
stack bond. Tile shall be carefully laid out and centred on each wall or section of wail to avoid
small cuts. Cut tile edges shall be rubbed smooth. Joints shall be approximately 1.5 mm wide and
accurately aligned. All exposed edges shall be laid with bull nose cap or edge units. All external
corners shall be laid with bull nose corner units. All vertical internal corners shall be laid square.
All horizontal internal corners shall be laid with cove units.

Floor Tile Installation: All ceramic floor tiles shall be laid in a bed of mortar. Tile joints shall be
approximately 1.5 mm wide and accurately aligned. The work shall be carefully laid out and
centered to avoid small cuts shall be rubbed smooth and even. After tile is laid, the entire floor
shall present a true and even surface varying not more than 1 mm from a 1-meter straightedge.
Setting bed mortar shall be placed over slab and tamped and screened to the required thickness.
After the mortar setting bed is placed, a 1.5 mm thick coat of neat cement paste shall be trowelled
over the setting bed or a 1.5 mm thick coat of dry Portland cement shall be dusted on the moist
surface. The dry coat shall be lightly worked with a brush or float immediately before placing tile.
The tile shall be applied and thoroughly beaten into place.

4.16     Gypsum Board Suspended Ceilings

Suspended ceilings with plain gypsum board are specified herein.
The “U” channels shall be secured to the walls at the required heights, at maximum 600 mm
centers and 50 mm from ends of channels. These channels shall form the perimeter. The centers of


                                                                                                     83
the upper „C‟ channels shall depend on the loading requirements, depending on the Supervisoring
calculations, and shall lay on the upper flange of the perimeter channel. Hanger rods shall be fixed
staggered to either side of „C‟ channels with special head screws. The Lower „C‟ channels shall be
positioned within the perimeter channels to coincide with the abutments of the boards, which shall
be fixed later. The centers shall be 400 mm. Once the upper and lower „C‟ channels have been
connected and before the boarding has started, the insulation quilt shall be inserted above the
upper „C‟ channels. Care shall be taken to ensure that the insulation is fitted neatly without gaps at
aboutments or between different rolls. All boards shall be offered up to the ceiling grid with the
decorative face of the boards outwards and secured with drywall screws at maximum 230 mm
centers. Fixing centers shall be reduced to 150 mm at corners. Boards shall be mounted at 90 0 to
the direction of the ceiling channels. Taping and jointing shall be applied to achieve a seamless
finish. As soon as the joints have dried one coat wall board Primer shall be applied over the plaster
boards and joints to equalise different suction levels.
At the end of the work, an elevation scanning shall be made in order to detect any elevation
difference. In case of detection of any elevation difference, and leveling deficiency, the Contractor
shall correct the same without any cost to the Employer.

4.17      Handrails and Balusters

Handrails and balusters shall be manufactured from material complying with the relevant
provisions of the appropriate standard as set out below.

                         Handrails                          Balusters
       Material
                         Solid          Tubular             Solid         Tubular
       Mild Steel        -              ISO 65              -             ISO 65
       Stainless Steel   -              -                   -             -
       Aluminum          EN755          EN 515, 573-3,      EN 1676       EN 515, 573 -3,
                                        754                               754

After manufacture, mild steel and aluminum handrails and balusters shall be hot dip galvanized,
both inside and outside, or anodized, as appropriate, in accordance with EN ISO 1460.

Hand railing shall be provided on all stairs, landings, platforms and floors to provide the users
protection against falling. This applies to stairs with three or more rises, where each rise does not
exceed 200 mm, landings, platforms and floors where a drop exceeds 200 mm, and wherever there
is a risk to the user.

Hand railing shall be no less than 1100 mm above the walking level on a floor, and no less than
900 mm and no more than 1000 mm above the pitch line of a stair.

Steel handrails shall be constructed out of Low Carbon Steel Cold Formed Circular Hollow
Section Grade S275JOH to EN 10 219-1 or Mild Steel with a minimum outside diameter of 33.7


                                                                                                    84
mm and 3 mm minimum wall thickness or as otherwise specified in the Contract. Hand railing
shall be supplied with at least one intermediate rail (or knee rail) mid-way between the handrail
(top rail) and the walking level or pitch line on a stair, or the top of any kicker plate.

Balusters for hand railing shall be constructed out of either Low Carbon Steel Solid Round to EN
10 025 Grade S275JR, CFCHS or mild steel as specified for rails. The diameter for solid shanks or
the outside diameter and wall thickness of tubular shanks shall be designed to suit the most
economical pitch between the balusters. Balusters shall be constructed as a single unit.




4.18     Joint Sealing Compounds and Sealants

Joint sealing compounds shall be impermeable ductile materials of a type suitable for the
conditions of exposure in which they are to be placed, and capable of providing a durable, flexible
and watertight seal by adhesion to the concrete throughout the range of joint movement.

Two-part polysulphide-based sealants. Pouring Grade shall be applied to horizontal upward-facing
joints and Gun Grade to joints of any other aspect or inclination. Other two-part polymer-based
sealants of Gun or Trowel Grade shall comply with the appropriate physical and test requirements.

Primers for use with joint sealants shall be compatible with, and obtained from the same
manufacturers as, the adjacent sealant. Primers shall have no harmful effects on concrete.
Sealants and primers which will be in contact with water to be used for potable supply shall not
impart to water any taste, colour, or any effect known to be harmful to health, and shall be
resistant to bacteria growth.

Sealants and primers which will be in contact with sewage or sewage sludge shall be resistant to
biodegradation. Sealants shall be two-part elastomeric. Sealants shall have resistance to both
aerobic and anaerobic bacteriological attack. When cured the sealant shall exhibit resilience to a
Shore Hardness-A of at least 25°.

Road joint sealants shall be hot poured rubber bitumen and shall be used strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.

4.19     Joint Seals and Lubricants

Elastomeric seals for pipe joints shall be obtained from the pipe manufacture and shall comply
with the relevant provisions of EN 681: Part 1. For water pipelines the seals shall be type WA and
for drainage purposes they shall be either type WC or WG. Within EN 681-1 there is no
microbiological requirement for elastomeric seals. Hence the seals shall comply with the
following:



                                                                                                 85
      the average l
      oss in mass of the test pieces shall not exceed 3.5%
      there shall be no greater release of carbon black or other fillers from the test set than from the
       control set when the surface of the specimens is lightly rubbed.


In the case of composite seals the requirements apply only to those components exposed to the
contents of the pipeline or pipework.
Joint lubricants for sliding joints shall have no deleterious effects on either the joint rings or pipes,
and be unaffected by the liquid to be conveyed. Lubricants to be used for jointing water pipelines
shall not impart to water any taste, colour, or any effect known to be injurious to health, and shall
be resistant to bacterial growth.

4.20      Ladders

After fabrication, low carbon steel ladders shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with EN ISO
1460.

Stainless steel ladders for vertical fixing shall be fabricated from Grade 316S31 steel.

Aluminum ladders for vertical fixing shall be fabricated from grade 6082.

After fabrication, aluminum ladders shall be anodized.

GRP ladders shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with National regulations or
standards. GRP ladders shall not be used on potable water installations.

The minimum clear width between stringers of ladders shall be 450 mm.

Unless otherwise specified, vertical ladders shall not be used. Access shall be provided using
ship-type ladders with a slope of 15 degrees.

Detailed drawings of all ladders shall be submitted to the Supervisor for approval before
manufacture.



4.21      Natural Stone Finishes


4.21.1 Applicable Publications:




                                                                                                       86
The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic
designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto:

Turkish Standards Institution (TSE):
TS 19 Portland Cement
TS 21 White Portland Cement
TS 2513 Natural Buildings Stones
TS 2717 Aggregates for Masonry Mortar



4.21.2 General Requirements:


The work shall be coordinated with the other trades. Marble (travertine) & stone flooring shall be
fabricated by an experienced and acceptable marble manufacturer.


4.21.3 Materials:


Materials shall conform to the requirements of the specifications and drawings:

Marble (travertine) and andesite stone flooring: Minimum thickness of Marble (travertine) flooring
shall be three (3) cm. Minimum thickness of stone flooring shall be three (3) cm in closed areas
and four (4) cm in outside areas. All marble (travertine) and stone flooring shall be factory cut and
finished, meeting the requirements of TS 2513. Color and pattern of marble (travertine) and
andesite shall be uniform. Marble (travertine) shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2500
kg/m3 and compressive strength of 600 kg/cm2. Marble (travertine) flooring shall not have cracks,
holes, voids, and soil. It shall be polished. Andesite stone flooring shall be filled. Marble
(travertine) and stone flooring shall have maximum dimensions as recommended by the
manufacturer.

Marble (travertine) sills: Natural stone window sills shall comply with the relevant provisions of
BS 5642: Part 1. The physical properties for marble (travertine) flooring mentioned above are also
valid for marble (travertine) sills. All sills shall be monolithic and polished. Locations shall be as
shown on the drawings.

Marble (travertine) & Stone Stairs:

Steps: steps shall be monolithic, factory cut and finished with minimum thickness of 4 cm.
Risers: Risers shall be monolithic, factory cut and finished with minimum thickness of 3 cm.

Portland Cement: Portland cement shall conform to TS 19.



                                                                                                    87
White Portland Cement: White Portland Cement shall conform to TS 21.

Sand: Sand shall be cleaned, washed, sharp, durable particles, free from silt, clay and shall be well
graded conforming to TS 2717.

Water: Water shall be clean, free from oil, acids, alkali, sewage and deleterious minerals or
organic matter and shall be potable.

4.21.4 Submittals:

Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted to for approval. Shop drawings shall show
plans, elevations, sections, details of construction, thicknesses of materials, methods of
installation, location, dimensions, interface with adjacent members, special handling instructions
and other information as is necessary to fully describe the work items to be furnished and their
installation into the work, and specifications for the required finish.

Certificates of Compliance: Certificate of compliance indicating conformance with specified
requirements shall be furnished for conductive dry-set mortar and for marble (travertine) flooring.

Samples: The following samples of material to be incorporated into this project shall be submitted
by the Contractor for approval prior to shipment.

Marble (travertine) Flooring: Two (2) 40 cm. by 60 cm. sample of marble (travertine) flooring
required for the project shall be submitted. Samples shall show color, pattern and finish.

Marble (travertine) Interior Sills: One (1) 100 cm. length sample of marble (travertine) exterior
and interior sill required for the project shall be submitted. Samples shall show color, pattern and
finish.

Andesite Flooring: Two (2) 40 cm. by 60 cm. sample of marble (travertine) flooring required for
the project shall be submitted. Samples shall show color, pattern and finish.

Andesite Exterior Sills: One (1) sample of maximum length required for the project shall be
submitted. The samples shall show color, pattern and finish.

Andesite Jamb: One (1) sample of maximum length required for the project shall be submitted.
The samples shall show color, pattern and finish.


4.21.5 Sampling and Testing:




                                                                                                   88
Sampling and testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed at no
additional cost to the Client. Sampling and testing shall be performed in sufficient number to
insure that materials and construction meet the specific requirements and Turkish Standards. A
sample of 1 m2 marble (travertine) flooring and stone flooring shall be installed on a sample floor
to be erected at a location as directed by the Project Manager. Installation shall not commence
until this sample has been inspected and approved.

4.21.6 Handling and Storage:


Marble (travertine) and stone flooring shall be delivered to the site with delivery scheduled to
avoid excessive build-up of units in storage at the site. Stocks shall be handled, stored and
protected in a manner to avoid chipping, breakage or contact with soil. Cement shall be delivered
to the site in sealed bags, plainly marked and labeled with the manufacturer's name and brands.

Cementious materials shall be stored off the ground in dry, weathertight sheds or enclosures or
under watertight tarpaulin. Cement shall be handled and stored in a manner which will prevent the
inclusion of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness.

Sand shall be built up in approved locations in layers of no more than 1.5 m high. Sand from
different sources or different gradations and sizes shall not be stockpiled together. Free drainage
shall be provided for all sand stockpiles.


4.21.7 Mortars:


Proportions: The materials shall be proportioned to secure plastic and workable mixtures which
will result in durable mortars, as follows:

a. Mortar for Bond Coat: Mortar for bond coat shall be composed by weight/volume ratio 400 kg
portland cement to 1.2 m3 dry sand, mixed with minimum amount of water necessary to produce
workable mass.

b. Mortar Coat: Mortar coat shall be composed by weight/volume ratio of 400 kg portland cement
to 1.2 m3 dry sand, mixed with minimum amount of water necessary to produce workable mass.

c. Mortar for Filling: Mortar for filling shall be composed by volume of 1 m3 portland cement to 1
m3 dry fine sand, mixed with minimum amount of water necessary to produce workable mass.

d. Cement Grout: Cement grout shall be composed of white, waterproof portland cement pigment
with minimum amount of water necessary to produce workable mass.




                                                                                                 89
Mortar Mixing: Cement and sand for each batch shall be accurately measured and mixed dry until
evenly distributed and until the mass is uniform in color. No frozen, caked or lumpy materials
shall be used. Batch shall be of size that they can be entirely used within half an hour. Water shall
be gradually added, in the maximum amount consistent with satisfactory workability. Grout shall
be continuously stirred to prevent segregation of aggregate.

4.21.8 Setting Marble (travertine) and Stone Flooring:

Marble (travertine) and stone flooring shall be installed with base mortar 2 to 3 cm. thick. All
joints shall be perfectly fitted, straight and even width. Maximum thickness of the joints shall be 1
mm.

Every 10 m2 flooring shall be inspected by the Supervisor or his approved representative. Marble
(travertine) flooring that is out of true plane or misplaced or having voids at their back shall be
removed and reset. Damaged, cracked or defective pieces shall be replaced.

Grouting: After the edges of tiles have been thoroughly wetted, joints shall be grouted full with a
plastic mix of neat white, waterproof portland cement, immediately after a suitable area of marble
(travertine) and stone flooring has been set. The joints shall be tooled slightly concave, and excess
mortar shall be cut off and wiped form the face of the tile. Depressions on the mortar joints after
the grout has been cleaned from the surface shall be roughened at once and filled to the spring line
of the cushion edge before mortar begins hardening.

Curing: Immediately after the grout has had its initial set, marble (travertine) flooring surfaces and
joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and damp-cured for one (1) week.


4.21.9 Cleaning:

Not sooner than 72 hours after joints are grouted, faces and other exposed surfaces of marble
(travertine) flooring shall be washed, cleaned with soap and water applied with a soft bristle
brush, then washed again with clean water or by other approved procedures. Acid shall not be used
for cleaning. Discolorations which cannot be removed by these procedures shall be considered
defective work. Cleaning work shall be done when temperature and humidity conditions are such
that surface dries rapidly. Care shall be taken during cleaning operations to protect adjacent
surfaces from damage.


4.21.10 Protection of Work:

Installed flooring shall be protected against damage from subsequent operations. Marble
(travertine) or Stone flooring that is damaged prior to completion and acceptance of the project




                                                                                                    90
shall be repaired or replaced in a satisfactory manner or as directed by the Project Manager or his
approved representative using approved procedures.

4.22      Paints and Painting Material for Buildings

4.22.1 Applicable Publications

TS 39     Solvent Based Enamel Paints
TS 144    Liquid Dryers
TS 772    White Pigments for Paints
TS 2436   Mineral Solvents For Paints
TS 5808   Water Based Emulsion Paints (Latex)


4.22.2 General

The final colour of the walls and ceilings shall be in accordance with the agreed colour scheme for
the Contract and 600 mm x 300 mm sample boards shall be prepared by the Contractor if required.

Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not
to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a
surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not
schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Supervisor will select
from standard colors and finishes available.

Do not paint pre-finished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels.

4.22.3 Submittals

Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.

Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual
conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of engineers and owners, and other information
specified.




                                                                                                     91
4.22.4 Quality Assurance

Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of
successful in-service performance.

Source Limitations: Obtain fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from
the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of
coating and substrate required on the Project.

After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in
this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen,
color, and texture on each surface.

4.22.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

      Product name or title of material.
      Product description (generic classification or binder type).
      Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
      Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
      Thinning instructions.
      Application instructions.
      Color name and number.
      VOC content.

Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 7 deg C. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.

4.22.6 Project Conditions

Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 10 and 32 deg C.

Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 7.2 and 35 deg C.



                                                                                                92
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed
and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying
periods.

4.22.7 Paint Materials

Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that
are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be
acceptable.

4.22.8 Execution

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will
be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.

Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within
a particular area.

Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.

After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers
skilled in the trades involved.

Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that
could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not
fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.




                                                                                                   93
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.

Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-
fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have
been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.

Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces
are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before
application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.

Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching
cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow
drying, and vacuuming before painting.

Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and
sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other
recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in
finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces,
undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction
occurs on backside.

Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer
immediately on delivery.

Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances.

Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer.


                                                                                                    94
Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before
priming.

Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with
solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is
free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated
from coil stock by mechanical methods.

Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.

Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain
material before using.

Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple
coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.



4.22.9 Application

Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best
suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.

Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.

Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector
covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend


                                                                                                   95
coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired
protection.

Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.

Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers
or grilles.

Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.

Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior.

Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.

The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the
manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's
written instructions, sand between applications.

Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats
until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of
flat surfaces.

Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces
until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose
adhesion.

Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.




                                                                                                   96
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for
the surface or item being painted.

Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.

Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.

Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.

Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.

Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.

Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even
luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel,
nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence
of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with requirements.

Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from the site.

After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by
washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.




                                                                                                    97
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.

Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Supervisor.

Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.




4.23       Plastering

4.23.1   General

Sands for external renderings and internal plastering with lime and Portland cement shall comply
with the relevant provisions of BS 1199.

Unless a bonding agent is used, concrete ceilings, ceiling beams, columns and stanchions shall be
dubbed out as necessary before plastering is commenced and the mix used for dubbing shall be
similar to that used for first undercoating. The surface of the in-situ concrete shall be cleaned of
dust, loose particles and other matter. Surfaces shall be wetted immediately before start of
plastering.

Angles between walls and ceilings, vertical angles and joints between dissimilar materials shall be
reinforced with 90 mm wide scrim set in plaster and trowelled flat. All joints between
plasterboards shall be similarly treated.
Expanded metal angle beads shall be provided at all external corners.

Plastering shall normally be applied in 2 coats in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
and batches shall be used as soon as possible after water has been added. The total thickness of
both coats shall not exceed 13 mm. The sand used for the first coat of plastering shall be uniformly
graded sand passing through sieve No. 4 and retained on sieve No. 5. The sand used for the second
coat shall be fine sand passing through sieve No. 8 (2.38 mm) and retained on sieve No. 5 (0.30
mm).

The thickness of 2 coat work applied to concrete ceilings and soffits or plasterboard shall not
exceed 9 mm.

The thickness of finishing coats shall be around 3 mm except where board finished plaster is used
when the thickness shall be 5 mm.



                                                                                                  98
4.23.2 External Rendering

Total thickness shall be not less than 20 mm. The first coat shall be applied, leveled, scratched and
left to dry for not less than 3 days in warm weather and not less than 7 days in cold or wet weather.
The suction of the surface of the first coat shall be adjusted as necessary by wetting before
applying the second coat which shall be coloured as directed, leveled and lightly trowelled with a
wooden trowel.

4.23.3    Expanded Metal Lathing

Before plastering commences, all junctions between brick/block walls and reinforced concrete
columns, beams and roof slabs, as well as any other locations in which (in the opinion of the
Supervisor) cracks are likely to develop, shall be reinforced with galvanized metal lathing
strips/beads/corners/stops, as specified in 5.6 below, which shall be plugged or nailed as required
at intervals not exceeding 50 cm at both edges.

Expanded Metal Lath shall be of tight-coat, galvanized steel metal lath conforming to BS 1369,
Part 1 1987 and EN 10143. Material thickness shall be not less than 0.5 mm and material weight
shall be not less than 1.22 kg/m2.

4.23.4    Plastering in Cold Weather

When the ambient temperature is 5 deg. C or less, the portion of the Works to be plastered shall be
completely enclosed. The ambient temperature shall be raised and maintained above 5 deg. C until
completion of plastering and hydration.

4.24     PVC Flooring

4.24.1 Scope of Work:


The location and extent of PVC flooring shall be as indicated on flooring plans and room book of
the contract drawings. This section covers the furnishing and installation of PVC flooring
complete.


4.24.2         Submittals:


Shop Drawings, one tile for color sample and one container of adhesive material sample shall be
submitted for approval. Shop Drawings shall indicate joint details, pre-installation surface
preparation requirements and the manufacturer‟s installation instructions and its recommendations.




                                                                                                   99
4.24.3 Delivery and Storage:


Materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer‟s original unopened containers with
brand name and type clearly marked. Materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover
in dry and waterproof enclosures.


4.24.4          Scheduling:


Floors shall be repaired where necessary and floor surfaces shall be smooth and clean. All interior
work such as painting shall be complete and dry before installation of PVC flooring.




4.24.5 Materials:


PVC flooring shall be TARKETT– SOMMER or approved equal and meet or exceed the
following minimum requirements:

        Classification: EN 685 commercial 34 industrial 43
        Total Thickness EN 423 2.00 mm
        Width EN 426 2000 mm
        Weight EN 430 approx. 2.9 kg.
        Abrasion EN 660-1 Approx. 0.12 mm
        Residual indentation EN 433 0.1 mm
        Electrical resistance DIN 51953 1010 ohms
        Flame Spread DIN 4102 B1
        Chemical resistance EN 423 Good

Color: Color of the flooring shall be submitted for the approval.

4.24.6 Installation Materials

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer
for applications indicated.

Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering
and substrate conditions indicated.

Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer.


                                                                                                100
Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:

Cove Strip: 25-mm radius provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.

Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer.

Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer.

Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running
joints.


4.24.7 Execution

Examination: Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.

Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other
Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that
might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Preparation: Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure
adhesion of floor coverings.

Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.

Moisture Testing:
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test. Proceed with installation only after substrates have
maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 1.5 kg of water / 100sq. m in 24 hours.

Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing.




                                                                                                   101
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48
hours in advance of installation.

Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Installation: Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and
fitting.

Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings as follows:

Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.

Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 152 mm
away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.

Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.

Avoid cross seams.
Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures,
and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.

Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.

Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation
areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor coverings installed on
covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.




                                                                                                   102
Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce
a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing
of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

Heat-Welded Seams: Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a
seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining
floor covering surfaces.

Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings to form integral base of height indicated at vertical
surfaces.

Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.



4.24.8 Cleaning and Protection

Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.
Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.
Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer.

Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

Apply protective floor polish to surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and blemishes if
recommended in writing by manufacturer.

Cover floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion.

Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard
panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects
over panels without moving panels.

4.25     Roads

4.25.1 Granular Sub-base Material

Granular sub-base material shall be natural sands, gravels, crushed rock, crushed slag, and crushed
concrete or well burnt non-plastic shale of uniform grading. The material shall be capable of being




                                                                                                  103
compacted to achieve a well knit dense layer and lie within the following grading limits unless
stated elsewhere in the Contract. Stones larger than 100 mm shall be removed.

 Sieve size                                    Percentage by mass passing
                             Type 1                             Type 2
 50 mm                       100                                100
 37.5 mm                     85 – 100                           85 – 100
 10 mm                       40 – 70                            45 – 100
 5 mm                        25 – 45                            25 – 85
 600µm                       8 – 22                             8 – 40
 75µm                        0 – 10                             0 – 10

Where granular sub-base material is to be used within 450 mm of the surface of any road, the
Contractor shall supply to the Supervisor a certificate confirming that the material has a heave not
greater than 15 mm when subjected to a frost test as specified by the Highway Authority.

Natural sands and gravels shall only be permitted in Type 2 material.

The particle size shall be determined by washing and sieving method. The material passing a 425
µm sieve shall be non-plastic for Type 1 and have a Plasticity Index of less than 6 for Type 2.

With the exception of well burnt non-plastic shale, the material shall have a „ten per cent fines‟
value of 50 kN or more when tested in accordance with EN 1097-2.

Sub-base material shall be spread evenly in layers not more than 150 mm compacted thickness and
compacted to obtain a well-bound surface finish, any loose areas or segregated areas being made
good by addition of fines or by removing and replacing with fresh material as directed by the
Supervisor.

Compaction shall be carried out by approved equipment operating on the material until a dry
density of not less than 95% of the laboratory maximum dry density as measured by the 4.5 kg
rammer method is obtained. The CBR value shall not be less than 25% after four days immersion
in water.

4.25.2 Road Base Material

Road base material shall consist of crushed rock or other material approved by the Supervisor, and
shall be suitably proportioned to conform to the following grading or such other grading, where
appropriate, in accordance with the requirements of the Supervisor alterations are made to
incorporate the requirements of the local highway authority:




                                                                                                 104
             Sieve Size mm                               Percentage by weight
                                                         passing square mesh
             75                                          100
             37.5                                        85-100
             20                                          60-80
             10                                          40-60
             5                                           20-40
             2.36                                        15-30
             0.425                                       5-18
             0.075                                       4-9

The fraction passing the 0.075 mm sieve shall not be greater than two-thirds of the fraction passing
the 0.425 mm sieve.

Material constituents shall comply with the following maximum limits:

For material passing the 0.425 mm sieve:
     Liquid Limit                          25
     Linear Shrinkage                       3
     Plasticity Index                       6

          For coarse material:
      Stone Size                           75 mm
      Aggregate Crushing Value             35%
      Water Absorption                     6%
      Flakiness Index                      35
      Elongation Index                     35

The aggregate crushing value shall be monitored by regular testing of material prior to its
inclusion in the construction.

Road base materials shall be crushed and mixed using approved mechanical equipment to produce
a material complying with the specified grading.

Water required to adjust the moisture content shall be added at the mixer. If required, the moisture
content shall be adjusted to allow for evaporation loss during transportation.

Material when mixed shall be removed at once from the mixer and transported directly to the point
where it is to be laid.

Road base material shall be spread evenly in a layer not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness
for the roadway and a layer not exceeding 200 mm compacted thickness in the verges. Segregation


                                                                                                 105
shall be avoided during transport and placing and any segregation evident after compaction shall
be made good by removing and replacing with properly graded material.

Where natural gravel is used, water necessary to adjust the moisture content shall be added during
laying by use of equipment equipped with a sprinkler bar giving an even spread of water over the
whole width of the pass. Uneven wetting of the road base shall be avoided by ensuring that the
equipment moves at a constant speed, and in addition, the material shall be turned over to ensure
even distribution of the water throughout the layer.

The road-base shall be compacted by approved equipment to a dry density which shall be not less
than 95% of the maximum laboratory dry density as measured by 4.5 kg rammer method. The
C.B.R. value shall not be less than 80% after four days immersion in water.

4.25.3 Bitumen

The Properties Of Penetration-Graded bitumen shall be in accordance with the following
requirements:

            Penetration Grade 60 - 70:                    Min.           Max.
            Ductility at 25 deg.C (cm)                    100            -
            Penetration at 25 deg.C (0.1mm)               60             70
            Softening Point (deg.C)                       48             56
            Specific Gravity at 25 deg.C                  1.01           1.06
            Loss on heating to 163 deg.C (%wt)            -              0.8
            Penetration of residue % of original          54             -
            Solubility in Trichlorethylene (%wt)          99             -
            Ash content %wt                               -              1.0
            Flash point (Cleveland Open Cup) (deg.C)      250            -

Prime Coat: medium curing cutback bitumen:

        Grade          Specification       Application Temperature
        MC-70          AASHTO M 82         50 – 70 deg.C
        MC-250         AASHTO M 82         70 – 93 deg.C

Tack Coat: rapid curing cutback bitumen:

        Grade          Specification       Application Temperature
        RC-70          AASHTO M 81         50 – 70 deg.C

Tack Coat: anionic emulsified bitumen to be diluted with water to give bitumen content of not less
than 26%:


                                                                                               106
        Grade          Specification        Application Temperature
        SS-1; SS-      AASHTO M 140         24 – 54 deg.C
        1h

Tack Coat: cationic emulsified bitumen:

        Grade          Specification        Application Temperature
        CSS1           AASHTO M 208         24 – 54 deg.C




4.25.4 Aggregates
Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete: to be coarse and fine aggregates and filler if required to obtain
the grading for the combined aggregate. Aggregates shall not contain more than 1% gypsum and
shall be free from clay, decomposed material, organic matter and other deleterious substances
which may prevent or detract from proper adhesion of bitumen to the aggregate particles.
Coarse Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete: clean crushed rock or crushed gravel having at least one
mechanically fractured face on 80% of the particles retained on the No. 4 sieve and when tested in
accordance with BS 812 having flakiness and elongation indices within the following prescribed
maximum limits:

                                        Base Course          Wearing Course

        Flakiness Index (FI)                  30                    25

        Elongation Index (EI)                 30                    25

Fine Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete: clean crushed sand or crushed sand blended with natural
sand free from lumps of clay, silt, or other deleterious substances. Sizes of the particles are to
provide the specified graded aggregate when blended with the coarse aggregate. Fine aggregate
may be produced with the coarse aggregate from the same source such that the processing of the
natural deposit yields a combined aggregate that meets the specification.

Mineral Filler for Asphaltic Concrete: Portland cement, rock dust, or other non-plastic mineral
filler from approved deposits. Filler need only be added to the aggregate to secure the specified
grading of the combined aggregate. Mineral filler is to conform to AASHTO M 17. Mineral Filler
shall be added when the combined grading of coarse and fine aggregates is deficient in material
passing 0.075mm (No.200) sieve.




                                                                                                 107
Combined Mineral Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete: when tested according to AASHTO T 11
and AASHTO T 27, is to conform to the following gradings:

                                     Percent Passing (Dry Weight)
        AASHTO Sieve Size            Base Course          Wearing Course

        1"                           100                    100                                      (25.40
        3/4"                         65 - 100               100                                      (19.10
        3/8"                         47 - 72                56 - 80                                  ( 9.52
        No.4                         30 - 56                35 - 56                                  ( 4.76
        No.10                        19 - 36                22 - 36                                  ( 2.00
        No.40                         8 - 20                 8 - 20                                  ( 0.42
        No.200                       2-8                    2-8                                      ( 0.07
Grading limits specified are based on materials of uniform specific gravity and may be adjusted to
compensate for any variations in specific gravity of the individual sizes. Gradings may be varied
on the basis of Marshall Tests to obtain optimum stability and life of the completed bituminous
course mixes.

Combined Mineral Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete: to conform to the following testing
requirements:

        Los Angeles Abrasion after         (AASHTO T 96)        35% maximum
        500 Revolutions

        Soundness (Sodium Sulphate)        (AASHTO T 104)       10% maximum

        Liquid Limit                       (AASHTO T 89)        25% maximum

        Plasticity Index                   (AASHTO T 91)        6% maximum

        Sand Equivalent                    (AASHTO T 176)       50% minimum

        Clay lumps and friable particles   (AASHTO T 112)       1% maximum

Plasticity Index of Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete: to be not greater than 6. Additions or
mixing of low plasticity materials to materials of high plasticity in order to meet these
requirements will not be permitted.

The Bituminous Plant Mix shall be composed of a mixture of aggregates, filler if required, and
bituminous materials. The several aggregate fractions shall be sized, uniformity graded and
combined in such proportions that the resulting mixture meets the gradings requirements of the job




                                                                                               108
mix formula. The job mix formula shall be designed according to the Asphalt Institute Manual
Series MS-2 to meet the mix requirements specified.

4.25.5 Execution

4.25.5.1   General

Distributor Trucks: apply liquid asphalts by approved pressure type trucks with insulated tanks
equipped with the following:

      tachometers
      pressure gauge
      adjustable length spray bars
      separate power unit and pumps on distributing system
      heating coils and burner
      thermometer well and accurate thermometer
      measuring sticks
      quick opening gate in dome.

Distributor Trucks: to have pneumatic tyres of such width and number that the load produced on
the road surface does not exceed 110kg/cm of tyre width.

Heat Materials by retort or steam coils in such a manner that steam will not be introduced directly
into the bituminous material.

Controls: spray bars on the distributor truck are to be controlled by a bootman riding at the rear of
the distributor. Cab-controlled valves will not be permitted.

Uniform Distribution: promptly cut-off distribution when there is a decrease in uniform flow
caused by the distributor tank becoming empty or the machine slowing down or stopping.

Uneven Distribution: in the event of any areas being missed in the application then remedy such
areas as directed by the Supervisor without delay.

Overspray: prevent spraying or splattering to areas outside the line of the roadway by providing
suitable protection.

Unused Bituminous Material: do not dispose of on site unless permitted by the Supervisor.

Use of Finished Pavements: do not permit use of finished pavements until it has been established
that the surface will not be marked or damaged under the action of traffic.



                                                                                                  109
4.25.5.2   Prime Coat

Lightly Blade and Roll the base immediately prior to application of prime coat.

Watering: in extremely dry areas the base is to be lightly watered prior to application of prime
coat.

Atmospheric Temperature: prime coat is to be applied only when atmospheric shade temperature
exceeds 15 deg. C.

Quantity of Bituminous Material in prime coat is to be approved by the Supervisor but is not to be
less than 1.0 Kg/m2 or more than 1.5 Kg/m2.

Roll the surface of the completed prime coat with a pneumatic tyred roller.

4.25.5.3   Tack Coat

Contaminated Surfaces: treat surfaces contaminated by oil, grease, sugar solution or other
chemicals in an approved manner before application of tack coat.

Quantity Of Bituminous Material in tack coat is to be approved by the Supervisor but is not to be
less than 0.25 kg/m2 or more than 0.75 kg/m2 to ensure a minimum residue of bituminous of 300
gm/m2.

Subsequent Covering: apply tack coat only so far in advance of wearing course placement to
obtain proper condition of tackiness.

4.25.5.4   Asphaltic Concrete

Mixing Plant: to be an approved type batch plant of adequate size and capable of producing
asphaltic concrete mixtures within the job mix tolerances. The plant shall conform with the
relevant requirements of AASHTO M 156 and consist of the following basic components:

      cold feed system, either a single reciprocating feeder, or a multiple feeder capable of
       feeding various sizes
      conveyor or elevator to move the cold aggregate into the rotary drier
      dust collector with means for returning the collected mineral dust back into the hot stone
       elevator, if so required.
      hot stone elevator.
      set of screens to make the separation of the aggregate sizes.
      set of hot stone bins for the storage of the various components of the aggregate prior to
       proportioning.


                                                                                               110
      proportioning system using scales or volumetric devices for control.
      mixer pugmill.
      discharge hopper for loading trucks.
      asphalt and fuel storage tanks.

Plant Inspection: the Supervisor is to have access at all times to the mixing plant. Provide ladders
or stairs to facilitate access for the Supervisor to obtain samples, to check the working parts of the
plant or to inspect the screens or screening arrangement.

Grading of the paving aggregate is to be uniform within the specified limits and rejection or
addition of any size or sizes of particles to obtain a satisfactory uniformity is to be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Fines or filler is to be added only where the natural crushed
material is deficient of such sizes.

Job Mix Formula: at least 30 days prior to the commencement of mix production, the Contractor
shall establish under the supervision of the Supervisor, in a laboratory, a Job Mix Formula. The
formula shall specify a combination of mineral aggregates including filler and asphalt cement
content in such proportions as to produce a Job Mix which is within the limits of the specified
gradation and content ranges and which meets the Marshall Test requirements prescribed for each
particular course. It shall also stipulate the mixing temperature at discharge from the mixer which,
unless otherwise directed, shall be 170 deg. C

Job Mix Formula: the participation of the Supervisor in establishing or approving the Job Mix
Formula shall in no way relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for producing mixes
conforming to specified requirements.

Marshall Test procedures shall be used to determine the optimum percentage of asphalt cement to
be incorporated into the mix, taking into consideration the absorption of bitumen into the
aggregates. When compacting specimens the number of hammer blows applied shall be 75 on each
side.

Variations: upon approval of the Job Mix Formula adjust mixing plant to proportion aggregates,
mineral filler and asphalt cement to produce mixes that will not vary by more than the following
percentages from the Job Mix Formula:

        Maximum Variation in
        Percentage Material Passing

        Aggregate (Sieve Size):

            No.4 and larger                  5%



                                                                                                   111
            No.10 through No.200              4%

             No.200                           1.5 %

         Asphalt cement content:              0.3 %

Hauling: the hot asphaltic concrete is to be delivered in haulage trucks at the temperature approved
by the Supervisor. Each truck is to be equipped with a suitable box which is to be lightly sprayed
with a thin coat of oil to prevent the mixture from sticking. Truck box is to contain no dirt or other
foreign materials. Loads which are not satisfactory for any reason whatsoever, including loss of
heat, will be rejected.

Segregation: handle asphaltic concrete at all times to prevent segregation.

Unload the mixed material from the hauling vehicles directly into the paving machine. Trucks are
to be securely attached to the paving machine while dumping. Avoid jarring the machine or
moving it out of alignment.

Surface Temperature: place finishing course only when the temperature of the surface is at least 15
degrees C.

Surface Temperature just prior to dumping from the hauling vehicle is to be at least 115 degrees C.

Contaminated Surfaces: where a bituminous tack coat is not applied prior to paving remove loose
dirt and other harmful matter from the surface by an approved means.

Adjoining Surfaces: apply a light coat of bituminous material as directed to edges or vertical
surfaces against which asphaltic concrete is to be placed.

Base and Sub-Base are to be prepared and maintained smooth, firm and in conformity to the lines,
grades and dimensions established. If necessary, to obtain the required base or sub-base surface
condition, spread and compact asphaltic concrete base course material as directed to fill and level
low areas.

Paving Machines: place all courses by means of approved paving machines.

Laying: spread, compact and screed or strike off in a dense layer and finish with a smooth surface.

Joints: longitudinal joints in each course are to be staggered with the joints in underlying courses.

Joints: longitudinal joints in the final course are to be located at the centre of a lane or at the joint
between two adjacent lanes.


                                                                                                      112
Joints: before placing a surface course against a cold transverse construction joint, trim the cold
material to a vertical face for its full depth.

Joints: material on both sides of the joint is to be dense and the joint is to be well sealed. Surfaces
in the area of the joint are to conform to the requirements for surface tolerances.

Breakdown Rolling is to follow immediately behind the paving machine and completed while the
temperature of the asphaltic concrete will allow compaction with the least amount of effort.

Breakdown Rolling: initial breakdown rolling is to be by pneumatic tyred rollers or the Supervisor
may order the use of tandem power steel rollers operated with the drive wheel in the forward
position.

Breakdown Rolling: keep tyres on steel rollers properly moistened with water by an automatic
spraying system.

Breakdown Rolling is to begin at the low side and progress to the high side by overlapping of
longitudinal trips parallel to the centreline. Final breakdown rolling is to be accomplished by
means of pneumatic tyred rollers.

Finish Rolling is to begin as soon as the stability of the asphaltic concrete will prevent shoving
displacing or cracking during compaction and is to continue until the surface requirements and
tolerances have been met. A tandem power steel roller with water spraying equipment is to be
used unless otherwise designated. When the specified density is not obtained, changes in the size
and/or number of rollers are to be made as corrective measures.

Finish Rolling: rollers are to be operated by competent and experienced roller men and kept in
operation continuously if necessary so that all parts of the pavement will receive substantially
equal compaction at the time desired. The Supervisor will order the mixing plant to cease
operation at any time proper rolling is not being performed.

Density Requirements of the wearing coarse are to be not less than 97% of the Marshall density
obtained in the laboratory. For the base course the requirement is 96%.

Pavement Uniformity finished surfaces of wearing and base courses are to be of uniform thickness
and texture and the thickness is not to vary more than 6 mm from that specified. Surface tolerance
of the courses is not to exceed 6 mm when tested by means of a 4 m straight edge longitudinally
and 3 mm when tested transversely. Any layer with deviation exceeding these limits is to be
corrected or removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.




                                                                                                    113
Testing Requirements: when tested according to Marshall Test Procedures asphaltic concrete is to
conform to the following requirements:

                                                 Base Course        Wearing Course

         Stability at 60 deg. C (kgs)            700 min.           900 min.

         Flow (mm)                               2 min. - 4 max.    2 min. - 4 max.

         Air voids                               4% - 8%            4% - 6%

         Voids in       Mineral      Aggregate   14 min.            14 min.
         (VMA)

Testing Requirements: finished asphaltic concrete is to be tested in place by such standard ASTM
or AASHTO tests as deemed necessary and instructed by the Supervisor. Samples are to be taken
for checking the asphalt content in the mixtures by means of the standard extraction test and for
the gradation of the sample.

Testing Requirements: when directed, cut samples for testing from compacted courses with an
approved saw or 100 mm diameter core drill in the presence of the Supervisor.

4.25.6 Precast Concrete Kerbs, Channels, Edgings and Quadrants

Precast concrete kerbs, channels and edgings shall be hydraulically pressed. Where kerbs or
channels are required to be laid to a radius of 12m or less, components of the appropriate radius
shall be used.

Where relevant all precast kerbs, channels, edging and quadrants shall comply the requirements of
the Highways Authority.

4.26      Roofs

4.26.1 Roof Coverings

Roof coverings shall comply with the following appropriate standard:

       Material/type                                       Standard
       Clay tiles and fittings                             EN 538, EN 1304
       Concrete tiles and fittings                         EN 490 and EN 491
       Fibre cement slates                                 EN 492
       Fibre cement sheets                                 EN 494


                                                                                              114
     Material/type                                     Standard
     Metal roofing – zinc                              EN 501
     Metal roofing – copper                            EN 504
     Metal roofing - Sheet Steel                       EN 505
     Metal roofing – aluminum                          EN 507
     Slate and stone                                   EN 12326


4.26.2 Rainwater Pipes and Gutters

Rainwater pipes, gutters, fixings and accessories shall comply with the following appropriate
standard:

     Material                                    Standard
     Cast iron                                   -
     Aluminum                                    EN 612
     PVC-U                                       EN 607
     Pressed steel                               EN 612



4.26.3 Nuts, Screws, Washers and Bolts

Bolting for pipes and fittings shall comply with EN 1092, part 2, except that spheroidal graphite
iron bolts for use with ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from metal complying
with EN 1563 and EN 1564 for Grade 500/7.

Bolt lengths shall be sufficient to ensure that nuts are fully-threaded tightened in their final
positions.

Stainless steel nuts, screws, washers and bolts shall be manufactured from Grade X5CrNiMo 17-
12-2 steel complying with EN 10088: Part 2.

Where bolting is incompatible with the material being fixed, suitable isolating washers and sleeves
shall be used.

Where stainless steel nuts, bolts and washers are to be used adjacent to galvanized metallic
surfaces other than stainless steel than the surfaces should be isolated with sleeves and washers of
non-conductive material.

Mild steel nuts, screws, washers and bolts shall be hot dip galvanized to EN ISO 1460 unless
otherwise stated in the Contract.




                                                                                                 115
4.26.4 Roofing Materials

4.26.4.1    Mineral Aggregates for Flat Roofs

Mineral aggregates for the reflection of solar heat on flat built-up bitumen or mastic asphalt roofs
shall be light coloured and consist of a hard limestone having a low moisture absorption
characteristic, granite, gravel, calcite flint or feldspar, of 10 mm nominal size.

4.26.4.2    SBS Bitumen

SBS-bitumen may be used in the construction of buildings needed to complete the works. SBS-
bitumen roofing shall be made of minimum 2 layers. Each layer shall be overlapped and bonded
minimum width 100 mm. First layer shall be fixed by mechanical fixings or by hot bitumen bond
according to base material. Second layer shall be fixed by flame welding 100 % of area. Top layer
shall be equipped with granulite chipping on top, also in cases of protective granulite layer on the
roof.




4.26.4.3    Trapezoidal aluminum panel roofing

Support system may consist of beams, rafters, and purlins in wood, steel or aluminum.

Min. recommended slope 3:12.

Roofing panels are normally mechanically fastened to support frame.

Fastening always made through upper portion of corrugation, washers and gaskets required.

Mastic or other sealant may also be required at side and laps.

Expansion joint requirements depend on the material used.


4.26.5 Guarantee on roofing work

The roof shall be carefully inspected when ready. Roofs with inside water outlet shall be water
tested with minimum 150 mm water near gullies.

4.27       Security Fencing

All fencing materials shall be hot-dip galvanized. Fencing shall be topped with three (3) lines of
barbed wire unless otherwise shown. Fencing shall be 1.8 m high unless otherwise shown



                                                                                                 116
Fabric shall be 65 mm "diamond type" wire.

Fabric ties shall be galvanized steel wire, spaced 0.35 m apart on posts and 0.61 m apart on rails.
Aluminum ties will not be permitted. A continuous galvanized steel wire shall be interlaced with
the fabric along the extreme bottom of the fence and shall be pulled taut.

Posts and rails shall be manufactured from galvanized steel pipe.

Barbed wire shall be 2-strand, 4 point galvanized steel wire with barbs spaced on 13 cm on
centers.

Nuts, bolts and screws shall be of galvanized steel minimum size 9.5 mm.

Swing gate frames, if any, shall be constructed of pipe at least as heavy as the top rails for the
fence and shall be fabricated by welding. Each gate lead shall be provided with at least one
diagonal brace. Frames shall be galvanized after fabrication. Galvanized malleable iron fittings for
latching the gate shall be provided. Fabric shall match the fabric used in fence. Each pair of gates
shall be provided with a heavy drop rod latch assembly with a locking device for a padlock.

4.28     Suspended Ceilings


4.28.1 Scope:


 This section covers furnishing all labor, equipment, plant, supplies and materials and in
performing all operations for the construction of suspended ceiling systems and suspension
systems, including main runners, cross tees, perimeter trims, bandrasters, main runner splices,
leveling hangers, wall molding and miscellaneous accessories where required for support of metal
suspension systems or reception of mechanical fasteners.


4.28.2 General:


Suspended ceiling systems shall be installed where indicated on the drawings. Suspended ceiling
systems shall conform to the requirements specified in Materials part.

4.28.3 Submittals:

Samples: Samples of all materials, including gypsum board, metal panels and suspension systems
shall be submitted for approval prior to shipment to the site.

4.28.4 Materials:



                                                                                                 117
The suspended ceiling system indicated on the contact drawings shall be comprised of the
following:

Gypsum Board: Gypsum board suspended ceiling system shall be provided at areas indicated on
the contract drawings. Suspended ceiling shall be of 12.5 mm thick gypsum board paneling
complete with concealed type galvanized steel suspension grid of 60x60 cm, galvanized steel
hanger rods, fasteners and all other applicable accessories. All supporting grid and suspension
members shall be standard products of the manufacturer. For the detailed description of gypsum
board suspended ceilings please refer to 4.16.

Mineral tiles (rock wool): Mineral tile suspended ceiling system shall be provided at areas
indicated on the contract drawings.

The contractor shall be fully responsible for providing a rigid suspension system located and
adjusted to heights according to the requirements of the design.

Perforated Metal Boards: Metal suspended ceiling shall be provided at areas indicated on the
contract drawings. The suspended ceiling tiles shall be 60x60 cm and 30x30 cm in size as and
produced from galvanized steel or aluminum. They shall be perforated type with Pattern E (2.5
mm diameter holes on a 5.5 x 5.5 mm grid with 16% open area), have square edge details and
shall be metallic gray (RAL 9006) in color. Boards shall be lined with 0.05 mm black acoustic
fleece for sound absorption. The suspension system shall be the „lay-in‟ suspension system as
described below.

Suspension system: The system shall be regular exposed „lay-in‟ type to allow for simple and easy
access to the plenum. The Lay-in type suspension system shall be comprised of 24 mm wide main
runners, 24 mm wide cross tees, perimeter trims and all necessary suspension accessories. Main
runners spaced at 1200 mm centers shall be securely fixed to the structural soffit by approved
hangers. The last hanger at the end of each main runner should not be greater than 450 mm from
the adjacent wall.


4.28.5 Installation:

The suspended ceiling system shall be installed by the Contractor thoroughly experienced in
ceiling systems. The system shall be installed in accordance with the drawings and the
manufacturer‟s recommendations and technical instructions. The contractor shall be responsible
for ensuring that the suspended ceiling is level and true. Installation shall be in strict accordance
with installation requirements of the ceiling manufacturer. A copy of the installation procedures, in
English, shall be submitted for approval prior to the installation of the suspended ceiling system.
The installation procedures shall include details of installation of light fixtures and/or registers that
are recessed within the ceiling system. The Contractor shall have all required licenses for



                                                                                                      118
construction of similar or equivalent type of suspension ceiling systems. The Contractor shall
coordinate the installation of the suspended ceiling system with the installation of other work. For
the detailed suspended ceiling installation please refer to 4.16.

4.28.6 Cleaning:

Following erection, soiled and discolored surfaces of panels shall be cleaned and left free from
defects. Units that are damaged or improperly applied shall be removed and replaced at no cost.
                                           Room book

Room no:       Room name         Floor          Skirting       Wall           Ceiling
                                 material       Material       material       maternal
A block, main building
                                                                              Gypsum -
                                 Granite        Granite        Plastic paint- metal
G 01           Entrance hall
                                 ceramic        ceramic        glass          suspended
                                                                              ceiling
                                                                              Gypsum -
                                 Granite        Granite                       metal
G 02           Foyer                                           Plastic paint
                                 ceramic        ceramic                       suspended
                                                                              ceiling
                                                               Wooden         Acoustical
G 03           Meeting room      Carpet         Wooden         acoustical     suspended
                                                               panel          ceiling
                                                                              Gypsum -
               Official paper
                                                                              metal
G 04           registration   Pvc               Pvc            Plastic paint
                                                                              suspended
               archive
                                                                              ceiling
                                                                              Gypsum -
               Documents                                                      metal
G 05                             Pvc            Pvc            Plastic paint
               receiving                                                      suspended
                                                                              ceiling
                                                                              Gypsum -
                                                                              metal
G 06           Call center       Pvc            Pvc            Plastic paint
                                                                              suspended
                                                                              ceiling
                                                                              Gypsum -
                                                                              metal
G 07           Storage           Ceramic                       Ceramic
                                                                              suspended
                                                                              ceiling
               Sample                                          Ceramic-       Gypsum -
G 08                             Ceramic        Ceramic
               register-                                       plastic paint metal


                                                                                                 119
       distribution                                                suspended
                                                                   ceiling
                                                                   Gypsum -
       Cold storage                                                metal
G 09                Ceramic           Ceramic      Plastic paint
       (+4°c)                                                      suspended
                                                                   ceiling
                                                                   Gypsum -
       Cold storage (-                                             metal
G 10                   Ceramic        Ceramic      Plastic paint
       20°c)                                                       suspended
                                                                   ceiling
                                                                   Gypsum -
       Cleaning
                                                                   metal
G 11   material          Ceramic      Ceramic      Plastic paint
                                                                   suspended
       storage
                                                                   ceiling
                                                                   Gypsum -
       Female
                                                                   metal
G 12   cleaning    staff Ceramic                   Ceramic
                                                                   suspended
       dressing
                                                                   ceiling
                                                                   Gypsum -
       Male cleaning                                               metal
G 13                  Ceramic                      Ceramic
       staff dressing                                              suspended
                                                                   ceiling
                                                                   30*30 metal
       Handicapped
G 14                     Ceramic                   Ceramic         suspended
       wc
                                                                   ceiling
                                                                   Gypsum -
                         Granite      Granite                      metal
G 15   Corridor                                    Plastic paint
                         ceramic      ceramic                      suspended
                                                                   ceiling
                                                                   30*30 metal
G 16   Male wc           Ceramic      Ceramic      Ceramic         suspended
                                                                   ceiling
                                                                   30*30 metal
G 17   Female wc         Ceramic      Ceramic      Ceramic         suspended
                                                                   ceiling
                                                                   Gypsum -
       Chemicals         Ceramic      Ceramic                      metal
G 18                                               Plastic paint
       storage           (antiacid)   (antiacid)                   suspended
                                                                   ceiling
       Storage     after Ceramic      Ceramic                      Gypsum -
G 19                                               Plastic paint
       analysis          (antiacid)   (antiacid)                   metal



                                                                                 120
                                                                      suspended
                                                                      ceiling
                                                                      Gypsum -
       Sample
                                                                      metal
G 20   receiving-           Ceramic      Ceramic      Plastic paint
                                                                      suspended
       payment
                                                                      ceiling
                                                                      Gypsum -
       Entrance hall- Granite            Granite                      metal
G 21                                                  Plastic paint
       waiting        ceramic            ceramic                      suspended
                                                                      ceiling
                                                                      Gypsum -
                                                                      metal
G 22   Office               Pvc          Pvc          Plastic paint
                                                                      suspended
                                                                      ceiling
                                                                      Gypsum -
                                                                      metal
G 23   Office               Pvc          Pvc          Plastic paint
                                                                      suspended
                                                                      ceiling
                                                                      Gypsum -
       Chemicals            Ceramic      Ceramic                      metal
G 24                                                  Plastic paint
       storage              (antiacid)   (antiacid)                   suspended
                                                                      ceiling
                                                                      Gypsum -
       General                                                        metal
G 25                        Ceramic      Ceramic      Ceramic
       washing                                                        suspended
                                                                      ceiling
                                                                      Gypsum -
                                                                      metal
G 26   Electrical room Ceramic           Ceramic      Plastic paint
                                                                      suspended
                                                                      ceiling
                                                                      Gypsum -
                            Granite      Granite                      metal
G 27   Hall                                           Plastic paint
                            ceramic      ceramic                      suspended
                                                                      ceiling
                                                                      30*30 metal
       Female       staff
G 28                        Ceramic                   Ceramic         suspended
       wc
                                                                      ceiling
                                                                      30*30 metal
G 29   Cleaning room Ceramic                          Ceramic         suspended
                                                                      ceiling
G 30   Male staff wc        Ceramic                   Ceramic         30*30 metal



                                                                                    121
                                                                suspended
                                                                ceiling
                                                                Gypsum -
                        Floating
                                                                metal
G 31   Calibration      floor    with Pvc      Plastic paint
                                                                suspended
                        pvc
                                                                ceiling
                                                                Gypsum -
                                                                metal
G 32   Support          Ceramic      Ceramic   Plastic paint
                                                                suspended
                                                                ceiling
                                               Plastic paint    Gypsum with
G 33   Revelation       Pvc          Pvc       (antibacterial   plastic paint
                                               )                (antibacterial)
                                               Plastic paint    Gypsum with
G 34   Real time PCR Pvc             Pvc       (antibacterial   plastic paint
                                               )                (antibacterial)
                                                                Gypsum with
       Molecular                               Plastic paint
                                                                plastic paint
G 35   biology    lab Pvc            Pvc       (antibacterial
                                                                (antibacterial)
       chief room                              )

       Molecular                               Plastic paint  Gypsum with
G 36   biology   lab Pvc             Pvc       (antibacterial plastic paint
       office                                  )              (antibacterial)
                                               Plastic paint  Gypsum with
       Microbiology
G 37                    Pvc          Pvc       (antibacterial plastic paint
       lab office
                                               )              (antibacterial)
                                               Plastic paint  Gypsum with
       Microbiology
G 38                    Pvc          Pvc       (antibacterial plastic paint
       lab chief room
                                               )              (antibacterial)
                                               Plastic paint  Gypsum with
       Dirty-washing
G 39                    Pvc          Pvc       (antibacterial plastic paint
       room
                                               )              (antibacterial)
                                               Plastic paint  Gypsum with
       Reading-
G 40                    Pvc          Pvc       (antibacterial plastic paint
       confirmation
                                               )              (antibacterial)
                                                              Gypsum with
                                               Plastic paint
       Incubation                                             plastic paint
G 41                    Pvc          Pvc       (antibacterial
       room                                                   (antibacterial)
                                               )

                                               Plastic paint Gypsum with
G 42   Pathogen         Pvc          Pvc
                                               (antibacterial plastic paint



                                                                                  122
                                       )                (antibacterial)




G 43   Inoculation                     Plastic paint    Gypsum with
       room                Pvc   Pvc   (antibacterial   plastic paint
                                       )                (antibacterial)
                                       Plastic paint    Gypsum with
       Sample
G 44                       Pvc   Pvc   (antibacterial   plastic paint
       preparation
                                       )                (antibacterial)
                                       Plastic paint    Gypsum with
       Preparation of
G 45                  Pvc        Pvc   (antibacterial   plastic paint
       culture media
                                       )                (antibacterial)
                                       Plastic paint    Gypsum with
G 46   Pre-preparation Pvc       Pvc   (antibacterial   plastic paint
                                       )                (antibacterial)
                                       Plastic paint    Gypsum with
       Storage      of
G 47                   Pvc       Pvc   (antibacterial   plastic paint
       culture media
                                       )                (antibacterial)
                                       Plastic paint    Gypsum with
       Reference
G 48                       Pvc   Pvc   (antibacterial   plastic paint
       strains culture
                                       )                (antibacterial)
                                       Plastic paint    Gypsum with
       Homogenizatio
G 49                 Pvc         Pvc   (antibacterial   plastic paint
       n
                                       )                (antibacterial)
                                       Plastic paint    Gypsum with
       Extraction    of
G 50                       Pvc   Pvc   (antibacterial   plastic paint
       DNA
                                       )                (antibacterial)
                                       Plastic paint    Gypsum with
G 51   Master mix          Pvc   Pvc   (antibacterial   plastic paint
                                       )                (antibacterial)
                                       Plastic paint    Gypsum with
G 52   Amplification       Pvc   Pvc   (antibacterial   plastic paint
                                       )                (antibacterial)
                                                        Gypsum -
       Residue       lab                                metal
G 53                       Pvc   Pvc   Plastic paint
       office                                           suspended
                                                        ceiling
                                                        Gypsum -
       Toxins        lab
G 54                       Pvc   Pvc   Plastic paint    metal
       office
                                                        suspended



                                                                          123
                                                           ceiling
                                                           Gypsum -
       Toxins     lab                                      metal
G 55                    Pvc          Pvc   Plastic paint
       office                                              suspended
                                                           ceiling
                                                           Gypsum -
                                                           metal
       Residue    lab
G 56                    Pvc          Pvc   Plastic paint   suspended
       office
                                                           ceiling

       Residue   lab                                       Gypsum -
       (gas)                                               metal
G 57                 Pvc             Pvc   Plastic paint
       equipment                                           suspended
       room                                                ceiling
       Residue   lab                                       Gypsum -
       (liquid)                                            metal
G 58                 Pvc             Pvc   Plastic paint
       equipment                                           suspended
       room                                                ceiling
                                                           Gypsum -
       Toxins    lab
                                                           metal
G 59   equipment     Pvc             Pvc   Plastic paint
                                                           suspended
       room
                                                           ceiling
       Packaging lab                                       Gypsum -
       sample prep- Ceramic                Ceramic         metal
G 60
       extraction    (antiacid)            (antiacid)      suspended
       room                                                ceiling
                                                           Gypsum -
       Packaging lab Ceramic               Ceramic         metal
G 61
       weighing room (antiacid)            (antiacid)      suspended
                                                           ceiling
       Packaging lab                                       Gypsum -
       sample prep-     Ceramic            Ceramic         metal
G 62
       extraction       (antiacid)         (antiacid)      suspended
       room                                                ceiling
       Packaging lab
                                                           Gypsum -
       (thermal
                                                           metal
G 63   analyzer)        Pvc          Pvc   Plastic paint
                                                           suspended
       equipment
                                                           ceiling
       room
       Packaging lab                                       Gypsum -
G 64                    Pvc          Pvc   Plastic paint
       (chromatograp                                       metal



                                                                       124
       hy) Equipment                                         suspended
       room                                                  ceiling
       Mineral                                               Gypsum -
       matters     lab    Ceramic            Ceramic         metal
G 65
       extraction         (antiacid)         (antiacid)      suspended
       room                                                  ceiling
       Mineral
       matters     lab
                                                             Gypsum -
       sample
                          Ceramic            Ceramic         metal
G 66   preparation
                          (antiacid)         (antiacid)      suspended
       room
                                                             ceiling


       Mineral                                               Gypsum -
       matters   lab                                         metal
G 67                 Pvc               Pvc   Plastic paint
       equipment                                             suspended
       room                                                  ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
       Mineral
                                                             metal
G 68   matters    lab Pvc              Pvc   Plastic paint
                                                             suspended
       chief room
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
       Mineral                                               metal
G 69   matters      lab Pvc            Pvc   Plastic paint   suspended
       office                                                ceiling

                                                             Gypsum -
       Packaging lab                                         metal
G 70                 Pvc               Pvc   Plastic paint
       office                                                suspended
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
       Packaging lab                                         metal
G 71                 Pvc               Pvc   Plastic paint
       office                                                suspended
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
       Toxins       lab
                          Ceramic            Ceramic         metal
G 72   extraction
                          (antiacid)         (antiacid)      suspended
       room
                                                             ceiling
       Toxins      lab                                       Gypsum -
                       Ceramic               Ceramic
G 73   sample                                                metal
                       (antiacid)            (antiacid)
       preparation                                           suspended



                                                                         125
       room                                               ceiling



       Residue    lab                                     Gypsum -
       sample prep- Ceramic               Ceramic         metal
G 74
       extraction     (antiacid)          (antiacid)      suspended
       room                                               ceiling
                                                          Gypsum -
       Residue     lab                                    metal
       standard        Ceramic            Ceramic         suspended
G 75
       preparation     (antiacid)         (antiacid)      ceiling
       room

                                                          Gypsum -
       Origin/adultera                                    metal
G 76                   Pvc          Pvc   Plastic paint
       tion lab office                                    suspended
                                                          ceiling
                                                          Gypsum -
       Irradiation lab                                    metal
G 77                   Pvc          Pvc   Plastic paint
       office                                             suspended
                                                          ceiling
                                                          Gypsum -
       Chemical
                                                          metal
G 78   analysis    lab Pvc          Pvc   Plastic paint
                                                          suspended
       office
                                                          ceiling
                                                          Gypsum -
       Chemical
                                                          metal
G 79   analysis    lab Pvc          Pvc   Plastic paint
                                                          suspended
       office
                                                          ceiling
                                                          Gypsum -
       Report edition                                     metal
G 80                  Pvc           Pvc   Plastic paint
       office                                             suspended
                                                          ceiling
                                                          Gypsum -
                                                          metal
G 81   Office          Pvc          Pvc   Plastic paint
                                                          suspended
                                                          ceiling
       Chemical
       analysis  lab Ceramic              Ceramic         Gypsum -
G 82
       glass material (antiacid)          (antiacid)      metal
       storage                                            suspended



                                                                      126
                                                              ceiling

       Chemical
                                                              Gypsum -
       analysis     lab
                           Ceramic            Ceramic         metal
G 83   wet digestion
                           (antiacid)         (antiacid)      suspended
       room          for
                                                              ceiling
       protein
       Origin
                                                              Gypsum -
       /adulteration
                           Ceramic            Ceramic         metal
G 84   lab
                           (antiacid)         (antiacid)      suspended
       (electrophoresi
                                                              ceiling
       s-Elisa)
                                                              Gypsum -
       Additives lab
                      Ceramic                 Ceramic         metal
G 85   SNIF/Rextracti
                      (antiacid)              (antiacid)      suspended
       on room
                                                              ceiling
                                                              Gypsum -
       Additives    lab                                       metal
G 86                       Pvc          Pvc   Plastic paint
       office                                                 suspended
                                                              ceiling
                                                              Gypsum -
       Additives lab                                          metal
G 87                 Pvc                Pvc   Plastic paint
       chief room                                             suspended
                                                              ceiling
                                                              Gypsum -
       Additives    lab
                           Ceramic            Ceramic         metal
G 88   GS/IRMS
                           (antiacid)         (antiacid)      suspended
       room
                                                              ceiling
                                                              Gypsum -
       Additives lab
                                                              metal
G 89   equipment     Pvc                Pvc   Plastic paint
                                                              suspended
       room
                                                              ceiling
                                                              Acoustical
G 90   Stage               Wooden             Plastic paint   suspended
                                                              ceiling
       Additives lab                                          Gypsum -
       sample prep- Ceramic                   Ceramic         metal
G 91
       extraction    (antiacid)               (antiacid)      suspended
       room                                                   ceiling
                     Ceramic                  Ceramic         Gypsum -
G 92
       Additives lab (antiacid)               (antiacid)      metal



                                                                           127
        SNIF/NMR                                                 suspended
        room                                                     ceiling

        Chemical                                                 Gypsum -
        analysis   lab Ceramic                  Ceramic          metal
G 93
        sample prep- (antiacid)                 (antiacid)       suspended
        extraction                                               ceiling
        room
        Chemical                                                 Gypsum -
        analysis   lab                                           metal
G 94                   Pvc            Pvc       Plastic paint
        equipment                                                suspended
        room                                                     ceiling
                                                                 Gypsum -
        Irradiation lab
                                                                 metal
G 95    equipment       Pvc           Pvc       Plastic paint
                                                                 suspended
        room
                                                                 ceiling
        Proficiency                                              Gypsum -
        testing sample   Ceramic                Ceramic          metal
G 96
        preparation      (antiacid)             (antiacid)       suspended
        room                                                     ceiling
        Proficiency                                              Gypsum -
        testing sample   Ceramic                Ceramic          metal
G 97
        preparation      (antiacid)             (antiacid)       suspended
        room                                                     ceiling
                                                                 Gypsum -
                                                                 metal
G 98
        Corridor         Ceramic      Ceramic   Plastic paint    suspended
                                                                 ceiling
                                                                 Gypsum -
                         Granite      Granite                    metal
G 99    Main corridor                           Plastic paint
                         ceramic      ceramic                    suspended
                                                                 ceiling
                                                                 Gypsum -
                         Granite      Granite                    metal
G 100   Lab corridor                            Plastic paint
                         ceramic      ceramic                    suspended
                                                                 ceiling
                                                Plastic paint    Gypsum with
G 101   SAS              Pvc          Pvc       (antibacterial   plastic paint
                                                )                (antibacterial)
        Molecular                               Plastic paint    Gypsum with
G 102                 Pvc             Pvc
        biology   lab                           (antibacterial   plastic paint



                                                                                   128
        corridor                                   )                (antibacterial)
                                                   Plastic paint    Gypsum with
        Microbiology
G 103                    Pvc          Pvc          (antibacterial   plastic paint
        lab corridor
                                                   )                (antibacterial)
                                                                    Gypsum -
        Residue    lab                                              metal
G 104                  Pvc            Pvc          Plastic paint
        chief room                                                  suspended
                                                                    ceiling
                                                                    Gypsum -
        Toxins     lab                                              metal
G 105                  Pvc            Pvc          Plastic paint
        chief room                                                  suspended
                                                                    ceiling
                                                                    Gypsum -
        Packaging lab                                               metal
G 106                 Pvc             Pvc          Plastic paint
        chief room                                                  suspended
                                                                    ceiling
                                                                    Gypsum -
        Chemical
                                                                    metal
G 107   analysis   lab Pvc            Pvc          Plastic paint
                                                                    suspended
        chief room
                                                                    ceiling
                                                                    Gypsum -
                         Granite      Granite                       metal
G 108   Vestibule                                  Plastic paint
                         ceramic      ceramic                       suspended
                                                                    ceiling
                                                                    Gypsum -
                                                                    metal
G 109   Corridor         Ceramic      Ceramic      Plastic paint
                                                                    suspended
                                                                    ceiling
                                                                    Gypsum -
                         Granite      Granite                       metal
G 110   Information                                Plastic paint
                         ceramic      ceramic                       suspended
                                                                    ceiling
                                                                    Gypsum -
                                                                    metal
G 111   Fire exit hall   Travertine   Travertine   Plastic paint
                                                                    suspended
                                                                    ceiling
                                                                    Gypsum -
                                                                    metal
G 112   Fire exit hall   Travertine   Travertine   Plastic paint    suspended
                                                                    ceiling
G 113   Service          Granite      Granite      Plastic paint    Gypsum -



                                                                                      129
                                 ceramic   ceramic                   metal
                                                                     suspended
                                                                     ceiling
                                                                     Gypsum -
              Cafeteria/loung Granite      Granite                   metal
G 114                                                Plastic paint
              e               ceramic      ceramic                   suspended
                                                                     ceiling



Fırst floor
                                                                     Gypsum -
                                                                     metal
1 01          Statistic office   Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
                                                                     suspended
                                                                     ceiling
                                                                     Gypsum -
              Risk                                                   metal
1 02                             Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
              assessment                                             suspended
                                                                     ceiling
              Chief        of
              workers-office                                         Gypsum -
              in charge of                                           metal
1 03                          Pvc          Pvc       Plastic paint
              stock        or                                        suspended
              movable                                                ceiling
              property
                                                                     Gypsum -
                                                                     metal
1 04          First aid room     Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
                                                                     suspended
                                                                     ceiling
                                                                     Gypsum -
                                                                     metal
1 05          Office             Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
                                                                     suspended
                                                                     ceiling
                                                                     Gypsum -
                                                                     metal
1 06          Personnel unit     Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
                                                                     suspended
                                                                     ceiling
                                                                     Gypsum -
              Accounting                                             metal
1 07                             Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
              chief room                                             suspended
                                                                     ceiling
1 08          Accounting         Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint   Gypsum -



                                                                                 130
       office                                                metal
                                                             suspended
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
                                                             metal
1 09   Secretary         Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
                                                             suspended
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
                                                             metal
1 10   Director room     Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
                                                             suspended
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
       Deputy                                                metal
1 11                     Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
       director room                                         suspended
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
       Deputy                                                metal
1 12                     Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
       director room                                         suspended
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
       Quality                                               metal
1 13                     Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
       management                                            suspended
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
       Storage      of
                                                             metal
1 14   writing           Pvc       Pvc       Plastic paint
                                                             suspended
       materials
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
                                                             metal
1 15   Archive           Ceramic   Ceramic   Plastic paint   suspended
                                                             ceiling

                                                             Gypsum -
                                                             metal
1 16   Library           Carpet    Wooden    Plastic paint
                                                             suspended
                                                             ceiling
                                                             Gypsum -
                                                             metal
1 17   Meeting room      Carpet    Wooden    Plastic paint
                                                             suspended
                                                             ceiling
1 18   Technical         Ceramic             Ceramic         Plastic paint



                                                                             131
              room
                                                                             30*30 metal
1 19          Male wc            Ceramic                     Ceramic         suspended
                                                                             ceiling
                                                                             30*30 metal
1 20          Female wc          Ceramic                     Ceramic         suspended
                                                                             ceiling
1 21          Terrace            Ceramic      Ceramic        Acrylic paint
                                                                             Gypsum -
                                                                             metal
1 22          Fire stairs hall   Travertine   Travertine     Plastic paint
                                                                             suspended
                                                                             ceiling
                                                                             Gypsum -
                                 Granite      Granite                        metal
1 23          Floor hall                                     Plastic paint
                                 ceramic      ceramic                        suspended
                                                                             ceiling
                                                                             Gypsum -
                                                                             metal
1 24          Fire stairs hall   Travertine   Travertine     Plastic paint
                                                                             suspended
                                                                             ceiling
1 25          Terrace            Ceramic      Ceramic        Acrylic paint
                                                                             Gypsum -
                                                                             metal
1 26          Electrical room Ceramic         Ceramic        Plastic paint
                                                                             suspended
                                                                             ceiling
B block, technical building
G 01          Gas storage        Ceramic      Ceramic        Plastic paint   Plastic paint
G 02          Hall               Ceramic      Ceramic        Plastic paint   Plastic paint
G 03          Pressure tank      Ceramic      Ceramic        Plastic paint   Plastic paint
G 04          Water storage      Screed                      Screed          Plastic paint
              Fire      water
G 05                             Screed                      Screed          Plastic paint
              storage
C block, building entrance
                                 Granite      Granite
G 01          Control room                                   Plastic paint   Plastic paint
                                 ceramic      ceramic
G 02          Wc                 Ceramic                     Ceramic         Plastic paint
D block, building entrance
                                 Granite      Granite
G 01          Control room                                   Plastic paint   Plastic paint
                                 ceramic      ceramic
G 02          Wc                 Ceramic                      Ceramic        Plastic paint
Staircases                                                 (* building entrance staircase)



                                                                                             132
                                                                  Gypsum -
                                                                  metal
S1   Main staircase     Granite      Granite      Plastic paint
                                                                  suspended
                                                                  ceiling
                                                                  Gypsum -
                                                                  metal
S2   Fire staircase     Travertine   Travertine   Plastic paint
                                                                  suspended
                                                                  ceiling
     Main entrance
S3                      Granite      Granite      Plastic paint
     staircase
     Sample
S4   entrance           Granite      Granite      Plastic paint
     staircase
     Service
S5   entrance           Granite      Granite
     staircase
     Fire        exit
S6                      Granite      Granite
     staircase
     Technical
S7   building           Travertine   Travertine   Plastic paint
     staircase
S8   Technical *        Travertine   Travertine   Plastic p.




                                                                              133
                         Technical specifications For Infrastructural works


4.29 EARTH WORKS

4.29.1 General

4.29.1.1 Works Included
         Earth Works as specified hereunder shall include the location of underground structures,
         the preparation of the site including protective fencing, excavation including strutting,
         sheeting, bracing and protection of slopes, trimming, disposal of excavated materials off
         site, backfilling including delivery of backfill material and site clearance including
         disposal of surplus material.

4.29.1.2 Classification of Soils
         The following terms shall apply to Specification Clauses in which reference is made to the
         excavated materials;
         Topsoil     means any surface material suitable for use in soiling areas to be grassed or
                     cultivated.
         Rock        is defined as material occurring in solid unweathered banks or layers which, in
                     the opinion of the Supervisor, can only be removed by blasting, percussion
                     drilling, wedging or splitting. Boulders exceeding 1 m3 in volume shall be
                     classified as "rock".
         Subsoil     any material other than topsoil and rock shall be classified as "subsoil'.

4.29.1.3 Excavation Methods
         Trench Excavation                      means excavation, to levels and limits specified on
                                        drawings or otherwise, of trenches in which pipes or the like
                                        are to be laid.

4.29.1.4 Backfill Materials
         The following terms shall apply to Specification Clauses in which reference is made to
         backfilling of excavations:
         Unsuitable Material            means material not suitable for backfilling including
                                        materials from swamps, organic and perishable materials,
                                        clay and soils with high placidity indices such as liquid limit
                                        (LL) > 80 and plasticity index (PI) > 55.
         Rock Fill                             shall consist of hard unweathered material of suitable
                                        size for deposition and compaction and may comprise broken
                                        stone, hard brick, concrete or other comparably hard inert
                                        material.
         Selected Fill                  for backfilling trenches and foundations shall comprise
                                        uniform readily compactable material free from roots,
                                        vegetable matter, building rubbish and clay lumps.




                                                                                                   134
4.29.1.5 Location and Protection of Underground Utilities
        The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and protecting all underground structures
        and utilities. He shall proceed with caution in all excavation so that the exact location of
        underground structures and utilities, both known and unknown, maybe determined and he
        shall be held responsible and to pay for the repair of such structures when broken or
        otherwise damaged.
        When removal, relocation or reconstruction of any cables, pipes or any other services
        whatsoever is necessary for the pursuit of the Contract, the Contractor shall notify the
        Supervisor in writing. All work in connection with the removal or re-setting of these or
        any services shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own expense and under the
        supervision of the concerned authorities.

4.29.1.6 Safety in Working
        The Contractor shall have particular regard to the safety of persons and livestock and shall
        ensure that all-open excavations, access routes and steep or loose slopes arising from
        Contractor's operation are adequately fenced and protected.
        The Contractor will be held responsible for all necessary safety measures during the
        duration of the Contract and shall strictly follow the safety regulations in order to prevent
        accidents. Proper strutting, sheeting and bracing, protection of slopes, methods of
        excavation to reduce risks of slides, etc. shall be deemed to be included in the rates and
        prices entered in the schedule of prices. In the event of soil slides occurring during earth
        work, all damage and making good of works will be at the expense of the Contractor.
        If there is an intensive human existence around the working area safety barriers and
        portable bridges (for crossing purposes) shall be located along and over ditches to prevent
        any accident or injury.

4.29.1.7 Working in Public Roads
        Notwithstanding requirements stated elsewhere in the Specification, the Contractor shall
        comply with the additional requirements contained in this Clause whenever carrying out
        any earth works or pipe-laying in or adjacent to public roads:
         The Contractor shall carry out any work in or adjacent to public roads in a manner
          approved by the Supervisor and the competent authorities and only at such times and
          during such hours as may be agreed by the competent authorities.

         At no time, the Contractor shall commence work in or adjacent to public roads without
          the prior approval of the Supervisor.

         The Contractor shall arrange his work in or adjacent to public roads in such a way that
          at no time the length of road restricted by his operations exceeds 50 -100 m.

         The Contractor shall, when working in or adjacent to public roads, cause the least
          interference possible to the flow of traffic and shall at all times maintain unimpeded
          sufficient width of the carriageway to permit single lane traffic, wherever possible.

        The Contractor shall control the flow of traffic and protect excavations as required to
        ensure appropriate traffic arrangements and the safety of workmen, the public in general
        and the users of public roads.



                                                                                                 135
4.29.2 Excavation


4.29.2.1 Excavation Method
        The Contractor shall examine the site and familiarize himself with the nature of ground,
        the excavation methods to be applied and physical obstructions that may affect the work.
        The use of explosives will not be permitted.
        The Contractor shall not execute any excavation without having the Supervisor's prior
        approval to the methods which he proposes to employ. He shall not modify such methods
        thereafter without the Supervisor's consent.

4.29.2.2 Trench Excavation
        Trench excavations for pipes and interconnections shall be open-cut trenches with
        minimum width, as defined below. All pipes, sewers and cables shall be laid in trenches
        excavated in undisturbed soil.
        The trench shall be excavated to such depths as necessary to permit placing pipe bedding
        material or concrete encasement as required and to allow the pipe to be laid at the required
        elevations, slopes and depths. Trench bottoms shall be cleared of projections such as
        rocks, stones, roots and the like.
        The width of the trenches shall be sufficient to permit the pipes to be laid and jointed
        properly and to place and compact the backfill as specified. The minimum trench width
        shall be 40 cm for cable trenches and 50 cm for all kind of pipes less than 100 mm
        diameter. The minimum trench width for Dl, HDPE and PVC pipes shall be equivalent to
        the internal diameter + 40 cm and for concrete sewers 4/3 of the internal diameter + 40
        cm. The maximum width of a trench should not exceed the outside diameter of the pipe +
        60 cm.
        Trenches for all kinds of pipes shall be excavated to 150 mm below the bottom of the pipe
        to accommodate for adequate bedding. Trenches for sewers shall be excavated to the level
        specified in the Drawings; water supply pipes shall be executed for a minimum cover of
        0.8 m; trenches for cables shall be executed as step trenches or as open cut trenches with a
        minimum depth of 0.8 m.
        The prices quoted for trench excavation shall be fully inclusive and contain all incidental
        works as:
         Excavation of any type of ground including rock, whether this excavation has to be
          made by hand or by machine;

         Excavation below ground water level irrespective of depth;

         Over excavation, if ordered by the Supervisor, and making good the same;

         Demolition of existing surfaces and underground structures, where required;

         Location, maintaining and reinstatement of existing services and ditches, where
          required;

         Temporary diversions of the existing ditches and pipelines and their realignment,
          backfilling and reinstatement;


                                                                                                136
         Extra excavation for joint holes, fittings, thrust blocks, manholes, encasements, etc.;

         Sheeting and piling of trenches, respectively bracing and protection of slopes;

         Leveling, trimming and consolidating the bottom of the trench;

         Keeping of trenches free from water and maintenance of flow during construction;

         Additional excavation to accommodate temporary supports and all working space to
          carry out the work;

         Disposal of excavated material whether it shall be reused for backfilling or removed as
          surplus including formation of all temporary spoil heaps and all double handling
          necessary;

         All additional measures necessary to ensure that the dug made to the correct line and
          level and maintained in a safe and workmanlike manner.

4.29.2.3 Keeping Excavations Free from Water
        The Contractor shall keep all excavations free from water and sewage, whether caused by
        floods, storms or otherwise, so as to construct the works in dry conditions.
        The Contractor shall keep infiltrating or accumulated water at a level lower than the
        bottom of the permanent work for such a period as required by the provisions of the
        Specification and the Contractor's method of construction.
        The mode of drainage proposed by the Contractor is subject to the approval of the
        Supervisor. Any sub-drainage below the permanent works shall, if left in place, be sealed
        with concrete or other approved material. Sub-drains underneath permanent concrete
        structures shall be covered with waterproof membranes.

4.29.2.4 Supporting Excavations
        The Contractor shall support the sides and the ends of all excavations to prevent any fall
        or run from any portion of the ground outside the excavation and to prevent settlement or
        damage to structures adjacent to the excavation. The Contractor shall provide, install and
        maintain all materials necessary to provide such support.
        If, for any reason, any portion of the bottom, sides and ends of any excavation shall give
        way, the Contractor shall take all necessary remedial measures including the excavation
        and removal of all the subsoil thereby disturbed at both, inside and outside the nominal
        limits of excavations.
        Where the Contractor proposes to perform excavations with sloping faces and without
        shoring, the excavated faces shall be to stable slopes and heights. Full details on the
        execution shall be submitted to the Supervisor for approval.

4.29.2.5 Shoring
        When the material being excavated has sliding planes inclined towards the trench,
        adequate shoring must be carried out immediately after excavation. Particular care shall be
        taken if the earth, though firm, may be rendered unstable when trenched or by rain or
        seepage of groundwater.



                                                                                                    137
        If the width of the trench is unavoidably increased by slipping or collapsing of the sides,
        work shall be suspended and the Supervisor informed on the occurrence. The Supervisor
        will decide, whether the design of the pipeline has to be reviewed in view of trench width
        or, if necessary, the class of bedding and shoring.
        The method of shoring to be used is up to the discretion of the Contractor, but subject to
        the approval of the Supervisor with regard to safety. The Contractor will be fully
        responsible for the stability and the effectiveness of the shoring. Costs for shoring shall be
        included in the rates and prices entered for other items in the schedule of prices.
        The method statement shall include engineering calculations for the sheeting, shoring and
        piling for different excavation depths.

4.29.2.6 Maintaining of Other Services and Structures
        The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all water courses, pipes, sewers,
        drains, electricity and communication cables, other services and structures during the
        construction of the works and for any remedial measures necessary to make good any
        damage arising out of the execution of the works. He shall temporarily support or divert
        and subsequently reinstate all such services and structures to the satisfaction of the
        Supervisor or the concerned authorities.
        As soon as an existing service is encountered in the excavation the Contractor shall
        forthwith call the attention of the Supervisor and the appropriate utilities service authority
        thereto.
        Where permanent diversion or support is rendered necessary as the unavoidable result of
        the construction of the works in accordance with the Contract or where in the opinion of
        the Supervisor the position of existing services warrants temporary diversion or support
        the Supervisor will instruct the Contractor accordingly.
        Notwithstanding any relevant information furnished by the Employer or the Supervisor,
        the Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining, from his own inspection of the site
        and from the respective supply authorities and other public bodies and by excavating trial
        pits, the position of all mains, pipes and cables whether underground or overhead, within
        or near the site.

4.29.3 Materials


4.29.3.1 Filling Materials
        The selection of backfill material is subject to the approval of the Supervisor. Fill material
        shall be, where otherwise not specified, selected and broken in such manner that no
        particle exceeds one half of the thickness of the layer for compaction. It shall contain all
        sizes of material distributed from the largest permitted to the smallest grain diameter.
        Fill material shall not contain gap-graded materials, except with the written approval of
        the Supervisor for such case. It shall be free of organic, soluble or other deleterious
        materials. For trenches, the fill material shall not contain stones, rocks or concrete
        fragments larger than 50 mm in any dimension and shall have a plasticity index of less
        than 10 and a minimum dry density of 1.6t/m3 according to modified Proctor density.
        Should the material selected as filling become unacceptable to the Supervisor for any
        reason including exposure to weather conditions, contamination and segregation during



                                                                                                  138
        the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall remove such damaged, softened or
        segregated material and replace it by fresh approved material at his own expense.

4.29.3.2 Sand Bedding
        All iron, plastic or clay pipes and cables shall be laid on compacted sand bed and be
        embedded in sand. Sand backfilling materials from different sources of supply shall not be
        mixed or stored in the same pile nor used alternately in the same class of construction
        without the permission of the Supervisor.
        The sand backfilling material shall be uniformly graded and meet the following grading
        requirements:
        Sieve designation:                   3/8"    No.4     No.16      No.50 No.100
        Percent passing by weight:           100    95-100    45-80      10-30    2-10

4.29.3.3 Bedding Material for Concrete Pipes
        Except where concrete or granular bed is specified, the bedding material shall consist of
        crushed stones or gravel, free from stones and lumps and fulfill the following gradation
        requirements:
        Sieve size (mm):                            25       19    9.5    4.75   2.36
                                                     (1")    (3/4") (3/8") (No.4) (No.8)

        Percent passing by weight:                  100 -90-100       20-55      0-10    0-5

4.29.3.4 Graded Aggregates
        Graded aggregates will be used for the backfill of the top of trenches below paved areas.
        Except where otherwise specified, the graded aggregates shall fulfill the following
        gradation requirements:
        Sieve size (mm):                     37.5    25      19   4.75     2.0   0.425 0.075
        Per cent passing by weight:          100 60-100 55-85 35-60 25-50 15-30 8-15

4.29.3.5 Drainage Fill and Filter Materials
        Free drainage fills and filter material shall be formed of hard durable particles and shall be
        free from clay, silt, and soluble or organic matter. The particle size distribution shall be in
        accordance to the filter rules set out by Terzaghi.
        The Contractor may use material from excavation, provided it is suitable and processed in
        compliance with the specification of free drainage material.

4.29.3.6 Reuse of Excavated Material
        Where, in the opinion of the Supervisor, excavated materials are not suitable for refill
        without resorting to sieving or other special means, the Supervisor may order the
        Contractor:
        (a)   to sieve out stones as may be necessary to meet gradation requirements,

        (b) to transport suitable materials from trench excavation at distances exceeding 200 m
            from the length to be refilled (overhaul) or



                                                                                                   139
        (c)   to excavate material from suitable borrow areas and transport it to the length to be
              refilled.

4.29.4 Backfilling


4.29.4.1 Embedding of Pipes
        Trenches not to be Left Open;
        Trench excavation for interconnections, sewers and transport lines shall be carried out
        expeditiously and the refilling of trenches shall be commenced and completed as soon as
        reasonably practicable. Pipe laying and embedding of pipes shall follow closely after
        trench excavation and the Contractor shall not permit unreasonably excessive lengths of
        trench excavation to remain open for any reason.
        Open Ditches:
        The length for the open excavated ditches can be maximum the interval between two
        manholes or 60 meters.
        Embedding of HDPE and PVC Pipes:
        All ductile iron and PVC pipes shall be laid on a 150 mm compacted sand bed and shall
        be embedded by sand to a level of 300 mm above the top of the pipes.
        Embedding material snail be placed by hand and compacted in layers of not more than
        compacted 100 mm thickness. The material shall be compacted to at least 90% maximum
        density below and around the pipes as to provide firm and continuous support. The
        Contractor shall ensure that the pipe is not displaced or damaged by the embedding
        operation.
        Embedding of Concrete Pipes:
        Except where concrete or granular bed is specified, the bedding material for concrete
        sewers shall consist of crushed stones or gravel, be free from stones and lumps and be
        graded 0/25 mm. The pipe bed shall be backfilled by hand from 150 mm below the
        bottom of the pipes to a level of 300 mm above the top of the pipe and compacted to at
        least 90% maximum modified Proctor density.
        Approval of Embedding:
        The Contractor shall take all precautions to fix the pipes in their location. This includes
        expressingly the bedding of pipes and partial refilling of trenches leaving the joints
        exposed while awaiting pressure tests. Formal approval of embedding shall be obtained
        from the Supervisor prior to the testing of pipes and sewers.

4.29.4.2 Backfilling of Trenches to Surface
        From the top of the bedding layer up to the finished ground level, the trench shall be
        backfilled with approved selected material, consolidated by approved mechanical methods
        in layers with a thickness of not more than 150 mm.
        Each layer has to be compacted separately. The degree of compaction shall be not less
        than 95% of maximum dry density according to modified Proctor density. The Contractor
        shall provide adequate number of power tampers or other compaction equipment subject
        to the approval of the Supervisor.



                                                                                               140
        Where necessary, the Contractor shall adjust the moisture content of the refill material to
        assist the compaction either by drying out or by sprinkling with water. A safe amount of
        water shall be available at the site during backfilling of trenches,
        The Contractor shall, when placing the backfilling, make due allowance for any settlement
        that may occur before the end of period of maintenance. Where necessary, the Contractor
        shall at the end of the period of maintenance remove any excess material or make up any
        deficiency of backfilling to specified levels.
        In the event that excavated material is insufficient or unsuitable for backfilling, the
        Contractor shall use imported fill material from approved borrow pits. Where directed by
        the Supervisor, trench excavations shall be backfilled with concrete, class B10.

4.29.4.3 Backfilling Sundries


Backfilling around Manholes
        Backfilling around manholes and material used for it shall meet the specifications set out
        for the backfilling of adjacent trenches. In roads with a width over 3m, the material around
        manholes shall be selected and compacted to meet the requirements of base and subbase.

Backfilling in Streambeds
        In streambeds and wade courses, the pipes shall be fully encased with reinforced concrete
        and the top of the excavation shall be filled with gabions, laid by hand and exceeding 1 m
        on either side of the excavated trench.

Field Drains
        Should any existing subsoil or field drains be uncovered during general excavation. The
        Contractor shall either carefully replace them when backfilling, or, if this is impracticable,
        shall divert them to new drains or ditches, or otherwise relay them as the Supervisor may
        direct.

4.29.5 Reinstatement and Maintenance


4.29.5.1 Reinstatement of Paved Surfaces
        The Contractor shall restore all pavements or other surface structures removed or
        disturbed as a part of the work to a condition suitable and satisfactory to the Supervisor.
        No pavement shall be restored unless and until, in the opinion of the Supervisor, the
        condition for backfill is given in such a way as to properly support the pavement.
        The reinstatement of road surfaces and pavements will be commenced upon approval of
        the Supervisior and shall be done, if not otherwise stated, as follows:
        (a)    The top 30 cm of the pipe trench (below the top of the base) shall be filled with
               graded aggregate (0-60 mm of natural stabilized material), watered, placed in layers
               of 15 cm thickness and compacted to not less than 95-': of maximum dry density
               according to modified Proctor test. At pipeline crossings, the top 30 cm of the trench
               shall be filled with plane concrete B10.

        (b) At the top of the base, the width of the trench shall be increased for 15 cm on each


                                                                                                  141
              side. In order to ensure appropriate adjustment of the surfaces the Contractor shall
              use such methods as will ensure the breaking of the pavement along straight lines,
              preferably by cutting. The face of the remaining pavement shall be approximately
              vertical.

        (c)   The surface shall be restored in accordance with the instructions or this specification
              (see Clause 7 and its sub-clauses) and/or the direction of the Supervisior.

4.29.5.2 Reinstatement of Unpaved Surfaces
        Gravel roads and unpaved roads shall be reinstated to a technically acceptable condition,
        i.e. 100 mm approved large gravel and 150 mm well graded gravel compacted to 95% of
        maximum density shall be provided.

Surface Reinstatement in Agricultural Fields
        After the Contractor has refilled excavations in fields and grass verges in the manner and
        to the level specified, he shall replace all topsoil previously removed and it shall be evenly
        distributed and leveled over the full extent of the stripped area. Such of the working area
        occupied by the Contractor as were originally down to grass shall be sown with grass seed
        of equivalent quality and maintained until the new grass is properly established. Other
        areas not originally down to grass shall be dressed with suitable fertilizers harrowed in so
        as to restore the original level of fertility.

Reinstatement of Existing Services
        Where excavation is carried out close to or across the line of sewers, pipes, cables or other
        services, whether underground or overhead, the Contractor shall, where necessary,
        provide at his own cost temporary supports or slings and where such services are
        temporarily disturbed, they shall be replaced.

Reinstatement of Hedges, Fences and Walls
        Where excavation disturbs features such as hedges, fences and walls, the Contractor shall,
        as a temporary measure, provide temporary fencing for any such parts of such barriers.
        After excavation has been reinstated, the Contractor shall carry out such work as approved
        by the Superisor for permanent restoration of such barriers.
        In case of hedges, the section removed shall be replaced by saplings of the appropriate
        species and on both sides by providing an adequate post and barbed wire fence. During
        the period of maintenance all hedges replanted in the above manner shall be inspected and
        any dead sapling replaced by the Contractor.

Maintenance of Backfilled Surfaces
        The Contractor shall maintain the reinstated surfaces and ensure that the surfaces after
        backfilling are kept in satisfactory condition during the period of maintenance. The
        reinstatement of any settlement shall be carried out forthwith upon notification of the
        Contractor.
        The reinstatement of the backfilled surface shall be done at the Contractor's own expense
        and include (1) the re-excavation of the top surface, base and subbase, (2) compacting the
        backfill in the trench, (3) backfilling the base and subbase with graded aggregate and (4)
        reinstatement of the surface according to surface conditions met before.


                                                                                                  142
4.29.6 Testing Of Earth Works

4.29.6.1 General
        The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary for collecting samples
        and carry out field laboratory tests on materials for earthworks. Laboratory equipment
        shall be housed in a suitable building on site, which shall also incorporate space for the
        storage of field test equipment.

4.29.6.2 Main Tests and Standards
        The Contractor shall carry out all tests in accordance with TS or equivalent international
        standards.

4.29.6.3 Compaction of Soils
        The Contractor shall carry out the compaction to attain not less than the specified
        percentage of the maximum dry density and control soil compaction during backfilling
        and filling operation. Where the subgrade or layers of soil material require being moisture
        conditioned before compaction, the Contractor shall uniformly apply water to the
        subgrade or layer of soil to attain the optimum moisture content required. The application
        of water shall be carried out in a manner to prevent free water appearing on surface during
        compaction operations. The Contractor shall dry soil material that is too wet for
        compaction to the specified densities.

4.29.6.4 Testing of Compaction
        The Contractor shall inspect, perform and report all testing and retesting as to ensure that
        the works conform to the specified requirements. For each compacted backfill of trench
        the required number of field density tests to ensure compliance with specification shall not
        be less than three passing tests between each 2 manholes or 100 linear meters (which ever
        is smaller) of filled and compacted trench.
        If, in the opinion of the Supervisor, the subgrade, backfill and fill layers have been placed
        and compacted to densities below the specified limits, the Contractor shall provide
        additional compaction and testing until satisfactory results are attained or remove certain
        sections of the work and reconstruct them according to the Specifications at his own
        expense.
        All holes made for the purpose of tests shall be restored by the Contractor to conform to
        the characteristics of the adjacent layers. This work shall be conducted at the Contractor's
        expense.
        The compaction required for various fills shall be as follows:
         Item of Works                             Materials Prescribed     % of Max. Density
         Backfill for over-excavation              Granular material              100%
         Formation and bedding layers              Fine granular material          95%
         Crushed stone supporting layers           Crusher runs                    95%
         Final backfill of trenches under roads    Fine granular material         100%
         Backfill of trenches in general           Fine granular material          98%
                                                   Sandy material                  95%
                                                   Clayey material                 98%
         Backfill below structures                 Fine granular material         100%




                                                                                                 143
4.30 PIPE WORKS


4.30.1 General


4.30.1.1 Scope
        Pipe work, as specified hereunder, shall include the supply, laying, testing, disinfection and
        flushing of water and wastewater distribution pipes.
        The bid prices entered in the Bill of Quantities shall fully include the value of works
        described under the several items and shall fully cover the cost of all labour, materials, tools,
        equipment etc. as necessary to furnish, install, test and disinfect water distribution pipes as
        shown on the Drawings or as directed, ail as specified. The unit prices shall include all
        auxiliary work for the construction of pipelines but not specifically included for payment
        under other items of the Contract.

4.30.1.2 Method Statement for Pipe Laying
        The means of storing, handling, laying and jointing pipes, together with the chosen material
        and method for compacting the pipe surrounding and backfilling of pipe trenches, shall be
        subject to the approval of the Supervisor.
        At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for the approval of the
        Supervisor a method statement detailing his proposal for pipe laying and related activities at
        the site.
        The method statement shall be submitted within 14 days after the awarding of the Contract
        and shall include:
        (a) Location, size and security arrangements of all proposed storage areas and storage shads
            for pipes;

        (b) Methods of loading, off-loading and transporting pipes and jointing materials from the
            point of production or point of importation to the storage area;

        (c) Methods of loading, transporting and stringing out of pipes from the storage area to the
            pipeline routes;

        (d) Method of excavation of pipe trenches including plant to be used and methods of trench
            dewatering to be employed;

        (e) Material to be used for bedding and surrounding of pipes and backfilling of pipe
            trenches together with plant to be used and methods of compaction to be employed;

        (f) Details of the proposed order of work incorporating the specified checks and hydraulic
            testing.

        The methods for pipe laying, jointing, bedding and backfilling recommended by the pipe
        manufacturer shall be strictly adhered to. In cases of conflicts between the manufacturer's
        recommended methods and this Specification, the decision of the Supervisor shall prevail.



                                                                                                     144
4.30.1.3 Supply of Materials
        All materials shall be supplied from approved manufacturers only. The Contractor is
        requested to submit a list of suppliers that he intends to use, together with the Tender bid.
        The Contractor shall also submit on request and for the approval of the Supervisor, before
        ordering any materials:
         Type of materials to be used, dimensions, thickness, lengths, shape, weight, class,
          tolerance limits and quality;

         Standard to which the item is manufactured, details of specials, adapters, fittings and
          joints;

         Coating and lining methods.

4.30.1.4 Potable Water Certification
        All pipe and coating materials for water distribution pipes shall be certified for potable water
        use and shall contain no ingredients that might migrate into water in amounts that are
        considered to be toxic or otherwise dangerous for health.

4.30.1.5 Inspection by the Supervisor
        The Supervisor reserves the right to inspect goods prior to delivery or shipment from the
        supplier's factory. The Contractor shall, on request, provide all necessary facilities to the
        Supervisor or his representative to carry out such inspection.
        Inspection or approval by the Supervisor of any equipment or materials shall not release the
        Contractor from any of his obligations under this Contract.

4.30.1.6 Fittings and Adapters
        Fittings, unless otherwise specified, shall be furnished with a type of joint compatible with
        the existing pipe system at the supplier's option. The Contractor at no extra cost shall provide
        any adapters necessary to joint fittings to the adjacent pipes, even of different materials.

4.30.1.7 Toxic Materials
        The Contractor is prohibited to import or to use any toxic or poisonous grouts, materials or
        submaterials used in piping, its accessories, lining sealing etc, or in various kinds of concrete,
        soils or whatsoever. Any import of the above materials by the Contractor requires to be
        licensed by the Supervisor; otherwise, the Contractor shall be subject to legal pursuance.

4.30.2 Pipe Materials


4.30.2.1 General
        Pipe materials shall be of the best quality of the class most suitable for working under the
        conditions specified and shall withstand traffic loads, operating pressure, corrosion and
        abrasion, and the variation of temperature and climatic conditions without distortion or
        deterioration or the setting of undue stresses in any part of the works and without affecting
        the strength or the suitability of the various parts of the work which they have to perform.
        If not otherwise specified, all pipes have to withstand heavy traffic load and, water pipes and
        accessories shall withstand at least 10 bars nominal pressure.


                                                                                                      145
        Where corrosion or abrasion may be expected from contact with water, sediments or from
        any other cause, the Contractor shall supply suitably resistant materials. Any material
        showing signs of corrosion, distortion or pitting before the expire of the maintenance period
        shall be replaced with material approved by the Supervisor, at the Contractor's own expense.

4.30.2.2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes and Fittings
        HDPE pipes shall comply with DIN 8074, DIN 8075 or ISO/161 in connection with DIN
        19533 or equivalent. The pipes shall be designed for a nominal working pressure Class PN
        10, have a hydrostatic design stress of 50 kg/cm2 at 20 C and be jointed with pushfit
        couplings.
        The nominal and outside diameters and the wall thickness of HDPE pipes are as follows:
              Nominal Diameter (ND)      Outside Diameter (mm)           Wall Thickness (mm)
         20                              25                              2.3
         25                              32                              3.0
         40                              50                              4.6
         50                              63                              5.8
        The length of coiled pipes shall be in general 100 m. The minimum diameter of the rollers
        for coiled pipe should be such that kinking of the pipe is prevented. The minimum internal
        diameter of the rollers shall not be less than 24 times the nominal outside diameter of the
        pipe. The ends of the pipe shall be plugged or covered.
        The pipes shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene containing only those
        antioxidants, UV stabilizers and pigments necessary for the manufacture of potable water
        black pipes. The Contractor shall provide an approved third party certificate to verify the
        above.
        Mechanical couplings and fittings shall be used. The mechanical joints shall be push-on
        types. They shall be produced in acetal-homo-polymer or be combined with gunmetal
        adapters. The joints have to provide the system with strength in tension and water tightness.
        Push fit jointing type shall consist of a PVC grip ring and nitrite elastomer or equivalent 0
        rings.
        The couplings and fittings shall be designed for a nominal working pressure of 16 bars and a
        temperature of 40°C and shall fit the HDPE pipes in this contract.
        All fittings (couplings, bends, tees, reducers) and adapters shall be deemed to be included in
        the unit rates of HDPE pipes.

4.30.2.3 Polyvinyl-Chloride Pipes
        Polyvinyl-chloride pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with DIN 2401, DIN 2402, DIN
        8063, DIN 16450, DIN 16451, DIN 16929 and DIN 19532.
        Generally, only pipes for nominal pressures of 6, 10, and 16 bar are acceptable. If different
        pipe categories are to be used this will be decided by the Contracting Authority depending on
        the water properties for which the pipes are destined.
        Controls and checks are to be carried out in the factory according to the specifications for
        acceptance of man-made materials.




                                                                                                  146
        For purposes of assembly, pipes will have a socket and spigot end. The socket end has a
        rubber gasket and must guarantee the same quality of installation as the pipes themselves.
        Pipes of different materials or pipes, pipe-fittings and valves will be connected with flanges.
        Double sockets, double socket bends shall be of rigid PVC.
        Special parts (tees, reduction cones, spigot flanges, flanged sockets, flanged bends, etc.) are
        made out of cast iron with a plastic coating; they are connected to pipes with the flanges with
        a rubber gasket.

4.30.2.4 Lining of Pipes and Fittings
        Pipes and all joining elements, fittings, valves equipment, must be protected against
        corrosion both internally and externally. Interior and exterior protections in general have to
        be in faultless conditions before the pipes are laid. If necessary, the Contractor will renew the
        protections without waiting for a request by the Supervisor. Otherwise the Supervisor has the
        right to refuse pipes with defective protection.
        External protective linings must adhere firmly to the surface of the base material, fully
        enclose the same and protect if effectively against the influence of the soil or generally
        against any other environmental influence.
        In addition, inner linings must have a smooth and even surface and effectively protect the
        pipes against water corrosion, even if the water is aggressive. Linings are to be applied by
        centrifugation. The use of bituminous paints is strictly forbidden.
        Linings must be applied to surfaces which are dry, degreased and show no evidence of mill
        scale or fine rust.
        The following linings are to be used; other linings may be used if their quality and properties
        are at least equivalent to those specified below.
        (a) PVC and HDPE Pipes

            Apart from careful transport and backfilling of the trench no further protection is
            required. If pipes have to be laid above ground for technical reason protection against
            ultraviolet rays is required.
        (b) Steel or Cast Iron Fittings

            Before lining couplings have to be sandblasted or steelshot abraded.
            External Protection
            It is one coat of bituminous paint on the basis of coal pitch. The dry film thickness is 80
            micron.
            Internal Protection
            either:      + by special pure epoxy resin-based lining (non-toxic) applied hot to
                         sandblasted or steelshot abraded beforehand (minimum thickness 300
                         micron)
            or:          + by CHF cement mortar for waters with zero or low aggressiveness
                         + by alumina cement mortar for very aggressive waters ND 80 - ND 300: 3
                         mm min.; above ND 300: 5 mm min.




                                                                                                     147
4.30.2.5 Pipe Joints
        (a) Rigid PVC Pipes

            Non-bonded socket connection push-in joint with rubber or elastomer gaskets, or flanges
            with rubber gasket.
        (b) HDPE Pipes

           cast iron fittings for polyethylene tubes with anchor and support gasket for connection
             with pipes or fittings in other material

           welded connection for PE-pipe connection

4.30.2.6 Shipping, Packaging, Protection
        Ductile cast iron or steel pipes to be shipped in bundles in order to facilitate handling, with
        wrappings suitable for conditions of transport and adequate protection.
        Ductile cast iron and steel pipes shall be delivered with a plastic stopper at each end of the
        pipes.
        Handling and storage on site must conform to manufacturer's recommendations and
        standards. Open-air interim storage of cast iron pipes is permissible if proper positioning is
        maintained; lined steel pipes as well as PVC and HDPE pipes must be protected against
        sunlight.
        Materials delivered will be accepted only if proper storage provisions have been made and if
        equipment which was damaged during shipment is either repaired or replaced.
        Generally and unless specified otherwise containers shall be sealed on leaving the factory
        and opened only at their final point of destination without opening of the packaging at the
        port of arrival. Containers therefore have to bear distinctive labels specifying the project they
        belong to.

4.30.3 Pipeline Appurtenances


4.30.3.1 General Requirements
        Hydraulic equipment and fittings must conform to specified models and fulfill the conditions
        of these technical specifications. Moulded parts must have perfect outer surfaces without
        chips and must be finished by means of debarring or filling.
        Connecting surfaces of all flanges have to be machined. Flanges must also have one or
        several circular grooves in order to facility grip.
        All surfaces which are subject to friction must be machined; bore holes in covers, blind
        flanges, and flanges which connect pipes have to be produced by means of drills. Manual
        precision grinding of valve seats and surfaces of sluice valves is required for purposes of
        stability and accurateness of shut-off elements. Threads of spinles must be machined with
        straight edges, and have no defects or scarcity of material.
        Manufacturer's marks, flow diameter and arrow indicating flow direction must be visible on
        the device's outer surface.
        Punched or forged special elements will have this information stamped upon them.



                                                                                                     148
4.30.4 Testing Of Materials


4.30.4.1 Testing at Place of Manufacture
        The supplier shall, at the place of manufacture, test all pipes, fittings and pipeline
        appurtenances listed in the Bill of Quantities, including all necessary jointing material and
        mark them. The same applies for the Contractor for his part or supplies, as applicable. The
        Contractor shall submit a certificate from the manufacturer certifying that all items have been
        mill tested and that they have successfully passed the relevant tests prescribed by the
        respective Standard Specifications.
        Any or all materials and manufactured articles supplied by the Contractor shall, if so required
        by the Supervisor, be tested in advance at the Contractor's expense in accordance with the
        tests specified in the relative German or other approved equivalent standards. The materials
        and workmanship shall be the best of their respective kind and subject to the approval of the
        Supervisor.

4.30.4.2 Storage and Testing on Site
        All materials provided by the Contractor have to be stored in a proper storage area subject to
        the approval of the Supervisor. The Contractor shall construct a fenced and lockable
        compound in which all pipes, fittings, valves and other pipe appurtenances are to be
        delivered, and also maintain shelters of sufficient size and capacity to store the materials and
        to protect them from the effects of weather. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning,
        levelling and enclosing the storage site and shall provide all necessary security. The
        Contractor shall, at his own expense, carry out all tests he considers necessary to ensure that
        all pipes, fittings, valves and other appurtenances are in accordance with the Contract, on his
        own responsibility. The Supervisor may witness such tests without incurring any
        responsibility for the materials.
        The Contractor shall at all reasonable times allow the Supervisor or the Employer free access
        to any place for inspection and testing. In all cases the Contractor shall satisfy the Supervisor
        that all plant has been delivered in good and clean condition that identification markings are
        clear and that stock piling is in approved manner. The Contractor shall keep detailed records
        in a form to be approved by the Supervisor of all pipes, fittings, valves and other pipe
        appurtenances, showing the quantities of each type and class which have been
         received by the Contractor during the course of the works,

         declared on delivery to be faulty, damaged or deficient,

         broken, damaged or lost during the course of the works, and

         found to be surplus to the requirements and held by the Contractor.

        Such records shall be updated and delivered by the Contractor to the Supervisor on a monthly
        basis. The Contractor shall comply with the Supervisor's instructions as to the disposal,
        repair or replacement of any pipe, fitting or valve which has been notified as being faulty,
        damaged or missing.

4.30.5 Handling and Storage of Pipes




                                                                                                     149
4.30.5.1 Handling and Transport of Pipes
        The Contractor's arrangements for handling, lifting and transporting of pipes, fittings, valves
        and other appurtenances shall ensure that these appurtenances are brought to their final place
        on site undamaged and in good order.
        Pipes, fittings and appurtenances shall be handled with utmost care and the Contractor shall
        provide cranes and other appliances approved by the Suppervisor wherever it is necessary to
        lift or lower pipe or pipe specials.
        For the handling of pipes with external coating and lining, slings of canvas, rubber belting or
        special fittings shaped to fit the pipe ends shall be used. Pipes shall not be lifted by hooks nor
        shall they be dropped or dragged.
        Ductile iron pipes being transported shall be supported by timbers, sand bags or padding
        arranged in such a way that the pipes do not rest on their sockets and adjacent pipes do not
        touch.
        The height of the load for the various pipe diameters shall be as recommended by the
        manufacturer and approved by the Supervisor. Each load shall be secured by ropes or other
        lashing arrangement so that the pipes do not move or chafe and suitable padding shall be
        used to ensure that the pipe coating is not damaged by these lashings. Pipe specials shall be
        supported by sandbags or other padding and lashed down as described above so that they are
        not damaged during transport.
        Pipe and fittings which will be supplied but not laid or installed have to be packed in a way
        to facilitate the storage in ESKI's hangar and that the quality of the material remains over
        years as specified within the contract.

4.30.5.2 Stacking of Pipes
        The Contractor shall properly stack the pipes in storage yards at site and the stacks shall be
        laid out in regular pattern. The limits of each stack shall be marked so that the movement of
        cranes and vehicles is restricted to access tracks between the stacks and the control of
        delivery and removal of pipes is facilitated. Where the pipes are to be delivered and stacked
        on designated sites along the pipeline route, the areas where the pipes are to be stacked shall,
        if directed by the Supervisor, be graded flat by the Contractor at his own expense to provide
        a firm and even surface and be kept free from loose stones, rubbish or waste liable to damage
        pips coating.

4.30.5.3 Distribution at the Site
        In distributing the material at the site of works, each piece shall be unloaded adjacent or near
        to the place where it is to be laid. Rubber rings for pipe joints shall be stored and protected in
        an appropriate manner to prevent deterioration.
        The Contractor shall keep the pipe and the appurtenances clean during the progress of the
        work. Dirt, debris or other foreign material shall be removed from the interior of the pipe and
        the joints before installation.

4.30.5.4 Inspection before Installation
        All pipes and fittings shall be carefully inspected and examined for cracks and other defaults
        while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position.
        Material found to be damaged or defective should be rejected and removed from the site.
        Spigot and socket ends shall be examined with particular care. Any damage to exterior


                                                                                                      150
        protective coatings shall be repaired before the pipe is laid in the trench. In case of damage to
        interior protective coating or lining, the said pipe shall be laid aside for inspection by the
        Supervisor, who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. Any materials, which fail or
        become damaged will be deemed to be caused by the Contractor's negligence in handling and
        must be replaced with new or repaired materials as decided by the Supervisor and without
        cost to the Employer.

4.30.5.5 Lowering into Trench
        The pipe shall be handled with approved equipment designed to prevent damage to the pipe
        and the external coating. Bare cables, chains, hooks or metal bars will not be allowed to
        come into contact neither with the external coating nor with the inner lining. If damage
        occurs to any pipes, fittings or pipe accessories in handling, the damage shall be brought
        forthwith to the Supervisor's attention. The Supervisor shall prescribe corrective repairs or
        reject the damaged items.
        The Contractor shall, at his own expense, repair and replace damaged items. Coating material
        ready for use shall always be kept on site when pipe laying is going on.

4.30.6 Pipe Laying


4.30.6.1 Routing of Pipelines
        The Contract Drawings show the approximate lines and levels to which the pipeline is to be
        built and are subject to the amendments by the Supervisor on site. Before establishing the
        execution drawings, the Contractor or his representative shall make an inspection on site in
        company with the Supervisor and obtain from him instructions in this respect. The execution
        drawings shall be approved by the Supervisor before setting out any section of the pipeline.

4.30.6.2 General Requirements for Pipe Laying
        In as much as possible, pipelines shall be laid in trenches excavated and subsequently
        backfilled with a minimum cover and width as specified in the Specification of Earth Works.
        All pipes, curves, bends and other specials shall be laid in accordance with the alignment,
        levels and gradients as finally authorized by the Supervisor and be laid so, that the top of the
        pipe is not less than the minimum specified depth below the finished ground level along the
        pipeline route. The finished pipeline shall run straight between the bends and curves and a
        uniform gradient shall be accurately maintained between changes of gradient shown on
        Drawings or authorized by the Supervisor.
        The bottom of the trenches shall be graded and prepared to provide a firm and uniform
        bearing throughout the entire length of pipe and bell holes shall be provided. The Contractor
        shall inform the Supervisor sufficiently in advance when the formation levels of the trenches
        are ready for inspection. No pipe laying shall be allowed until the bottom of trenches has
        been inspected and approved by the Supervisor.
        The pipe shall be positioned and bedded in the trenches in an approved manner and properly
        aligned. Before being positioned, each pipe shall be thoroughly examined to ensure that it is
        free from defects and shall have all dirt removed from the inside thereof. The Contractor
        shall lay the pipe in accordance to professional practice and install all fittings, specials and
        adapters as may be necessitated-for the proper execution of the works. The Contractor shall
        joint the pipes in accordance with the Specification and to the Supervisor's satisfaction.



                                                                                                     151
        The Contractor shall supply all the materials, equipment and tools required for the proper
        jointing of the pipes at his down cost.
        The Contractor at his own expense shall repair any injury of the protective coating of the
        pipes from any causes during the construction of the pipeline to the satisfaction of the
        Supervisor.
        At the end of each day's work a strong wooden plug or iron disk shall be firmly fixed in each
        open end in order to prevent any contamination of the pipe by foreign materials.
        At a distance of 300 mm over the pipeline a plastic warning tape shall be laid. Samples of the
        tape shall be submitted to the Supervisor for his approval.

4.30.6.3 Cutting of Pipes


Polyvinyl-Chloride and HDPE Pipes
        Cutting of the pipe shall be kept to a minimum. When cuts are necessary they shall be
        perpendicular to the axis of the pipe and smooth. Cuts shall be made in accordance with the
        pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Cut ends shall then be tapered and the bevelled end
        shall be exactly the same as the spigot end of the pipe as manufactured at the factory.
        Solvent welds, which are only allowed for service connections shall be made in strict
        accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and utilize only solvents furnished by
        the manufacturer. In addition, it will be necessary to install underground piping so that the
        offset from true horizontal alignment is not more than 30 cm in 30 meters of the laying
        length. Care shall be taken to ensure that the temperature of both sections of pipe being
        joined is the same.

Closing Lengths

         Pipes which are required to be cut to form closing pieces in any portion of the pipeline or to
         terminate in manholes or other parts of the works shall not be cut until after all adjacent
         pipes have been installed and jointed.
        The Contractor shall determine the length of each closing piece and the required angle and
        shape of the cut. The cut shall be neatly performed and the end of the pipe shaped up and
        trimmed so as to ensure an accurate joint or termination as the case may be. Any damage to
        sheathing coating or lining shall be made good.
        The unused part of any cut pipe shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed
        of by him off the site unless with the Supervisor's approval it can be used elsewhere in the
        works.

4.30.6.4 Laying of Polyethylene Pipes
        (a) Installation

        To achieve a satisfactory installation for polyethylene pipes, the supporting soil shall provide
        a stable and permanent support for the pipe. The embedding of HDPE pipes and the
        backfilling of trenches shall comply with the Specification of Earth Works.
        Cuts in pipes should always be square and clean. Sandpaper shall be used to remove any
        excucess material, flashing or burrs, and to smooth the end of the pipe. Only pushfit service


                                                                                                    152
        fittings such as connectors, reducing connectors, 90° bends or tees made of acetal-homo-
        polymer, ultra violet resistant body with a PVC grip ring and nitile elastomer 0-ring should
        be used. Liners for some metric pipes are required. Extractor tools for removing fittings from
        pipes shall be used. Some pushfit fittings are provided with screwed end caps.
        (b) Warning Tape

        At a distance of 300 mm over the service pipe a ferrous tracking tape shall be laid for easy
        location of the pipe route. The tape should be blue in color and of 200 mm overall width and
        contain an aluminum strip throughout is length and shall have warning signs "Caution Water
        Main below" along the top section of the pipe. Samples of the tape shall be submitted to the
        Supervisor for his approval.
        (c) Field Adjustments

        The pipe and method of jointing shall be such that the locations of fittings and lengths of
        pipes can be adjusted in the field to suit field conditions and variations in stationing. A
        reasonable tolerance in the location of lines will be allowed upon approval of the Supervisor.

4.30.7 Testing and Disinfection of Pipelines

4.30.7.1 Pressure Testing of Pipelines
        The test shall be conducted by the Contractor. A written test report shall be supplied for each
        test.
        The contractor shall supply the water necessary for the test and shall further supply all
        necessary materials (joints, valves, air-relieve valves, manometers, test pumps etc.)
        Water is admitted into the pipelines gradually and care must be taken to avoid pressure
        surges, which may occur if the pipelines are filled too quickly. Air in pipelines must be
        properly expelled. The hydraulic pump is installed at the lowest point of the pipeline section.
        Filling rates must not exceed the following values:
                 ND             Q           ND           Q           ND           Q [l/s]
                 100            [l/s]
                                0.3         250          [l/s]
                                                         2           500          9
                 150            0.7         300          3           600          14
                 200            1.5         400          6           700          18
        Test pressure (TP) is fixed depending on nominal pressure (PN) or maximum service
        pressure during operation (SP).
        Please note: the service pressure is the pressure of the pipeline plus pressure surge.
        - Pressure pipeline:                                           TP = PN + 5 bar
        - Distribution pipelines:                                        TP = PN + 5 bar
        - Gravity-operated pipes in natural slopes, suction pipelines: TP = 5 bar
        For plastic pipes (PVC, PE and others) the respective nominal pressure is reduced depending
        on water temperature if this temperature exceeds 20°C.
        After the test pressure has been progressively increment (by not more than one bar per
        minute) it must be kept constant. Water consumption at each pressure incrementation by one
        bar will be noted.



                                                                                                   153
        The Contractor must carry out pre-test in order to detect and remove air residues in pipelines.
        For pipelines with cement mortar lining this test is carried out for 24 hours at nominal
        pressure so that pipes are saturated with water. For PVC and high-density PE pipes the pre-
        test will be conducted for 12 hours at test pressure to allow for pipe expansions caused by the
        very nature of the material.
        Apart from that the temperature of the pipelines must be the same at the beginning and the
        end of the tests.
        Duration of tests:
                                      ND           ND2          ND40          ND70         ND70
                   DCI                150
                                      3h           00
                                                   3h           0
                                                                6h            0 h
                                                                              18           0 h
                                                                                           24
                   PVC       or        3h           3h          6h           -             -
                   HDPE
        At the end of the test pressure drops must not be higher than 0.2 bar for PVC and HDPE
        pipes or ductile cast iron/steel pipes with a nominal pressure >16 bars. 0.1 bar pressure drops
        are acceptable for ductile cast iron/steel pipes with nominal pressure of 10 bars. 0.15 bar
        pressure drop is admitted for ductile cast iron/steel pipes with nominal pressure of 16 bars.
        Manometers must be properly graded and allow readings of 0.1 bar. If these conditions are
        not fulfilled the Contractor shall establish whether there is one or several leaks, air pockets,
        or whether pipes have not been installed correctly.
        After the faults have been identified the test shall be conducted again.

4.30.7.2 Sterilization of Pipelines
        After the water distribution lines have been hydraulically tested and before they are put into
        service, they shall be flushed with clean water to remove foreign matter. After the flushing
        they are to be sterilized with a chlorine solution at a rate as to obtain 30 mg/l chlorine at the
        point of introduction. The line shall be blown-off until a residual of 5 mg/l chlorine is
        obtained at the point of blow-off.
        If a residual of 5 mg/l chlorine is obtained, the blow-off will be closed and the water allowed
        remaining in the pipe for a minimum of 24 hours. After this period the water shall be tested
        for residual chlorine at the point of blow-off. If no residual chlorine remains, the process
        shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. After the sterilization process is
        completed, the main shall be flushed with 0.5 mg/l chlorinated water until effluent
        concentration at the point of blow-off is less than 0.5 mg/l.

4.30.7.3 Repairs and Making Good of Defaults
        Repair and making good of defaults observed during testing includes, as directed by the
        Supervisor, the correction of the properly fixing of any two pipes or the replacement of
        defective pipes. All necessary repairs, re-testing and replacement ordered by the Supervisor
        shall be at the Contractor's expense.




                                                                                                     154
4.31 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE WORKS


4.31.1 General

4.31.1.1 Scope
        Sewerage works, as specified hereunder, shall include the supply, laying and testing of
        sewers including manholes and house connections.
        The bid prices entered in the Bill of Quantities shall fully include the value of works
        described under the several items and shall cover the cost of all labour, subsidence, traveling,
        supplies, materials, fittings, temporary works, testing, re-testing if applicable), watching,
        lightening, overhead charges and any other expenses whatsoever together with all risks,
        liabilities and obligations set forth or implied in the Contract Documents.

4.31.1.2 Materials and Standards
        The Contractor may carry out the works or provide materials in accordance to TS or other
        international standards (ISO, BS, ASTM and others), provided their requirements are
        superior or equivalent to the quality described by the standards cited in the Specifications.
        Pipe materials shall be of the best quality of the class most suitable for working under the
        conditions specified and shall withstand traffic loads, operating pressure, corrosion and
        abrasion, and the variation of temperature and climatic conditions without distortion or
        deterioration or the setting of undue stresses in any part of the works and without affecting
        the strength or the suitability of the various parts for the work which they have to perform.

4.31.1.3 Method Statement for Sewerage Works
        The means of storing, handling and laying, together with the chosen material and
        construction methods for manholes and the method for compacting the pipe surrounding and
        the backfilling of pipe trenches and around manholes, shall be subject to the approval of the
        Supervisor.
        At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for the approval of the
        Supervisor a method statement detailing his proposal for pipe laying and related activities at
        the site.
        The method statement shall be submitted within 14 days after the awarding of the Contract
        and shall include:
        (a) location, size and security arrangements of all proposed storage areas for pipes;
        (b) methods of loading, off-loading and transporting pipes and precast concrete sections from
        the point of production or point of importation to the storage area;
        (c) methods of loading, transporting and stringing out of pipes from the storage area to the
        pipeline routes;
        (d) method of excavation of pipe trenches including plant to be used and methods of trench
        dewatering to be employed;
        (e) material to be used for bedding and surrounding of pipes and backfilling of pipe trenches
        together with plant to be used and methods of compaction to be employed;




                                                                                                    155
        (f) details of the proposed order of work incorporating the specified checks and hydraulic
        testing.
        The methods for pipe laying, jointing, bedding and backfilling recommended by the pipe
        manufacturer shall be strictly adhered to. In cases of conflicts between the manufacturer's
        recommended methods and this Specification, the decision of the Supervisor will prevail.

4.31.1.4 Supply of Materials
        All materials shall be supplied from approved manufacturers only. The Contractor is
        requested to submit a list of suppliers that he intends to use, together with the Tender bid.
        The Contractor shall also submit on request and for the approval of the Supervisor, before
        ordering of materials:
                 type of materials to be used, dimensions, thickness, lengths, shape, weight, class,
        tolerance limits and quality;
                  standard to which the item is manufactured, details of specials, adapters, fittings and
        joints;
                  coating and lining methods.

4.31.1.5 Inspection by the Supervisor
        The Supervisor reserves the right to inspect goods prior to delivery or shipment from the
        supplier's factory. The Contractor shall, on request, provide all necessary facilities to the
        Supervior or his representative to carry out such inspection.
        Inspection or approval by the Supervisor of any equipment or materials shall not release the
        Contractor from any of his obligations under this Contract.

4.31.2 Pipes and Fittings


4.31.2.1 General Requirements
        Sewers shall withstand traffic loads, corrosion and abrasion, and the variation of temperature
        and climatic conditions without distortion or deterioration or the setting of undue stresses in
        any part of the works and without affecting the strength or the suitability of the various parts
        for the work which they have to perform
        Where corrosion or abrasion may be expected from contact with wastewater, sediments or
        from any other cause, the Contractor shall supply suitably resistant materials. Any material
        showing signs of corrosion or distortion before the expiry of the maintenance period shall be
        replaced with material approved by the Supervisor, at the Contractor's own expense.
        All sewers will be tested for watertightness and inspected for straightness and obstructions,
        in the case of unsuccessful test results, the Contractor has to repair and make good the
        defaults observed or to dismantle and reconstruct deficious pipe sections at his own expense.

4.31.2.2 Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Pipes and Fittings
        Polyvinyl-chloride pipes and fittings shall be in accordance TS or equivalent international
        standards.
        For the cutting of pipes, mechanical sawing machined shall be used such that the piece meets
        the requirements of the whole pipe. No hammering or chiselling will be allowed.


                                                                                                     156
4.31.2.3 Concrete Pipes
        The Contractor shall provide high grade cylindrical concrete pipes and fittings with bell and
        spigot ends complying with TS (concrete pipes).
        Concrete pipes should be made of sulfate resistant cement and show smooth inside and
        outside surfaces without honeycombed texture. The pipes, whether fresh or hardened, should
        not be treated, brushed or coated using water, cement grout, mortar or any other material.
        Pipes should not show cracks or penetrating holes. Pipes, which do not comply with these
        requirements shall be rejected and removed from the site immediately.
        Pipes with diameter 300 mm and less may be without reinforcement provided they meet the
        requirements of extra strength pipe class. In the case, pipes are manufactured in accordance
        to other standards, pipes with diameter 400 and 500 mm shall be reinforced by centric simple
        layer in both directions; pipes with diameter 600 mm and more shall be reinforced by centric
        double layer in both directions.
        Concrete pipes and fittings shall net be dispatched from the factory before 28 days have
        elapsed after manufacturing.
        For the cutting of pipes, mechanical sawing machines shall be used such that the piece meets
        the requirements of the whole pipe. No hammering or chiselling will be allowed.

4.31.2.4 HDPE Pipes
        HDPE-pipes shall be produced according to TS 418.

4.31.2.5 Testing at Place of Manufacture
        The supplier shall, at the place of manufacture, test all pipes, fittings and pipeline
        appurtenances, including all necessary Jointing material and mark them. The same applies
        for the Contractor for his part of supplies, as applicable. The Contractor shall submit a
        certificate from the manufacturer certifying that all items have been mill tested and that they
        have successfully passed the relevant tests prescribed by the respective Standard
        Specifications.
        Any or all materials and manufactured articles supplied by the Contractor shall, if so required
        by the Supervisor, be tested in advance at the Contractor's expense in accordance with the
        tests specified in the relative German or other approved equivalent standards.
        The Contractor shall arrange for a co-operation with a certified testing lab for the needed
        testing (third party control). Mill testing of sewerage pipes shall include one sample of 3
        pipes for every 500 m.

4.31.2.6 Third Party Control
        The Contractor shall at his own expense provide a recognized, independent third party
        control to ensure that the pipes, fittings and other appurtenances are all manufactured in
        accordance with their respective standards and who shall, among other duties and
        obligations, testify that they have witnessed all mill tests prescribed by the relative standards
        and that the material manufactured fulfill in every respect the requirements of the Contract
        and who shall check the materials in respect of proper packing and certify the Bill of
        Loading.
        Before signing the Contract, the Contractor shall inform the Employer of the name of the
        control party he intends to engage, and obtain the Employers approval.



                                                                                                     157
4.31.2.7 Storage and Testing on Site
        All materials provided by the Contractor have to be stored in a proper storage area subject to
        the approval of the Supervisor. The Contractor shall construct a fenced and lockable
        compound in which all pipes, fittings, valves and other pipe appurtenances are to be
        delivered, and also maintain shelters of sufficient size and capacity to store the materials and
        to protect them from the effects of weather. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning,
        levelling and enclosing the storage site and shall provide all necessary security.
        The Contractor shall, at his own expense, carry out all tests he considers necessary to ensure
        that all pipes, fittings, valves and other appurtenances are in accordance with the Contract, on
        his own responsibility. The Supervisor may witness such tests without incurring any
        responsibility for the materials.
        The Contractor shall at all reasonable times allow the Supervisor or the Employer free access
        to any place for inspection and testing. In all cases the Contractor shall satisfy the Supervisor
        that all plant has been delivered in good and clean condition that identification markings are
        clear and that stock piling is in an approved manner.
        The Contractor shall keep detailed records in a form to be approved by the Supervisor of all
        pipes, fittings and other pipe appurtenances, showing the quantities of each type and class,
        which have been
           received by the Contractor during the course of the works,

           declared on delivery to be faulty, damaged or deficient,

           broken, damaged or lost during the course of the works,

           found to be surplus to the requirements and held by the Contractor.

        Such records shall be updated and delivered by the Contractor to the Supervisor on a monthly
        basis.
        The Contractor shall comply with the Supervisor's instructions as to the disposal, repair or
        replacement of any pipe, fitting or valve which has been notified as being faulty, damaged or
        missing.

4.31.2.8 Alternative Materials
        The pipe materials have been selected as required to construct watertight and corrosion
        resistant sewers. In order to achieve the most economical solution, the Contractor may
        propose other materials as a variant, provided the completed sewer line made of alternative
        material meets the specified quality requirements.
        In the case alternative pipe materials are proposed the Tenderer shall submit the priced Bill
        of Quantities for both, the basic option and the proposed variant. The unit rates to be entered
        for excavation, laying, embedding and backfiring shall take due account of the specific
        conditions implied by the proposed variant.

4.31.3 Manholes and House Connections




                                                                                                     158
4.31.3.1 Manholes
       Manholes and valve chambers shall be located as indicated on Contract Drawings or directed
       by the Supervisor.
       In-situ concrete manholes and valve chambers shall comply with the applicable specified
       requirements for Earth Works and Concrete Works. Unless otherwise specified, typical
       manholes and inspection chambers placed in the sewerage network shall be made of pre-cast
       circular or rectangular manhole rings of appropriate size as shown on Typical Drawings.
       All manholes and inspection chambers shall be placed at all changes in direction, either
       horizontally or vertically, and connections to sewer lines. They shall be constructed with
       incoming and outgoing pipes neatly and truly concreted in, complete with benching, iron
       steps and manhole cover as specified herein and shown on typical drawings.

       Manhole Covers
       Cast iron covers and frames shall comply with TS for materials and workmanship and be
       subject to the approval of the Supervisor. All covers shall be non-ventilated unless otherwise
       specified and be marked with the word "Sewer" on their surface.
       Unless otherwise specified, all covers shall be provided with approved corrosion resistant
       locking mechanism and provisions for lifting. Holes provided in covers for lifting shall be
       appropriately shaped pockets and there shall be no projections above cover level.
       Heavy duty covers and frames shall be installed in all roads, streets and highways of width
       exceeding 3 m.
       Unless otherwise directed, cast iron covers shall have the following bearing capacity:
       (a) medium duty cover and frame shall withstand a load of not less than 25 t;
       (b) heavy duty cover and frame shall withstand a load of not less than 40 t.

       Steps
       Steps in manholes and inspection chambers shall comply with the specifications shall be
       made of iron steps, 25mm diameter, dimension 300 x 270 mm. Steps shall be installed in a
       staggered pattern at not more than 300 mm centers and well grouted.

       Construction of Manholes
       The Contractor shall construct manholes to the levels, dimensions and shapes shown on
       Drawings or as directed by the Supervisor.
       The construction of manholes shall be as indicated on Standard Drawings and comprise:
       (a) well compacted blinding layer, concrete B10, thickness 10 cm;
       (b) bottom of manholes, either in cast-in place or precast concrete, at the discretion of the
       Contractor;
       (c) tops of manhole frames (rings) and covers to the elevations as indicated on drawings,
       unless otherwise directed;
       (d) building in and grouting of pipe ends (watertight construction), iron steps (at 300 mm
       centers) and drop fittings (encased in concrete B25);
       (e) benching to manholes (plain concrete B35, compacted, well formed and smooth
       trowelled);


                                                                                                 159
        (f) placing of cast iron manhole covers including frames.

4.31.3.2 House Connections
        If not otherwise directed, house connections shall be made of PVC pipes, 150mm diameter,
        equipped with house connection chambers and connected to the sewer lines. If not otherwise
        directed, the house connection chambers shall be placed on the customer's property, adjacent
        to the boundary of the plot.
        The house connection chambers shall be constructed in accordance to dimensions and
        workmanship proposed in the relevant Standard Drawings attached to these Tender
        Documents.

4.31.3.3 Stormwater Inlets
        If not otherwise directed, stormwater inlets shall be made out of concrete chambers with cast
        Iron gullies and removable grit pans made out of galvanized steel. The connection to the
        sewer line shall be with PVC pipes, 150 mm diameter.
        The inlets shall be constructed in accordance to dimensions and workmanship proposed in
        the relevant Standard Drawings attached to these Tender Documents.

4.31.4 Handling of Pipelines and Materials


4.31.4.1 Handling and Transport
        The Contractor's arrangements for handling, lifting and transporting of pipes, fittings, precast
        concrete parts, covers etc. shall ensure that these items are brought to their final place on site,
        undamaged and in good order.
        Pipes and precast concrete parts shall be handled with utmost care and the Contractor shall
        provide cranes and other appliances approved by the Supervisor wherever it is necessary to
        lift or lower pipes or other specials.
        For the handling of pipe slings of canvas, rubber belting or special fittings shaped to fit the
        pipe ends shall be used. Pipes shall not be lifted by hooks nor shall they be dropped or
        dragged.
        The height of the load for the various items shall be as recommended by the manufacturer
        and approved by the Supervisor. Ropes or other lashing arrangement shall secure each load
        so that the pipes do not move or chafe and suitable padding shall be used to ensure that the
        pipe is not damaged by these lashings. Pipe specials shall be supported by sandbags or other
        padding and lashed down as described above so that they are not damaged during transport.

4.31.4.2 Stacking of Pipes
        Where the pipes are to be delivered and stacked on designated sites along the pipeline route,
        the areas where the pipes are to be stacked shall, if directed by the Supervisor, be graded flat
        by the Contractor at his own expense to provide a firm and even surface.
        If the pipeline material is not resistant against sun and high temperatures, adequate covering
        has to be provided.




                                                                                                       160
4.31.4.3 Distribution at the Site
        In distributing the material at the site of works, each piece shall be unloaded adjacent or near
        to the place where it is to be laid. Rubber rings for pipe joints shall be stored and protected in
        an appropriate manner to prevent deterioration.
        The Contractor shall keep the pipe and the appurtenances clean during the progress of the
        work. Dirt, debris or other foreign material shall be removed from the interior of the pipe and
        the joints before installation.

4.31.4.4 Inspection before Installation
        All pipes and materials shall be carefully inspected and examined for cracks and other
        defaults while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position.
        Material found to be damaged or defective should be rejected and removed from the site.
        Spigot and socket ends of pipes shall be examined with particular care. Any damaged pipe
        shall be laid aside for inspection by the Supervisor who will prescribe corrective repairs or
        rejection. Any materials, which fail or become damaged, must be replaced with new or
        repaired materials as decided by the Supervisor and without cost to the Employer.

4.31.4.5 Lowering into Trench
        The pipe shall be handled with approved equipment designed to prevent damage to the pipe
        and the external coating. Bare cables, chains, hooks or metal bars will not be allowed to
        come into contact neither with the external coating nor with the inner lining.
        If damage occurs to any pipes, fittings or pipe accessories in handling, the damage shall be
        brought forthwith to the Supervisor‟s attention. The Supervisor shall prescribe corrective
        repairs or reject the damaged items. The Contractor shall stand the expense of repairing and
        replacing the same.

4.31.5 Pipe Laying


4.31.5.1 Routing of Pipelines
        The Contract Drawings show the approximate lines and levels to which the pipeline is to be
        built and are subject to the amendments by the Supervisor on site. Before establishing the
        execution drawings, the Contractor or his representative shall make an inspection on site in
        company with the Supervisor and obtain from him instructions in this respect. The execution
        drawings shall be approved by the Supervisor before setting out any section out any section
        of the pipeline.

4.31.5.2 General Requirements for Pipe Laying
        In as much as possible, pipelines shall be laid in trenches excavated and subsequently
        backfilled with the prescribed cover and minimum width as specified in the Specification of
        Earth Works.
        All pipes shall be laid in accordance with the alignment, levels and gradients as finally
        authorized by the Supervisor. The finished pipeline shall run straight between the manholes
        and/or inspection chambers.
        The bottom of the trenches shall be graded and prepared to provide a firm and uniform
        bearing throughout the entire length of pipe and bell holes. The Contractor shall inform the


                                                                                                      161
        Supervisor sufficiently in advance when the formation levels of the trenches are ready for
        inspection. No pipe laying shall be allowed until the bottom of trenches has been inspected
        and approved by the Supervisor.
        The pipe shall be positioned and bedded in the trenches in an approved manner and properly
        aligned. Before being positioned, each pipe shall be thoroughly examined to ensure that it is
        free from defects and shall have all dirt removed from the inside thereof. The Contractor
        shall lay the pipe in accordance to professional practice and install all fittings and specials as
        may be necessitated for the proper execution of the works. The Contractor shall joint the
        pipes in accordance with the Specification and to the Supervisor‟s satisfaction.

4.31.5.3 Laying of GRP, PVC and Ductile Iron Pipes
        The pipes shall be positioned and bedded in the trenches on the compacted and finished
        subgrade of the trench and jointed in an approved manner. After placing a length of a pipe in
        the trench, the spigot shall be centered in the socket of the corresponding pipe using the
        proper lubricant, rubber rings and methods in accordance with the manufacturers‟
        instructions and the pipe shall be forced home and brought to the correct line and grade.
        Particular care shall be applied to ensure that the spigot end of the pipe does not damage or
        displace the rubber ring joint. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill
        material tampered around it except at the socket.
        The jointing of all pipes shall be carried out in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
        instructions to the satisfaction of the Supervisor. The Contractor shall supply all the
        materials, equipment and tools required for the proper jointing of the pipes at his own cost.
        All joint holes have to remain uncovered until passing the prescribed pressure test in
        accordance with the Specification and to the Supervisor‟s satisfaction.

4.31.5.4 Laying of Concrete Pipes
        The pipes shall be accurately laid to line and level and jointed in an approved manner. The
        pipes shall be laid on the backfilled, graded and finished bedding of the trench and special
        joint holes shall be provided. Spigot and socket pipes shall normally be laid with the socket
        at the higher end.
        The whole inside and outside area forming the joint of pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly
        cleaned before laying. Every precaution shall be made to prevent foreign material entering
        the pipes. During laying operation no debris, tools, cloth or other material shall be placed in
        the pipe.
        After placing a length of the pipe in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the socket
        (or corresponding) and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe
        shall be secured in place with approved backfill material (preferable concrete B5 - B10 on
        fine sand) tamped under it, except at the joint. Pipes shall be laid in such a manner that the
        whole body of the pipe is in contact with the bedding. Precautions shall be taken to prevent
        dirt from entering the joint space.
        The finished pipeline shall run straight between the bends and curves and a uniform gradient
        shall be accurately maintained between changes of gradient shown on Drawings or
        authorized by the Supervisor. All pipelines must be inspected and approved by the
        Supervisor before they are tested and finally covered.




                                                                                                      162
4.31.5.5 Laying of HDPE Pipes
        To achieve a satisfactory installation for high density polyethylene pipes, the supporting soil
        shall provide a stable and permanent support for the pipe. The embedding of HDPE pipes
        and the backfilling of trenches shall comply with the Specification of Earth Works.
        Cuts in pipes should always be square and clean. Sandpaper shall be used to remove any
        excuses material, flashing or burrs, arid to smooth the end of the pipe.
        The jointing of all pipes shall be carried out in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
        instructions to the satisfaction of the Supervisor. The Contractor shall supply all the
        materials, equipment and tools required for the proper jointing of the pipes at his own cost.
        All joint holes have to remain uncovered until passing the prescribed pressure test in
        accordance with the Specification and to the Supervisor 's satisfaction.

4.31.5.6 Manholes and Inspection Chambers
        Manholes and other chambers shall be located as indicated on Contract Drawings or directed
        by the Supervisor.
        In-situ concrete manholes and other chambers shall comply with the applicable specified
        requirements for Earth Works and Concrete Works. Typical manholes and inspection
        chambers placed in the sewerage network shall be made of precast circular or rectangular
        manhole rings of appropriate size.

4.31.5.7 Measurement
        The quantity of pipes in place and all fittings shall be the number of linear meters of each
        size installed within the limits shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the Supervisor. The
        length of the distance between the ends of pipes will be measured or computed along the
        centerline of the pipe from manhole to manhole without deduction for fittings and manholes.
        Every type of fittings shall be included in the unit rates of the pipe layed.
        All manholes, inspection chambers and house connection chambers placed in the sewerage or
        drainage system shall be quoted as separate items.

4.31.6 Testing of Sewers


4.31.6.1 Extent of Testing
        The testing of sewers shall include (1) tests for straightness and obstructions, (2) checks on
        infiltration and (3) tests for watertightness. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense,
        all equipment, labor, materials and water necessary and carry out the prescribed testing.
        Carrying out visual checks, the Contractor shall ensure that no unprotected lights are used in
        existing sewers and manholes or in any new sewers and pipelines in which risks of explosion
        may be given due to the presence of gases.
        Tests for straightness and obstructions and checks on infiltration shall be performed on 100%
        of all sewers and manholes. Tests for watertightness shall include the testing of
        100% of the total lengths of pipelines before covering up the pipes;
        at minimum of 5% of the manholes before benching is made and before back-filling and after
        installation of climbing irons;
        a maximum of 5% of the lines including connections after backfilling is completed.


                                                                                                    163
4.31.6.2 Tests for Straightness and Obstructions
        Visual tests for linearity and freedom from obstructions shall be carried out after completion
        of the works and be performed by means -of a lamp and mirror. Invert levels of the sewers
        and inspection chambers shall be tested and verified with levelling instruments.

4.31.6.3 Checks on Infiltration
        Infiltration checks shall be performed when backfilling is completed and all inlets to the
        length of sewers under testing have been effectively sealed. For sewers, not exceeding 500
        mm nominal diameter, the infiltration rate shall be below 0.05 1/h per 100 linear meters and
        per mm of nominal bore.
        Manholes and inspection chambers will be visually inspected for water tightness against
        infiltration after backfilling has been completed and groundwater table is at is highest level.
        Under these conditions no visible infiltration flow shall be admitted.

4.31.6.4 Tests for Watertightness
        All lengths of sewers shall be tested for watertightness by means of hydrostatic testing.
        Hydrostatic testing shall be applied after partial backfilling leaving the joints exposed.
        Testing shall be carried out from manhole to manhole. Short branch laterals connected to the
        sewer may be tested as one system with the sewer. Long branches and manholes shall be
        separately tested.
        The hydrostatic testing shall be carried out as follows:
        After completing the installation and covering of a sewer line or a section of the line,
        hydraulic testing of the line shall be performed, when directed by the Supervisor. The test
        pressure shall be 1.0 m head of water at the highest point of the section under consideration.
        The length of each section to be tested shall not exceed 100 m and the pressure at the lowest
        point of the section shall not exceed 5.0 m head of water.
        At the upper end of the sewer a gauge glass shall be connected to the sealing plug to enable
        the observation of the water level during the test. The gauge glass should have an inner
        diameter of approx. 50 mm and shall be provided with a mark located 1.0 m above the top of
        the sewer. An air vent and a cock should be installed at the same end as to allow for the
        release of air during the filling of water for testing.
        The pipe shall be filled with water for a period of minimum 2 hours and maximum 24 hours
        before testing in order to allow for an adequate soaking period and the complete release of
        air. The water level shall be kept at the mark of the gauge glass during the entire soaking
        period. The hydrostatic test shall be carried out immediately after the soaking period.
        The leakage of the pipe is defined as the quantity of water, which must be supplied to the
        pipe during 10 minutes to maintain the specified water level. The additional quantity of water
        filled into the pipe shall be measured with an accuracy of 0.1 liters.
        The sewer will be accepted in respect of water tightness if the quantity of water added during
        10 minutes is less than 0.01 I per 100 linear meters and per mm of nominal bore.
        The maximum permissible leakage in manholes shall be less than 0.35 liters per minutes and
        per m depth of water inside the manhole.




                                                                                                   164
4.31.6.5 Repairs and Making Good of Defaults
       Repair and making good of defaults observed after testing includes, as directed by the
       Supervisor, the correction of alignments and levels and the properly fixing of any two pipes.
       Brushing, grouting, cementing or concreting of pipes is not allowed neither before nor after
       running the tests. All necessary repairs, re-testing and replacement ordered by the Supervisor
       shall be at the Contractor's expense.
       If the linearity of a sewer line between two manholes is not given, the Supervisor may order
       to dismantle and relay the pipe or to arrange for an additional manhole at the bending
       ensuring the linearity between two neighboring manholes.
       Should the losses in any line tested exceed the permissible leakage by more than 5%, the
       Contractor shall, after repairing and making good any leaks, carry out further tests to prove
       evidence of the permissible leakage rate. If, during iterated testing the loss rate fails the
       permissible leakage by more than 5%, .the line shall be dismantled and reconstructed with
       new pipes at the Contractor's expense.
       The above procedure shall apply also for lines and house connections, which are to be tested
       after backfilling, whereby a tolerance of 5% from the permissible leakage rate infiltration
       shall be allowed.




                                                                                                 165
                           Technical specifications mechanical works

5. Summary of work

5.1 Work Covered By Tender Documents

The scope of works comprises: Building Works and connections of Utility Works. Work to be
performed according to this section includes supply, delivery, installation, testing and
commissioning of all mechanical equipment‟s and material.
The contractor shall execute all systems in accordance with this design.
The contractor shall provide materials, equipment, labor and perform all operations required for
the complete installations in the buildings.
The drawings and specifications are complementary. Any items mentioned in the specifications
and not shown on the drawings, or vice versa shall be furnished as though called for in both. Any
item not mentioned in specification nor in BOQ but found vital according to the design code, shall
be furnished as though called for in both. Contractor shall be responsible from the changes made
by consultant and control in technical specifications and drawings and contractor shall not claim
extra payment for this changes.
All works, fixtures, materials and equipment shall be protected at all times. The contractor shall
fully complete all works in the protection of installations. Upon installation of all equipment‟s and
materials, all openings shall be protected and finished to match the surrounding surfaces.
The anticipated scope of the proposed Works which particularly relate to the Mechanical
Supervisory aspects of the Tender are as follows:

 1.    Plumbing systems
 2.    Heating systems
 3.    HVAC systems
 4.    Chilled water systems
 5.    Fire fighting systems
 6.    Building automation system

5.2 Mechanical Work Explanation

 Plumbing System
 Galvanized steel pipes and PPRC type pipes shall be used in domestic water distribution of the
 building.
 Drainage of the waste water shall be provided by centrifugal cast iron pipes. U-PVC pipes shall
 be used in storm drain drainage system.
 Laboratories waste waters shall pass from the naturalization tanks before connection to the city
 main waste water system.
 De-ionized water system pipes and valves shall be stainless steel.




                                                                                                  166
Counter type lavatories shall be used in general toilet areas. Eastern and western type WC pans
shall be used in toilet areas. Lavatories, WC pans, urinals, etc. shall be from vitrivius china.
Sinks shall be from stainless steel.
Eye wash units shall be placed inside laboratories area.
Domestic cold water storage tank will be buried type and it will be placed outside of the building.
Domestic cold water booster pump will be placed to the pump room which is next to this pump
room.

Heating & Cooling System
Heating of the building shall be provided by panel type steel radiators. Heating system shall be
Ø16 PEX pipe. Headers shall be placed for the heating water distribution.
Main heating and cooling water pipes shall be black steel pipe.
In summer operation cooling of the building shall be provided by air handling units placed in
technical room and roof floor. In winter operation air handling units will heat the outdoor air up
to indoor air temperature.
Natural gas fired boilers and circulation pumps shall be placed in technical room at first floor.
Air cooled chiller units will be placed outside of the building.

Ventilation System
Ventilation of the laboratories will be provided by air handling units placed in technical room and
roof floor. Units will be selected as 100% fresh air type. Exhaust of the laboratories will be
provided by both roof type and cabinet type exhaust fans. Corrosion resistant roof type exhaust
fans shall be used for the laboratories where dangerous gases occurs. Places like offices and
ordinary labs. shall have cabinet type exhaust fans.
Frequency controlled air handling unit shall be used in meeting room.
Square diffusers shall be used for supply and return air. Constant air volume units shall be used
for the microbiology and molecular biology sections. Hepa filters shall be used in some lab. in
this section.

Fire Fighting System
Fire hose cabinets shall be used for the fire fighting system inside the building and fire hydrants
shall be placed outside of the building. Fire fighting system booster pump will be placed in the
pump room. Fire fighting system reserve tank will be placed near this pump room.




                                                                                               167
5.3 General Requirements

The requirements for the detailed co-ordination and construction are stated in the Bidding
Documents. All these volumes are to be read collectively as they form the total co-ordination and
construction requirements intended.
The Contractor shall review architectural, civil, structural, and mechanical and electrical designs
as shown in the Drawings. Minor and detailed adjustments according to the detailed co-ordination
carried out by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Supervisor for approval prior to any
construction.
The Works shall be coordinated in detail by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements
and/or methods as stated in the Bidding Documents. In the absence of any such statements for any
aspect or any element of the co-ordination and construction, it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to adopt local standards and/or well known and internationally accepted editions of the
Codes of Practice/Standards/Criteria and Methods in performing the Works, subject to the review
and/or approval of the Supervisor.
More detailed descriptions of the Works requirements are given below, but any ambiguity in
description of any work otherwise described in the contract does not exclude it from the Contract.



5.4 Products, Execution of Works

Products: Material and equipment shall be new, current models of manufacturer and shall bear all
identifications. All materials and equipment should have identification labels with the data on their
manufacturer, pressure ratings, capacities etc. Equipment‟s and materials damaged during
transportation or installation shall be replaced by new ones. Any deviation from this provision
shall be permitted only upon written approval. An authorized representative shall be appointed to
constantly supervise the works under this section and check all materials and equipment prior to
their installation.
All the materials are subject the approval of the Supervisor. If any material other than approved
brand or quality was discovered on site, it will be immediately removed from site.
All materials used shall be originated from EU or Beneficiary Countries.
Execution of works, Installation of materials, equipment‟s and apparatus shall be performed in an
orderly and neat manner, taking into consideration the location of doors, windows, structural
members, lighting fixtures and other architectural elements in order to avoid their interference.
Operation, maintenance and access to all installation shall be provided. Access holes for servicing
of equipment‟s, automatic devices etc. shall be provided at specified locations, enabling easy
servicing and replacement of items. During all the installation, all equipment shall be set at a level
with supports neatly placed and properly fastened.
Piping: The piping shall be set and finished in a neat and orderly manner. The installation shall be
concealed, except if shown otherwise. It shall be run in parallel with the walls or structural
elements. All pipes and ducts passing through the roof shall be flashed and counter flashed.




                                                                                                   168
Brand Approval: Constructor shall have to prepare file for the approval of the equipments and
materials before procurement. Boilers, steam generator, burners, circulation pumps, water
treatment units, medical gas system equipments, kitchen and laundry equipments, valves,
plumbing fixtures, fire hose cabinets, air handling units, building management system, cold room
and morgue equipments brand name approvals shall be done by both controls and consultants.
Other equipments approval shall be done by consultant.
Electrical Installation for HVAC Systems: The proper operation of the mechanical installation
requires respective electrical equipment and installation. Technical specification and BOQ for
electrical equipment installations related to heating, ventilating and air-conditioning system are set
forth in the section of electrical work.

5.5 Units and abbreviations

The following units have been used throughout these Specifications.

              m               -              meter
              m2              -              square meter
              m3              -              cubic meter
              mm              -              millimeter
              mm2             -              square millimeter
              cm              -              centimeter
              cm2             -              square centimeter
              N               -              Newton
              kN              -              kilo Newton
              N/mm2           -              Newton per square millimeter
              N/m2            -              Newton per square meter
              KPa             -              KiloPascal
              t               -              ton = kg x 103
              t/m3            -              tons per cubic meter
              kg              -              kilogram
              kg/m3           -              kilogram per cubic meter
              g               -              gram = kg x 10-3
              %               -              percent
              °C                  -          degree Celcius




5.6 General




                                                                                                   169
5.6.1 Introduction

This document covers general aspects of the Mechanical Works for the buildings and utility and
provides minimum standards which govern the detailed co-ordination and construction of the
Works and form the Employer‟s General Requirements.

5.6.2 General Description

The total area of the building is m2 and the highest part has a height of 9 m. There are
microbiology, chemical analysis, residue, molecular biology, additives, mineral matters, packaging
laboratories, a meeting room and offices in the building.

5.7 Codes And Standards

The co-ordination and construction of the permanent works shall comply with the Contract
Documents, the applicable codes of practice and standards current at the time of submission of bid
(TSE, DIN, ISO and other internationally accepted standards as approved by the Supervisor)
except where noted, or are otherwise demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Supervisor to be
inapplicable or inappropriate for the design or construction of the permanent works
The Contractor may propose alternative or additional codes, standards and specifications. These
shall be internationally recognized, demonstrated as equivalent to or exceeding the existing
standards requirement and shall be approved in writing by the Supervisor prior to use by the
Contractor. Any alternative or additional codes shall be available in Turkish/English or translated
into Turkish/English and copies provided to Supervisor before approval will be considered.

5.8 Special Tool And Test Equipment List

The Contractor shall furnish to the Supervisor two (2) copies of recommended list of all special
tools and test equipment shall cover all items required for the successful operation and
maintenance during a ten year equipment life, In complying the special tools and test equipment
list the Contractor shall indicate all special tools and test equipment items that require calibration,
including frequency and method. Necessary standards shall be listed immediately after each item
that requires calibration, and they must be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards or other
reference satisfactory to the Supervisor. Tool list shall include all tools required. Test equipment
list shall include all equipment required for acceptance testing and calibration. The Contractor
shall supply two (2) copies of all vendor-supplied catalogs and instructions for operation and
maintenance of the tools and test equipment furnished under this contract.

5.8.1 Submission Preliminary Parts List

The Contractor shall submit one (1) copy of this preliminary parts list with recommendations for
spares within the time frame set forth above. This list is subject to Supervisor review and written


                                                                                                    170
approval. Supervisor may revise the listing as to quantities of recommended spares as to quantities
of recommended spares as a condition of approval. Supervisor reserves the right to order all, none
or any portion of additional spare parts from the manufacturer‟s complete parts list and the
preliminary Parts List.
Resubmittals: Any resubmittal or additional submittals of equipment lists, spare parts lists or
associated information shall be made within by the Supervisor and all costs associated with the
submissions shall be borne by the contractor.
 Final Parts List: The final list shall be submitted prior to contract completion date, in three (3)
copies and shall be annotated “Final” on each sheet.

5.9 Samples

The Contractor shall submit samples of materials together with supporting technical information
for approval by the Supervisor prior to incorporating them in the works as and when required. All
samples, which are approved, shall indicate the standard to be maintained in the execution of the
Works. Materials, which are rejected, shall not be used in the Works.
Where a sample or set of samples requires re-submission, the Contractor shall resubmit the
required samples or other requested data.
All approved samples shall further :
            be properly catalogued with the technical information, test     results, etc.,
            be neatly and systematically kept in a secure place, for the Supervisor‟s reference and
for subsequent comparison checks with actual respective delivered material for construction.

5.10 Compliance to Rules and Regulations

The Contractor shall execute all Works in accordance with good engineering practice. He shall
comply with the latest by-laws and latest Rules and Regulations of all Approving Authorities.
 Notwithstanding Clause a. above, the functional adequacy and professional liabilities of the
construction shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.




                                                                                                 171
5.11 Material Testing

The Contractor shall carry out quality tests on materials and works and shall supply the Supervisor
with the test results of each test carried out. Tests to be carried out on works in accordance with
requirements as described in the Contract Documents.
A complete record of all tests and their results shall be kept up to date by the Contractor. Three (3)
bound copies of all test results shall be supplied to the Supervisor for each discipline of the Works
as mentioned in the Contract Documents.

5.12 Supervision, Inspection and Tests

For the purpose of carrying out the project Quality Assurance Plan as contained in Quality
Assurance Policy, the Contractor shall appoint a Supervision Team to supervise the Works.
The Supervisor may at any stage of the Works carry out inspection, measurement and tests on any
part of the Works to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall
provide the necessary attendance all at the Contractor‟s costs whenever required by the Supervisor.
Notwithstanding any tests which have been carried out off-site, the Supervisor shall be empowered
to order further reasonable tests of any materials or goods to be made on the site and to reject such
materials or goods should they fail to pass the tests on site. All costs incurred shall be borne by the
Contractor.
Three (3) properly collated and certified bound sets of all inspection notes, measurements, quality
control test results, certification of permanently covered works etc. shall be finally submitted to
the Supervisor by the Contractor, and certified by the Contractor‟s Supervision Team at the
completion of the Works.
All gas, water for the purposes of testing and commissioning shall be provided by the Contractor
up to the issue of the Certificate of Temporary Acceptance. This shall include the initial charging
of all systems and equipment with water and refrigerants etc.
The Supervisor shall be entitled during manufacturer to inspect, examine and test the materials and
workmanship for the equipment to be supplied under the contract. Such inspection, examination or
testing shall not release the contractor from any obligation under the contract. The contractor shall
provide free of charge at his all expense the cost relating to examination, inspection and testing at
the manufacturer premises. The equipments subject to this work at the manufacturer premises shall
include:
       Boilers
       Air conditioning equipment
       Pumps
       Heat exchangers
       Any other measure equipment found necessary.



5.13 Quality Management




                                                                                                    172
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for the approval of the Supervisor detailed Quality
Assurance and Quality Control Plans for the Quality Management of carrying out the Works. This
scope includes, but is not limited, to describing, adhering to, and carrying out the quality
assurance, control and management of the works, and the submittal for the Supervisor‟s review of
all initial, interim and final submittals of quality assurance and control documents.
Required Quality Assurance and Control Submittals include (but not limited to):

      Detailed description and management of quality assurance, control and monitoring
       procedures
      Detailed procedures for off-site and onsite testing, inspection and commissioning methods
       and procedures
      Details of manufacturer‟s and subcontractors quality assurance and quality control
       procedures

5.14 Covering Up Of Works

Before any part of the Works is permanently covered up, the Contractor‟s Supervision Team shall
certify in writing that the Works have been inspected by them and completed as per the Contract
Documents. Three (3) copies of the quality control test results shall be submitted to the Supervisor.

5.15 Training

The Contractor shall provide training for the employees of the employer. Such training shall cover
all aspects of using, running, commissioning and maintaining of all Engineering services.

6. General standards

6.1 General Requirements

The standards, codes of practice and the like to be applied to the detailed design and construction
of the Works shall be those shown and described in the related Division and Section.




                                                                                                  173
6.1.1 Alternative Standards

If the Contractor wishes to use alternative standards, he shall submit these to the Supervisor for
approval. Approval to use alternative standards may be given provided that they are equal or
higher than those specified. If the standard, or standards, are in a language other than the English
language, a technically correct English translation shall also be submitted. Submittals shall be
made sufficiently in advance for the Supervisor‟s approval and before the standard is applied to
any part of the Works.

6.1.2 Availability

Two copies of all standards, codes of practice and the like referred to in the Contract Document
shall be provided for the sole use of the Supervisor, by the Contractor prior to the manufacture,
construction or fabrication of the parts of the Works concerned. Where such standards, codes of
practice and the like are not available in the language of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide
a detailed translation of such documents in the said language. The abbreviations used to describe
these standards, codes of practice and the like are :
       ISO : International Standards Organisation
       DIN : Deutsche Industries Normenausschuss
       EN : European Norms
       NEC : National Electrical Code
       NFPA : National Fire Protection Association Codes and Standards
       ASHRAE         : American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
       NEMA : National Electrical Manufacturers Association

6.2 Design Standards

The installation shall also confirm to:
      The general and specific requirements of the local water authority, public health officer,
       local drainage inspectorate and other local statutory authorities.
      Local authority by laws and other regulations.
      General and specific requirements of the local fire officer.




                                                                                                  174
7. Plumbing fixtures and equipment

7.1 General

7.1.1 Section Include

The Contractor shall supply, deliver and install the plumbing fixtures and equipment, and carry out
the plumbing work.

7.1.2 Related Work

       Water piping
       Fire Protection Piping
       Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

7.1.3 References

ISO - International Standard Organization

7.1.4 Submittals

      Certificate of Compliance
      Test Reports
      Manufacturer‟s Data
      Parts and Special Tools List
      Operation and Maintenance Manual

7.2 Product Requirements

7.2.1 General Requirements

Materials required herein shall be first quality of standard products from manufacturers.




                                                                                                175
7.3 Plumbing Equipment

7.3.1 Water Supply Pump

Type and Components

Domestic cold water boosters will be a set with pumps, expansion tanks, main control unit and
necessary accessories. The domestic water boosters shall be factory packaged and assembled.
Water supply pumps shall be multistage centrifugal pump arranged in parallel, directly connected
to motor with coupling and mounted steel base plate, pipe work complete with all hydraulically
required parts, control panel. For analogue pressure sensor systems the difference between
minimum and maximum levels of booster must be adjusted to +- 0,3 bar. Main switch, MAN-0-
AUTO selector switches for all pumps on the control unit.
      Casings shall be of cast iron and impellers shall be of cast bronze.
      Shafts shall be of stainless steel or may be carbon steel only when shaft sleeves are
       provided; and shall be of construction that will prevent oils from mixing with supply water.
      Base plate shall be cast iron with a raised lip at all edges.
      Rotating parts of pumps shall be thoroughly balanced.
      Vibration isolator used for each installation shall be selected for location and weight of unit
       and expected vibration; and shall be approved by Supervisor before installation.
      The pumps shall be directly coupled to a closed type insulated class F motor suitable for
       operating at an electric power supply of 380 Volts, 3-phase, 50 hertz.
      The full load speed shall not exceed 3000 Rpm. The rotating parts shall be thoroughly
       dynamically and statically balanced.
      The pressure tank shall be of prefabricated steel tank with diaphragm device having
       working pressure 10 bar.
      Control unit casing must be thermo plastic, protection class IP 54, electrical supply 3
       phases /380 V/50 Hz.
      Electric Motors: Each electric motor-driven pump shall be driven by a continuous duty
       totally enclosed electric motor, suitable for operation on 380 Volt, 50 Hertz, 3 Phase
       alternating current. The electric motor shall be squirrel cage,2-pole,the protection class
       shall be IP 54, Insulation class F. Motors shall be of sufficient capacity to drive the
       equipment so that the nameplate horsepower rating of the motor will not be exceeded
       throughout the entire published pump characteristics curve when operating at nominal
       system voltage.




                                                                                                   176
Accessories

Provide accessories with each pump as follows:

      Gate valve for suction and discharge pipe connection.
      Check valve with by-pass connection.
      Air and drain cock.
      Pressure gage.
      Anchor bolts with washers and nuts.
      Companion flanges for piping connection with packing, bolts washers and nuts.
      Flexible joints for pressure tank.
      Vibration isolators.
      All elements shall be integrated into single unit on a common base and shall be factory
       packaged and assembled ie. pumps, motors, control panel, pressure tank, pressure switch,
       and etc.

Capacity Requirement

Each pump set shall be capable of delivery not less than the water flow rate indicated against the
design head. The Contractor shall submit for approval the characteristic curve of each pump
offered.

Equipment Schedule

Refer to Equipment Schedules for the Water Booster Set, Irrigation Booster Set.

7.3.2 Pressure Tank

Type and Component

      Pressure tanks shall be steel plate welded construction.
      Inside finishing of tanks shall be epoxy resin coating or galvanized.

Accessories

Provide following accessories for each pressure tank.

     Pressure gage with siphon tube and gage valve.
     Anchor bolts, with washers and nuts.
Equipment Schedule




                                                                                               177
Refer to Equipment Schedules for the Water Booster Set, Irrigation Booster Set.

7.3.3 Domestic & Fire Water Storage Tank

Domestic water tank locations are at C-D Block Basement floor.
Type and Component shall be as described in structural specifications.

Accessories

Accessories for domestic water storage tank shall be as follows:

       Steel gage
       Level Indicator

Capacity Requirement

Refer to Equipment Schedules.

7.3.4 Duplex Water Softening System

Treatment: To remove the calcium and magnesium hardness from water by ion-exchanging
method.
The Softener shall be consisting of one tank manufactured in steel-sheet (electrical welding) with
stamped and flanged head and bottom, totally sand blasted, internally and externally epoxy coated.

The painting process shall be as follows:

      inside: sand blasting grade SA 2 ½ - 3 and coats of thermosetting food-grade epoxy
       powder, kiln baking. Thickness 250 µ
      outside: sand blasting grade SA 2 and coats of thermosetting polyester powder, kiln baking.
       Thickness 100 µ

The harness consists of hydro-pneumatic diaphragm Noryl valves interconnected with atoxyc PVC
pipes and fittings.
For the operation the softener there shall be an electronic programmer with microprocessor to
control the backwash operations. It shall be equipped with programming keyboard for the
operation length and with bright display to indicate the operation status.
The direct control of diaphragm automatic valves shall be executed through the rotating pilot
distributor placed in the IP 55 box installed directly on the softener.
The softener shall be also equipped with one brine system of polypropylene, complete with salt
dissolver and suction valve for brine from its chamber.



                                                                                               178
At the end of regeneration, the unit automatically resumes the service step while a suitable device
directs a preset quantity of water to the brine tank so as to make the brine required for the
following regeneration.

Technical Characteristics of the Unit

Resin Tank Quantity                :2
Salt Tank Quantity                 :2
Exchange Capacity                  : 1188 m3x0F ( between two regeneration )
Service Flow-Rate ( max.)          : 2 m3/h
Salt Consumption                   : 11-40 kgs./regeneration
Period of regeneration             : Volumetric controlled by metering device.
Operating Pressure                 : 2-7 bars
Operating temperature              : 2-40 °C
Resin Tank Material                : Polyester with reinforced fiberboard.
Valve type                         : Hydropneumatic diaphragm valves
Valve material                     : Norly PVC
Control Unit                       : Fully electronic control board with digital monitor

7.3.5 Domestic Water Deionization Unit

The unit shall be fed with the water coming from the city main. The entrance pressure is supposed
to be 4-6 bars.

Full Automatic Multimedia Sand Filter

Filtration unit shall perform the backwashing operations automatically without human intervention
according to the installed program. Operation pressure of the unit shall be 2-8 bars. The
connections to the unit shall be 1 1/2”. The capacity of the unit shall meet the requirement of 7,5
m3/h. The unit shall be automatically programmed at most once a day and at most once a week.
Mineral tank of the unit shall be made of fiberglass enhanced polypropylene composite material.
Automation valve of the unit shall be bronze bodied, multi way or hydraulic controlled norly
bodied. As the filter materials at least 220 kg granular active carbon media shall be used. Also, 90
kg gravel shall be put at the bottom of the tank.

Full Automatic Active Carbon Filter

Filtration unit shall refine the organic materials and remove the color, flavor, and dosed active
chlorine by absorbing using the carbon in the filter and perform the backwashing operations
automatically without human intervention according to the installed program. Operation pressure
of the unit shall be 2-8 bars. The connections to the unit shall be 1 1/2”. The capacity of the unit
shall meet the requirement of 7,5 m3/h. The unit shall be automatically programmed at most once


                                                                                                 179
a day and at most once a week. Mineral tank of the unit shall be made of fiberglass enhanced
polypropylene composite material.
Automation valve of the unit shall be bronze bodied, multi way or hydraulic controlled norly
bodied. As the filter materials at least 170 kg anthracite, at least 170 kg silica sand, and at least
225 kg gravel should be used, respectively.

Reverse Osmosis Unit

Pre refined water shall be passed through 5 micron filters and refined again to protect the high
pressure pumps and the membranes. Water which is now at the desired state shall be pumped to
reverse osmosis membranes. With the aid of high pressure the reverse of the natural osmosis shall
occur and the water which is highly conductive shall be passed through the membranes and be
much less conductive.
The capacity of the reverse osmosis water shall be 1000 liter/hour. Entrance pressure to the reverse
osmosis system shall be minimum 3-5 bars. The efficiency of the reverse osmosis chemical
refining shall be between 95-99 %. High pressure pump of the reverse osmosis pump shall be
vertical centrifugal and the pump material shall be SS 304 stainless steel. The operating pressure
shall be between 10-14 bars. The number of reverse osmosis membrane cases shall be 5 and each
case shall have 4 membranes with the type TFC spiral turn and dimensions 4” x 40”. Unit will be
complete with digital control panel.
Reverse osmosis high pressure line piping shall be galvanized steel, whereas low pressure line
piping shall be PN 16 PVC.

Reverse osmosis system shall also have the following equipment:
     Manometers
     Low and high pressure switches
     Flowmeters

Electrical panel shall be IP65 protection class and be painted with RAL 7302 electrostatic oven
paint. The electrical supply to the panel shall be 380 V@ 50 Hz. The high pressure pump power
circuit, on-off buttons and position LEDs shall be on the reverse osmosis electrical panel.

7.3.6 Neutralization Tank

      15 galloons capacity, having 38 and 51 mm inlet and outlet dimensions and 51 mm vent
       connections with seamless construction is manufactured from high density polyethlene.
       Top is completing with gasketed, bolt down cover. Regularly furnished with stainless steel
       hardware and neoprene gasket material.
      55 galloons capacity, having 102 and 102 mm inlet and outlet dimensions and 51 mm vent
       connections with seamless construction is manufactured from high density polyethlene.
       Top is complete with gasketed, bolt down cover. Regularly furnished with stainless steel
       hardware and neoprene gasket material.


                                                                                                  180
7.3.7 Domestic Water Headers

Type and Component

Domestic cold and hot water and soft water headers shall be black steel pipes conforming to TS
301 or approved equivalent with steel plates welded construction or steel angle support.

      Headers shall be made by steel pipe.
      Provide hot-dip galvanized, after fabrication.
      Support shall be assembled from steel angle.

Accessories

The Contractor shall provide following accessories:
     Pressure gauge.
     Thermometer.
     Drain valve and piping.




                                                                                           181
7.4 Plumbing Fixtures

7.4.1 General Requirements

All sanitary fixtures, trim and accessories shall be of approved manufacture and manufacturer's
standard, selected from the top half of the product line and shall not be "factory close-out", end of
product model", or otherwise discontinued models. Trim and accessories shall be procured from
one manufacturer unless specified otherwise. The individual units specified here to a certain trade
mark and model no; represent the quality, shape, dimensions etc. By Supervisor‟s approval
equivalent alternative trade mark and model can be used. All vitreous china shall be of first
quality, and specified color, with smooth glazed surface free from warp, cracks, flaws,
discoloration or other imperfections. All vitreous china accessories shall match fixtures and shall
be of the same manufacturer and color, unless otherwise specified. Trim and accessories shall be
chrome plated unless otherwise stated clearly in the specification. List and catalogues of all
proposed plumbing fixtures, trim and accessories, indicating manufacturer, type and model
number should be submitted for approval. Samples of all fixtures trim and accessories shall be
submitted for approval when asked to do so by the Supervisor. The Contractor shall not charge the
employer with the cost of such samples nor shall he use any item different from the approved
sample. Sanitary fixtures and their trim and accessories shall be installed in a neat, finished and
uniform manner as directed by the Supervisor. They shall be set straight and true and securely
attached to the supporting surfaces. Roughing shall be accurately laid out to conform to finished
walls and floors. Sanitary fixtures shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

Sanitary Fixtures:
Optional or Special Features include where specified.

Fittings and Trim:
      Base Metal shall be Brass, Bronze or cast iron
      Exposed surface of fittings and trim shall be polished chromium plated for brass or bronze,
       polished or sand blasted for cast iron.
      Traps shall be required for all fixtures and depth of water seal shall be not less than 50 mm
       or not greater than 100 mm.
      Accessible stops shall be provided for all water supplies.
      Fitting shall be applied to TS 11.
      An easily accessible stop valve for the water supply line shall be provided for each
       plumbing fixtures.




7.4.2 Sanitary Fixture Schedule



                                                                                                  182
Water Closets And Cistern

Western Water Closets

Arrangement: back to wall mounted pan with totally concealed low level cistern    and plumbing.

Pan: constructed from vitreous china to TS 800/3, 380mm high pan x 560mm projection with box
flushing rim and horizontal outlet, washdown action.

Seat: heavy duty seat and universal cover, top fixed easy release   plastics hinges and removable
covers.

Color: white

Pan connector: Flexible

Cistern: Flushing cistern for WC for concealed installation dual flush discharge valve

Fixing method: plugged and screw fixed to duct wall.

Eastern Water Closets

Vitreous china to TS 799, with water flush valve.

Urinal And Spreader

White vitreous china to TS 2947, with spreader and flush valve.

Wash Basins and Sinks

Wash Basin

Vitreous china to TS 605, wall mounted semi pedestal model

Dimension: 500*400 mm

Fitting: Basin mixer one-hole mounted, lavatory faucet supply pipe with       stop lavatory waste
with P-trap

Service Sink

Fixture: 18/10 Cr Ni Stainless Steel, Rectangular, counter top mounted


                                                                                              183
Dimension: 900*500mm.

Fitting: Sink faucet chromium plated with swivel spout. Cast iron sinks waste with S-trap Rim
cover and accessories.

Fabricated Accessory Items

Liquid Soap Dispenser

Wall mounted with lock. Shall be fabricated of type 304 (18-8),heavy gage stainless steel with
exposed surfaces satin finish Capacity 400 gr liquid soap. Shall be installed in all public toilets.

Soap Dish and Holder

Recessed type, vitreous china. Shall be installed in all shower locations.

Towel Bar

Surface mounted towel bar shall have chrome plated cast brass support posts. Shall be installed in
all shower locations.

Toilet Paper Holder

Recessed single roll toilet tissue dispenser with hinged hood shall be Vitreous china. Shall be
installed for all toilets..

Floor Drain

Cast iron, brass or plastic body with integral trap, chromium plated.

Floor Cleanout

Cast brass or bronze, chromium plate finished with counter sunk tap, screwed plug.

Trench and Grill

Trench and grills shall be acid and heat resistant (above 110 °C) from AISI 304 stainless steel.

7.5 Execution




                                                                                                   184
Components and accessories of plumbing fixtures & Equipment shall be installed as
manufacturer‟s instructions and shop drawings as approved by the Supervisor.

7.5.1 Wall Mounted Items

      Wall hung fixtures: provide backing plates for all items.
      Other mounting methods may be applied if approved by Supervisor.

7.5.2 Floor Mounted Items

Floor mounted fixtures shall be set and secure using anchor bolts.

7.5.3 Installation of Fixtures

All Units: set accurately and level.

Rough-ins : Carriers, drains and supplies accurately laid out, spaced and aligned for final fixture
location required.

Compression Stops: Each supply as specified.

Escutcheon: Each supply wall penetration.

Fixture Heights: As directed, unless otherwise shown; adjacent fixtures accurately aligned

Each fixture set: Square, plumb and level; rigidly secured to support free



from movement.

7.5.4 Sealant Work

       Required for rimless fixtures shown mounted under countertops.
       Clear or white, one component, pre-packaged silicone type as approved.
       Surfaces prepared and sealant installed and secured per manufacturers instructions
       Sealant joint widths not less than 3 mm not more than 6 mm
       Sealant depth not less than 6 mm
       Finish surfaces smooth and free from pits, strings or other irregularities.
       Sealant joints watertight throughout.




                                                                                                185
7.6 Domestic Water & Drainage Piping

7.6.1 General

The Contractor shall supply and deliver water piping materials, and install and test the plumbing
work together with apparatus.

Related Work

Plumbing fixtures and Equipment
Fire Protection Piping
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

References

TSE      - Turkish Standards Organization
ISO      - International Standard Organization

Submittals

      Certificate of Compliance
      Test Reports
      Manufacturer‟s Data
      Parts and Special Tools List
      Operation and Maintenance Manual

7.6.2 Product Requirements

General Requirements

Materials herein required shall be first quality of standard products of manufacturers

Domestic Water And Drainage Piping

7.6.2.2.1 Pipes And Fittings

All the pipes and fittings shall be conforming TS or approved equal.

7.6.2.2.2 Domestic Cold Water Piping

Domestic cold water piping inside the building shall be galvanized pipe for diameters 2” and
larger, pipe fittings conforming TS 11 or approved equivalent. Pipes with diameters smaller than


                                                                                              186
2” will be PPRC type. Concealed pipes shall be polypropylene pipe and fitting conforming TS
11451 or approved equivalent.

7.6.2.2.3 Domestic Hot Water Piping

Domestic hot water piping inside the building shall be galvanized pipe for diameters 2” and larger,
pipe fittings conforming TS 11 or approved equivalent. Pipes with diameters smaller than 2” will
be stable PPRC type. Concealed pipes shall be polypropylene pipe and fitting conforming TS
11451 or approved equivalent.

7.6.2.2.4 Sewer, Waste and Vent Piping

Sewer and waste system piping inside the building shall be centrifugal, lamella graphite cast iron
pipes and fittings and flexible stainless steel brackets conforming to DIN 19522 and EN 877 or
approved equivalent. Inside of the pipes are covered with epoxy and the pipes are impact,
corrosion, temperature, and uv rays resistant. Pipes must be fit sleeved at wall penetrations. Type
of joints shall be spigot and socket type.

7.6.2.2.5 Storm Water Piping

Unplastized Polyvinyl chloride pipes and fittings conforming to TS 275 or approved equivalent.
Pipes must be fitted sleeved at wall penetrations. Type of joints shall be spigot and socket type.




                                                                                                187
7.7 Valves And Strainers

All the valves and strainers shall be conforming TS or approved equal.
All valves shall be selected as following schedule unless otherwise specified on the drawings and
herein.
       Valves 50 mm in nominal size and smaller shall be brass body with threaded ends.
       Valves larger than 50 mm in nominal size shall be cast iron body, with flanged ends.
       Deionization water line valves will be aseptic diaphragm type 316 quality stainless steel.
        There will be no dead zone in valve body. Minimum working pressure of the valve will be
        6 kg/cm2.

7.7.1 Ball valves

Domestic cold and hot water valves shall be ball valves.
             Ball valves 50 mm in nominal size and smaller shall be bronze, full bore, stainless
steel solid bore, threaded ends, 10 kg/cm2 working pressure.

7.7.2 Butterfly Valves

HVAC system valves shall be butterfly valves.

      Valve body material shall be cast iron, bronze and bubble tight for shutoff at design
       pressure. Flanged and flangeless valves shall have 300 series corrosion-resistant steel
       stems and discs or bronze discs with moulded elastomer disc seals. Flow conditions shall
       be for regulation from maximum flow to complete shutoff by the throttling effect.
      Valves smaller than 200 mm shall be cast iron body shall have throttling handles.
      Valves 200 mm and larger shall be cast iron body shall have totally enclosed manual gear
       operators with adjustable balance return stops and indicators. Valves shall have a minimum
       of seven locking positions.
      50 mm and smaller shall be bronze body shall one-piece and three-piece design with male
       or female threaded end connections and shall be bubble tight for shutoff at rated operating
       pressure of valve. Provide 300 series corrosion resistant steel stem and disc assembly.
       Disc seal shall be suitable for liquid used in system in which valve is to be installed.
       Provide valves designed for throttling service use with valve lever and indicator
       adjustment.

7.7.3 Check Valves

Check Valves except attached to pumps shall be swing check type 10 kg/cm2. For sizes larger
than 65mm disc type check valves can be also be used.




                                                                                               188
7.7.4 Pressure Relief Valves

Pressure Relief valves shall be bronze body, spring loaded type with threaded end, set at 0,5
kg/cm2 higher than system pressure.

7.7.5 Strainers

      Strainers 50 mm in nominal size and smaller shall be bronze, Y - pattern, threaded ends
       with stainless steel basket, 6 kg/cm2 working pressure.
      Strainers larger than 50 mm nominal size shall be cast iron body, Y - pattern, flanged ends
       with stainless steel basket, 6 kg/cm2 working pressure.

7.7.6 Flexible Joints

Flexible joints shall be made of synthetic rubber with reinforcing, flanged ends and 6 kg/cm2
working pressure.

7.7.7 Water Meters and Gages

Water Meters

      Water meters 20 mm - 50 mm in nominal size shall be bronze body, vane wheel, double jet
       type with strainers and direct reading water flow accumulator, union coupling ends, with
       dry type indicating elements (magnetic or other).
      Water meters 65 mm in nominal size and larger shall be cast iron body, vane wheel, direct
       stream type with strainer and direct reading water flow accumulator, flanged ends, with
       dry type indicating elements (magnetic or other).

Pressure Gages And Compound Gages

      Outside diameter of gages shall be 100 mm and shall be equipped with a siphon tube and
       gage valve.
      Scale of gages shall indicate working pressure of system; and highest scale shall be 150
       percent to 300 percent of working pressure.
      Vacuum scale of compound gauges shall be 760 mm Hg.

Water Level Gages

      Water column type level gage shall be provided for domestic water storage tanks.
      Glass tube shall be 10 mm inside diameter with metal guard and shut-off valves.




                                                                                               189
7.7.8 Water Hammer Arrestors

Water Hammer Arrestors shall be furnished in all stainless steel construction. Pipe threads shall be
accurately machined to assure tight connection ¾” [ 19] male I.P.S. inlet is standard for the 100
and 200 size units, while 1” [25] male I.P.S. Inlet is standard for 300 thru 600 size units.

7.7.9 Eye Wash Units

The eye wash units shall be made of 10” (254 mm) diameter yellow impact plastic.
Standard Spray head Assembly; Chrome- plated brass spray head assembly with twin, soft flow,
eye wash heads and protective spray head covers. The integral flow control assures safe, steady
flow under varying water supply conditions from 30-90 PSI.
Valve; chrome-plated brass ½” IPS stay-open ball valve. Hand operated by a large, highly visible
push handle.
Pipe and fittings shall be galvanized steel and waste tee floor flange protected with safety yellow
coating.
Waste; dome-type strainer and 1 1/4” drain fitting furnished.
Water Supply; ½” IPS.

7.7.10 Auxiliary Materials and Accessories

        7.7.10.1                                                                       Pipe Hanger

General: Specially designed units for purposes intended; as approved by The Supervisor and in
accordance with specified requirements.

Rods : solid steel; sizes not less than as follows :

Supported Pipe                 Rod Diameter Size (mm)
80 and smaller                        M10
100 thru 125                          M12
150 and larger                        M16

Support Capacity Requirements:

      Not less than 5 times actual loading resulting from total weight of pipe when filled with
       water.
      Applies to entire hanger assembly, including connections or fastening to structures.
      Increase rod or connection sizes where necessary to meet these requirements.

 When supporting multiple pipes:



                                                                                                 190
      Hanger rods shall be 12 mm or greater.
      Width not exceeding 1.2 meters.
      Spacing between hangers not exceeding 2 meters.

Steel Parts: Hot-dip galvanized throughout, regardless of location where used.

       7.7.10.2                                                                             Gasket

Rubber: Durable and suited for pressure, temperature and water characteristic of work as required.

Liquid: Synthetic rubber compound specifically formulated for service intended.

       Sealing Tape

For threaded connections; Teflon tape and hemp fibres are suitable

       7.7.10.3                                                                           Adhesive

For polyvinyl chloride pipe; polyvinyl chloride resin in solvent specifically formulated for use
with specified pipe.




                                                                                                191
7.8 Execution

       7.8.1 Installation

Water Piping

Generally level and free from traps or unnecessary bends or offsets.
Common Trench with Sewer Lines:

      Permitted only when approved by The Supervisor in advance.
      Bottom of water line not less than 500 mm above top of sewer line at any point along
       common run.
      Not less than 500 mm horizontally between common trench lines.
      Bottom of water line supported on excavated shelf to one side of trench; which not less
       than pipe size plus 200 mm.

Connection to Existing Water Distribution Line: Flanged and Location Shown.

Deionozed Water Piping, Chemical Treatment & Testing

Contractor shall provide method of statement, system details and material approvals, deionized
water isometric drawings before the installation. All welding points shall have welding number
and these numbers will be identified in this isometric drawing. Contractor will submit the method
of statement, system details, isometric drawings and material approvals to controller. Installation
shall not begin before the approvals of the control Supervisor.
Contractor shall not use welding equipment and welders without certificate. Control Supervisor
shall also require the welding equipments calibration certificate, electrode certificate, welders
welding certificate (316 quality stainless steel ). Any welding done by unskilled person will be
removed by the controller.
Control Supervisor shall require X-ray for welding points. Contractor shall provide X-ray results.
Contractor shall have to re-make welding according to control Supervisors requirement.
Passivation will be applied to all welding points. 1 hour will be waited before cleaning the welding
points.

All cleaning agents will be provided by contractor. Approval of the control Supervisor will be
required for all cleaning agents.

All chemical treatment and passivation will be listed and all analysis of the samples will be written
for the approval of control Supervisor.
Cleaning agent and acids will be added to the water. Otherwise chemical reaction will be occur.
Chemical treatment and passivation system water temperatures will be detailed in the method of
statement for the approval of control Supervisor.


                                                                                                  192
Water Piping:
316L quality stainless steel pipe will be used for deionization water piping. Welding method of the
stainless steel pipes will be TIG (tungsten inert gas). There will be no dead zone for all deionized
water system.
Welder will be sure that two pipes will be at the same axis and there will be no deviation in the
axis of pipes before spot welding. There will be no cellular areas in the welded points.
Deionized water circulation will be provided by circulation pump. Deionized water velocity shall
be 2.5 m/sec.

Chemical Treatment:
Pipe volume will be calculated.
All cleaning will be done at 20-25ºC with deionized water
Cleaning agent and water will be added to storage tank to provide %1-2 solution.
Water volume in the system, cleaning agent portion, concentration of the solution, beginning and
final time will be noted.
This solution will be circulated minimum 3 hours in the pipe line.
System will be rinse till the inlet and exit PH, conductivity will be same.

Passivation of the System:
Passivation system volume and cleaning solution volume will be same.
Passivation will be done at 20-25ºC with deionized water
Air in the system will be removed.
Passivation solution will be circulated minimum 2 hours in the pipe line.
System will be rinse by deionized water till the inlet and exit PH, conductivity will be same.

Sewer Water And Storm Drain

Grade uniformly horizontal sanitary or storm drain piping inside building at 5-20 mm per 100 cm
for pipe 75 mm and larger, unless otherwise specified.
Run sewer piping as straight as possible. Make changes in direction required and using standard
offset fittings only and as approved for various location required.
Slope sewer uniformly between given elevations where invert elevation is shown.




                                                                                                 193
7.8.2 Piping Insulation

General

Anti-sweat insulation shall be provided with a vapour barrier jacket as specified herein after.

Application

Insulation shall be installed on aboveground, exposed and concealed water and drainage piping.
Insulation shall be omitted on the following items:
       Chromium plated pipe to fixture
       Vent Piping
       Buried piping
       Overflow and drain pipe for domestic water reservoir and pressure tank

Insulation Schedule

Anti sweat insulation shall be described as follows:

Exposed piping

      Closed cell electrometric rubber foam insulation covering for chilled water and hot water
       pipes.
      Adhesive tape

Concealed piping

      Closed cell electrometric rubber foam insulation covering for chilled water and domestic
       cold and hot water pipes. Insulation material must have a thermal conductivity less than
       0,036 W/mK conforming to DIN 52613, water vapour diffusion µ greater than 5000
       conforming to DIN 52615, fire propagation class 0 conforming to BS 476 Part 6.
      Adhesive tape.
      Kraft paper.
      Vinyl tape.




                                                                                                  194
Under floor or piping pit

      Closed cell electrometric rubber foam insulation covering for chilled water and domestic
       cold and hot water pipes. Insulation material must have a thermal conductivity less than
       0,036 W/mK conforming to DIN 52613, water vapour diffusion µ greater than 5000
       conforming to DIN 52615, fire propagation class 0 conforming to BS 476 Part 6.
      Adhesive tape.
      Asphalt roofing.
      Asphalt jute tape.
      Asphalt primer.

Thickness of insulation covering shall be not less than 6 mm for elastomeric pipe insulation.
Thickness of insulation will increase with sizes according to condensate calculations.

7.8.3 Pipe Sleeves

In all cases where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceiling and footings, the Contractor shall
provide sleeves which shall be built in and shall be responsible for ensuring that is this performed
correctly. Sleeves shall in no case be used as pipe supports, a free annular space always being
provided. Puddle flanges shall be provided on pipe work passing through walls and trenches
intended to be covered by earth. Etc., or where passing through bund walls. Puddle flanges shall
be provided on pipework passing through walls of water tanks.
Sleeves shall be of pipe cutting properly reamed, cleaned and trimmed at 90° to bore.
Sleeves in non-load bearing walls, floors ceiling and partition shall be PVC or black steel to suit
the particular pipe materials.
The space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed with a water tight mastic or silicon rubber
compound. Gland plates not less than 6 mm. thick shall be fitted if necessary to withstand water
pressures. Details of all sleeve arrangements through liquid-tight walls shall be submitted for
approval.

Where pipes pass through fire barriers proved proprietary approved fire rated mechanical seals
shall be provided or alternatively steel sleeves shall be installed with the space between the sleeves
and pipework sealed with suitable fire rated material.

External flashing sleeves shall be provided by the Contractor except where indicated otherwise.
They shall incorporate an integral flange to witch a flashing shield can be clamped or welded. The
Contractor shall build the shield in to the membrane and fill the space between the sleeves and
pipe with waterproof materials or mastic compound.
For pipes which change direction, oversized sleeves, the size larger than normal shall be fitted to
allow for expansion. The space between the pipe enclosed and its sleeve shall be caulked with
suitable filling material to be approved by the Supervisor.



                                                                                                   195
Sleeves shall not protrude from the finished face of walls. In toilets, kitchens and all other
situation where the floor may be swilled, the sleeve shall project 30 mm. above the finished floor
level.

7.8.4 Hydrostatic Tests

The Contractor shall allow for hydraulic testing the installation in sections as may be required in
order to conform with the program. All pipework in these sections shall be sealed and tested as
specified below, so that the insulation can be applied and the section completed to assist the
program.

Hydrostatıc Test For Water Pipe Work

After completion of the piping connection and before pipe covering, the openings shall be closed
before installing equipment. The entire hot and cold water piping system shall be tested at
hydrostatic pressure not less than 2 times the operating pressure for 8 hours.
The test shall be made with the pressure test apparatus with pressure gage and before proceeding
the test ends with all branching pipes shall be plugged .The pressure gauge shall be placed at the
lowest point of the installations, if the pressure does not disclose downward inclination in 6-8
hours, it shall mean that all the pipes and joints are proper, otherwise the defective place should be
traced and after remedying the defects, the test shall be repeated. When a portion of the piping
system is concealed before completion of the entire system, the portion shall be tested separately
as specified for the whole system; the system shall be vented of all air before testing.
Gas pipe work shall be tested according to local municipality directions.
The pressure shall be maintained for a period of eight hours in each case, and due allowance shall
be made for attendance by the Supervisor during the progress of such tests. The Contractor shall
also be responsible for arranging for the water authority to witness this test should they require to
do so. Any equipment fitted not suitable for this pressure shall be adequately protected or isolated
from the system during the test.
The test pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated test pump or, in the case of
long main or mains of large diameter, by a power driven test pump which shall not be left
unattended. In either case precaution shall be taken to ensure the required pressure is not exceeded.
Pressure gage should be recalibrated before the tests.
The Contractor shall provide all the test pumps and other equipment required to carry out the
pressure tests.
Hydrostatic Tests Of Above Ground Drainage System

All soil, waste and ventilating pipe system forming part of the above ground installation shall be
tested with water.
Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections
If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be filled with water to the point of
overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the


                                                                                                   196
section under test shall be tightly plugged and each section shall be filled with water and tested at
least 3m. head of water.
In testing successive sections, at least the upper 3m. of the next preceding section shall be tested so
that each joint or pipe in the building except the uppermost 3m. of the system has been submitted
to a test of at least a 3m. head of water
The water shall be kept in the system or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before the
inspection starts, the system shall then be tight at all joints.
Waste and soiled water pipe shall be inspected and tested before and after installation. The
complete discharge service shall be tested for soundness and performance to the Supervisor.
Any defects revealed by the tests shall be made good by the Contractor and the test repeated to the
Supervisor‟s approval.

8. Fire fighting system

8.1 General

The Fire Fighting Works shall comply in all respects to the requirement set out in local regulation
or NFPA codes.
The Contractor shall include for all appurtenances and appliances not only specified or shown on
the drawing but which are necessary for the completion and proper functioning of the Works.

8.1.1 Related Work:

Water piping
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

8.1.2 References:

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

8.1.3 Submittals:

      Certificate of Compliance
      Test Reports
      Manufacturer‟s Data
      Parts and Special Tools List
      Operation and Maintenance Manual



8.2 Fire Water Piping Materials

All the pipes and fittings shall be conforming TSE or DIN or approved equal.



                                                                                                    197
8.2.1 Pipes and Fittings

Fire water piping shall be black steel pipe for sprinkler system and galvanized steel pipe for fire
cabinet system conforming to TS 301 or approved equal. Pipe hangers shall be appropriate to
seismic installation. Maximum distance between two hangers shall not be more than 4m and
maximum distance from the end point or sprinkler head shall be 60 cm.

8.2.2 Valves

All the valves and strainers shall be conforming TS or DIN or NFPA or approved equal.

      Valves 50 mm in nominal diameter and smaller shall be bronze body, rising stem type, one-
       piece wedge, screwed in bonnet gate valve with threaded ends, (0S&Y) UL/FM listed, 10
       kg/cm2 working pressure.
      Valves 65 mm in nominal diameter and larger shall be cast iron wedge gate valve, inside
       screw, rising stem, bolted bonnet; flanged (OS&Y) UL/FM listed 10 kg/cm2 working
       pressure.
      Valves 50-300 mm in nominal size cast iron body butterfly valve with high nitrile rubber
       liner moulded form resilient seat and end seals; wafer type between flanges fitting with
       flange aligning drilled lugs; lever operated UL/FM listed with supervisor switch 10 kg/cm2
       working pressure.
      Check valve up to 50 mm in nominal size bronze swing check valve; renewable nitrile
       rubber disk; screwed – in cap; UL/FM Listed 10 kg/cm2 working pressure.
      Check valve 65-300 mm in nominal size cast iron swing check valve ; zinc-free bronze
       trim; bolded cover; resilient seated; flanged UL/FM Listed 10 kg/cm2 working pressure.
      Drain valves up to 32 mm in nominal size bronze gate non-rising stem; screw – in bonnet;
       One-piece wedge ; ANSI/ASME 16.3 10 kg/cm2 working pressure.

8.2.3 Insulation

The insulated piping shall be as follow:
      Under Ground Fire: Factory applied bitumen or coal-tar coated.




8.3 Fire Fighting Equipment

8.3.1 Pump Specifications

      Pump body should be GG-25 cast-iron.
      Pump impeller should be bronze.


                                                                                                198
     Pump shaft should be AISI 316 or AISI 304 .
     Shaft bush: Stainless steel AISI 304
     Impermeability should be provided by 5 lines of soft seal.
     Bearing should be provided by ball bearings.

8.3.2 Pump Performance

     Water speed should not exceed 3 m/sec.
     Pressure at zero flow should not be more than 140% of the nominal pressure.
     When required it should be able to work at 150% of its nominal flow rate and should be
      able to provide 65% pressure.
     Motor power should be selected according to the 150% of the nominal values.
     The type of operation should not let it make suction.
     At the nominal value, the NPSH should not be more than 4,5 mt .

8.3.3 Components

     No collectors should be present at the suction line. Each pump should separately connected
      to the vessel by black steel pipes at 10 diameters length
     On the suction side, PN10 rising stem valve should be used. (optionally with supervisory
      switch)
     On the suction line, there should be a glycerin vacuummeter with Ø100 threaded
      connection, to work betw. 0-6 bar.
     Suction side vacuummeter tap; DN 15 ball type
     On the suction side, one eccentric reduction-same diameter with the suction line
     All pumps should be cooled with Casing relief valve. It should be threaded, with corner
      type lock.
     On the discharge line, there should be a glycerin vacuummeter with Ø100 threaded
      connection, to work betw. 0-6 bar.
     Discharge side vacuummeter tap; DN 15 ball type
     Discharge line valve should be either PN 16 rising stem or manuelly controlled with gear
      box.
     On the suction line, there should be concentric reduction
     Suction line gate valf should have Swing or Disco plastic gland.
     Discharge collector should be painted black steel, at 2 diameters length, with 1” ball
      discharge valve.
     The connections of the detection line of the pressure switch should be crom covered, and
      threaded.
     Pump base should be steel sheet and painted. Should have vibration absorber if required.
     For each pump double pressure switches that can back-up each other should be used.
      Enclosure class should be IP 55, and have mercury switch.


                                                                                             199
       If required, there should be a solenoid valf for weekly tests.
       Flowmeter-optional

8.3.4 Jockey Pump

The pressure of the jockey pump should be 10% higher than total pressure and the flow should be
5% of the nominal flow.

8.3.5 Pump Pipe and Component Sizes


 Pump flow      Suction       Discharge      Safety       Safety valve      Flowmeter
 (gpm)           Line            Line          Valve        Disch.pipe

  25           DN25            DN 25        DN 15        DN15            DN32

  50           DN40            DN 32        DN 32        DN40            DN50

  100          DN50            DN 50        DN 40        DN50            DN65

  150          DN65            DN 65        DN50         DN65            DN80

  200          DN80            DN80         DN50         DN65            DN80

  250          DN100           DN80         DN50         DN65            DN100

  300          DN100           DN100        DN65         DN100           DN100

  400          DN100           DN100        DN80         DN125           DN100

  450          DN125           DN125        DN80         DN125           DN100

  500          DN125           DN125        DN80         DN125           DN125

  750          DN150           DN150        DN100        DN150           DN150

  1000         DN200           DN150        DN100        DN200           DN150

  1250         DN200           DN200        DN150        DN200           DN150

  1500         DN200           DN200        DN150        DN200           DN200




                                                                                            200
  2000        DN250          DN250       DN150        DN250            DN200

  2500        DN250          DN250       DN150        DN250            DN200

  3000        DN300          DN300       DN200        DN200            DN200

8.3.6 Electrical panels

      Panel should be electrostatic RAL 3000 painted, made of 1.5 mm sheet metal.
      Panel should have a protection class of IP55.
      Panel should be lockable.
      Cable connection terminals should be under the panel.
      Pressure switch should be inside the panel, and it should be possible to change the settings
       without opening it.
      Should have Automatic-Manuel selector switch (no “off” positions).
      It should be possible to operate the pump by the pressure switch and also through a button
       on the panel. This button should not be connected to the Automatic-Manuel selector switch.
      Pump should start when start button is pushed, and stop when the stop button is pushed. If
       the pressure is not enough, then pump should restart working. The stop button should not
       be locked type.
      If the pump works automatically, due to the automatic stop system when all conditions are
       back to normal, the min. working timer unit should able the pump to stop after at least 10
       min.
      There should be weekly tests and pump should work for 10 min.
      The jockey pump should have automatic-off-manual operation button.
      In order to watch the feed to the panel, there should be one normally closed contact when
       energised.
      In order to monitor the operation of pumps, there should be a normally open contact
      In case of fault, there should be normally open Common Fault contact.
      In the panel there should be; Ampermeter, Voltmeter,
       1.      Pump working signal
       2.      Jockey pump working signal
       3.      Pump stopped signal
       4.      Pump failure signal
       5.      Signal to show min-max. Water levels in the tank
       6.      Automatic operation signal
       7.      Automatic operation off signal
       8.      Phase failure signal
       9.      Phase, main power supply insufficient signal
       10.     Extra lamp test button to check the signal lamps
       11.     None of the failure signals should stop the pump.


                                                                                                201
       12.      In case of failure, audial alarm should start and warning lamps should illuminate.
      The power cut-off switch of the panel should be selected at a current value which is 15%
       more than the total load at start-up.
      The fire operation contactor should have a nominal current which is 50% higher than the
       direct pump motor starting current.
      There should not be any thermal protection.
      Jockey pump should have thermal protection.
      Jockey pump should be DOL.
      Main pump should be either DOL or SD.
      There should be phase number and order relays to monitor that all three of the supply
       phases of the panel are present and in correct order.
      There should be condensation –preventing thermostats inside the pump control panels for
       pumps that will be used in humid environments.

8.3.7 Fire Department Connection

Fire Department connection shall be installed at building to the fire fighting header. Fire
Department Connection shall consist two filling inlets 2 1/2” x 2 ½” and connected to the 6”
piping, suitable for wall installation, double clapper, completed with local Fire brigade adapters,
6” check valve and the automatic ball drip valve. Depends on application, a back pressure valve
and a cap secured with a suitable length of chain shall be proved. It shall conform to the
requirement of the local authorities. All fittings shall be located on the external wall at ground
level the requirement of the local authorities.

8.3.8 Fire Hose Cabinets

The hose cabinet shall be fixed, exposed or recessed type as indicated on the drawing and
conforming to TS EN 671-1.

Fire Hose Cabinets:
       Steel plate of 1.5 mm thick, welded construction, factory fabricated.
       Flush hinged door with spring latch and pull type handle.
       The finishing shall be melamine resin painted and colour approved by Supervisor, prior to
       painting.
       Provide indication of "FIRE HYDRANT" on front surface.
      The dimensions shall be suitable to install a 6 kg dry chemical type portable fire
       extinguisher inside the cabinet.

Fire Hydrants:
      Suitable for local fire connection, Ø100 mm nominal size and consist two filling inlets 2
       1/2” x 2 1/2”, 10 kg/cm2 nominal pressure.



                                                                                                202
      Fire hose connection shall be on quick press (Mechanical coupling) type.
      Conforming to TS EN 671.

8.3.9 Fire Hose

      Cotton or synthetic reinforced fiber hose with rubber lining.
      Coupling shall be cast bronze, chromium plated, storz type.
      Shall provide 20 meter lengths for each fire hose cabinet and 1” in size.

8.3.10 Hose Reel

      Hose Reel center part shall be rust proof material.
      Shall provide capacity to store 25 mm nominal size fire hose of 20 meter length.

8.3.11 Nozzle

      Aluminum or brass tube fire fighting nozzle with fire hose connection, nozzle opening 25
       mm (1"). The nozzle must be fog type to ensure multipurpose spraying characteristics.
      Fire hose connection shall be 25 mm nominal size and coupling type.




                                                                                            203
8.4 Fire Extinguisher and Bracket

8.4.1 General

The Contractor shall include for all appurtenances and appliances not necessary called for in this
specifications or shown in the drawings but which are necessary for the completion and
satisfactory functioning of the works.

8.4.2 Bracket

      Steel plate welded construction to mount fire extinguishers on wall.
      Provide securely holding and release with one action.
      Finishing shall be melamine resin painted.

8.4.3 Fire Extinguisher

      Dry chemical type portable fire extinguisher for general purpose.
      Weight of chemicals shall be 3 kg and 6 kg as indicated on the drawings.

8.5 Execution

Piping work shall be in accordance with 4. Section 1 Fire Water Piping.

9. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning equipment

9.1 General

9.1.1 Section Includes

The Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test and commission the air-conditioning and
ventilation work together with all accessories necessary for operation.

9.1.2 Related Work

Air Distribution
HVAC Instrumentation and Control
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

9.1.3 References

ISO - International Standard Organization



                                                                                               204
9.1.4 Submittals

      Certificate of Compliance
      Test Reports
      Manufacturer‟s Data
      Parts and Special Tools List
      Operation and Maintenance Manual

9.2 Air Conditioning Equipment Product Requirements

9.2.1 Materials

Materials specified herein shall be first quality of standard products of manufacturers regularly
supplied.

9.2.2 Air Conditioning Equipment

Air Cooled Screw Chiller

General:
     The air-cooled liquid chiller shall be factory assembled, and shall be delivered as single-
      piece. All factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (HFC-134a or R 407 C),
      required prior to field start-up, shall be contained within the unit cabinet.

Unit cabinet:
      Frame shall be made of U steel beam and protected by paint.
      The control box plates shall be steel and painted.

Fans:
     Condenser fans shall be direct-driven, shrouded-axial type, shall be statically and
      dynamically balanced, and made of recyclable material with inherent corrosion resistance.
      Air shall be discharged vertically upward.

Compressors:
    Unit shall have semi-hermetic twin-screw, with gear or gearless type compressors with
     internal muffler and check valve.
    Each compressor shall be equipped with a discharge shut-off valve.
    Capacity control shall be provided by pilot-operated solenoid valve or sliding valve,
     capable of reducing unit capacity to 10% of full load.
    Automatic capacity control at points between %10-12,5 and 100% of full duty and shall be
     fully modulating. Compressor shall start in unloaded condition.



                                                                                              205
      Motor cooling shall be provided by direct liquid injection and protected by internal
       overload thermistor.
      Lube oil system shall include pre-filter and internal filter capable of sensitive filtration.

Evaporator:
     Unit shall be equipped with a single flooded evaporator or direct expansion evaporator:
     Evaporator shall be tested and stamped in accordance with applicable American or
      European pressure code for a refrigerant-side operating pressure of 1550-1700 kPa and for
      a maximum water-side pressure of 1000 kPa.
     Shall be mechanically cleanable shell-and-tube type with removable heads.
     Tubes shall be internally-enhanced, seamless-copper type, and shall be rolled into tube
      sheets.
     Shell, shall have K factor to prevent condensation.
     Shall incorporate multi independent refrigerant circuits.
     Shall have an evaporator drain and vent.
     Shall incorporate a refrigerant level control system.

Condenser:
    Coil shall be air-cooled with integral subcooler, and shall be constructed of aluminum fins
     mechanically bonded to internally finned copper tubes. The tubes are then cleaned,
     dehydrated, and sealed.
    Condenser coils shall be leak tested and shall be pressure tested at 3300 kPa.
    Condenser-fan motors shall be 3-phase type with permanently-lubricated bearings and
     Class F (minimum) insulation.

Refrigeration circuits:
Refrigerant circuit components shall include oil separators, high and low side pressure relief
devices (according to applicable standards), discharge and liquid line shut-off valves, filter dryers,
moisture indicating sight glasses, electronic expansion devices in step controlled units and
thermostatic control in proportional control devices, refrigerant economizers on certain units, and
complete operating charge of both refrigerant (HFC-134a, R 407 C or equivalent which have no
harm to ozone layer) and compressor oil.

Controls:
Unit controls shall include as a minimum: the micro-processor, the LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE
selector b. shall be capable of performing the following functions:

      Automatic change-over between the main compressor and the non-active compressor(s).
      Capacity control based on leaving chilled fluid temperature with return fluid temperature
       sensing.




                                                                                                   206
     Limiting the chilled fluid temperature pull-down rate at start-up to an adjustable range of
      0.1°C to 1.1°C per minute to prevent excessive demand spikes at start-up.
     Enable adjustment of leaving chilled water temperature according to the return water
      temperature or the out-door temperature or (sensor supplied as standard) by means of a 0-
      10 V signal.
     Provide a dual set point for the leaving chilled water temperature activated by a remote
      contact closure signal.
     Enable a 2-level demand limit control (between 0 and 100%), activated by a remote contact
      closure or a 0 to 10 V signal.
     Control evaporator water pump and, if installed, safety pump operation.
     Enable automatic changeover in the main phase or shut-down of three chillers in a single
      system.
     With two times scheduling programs enable unit start-up control and set-point change.
     Chillers to be fully compatible and interfaced to BMS
Diagnostics:
     Display module shall be capable of displaying set points, system status (including
      temperatures, pressures, current for each compressor, run time and percent loading), and
      any alarm or alert conditions.
     The control shall allow a quick test of all machine elements to verify the correct operation
      of every switch, circuit breaker, contactor etc. before the chiller is started.
     The control shall be capable of balancing the compressor operating times and the number
      of compressor start-ups.
     Control shall based on throttling optimises evaporator charging, ensuring condenser
      superheat and subcooling.




                                                                                               207
Safeties :

Unit shall be equipped with all necessary components, and in conjunction with the control system
shall provide the unit with protection against the following:
       Loss of refrigerant charge.
       Reverse rotation.
       Low chilled water temperature.
       Low oil pressure (per compressor).
       Current imbalance.
       Thermal overload.
       -High pressure.
       Electrical overload.
       Loss of phase.

Fan motors shall be individually protected by a circuit breaker.
Control shall provide general alarm remote indication for each refrigeration circuit.
Control system shall have a RS485 serial output port.

Operating characteristics:
      Unit shall be capable of starting and running at full load at outdoor ambient temperatures
       from 0°C to 46°C.
      Unit starting up according to entering fluid temperature to the evaporator shall be
       acceptable.

Electrical characteristics:
      Unit electrical power supply shall enter the unit at one or two locations.
      Unit shall operate on 3-phase power supply without neutral.
      Unit with two compressors shall have a factory-installed, star-delta starter to limit electrical
       inrush current.
      Control voltage shall be supplied by a factory-installed transformer.
      Unit shall be supplied with factory-installed electrical disconnect switch/circuit breaker.

Quality assurance:
Unit construction shall comply with European directives:

      Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC, modified
      Electromagnetic compatibility directive 89/336/EEC, modified, and the applicable
       recommendations of European standards:
      Machine safety: electrical equipment in machines, general regulations, EN 60204-1
      Electromagnetic emission EN 50081-2
      Electromagnetic immunity EN 50082-2.


                                                                                                    208
Unit shall be designed, manufactured and tested in a facility with a quality assurance system
certified ISO 9001.
Unit shall be tested at the factory.

Delivery, storage and handling:
Unit controls shall be capable of withstanding 55°C storage temperatures in the control
compartment.

Air Conditioning Pumps

Component specifications of pumps are as follows:

     Casings shall be cast iron conforming to EN 1561 or equivalent. Impellers shall be bronze
      conforming to EN 1561 or approved equivalent.
     Main shafts shall be stainless or tempered steel and shall be of construction that will
      prevent oils from mixing with supply water.
     Bearings shall be lubricated by the turbine oil with oil-bath housing.
     Rotating parts shall be well balanced and with no vibration.
     Vibration isolators shall be provided for each pump, and shall be selected for location and
      weight of pump and expected vibration.
     Vibration isolators shall require the Supervisor‟s approval prior to installation.
     The motor speed shall not exceed 1450 rev/min unless otherwise stated. The performance
      shall be accordingly.
     The motor enclosure class shall be IP 54
     Motor insulation must be Class F according to IEC 85 and motor shall be built in the device
      transmit remarkable high temperature of motor coil
     Seal shall be mechanical seal.

Accessories

Pumps shall be provided with following accessories for each unit :
    Gate valve for discharge and suction piping.
    Check valve for discharge piping.
    Strainer for suction piping.
    Air cock and drain cock.
    Pressure gage with siphon tube and gage valve.
    Priming water funnel with cock.
    Companion flanges, bolts, washers, nuts and packing for piping connections.
    Vibration isolators.
    Flexible joints for discharge and suction piping.


                                                                                              209
      Anchor bolts with washers and nuts.

Pump Types

Semi Wet Water Circulation Pumps :
Pumps shall be inline, specially designed for potable hot water installations, with semi-wet rotor,
manually adjustable 3 speed and heat insulation jacket. Motor protection function, operation /
failure signal and motor turning direction control signal shall be present on the pump.

      Pump casing                                GG 25, special option G-CuSn 5
      Pump wheel                                Composite (Polypropylene)
      Pump axis                                 X35CrMo17
      Beds                                      Resin nursed carbon
      Motor protection and insulation class     IP43/F
      Parasite spreading and influence class    EN 50081-1/EN 50082-2
      Potable water temperature                 max. 80°C (Water hardness max.
                                                20° dH)
      Heating water temperature                 max. 110 °C
      Operational pressure                      max. 10 bar (PN 16/DIN 2533)


Wet Rotor Circulation Pumps:
Pumps shall be inline, manually adjustable 3 speeds, with wet rotor and without packing box, its
motor shall have self-protection against blockage and excessive forces and with heat insulation
jacket. There shall be manometer connection holes at suction and pressure flanges of the pump,
and operation / failure signal and motor turning direction control signal shall be present on clamp
box of the pump.

      Pump casing                              GG 25
      Pump wheel                               Composite (Polypropylene) or
                                               stainless steel
      Pump axis                                X40Cr13
      Beds                                     Metal nursed carbon or stainless
                                               steel
      Motor protection and insulation class    IP43/F
      Parasite spreading and influence class   EN 50081-1/EN 50082-2
      Permissible water temperature            -10 °C / +120 °C'
      Operational pressure                     max. 10 bar (PN 16/DIN 2533)



Dry Rotor Circulation Pumps



                                                                                                210
Pumps shall be provided with mechanical packing box, sealed by means of a coupling operating
independently from the rotation direction. Electric motor shall be designed such that, beds are
strengthened and rotor axis is extended to bear the pump wheel. Motor and pump shaft shall be
one part and integrated. No coupling use shall be required. Mechanical packing box, shall be on a
bronze shaft. In 11 kW and higher powered pumps, there shall be a bimetal heat sensing
thermocouples located within motor coils. Suction and pressure flanges shall be PN 16 pressure
class, and similar nominal diameter, and manometer connection holes shall exist on it. In the
located division of mechanical packing box, there shall be air vent and dry operation risk of
packing box shall be minimized. Pump shall be delivered with original console connection
components with option for location on a pedestal, if required.

      Pump casing                               GG 25, special option GGG 40
      Pump wheel                                Composite or GG 20, special option
                                                G-CuSn5, stainless steel
      Bedding group                             GG 25
      Pump axis                                 X20Cr13
      Mechanical packing box                    SiC/Carbon/EPDM
      Electrical motor                          special design with reinforced bed,
                                                continuous axis
      Motor protection and insulation class     IP 55/F
      Permissible water temperature             0 °C … +140 °C'
      Operational pressure                      max. 16 bar

Equipment Requirement

Refer to equipment schedule.

9.2.3 Boilers

Boilers shall be installed at Technical Room and shall conform to the applicable requirements of
TS 497 or equivalent. Boiler shall also have efficiency and capacity report approved for fuel-oil.
Minimum efficiency for both fuels shall be %91. Hot-water boilers shall be, scotch type, smoke
and fire pipes shall be easily cleanable, minimum insulation shall be 80 cm, smoke box shall
prevent heat loss from the back side of the boiler and back sheet frame of the boiler shall be
equally heated and packaged units mounted on a skid-type structural steel base. Provide each
boiler complete burner and gas system, a forced or induced draft fan, an automatic electronic
control system, safety interlocks, limit controls and central control panel, and such trim and
appurtenances as are peculiar to water units as specified herein. Units shall be factory-wired and
assembled except for such readily installed appurtenances as safety valves, water columns, and
pressure gages. Units shall be complete and ready for operation when connected to water, gas and
electrical supplies. The operation pressure shall not be less than 4 bars. For filling the system the
pressure will be 0,5 bar less than operation pressure.


                                                                                                  211
9.2.4 Natural Gas Burner

Burner will be mono block. Natural gas burner will be progressive type and minimum modulation
ration shall be 6+1. Heating sensor operation range shall be -100ºC/500ºC. Burner fan shall be
centrifugal type with backward fan. Maximum air temperature shall be 60ºC. Maximum sound
level shall be 75 dB. Burner controls and safety equipment shall conform to applicable
requirements of TS 497 or equivalent. Mount controls; including operating switches, indicating
lights, gages, alarms, motor starters, fuses, and circuit elements of control systems on a single
control panel or cabinet designed for separate mounting not on burner. Locate flame scanner such
that testing and cleaning of scanner can be accomplished without disassembly of burner.

9.2.5 Boiler Trim

      Emergency Disconnect Switch
      Relief Valves
      Pressure and Altitude Gage or Combination Pressure/Altitude Gage
      Thermometer
      Drain Tapping
      Make-up Water Station
      Air Vent Valve
      Stack, Breeching, and Supports

Provide boiler stack constructed of stainless steel 316L having a thickness of not less than 1,5 mm
with welded joints. Insulate stack located outside the building with 50 mm of rock wool
conforming to applicable requirements of local authority. Insulation shall receive a finish coat of
stainless steel 304 or galvanized steel having a thickness of not less than 0,6 mm with welded
joints. Provide stack supports, umbrella collar and cap, and flue transition piece. Stack diameter
and height shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Stack supports shall be
designed, manufactured and installed in accordance with manufacturer‟s recommendations.

9.2.6 Natural Gas System

Natural gas system shall be designed according to local municipality rules.
Burner gas line must be formed as below:

      Pressure regulator
      Manometer (With shut off equipment)
      Gas filter
      Fuel shut off equipment
      Expansion joints (For DN40 and over)



                                                                                                212
      Fittings
      Fitting Equipment
      Mounting base

Gas line must be provided already mounted and packed.
At all times before the operation of burner, gas leakage must be controlled automatically at the
magnetic gas valves. Therefore, equipment, must be matched and there must be no need for the
any external connection.
Steam generator must be admitted with two stages feed water pump unit.
Feed water pump unit must be mounted under the feed water tank, must be resistant to 105ºC feed
water temperature, and must include the equipment below:

     Two stages piston actuated pump, 3 phases
     In line suction pressure increase pump (with motor), against cavitation
     Strainer (suction side)
     Gate valve
Feed pump unit must be admitted as mounted and packed.

Equipment Schedule

Refer to the equipment schedule

9.2.7 Chilled And Hot Water Headers

Type and Components

Chilled and hot water and condenser water headers shall be black steel pipes conforming to TS
301 or approved equivalent with steel plates welded construction or steel angle support.

      Headers shall be made by steel pipe.
      Provide hot-dip galvanized, after fabrication.
      Support shall be assembled from steel angle.

Accessories

The Contractor shall provide following accessories:

      Pressure gauge.
      Thermometer.
      Drain valve and piping.




                                                                                             213
9.2.8 Closed Type Expansion Tank

Components

      Furnish and install a diaphragm type hydraulic expansion tank especially designed for use
       on the service specified. Construct the compression tank of welded steel and equip with a
       butyl rubber flexible replaceable diaphragm to maintain a separation between the system
       water and the air cushion. Provide with bottom inlet connection for all water systems.
       Each tank shall bear an appropriate label for the minimum working pressure and
       temperature.
      Shall be mounted on a baseplate including pipes ready for connection.
      The minimum total tank volume and acceptable volume to be as design requirements.
       Provide a factory initial charge of 150 kPa.
      All the expansion tanks shall be tested under a hydrostatic test pressure of 1.5 times
       nominal operating pressure during manufacturing.
      The nominal operating pressures of expansion tanks shall be 4 bars and stated in equipment
       schedule.

Accessories

      Drain
      Safety valve
      Pressure switch

Equipment Requirement

Refer to the equipment schedule.

9.2.9 Automatic filling of systems

The automatic filling valve shall let the flow from one direction to another maintaining the
adjusted outlet pressure stay constant. The automatic filling valve shall consist pressure reducer,
non return valve, manometer and strainer all factory installed as a combined unit. The automatic
filling valve shall be ½” and operate between 1.5-7 bar and shall be set at operating pressure.

9.2.10 Air Handling Units

Panel Construction

Casing shall consist of panels having standard module length.
These panels shall be mounted to the frame such that they can be detached from outside and be
easily reached inside.


                                                                                                214
Unit frame and corner pieces shall be made of galvanized steel or aluminum so that unit would
perform at high fan pressures without deformation.
All panels, access doors and access panels shall be constructed with double skin.
Panels shall be made of galvanized sheet steel, outer panels shall be made of galvanized sheet steel
coated with polyester or painted with powder paint resistive to humidity. Cut out edges and
corners shall be painted specially to resist corrosion.
Panel thickness, excluding doors, shall be enough not to have a deformation for each air volume.
Inner and outer covering steel sheets shall be at least 1 mm thick.
Mechanical Strength of casing shall be at least Class 1A according to EN 1886.
Casing air leakage ratio shall be at least Class B according to EN 1886.
Isolation material in between the panels shall be fire-proof glass fiber or rock wool according to
NEN 3881 and IMCO A270 standards.
Preventing the panels from decation caused by condensation on the panels, heat transfer resistance
of the panels shall be 1.0-1.3 W/m2.K.
Panels shall have heat transfer coefficient specified by U of; class T5 for low air volume units and
T4 for high air volume units according to EN 1886.
Unit shall have panels having thermal bridging factor kb of; TB4 for low air volume units and TB3
for high air volume units.
Incase of the manufacturers not providing the permitted sound levels, external solutions shall be
applied to provide the required sound levels.
Unit shall have smooth inner and outer faces. By that while cleaning, dust and dirt particles shall
be rinsed easily.

Air Control Dampers

Control dampers shall have galvanized steel or aluminum frames.
Damper blades shall be made of galvanized steel or aluminum according to frame thickness and
shall be double skinned and designed aerodynamically.
Damper blades shall be mounted to the frame on plastic supports.
Dampers shall be of low-level-leakage class. To satisfy this feature, tips of the blades shall be
covered with rubber gaskets and frame shall also have double-layer gasket.
Damper blade shafts shall be related together to have a unique motion of all blades. Damper blades
shall have opposite direction of rotation with respect to each other.
Dampers shall be available for actuator connection or manual control.
For manual control dampers there should exist air volume scale, adjusting mechanism and damper
fixing mechanisms.

Filter Sections

Filter material shall be glass fiber for bag filters.




                                                                                                 215
Filter frame shall be made of galvanized steel such that air leakage levels around filters shall be
avoided. Filter inserts each of which having their own frame shall be mounted on the unit frame
satisfying air leakage of at most %0,5 of total air according to EN1886.
Filter efficiencies shall satisfy EN 779 and have certificates according to the specified standard
and test reports shall be provided for filters.

Attenuator Sections

Attenuator splitters shall be placed inside the casing and be at the specified points. Sound
reduction values shall not be lower than specified values for each spectrum.
Splitters shall have a rectangular prism form and designed and manufactured according to DIN
45.646 German standards.
Spaces between the splitters and mounting of each splitter shall be such that deformation will be
avoided and sound reduction principles will be satisfied.
Sound absorbing parts shall be made of inorganic, mineral wool satisfying Class 1 fire diffusion
rates and the surface shall be made of a media which is weaved, resistant to humidity and abrasion.
By that abrasion shall be avoided even the air velocity reaches up to 20 m/s between the splitter
surfaces.

Hot Water Coil Sections

Hot water coils shall satisfy the capacities given at the specified temperatures and pressure losses.
Coil face velocities shall not exceed 3,8 m/s.
Coils shall be constructed according to the characteristics of ASTM E36/E53 standard. Brass tubes
having outer diameters of ½”-5/8” and aluminum fins of Alloy 1100 specified in ASTM B209-78
shall be mechanically extruded to conclude in a tight fit by the help of self aligning fin collars.

For thermal extrusion, coil frame having sliding collars , shall be made of galvanized steel.
Collectors shall be made of steel and welded to the tubes.
Coils shall be mounted to the air handling unit by means of nuts and bolts and to avoid air by-pass
around the coil, special plates to complete the mounting shall be used for this purpose.
Coils shall be able to be detached from the specified service side by detaching the connecting
tubes for the circuit.
Water entry to the coils shall be at the bottom and exit at the top.
Pipe mounting holes shall be equipped with air tight gaskets.
Pipe connections on the coils shall be male thread.
Coils shall be able to operate at 16 bar manometric pressure.

Chilled Water Coil Sections

Coils shall satisfy the specified sensible and total capacities at the specified water entrance and
return temperatures and given water pressure losses.


                                                                                                  216
Coil face velocities shall not exceed 3,2 m/s.
Eliminators shall be used to avoid water drag. Eliminators shall be made of polypropylene
resistant to 120°C.
Coils shall be constructed according to the characteristics of ASTM E36/E53 standard. Brass tubes
having outer diameters of ½”-5/8” and aluminum fins of Alloy 1100 specified in ASTM B209-78
shall be mechanically extruded to conclude in a tight fit by the help of self aligning fin collars.
For thermal extrusion, coil frame having sliding collars, shall be made of galvanized steel.
Collectors shall be made of steel and welded to the tubes.
Coils shall be mounted to the air handling unit by means of nuts and bolts and to avoid air by-pass
around the coil, special plates to complete the mounting shall be used for this purpose.
Coils shall be able to be detached from the specified service side by detaching the connecting
tubes for the circuit.
Water entry to the coils shall be at the bottom and exit at the top and have opposite flow direction.
Pipe mounting holes shall be equipped with air tight gaskets.
Pipe connections on the coils shall be male thread or flanged according to the size.
Coils shall be able to operate at 21 bar manometric pressure.
Drain pan , serving both the coil and the eliminator , shall be placed under the coil and made of
polyester or stainless steel. This drain pan shall have double slope to prevent the risk a legionnaire
disease. Drain pan shall have 32 mm drain hall to drain the condensate water. A siphon shall be
supplied with the unit to maintain an air tight water trap and to dismiss the condensed water.

Fan Section

Fan kit shall have the following components; fan, electric motor, fan frame, flexible fan mounting
connection, fan base and anti-vibration feet.
Fans shall be double inlet and centrifugal, blades backward curved aerofoil type.
Fan inlets shall consist of aerodynamically shaped suction funnels made of galvanized, aluminum
or polyester
Fan rotor shall be statically and dynamically balanced with the fan shaft and v-belt drive ,deviation
not exceeding 1 gram according to Class Q6.3 of VDI 2060 or ISO 1940.
Fan shall be actuated with low energy V-belts and shall have ball bearings on beds. Bearings shall
have at least 25.000 hours of life at the specified conditions. Double belt system shall be used.
Standard fan motors shall be 3-Phase and shall run at 415V/ 3faz/50Hz.
Motor shall be totally closed and shall have the following characteristics; IP54,Class F isolation
and Class B (80°C) temperature class.
Motors shall start with either direct or star-delta method.
Fan and motor shall be mounted on a steel base frame with sledges anti-vibration feet shall be
mounted to the reinforced profiles underneath the air handling unit.
Fan outlet shall be connected to the fan section casing opening through a flexible material at a
length of at least 100 mm.
At the fan inlets and outlets sound data shall not exceed the specified values as dB for 10-12W and
at 63-8000 Hz frequency band.


                                                                                                   217
Equipment Requirement

Refer to the equipment schedule.

Cav Terminal Boxes

CAV controllers provide constant volume flow for supply air or extract air. The box consists of a
galvanized sheet steel casing with duct connections.
Circular spigot connection on high pressure side should comply with DIN 24 145 and DIN 24 146
with groove for lip seal. Low pressure side should be suitable for slide-on flange or angle flange
connection. Casing air leakage rate should comply with class II , VDI 3803 and DIN V 24 194 and
should conform to clean rooms class 3. Set volume should be controlled electronically with high
Differential pressure range for all units should be 20 to 1500 Pa. Operating temperature range for

Maximum operating pressure shall be 16 bar.

Diffusers with DIN Class 1 HEPA Filter and Plenum

Hygienic type diffuser unit, that blows in four directions and with plenum that holds the HEPA
filter. Square diffuser shall be fabricated from aluminum, appropriate for flush installation to
reflected ceiling. Grilles shall be four directional type. Their blades shall be fixed. Diffusers shall
be mounted on the lower face on the plenum boxes in the reflected ceiling. Plenum and filter unit
with features described below shall be mounted to the rear side of the grille. Air regulation can be
performed via damper at the entrance of the neck of plenum box behind the grille. This damper
shall be provided with a damper adjustment handle that can be reached from the room itself.
Except the operation room with laminar flow units, air distribution in all hygienic areas designated
as “Class 1” as per DIN 1946 Division 4, shall be made via air HEPA terminal boxes. Air terminal
boxes shall be fabricated from baked painted steel sheets and shall be provided with filter fixing /
holding mechanisms. There shall be differential manometer connection ends on the device for
investigation of working conditions. There shall be nozzles at the S or H13 class filter inlet in
order to apply test aerosol . HEPA filters fitting beds shall be airtight as per DIN 1946 Division 4
descriptions. There shall be a test mechanism on it for measuring this tightness. There shall be
duct connection, pressure box sections within the box. Inside of the box shall be disinfectable, and
when disinfected it shall not be affected from the disinfection materials. S class HEPA filters
covers shall be manufactured from humidity resistant MDF material. They shall have neoprene
gasket on one side. Filter material shall be humidity resistant (hydrophobic), high quality, fiber -
glass, filter paper bend intervals shall be separated with special textile strings and shall be tightly
attached to the cover with a high strength, elastic special material. Each filter shall undergo
sodium flame (NaCl) test and other tests as per DIN 24184 standards after they are manufactured;
and packaged in special reinforced, damage resistant casing. S or H13 class filters shall be of
minimum 99.997 % efficiency according to sodium flame test. Filters shall have DIN 24185 part 1


                                                                                                    218
standards complying test certificate. Filters, each to be separately tested during fabrication, shall
be installed to their locations after coming to the site. After installation, tightness tests and
particulate measurement test of each filter shall be performed and their compliance to the
standards shall be guarantied. Filters that are found as a result of tests that do not comply with the
requirements of the standards shall be replaced with new ones and no additional payment shall be
claimed for this replacement. Projecting, installation supervision and commissioning after
installation to location shall be included to the price of the item.

Diffusers With DIN Plenum

Hygienic type diffuser unit equipped with plenum, that can suck air from four directions. Square
diffusers shall be fabricated from aluminum, appropriate for flush installation to suspended
ceiling. Grilles shall be of four directional type. Their blades shall be fixed. located within ceiling
and fasten to the surface of the plenum box. A flow adjustment damper shall exist at plenum inlet,
and there shall be a damper adjustment handle that can be reached from the room itself.

Constant Air Volume Dampers

These dampers are air flow regulation units that operate automatically and are located at the
supply and exhaust ducts of the air conditioning system. It is appropriate for constant flow
systems, and used in circular cross-sectioned ducts complying with DIN 24145 and DIN 24146
norm. Casing and control blades shall be in galvanized, leaf spring shall be stainless steel. Control
blade shaft shall be supported in bearings and shall act as an oscillation damper. Units shall have
an operating temperature 10 to 50 C and differential pressure range 50 to 1000 Pa. Volume flow
range shall be 4:1. Volume flow adjustment and resetting shall be via external scale. Scale
accuracy shall be approximately ±4-±5. Operating temperature of the units shall be between 10-50
°C. Volume regulator installation, supervision and commissioning after installation shall be
included in the price.

Shut-Off Dampers

These dampers shall be located behind constant air flow regulators mentioned above. Shut-off
dampers shall comply with DIN 1946/Division 4 compatibility certificate. Thus, in case air
conditioning system stops functioning or there is power failure, these dampers shall shut off
automatically and prevent the air flow in the ducts that may disturb the hygienic quality of the air
within the building. Dampers shall be manufactured from galvanized steel sheet material, insulated
with thermoplastic gasket, and damper axis shall have bearing bed. Projecting, installation
supervision and commissioning after installation shall be included in the price. Air leakage ratio
shall be Class II according to VDI 3803 and DIN 24194 standards. Operation temperature shall be
between 10-50 ºC. Devices can operate under duct pressures s up to 1500 Pa. Damper installation,
supervision and commissioning after installation shall be included in the price.




                                                                                                    219
Precision A/C Unit

Precision A/C unit shall be modular type whose capacity would be increased with the addition of
new modules. Each module shall have its own gas cycle (evaporator, condenser, thermostatic
expansion valve, etc.), steam humidifier, dehumidification cycle, and electrical heater. Locations
that need high precision shall be climatized by this equipment.
A/C unit shall be microprocessor controlled. There shall be two microprocessors, one of which is
the primary and other is secondary one. Secondary microprocessor shall be automatically operated
in case of an error in the primary one. The microprocessor shall control the temperature within ±
0.5 ˚C and the relative humidity within ± 3% precision.
All electrical equipment shall be collected in a electrical room which has no contact with the air
flow. The unit shall be CE approved and the producer shall have DIN ISO 9001/EN 29001. R407C
shall be used as the cooling fluid.
Filter of the A/C unit shall be changeable from the front and be at least at EU4 quality. The
dirtiness of the filter shall be controlled from the pressure difference pressostat.
High capacity cooling coils shall be copper pipe aluminum winged type. Condensation pan shall
be made of aluminum and have a slope.
Fans shall be radial type and have bearings that need no lubrication or maintenance during their
lives. Fan body shall be made of aluminum that is corrosion resistant. Fan motor shall be 3-phased,
low velocity, adjustable drum tension type.
The unit shall have one hermetic scroll type compressor on extruded aluminum chassis with high
efficiency, with anti-vibration damper. The compressor and the other heat generating equipment
should not take place on the way of air flow.
Condenser coil shall be copper pipe aluminum winged type. Coil shall be in a corrosion resistant
aluminum body. Condenser fans shall be axial type and protectors on it to avoid accidents.
Condenser fans shall be controlled by fan speed controls that work according to the difference
between the outdoor temperature and the condensate temperature. Condenser shall be able to
operate with no problems between -20 ˚C and +40 ˚C.

Panel Type Radiators

Panel type radiators have main casing of dimension 1.25 mm and width of convectors 0.5 mm
which           are          made         of         cold         rolled         steel       sheet.
The radiators shall be in accordance with DIN 4704, BS 3528, AND TS 4310 and be resistant to
corrosion,                 impacts,               and                outer              conditions.
Radiators shall be coated with electrostatic powder paint after being completely cleansed though
immersion, spray oil cleansing, ferro phosphate coating, and passivation, and coated by
immersion.
Underneath connection is possible in floor heating and sheathed pipe systems. With thermostatic
valve, thermal control of radiators can individually be made for an efficient and economic heating.
Vent is either on the right or left.




                                                                                                220
9.3 Ventilation Equipment

9.3.1 Roof Fans

Roof type centrifugal fans shall meet the following conditions: It can be installed directly to a duct
system. It shall have a mounting pedestal composed of galvanized sheet. Fan lid shall be
composed of techno-polymer or aluminum material; and there shall be required air gaps for motor
cooling. Operating temperature shall be maximum 80 0C for horizontal projection fans and 60 0C
for vertical projection fans. It shall have 3 or 1 phase non-synchronized motor. It can be usable
with speed regulator. It shall have low noise level, galvanized steel sheet fabricated backwards
inclined winged propeller. Connection protection class shall be IP 44 Class B (High temperature
IP55 Class F). Fan housing shall be hinged or removable weather tight. Motors shall be totally
enclosed fan cooled type. Motors shall be provided with non-fusible, manual disconnect mount on
unit. Fans shall be provided with gravity dampers, bird screen. Lubricated bearings shall be
provided.

9.3.2 Polyproplene Exhaust Fans

They are inline centrifugal roof curb mounted type exhaust fans with vertical discharge and
suitable for operation in corrosive applications including plating, anodizing, fume handling,
laboratory fume cupboard exhaust, industrial washer, etc. All structural parts are made of UV
treated polypropylene and mounting hardware is stainless steel.
Suitable for operation in highly corrosive applications such as laboratory exhaust or the chemical
industry. Single block strong high density UV treated and recyclable polypropylene (PPH) with no
air leakage. All fan mounting hardware in stainless steel.
Forward curved centrifugal type impeller made of injection molded PPH. Fan wheel supplied with
motor shaft bushing and hub cap constructed of PPH. Wheels electronically and dynamically
balanced to ISO 1940.
Direct drive, asynchronous, single or three phase, IP55. Single speed : three phase 230/400 V -
50/60 Hz, single phase 230 V - 50 Hz. Explosion-proof motors available on request. Motor is
outside the corrosive airstream and accessible by removal of outer housing. Three phase motors
speed adjustable by variable frequency inverter drive.
PPH casing and wheel temperature resistance is recommended up to 80°C.

9.3.3 Chemical Fume Hood

Chemical fume hoods shall have energy store on the top; energy, working space, a control panel
and mobile bench cabinet under the benchtop of the fume hood.
One mobile cabinet is to be placed below each chemical fume hood. One of the cabinet is to have
a waste basket for collecting the waste crude oil and other organic solvents used for cleaning the
glassware.




                                                                                                   221
Mobile cabinet panels are to be made of 1.50 mm galvanized metal sheet coated with phosphate
epoxy electrostatic powder dye.
Feet of the vertical carriers are to have adjustable screwed apparates which are made of hard PVC.

Gas panel: it should be at the back side of the fume hood. This is for the absorption of the light and
heavy gases. Aspirator and lighting armature are to be attached to the inner top part of the fume
hood. Gases from working with the volatiles are to be evacuated from the top part of the panel.
Gases precipitated on the working space will be evacuated from the bottom part of the gas panel.

Benchtop (working space of a fume hood): 16mm TRESPA TOPLAB PLUS.
Inside the fumehood the following items are to be available as indicated in the contract of the
decoration plan :
Fittings for hot and cold water , 2 lpg gas and 1 vacuum lines.
Water fittings shall have the adapters to be connected to a hose.
There will be an energy panel under the benchtop. On this panel, there will be valves directly
connected to the fittings; and 5 commutators directly connected to the fan system, switch for the
lamp; fuses, and two ground sockets . All cables shall be connected to this panel from the back of
the panel.
Heavy guillotine glass in front of the chemical fume hood; thickness of this glass is to be 6 mm;
damper glass. Weight (as heavy as the guillotine glass) is to be attached to the weight canals at the
back side of the fume hoods, so that the guillotine glass can be moved to the desired extent.
H2S (hydrogen sulfide) gas detector will be put inside each fumehood.

Engine of the fume hood:
Maximum air- capacity: 1,450 cycles/minute with adjustable cycle button.
1450 m3 engine system
Absorption edge of the fan: 200 mm, with flexible pipe for the exhaust emission.
Lamp on the inner top of the fume hood compatible with the IP 55 Standard. 5 mm glass sanded
with acid is to be placed under the lamp.

9.3.4 Execution

Installation and testing of equipment shall be in accordance with manufacturer‟s instructions and
standards.




                                                                                                   222
10. HVAC air distribution

10.1 General

10.1.1 Section Includes

The Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test and commission the air-conditioning and
ventilation facilities with all accessories necessary for the operation of air conditioning and
ventilation work.

10.1.2 Related Work

Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Equipment
HVAC Instrumentation and Control
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

10.1.3 References

ISO - International Standard Organization

10.1.4 Submittals

      Certificate of Compliance
      Test Reports
      Manufacturer‟s Data
      Parts and Special Tools List
      Operation and Maintenance Manual




                                                                                                  223
10.2 Air Conditioning Piping

10.2.1 Pipes and Fittings

Chilled Water and Hot Water Piping in Building

      Chilled water pipes shall be black steel pipe conforming to TS 301 or approved equivalent
       .The nominal operating pressure shall be 10kg/cm²
      Hot water pipes shall be black steel pipe conforming to TS 301 or approved equivalent. The
       nominal operating pressure shall be 10kg/cm²

Drain Piping

PPR pipe conforming to DIN 4660 or approved equivalent and fittings jointed by PPR welding
machine. The nominal operating pressure shall be 10 kg/cm².

Make Up Water Piping

Galvanized steel pipe, conforming to TS 301 or approved equivalent and malleable iron, threaded
pipe fittings. The nominal operating pressure shall be 10kg/cm².

10.2.2 Valves and Piping Accessories

Butterfly Valves

HVAC system valves shall be butterfly valves.

      Valve body material shall be cast iron, bronze and bubble tight for shutoff at design
       pressure. Flanged and flangeless valves shall have 300 series corrosion-resistant steel stems
       and discs or bronze discs with moulded elastomer disc seals. Flow conditions shall be for
       regulation from maximum flow to complete shutoff by the throttling effect.
      Valves smaller than 200 mm shall be cast iron body shall have throttling handles.
      Valves 200 mm and larger shall be cast iron body shall have totally enclosed manual gear
       operators with adjustable balance return stops and indicators. Valves shall have a minimum
       of seven locking positions.
      50 mm and smaller shall be bronze body shall one-piece and three-piece design with male or
       female threaded end connections and shall be bubble tight for shutoff at rated operating
       pressure of valve. Provide 300 series corrosion resistant steel stem and disc assembly. Disc
       seal shall be suitable for liquid used in system in which valve is to be installed. Provide
       valves designed for throttling service use with valve lever and indicator adjustment.

Check Valves



                                                                                                224
Check Valves except attached to pumps shall be swing check type 10 kg/cm2. For sizes larger than
65mm disc type check valves can be also be used.

Pressure Relief Valves

Pressure Relief valves shall be bronze body, spring loaded type with threaded end, set at 0,5 kg/cm2
higher than system pressure.

Strainers

      Strainers 50 mm in nominal size and smaller shall be bronze, Y - pattern, threaded ends
       with stainless steel basket, 6 kg/cm2 working pressure.
      Strainers larger than 50 mm nominal size shall be cast iron body, Y - pattern, flanged ends
       with stainless steel basket, 6 kg/cm2 working pressure.

Flexible Joint

Flexible joints shall be made of synthetic rubber with reinforcing, flanged ends and 6 kg/cm2
working pressure.

Expansion And Contraction Of Pipework

Expansion and Contraction of Pipework, expansion joints, guides, and anchor points, as required,
whether or not shown on the drawing shall be installed to resist the maximum stresses of the
pipework, formed by the Contractor.

Expansion Loops and Bends

All pipework shall be installed to accommodate without distortion the linear expansion when
heated. Pipe supports shall be of the type, which will allow full movements of the pipes except at
fixed points which shall be provided as necessary between expansion bends, or sets. The fixed
points shall be secured by anchors of an approved design.

The Contractor shall provide and fix all the requisite expansion loops formed in the pipe runs by
means of long radius welded sweep elbows to the required dimensions. The loops shall be installed
in the mains with mild steel flanges and each leg of the loop shall be pulled cold to approximately
50% of the estimated expansion of the leg.

Where no bellow or loops are specified, provision for expansion and contraction of pipework shall
be made by changes in direction and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor make sufficient
allowance for this.

Branch connections are to be taken from the top or bottom of both flow and return mains,
depending on the prevailing air venting arrangements. Branches shall have incorporated in them

                                                                                               225
two bends before passing into ducts, trenches, vertical chases, etc. The bends shall be arranged so as
to take up the expansion and contraction of the mains without putting any extraneous strain onto the
particular branches.

The Contractor shall install piping in a manner so as to permit perfect freedom of is movement
during expansion and contraction operations without causing it to become warped. The strain and
weight of the piping must not be transmitted to the connected apparatus.

The Contractor shall ensure that adequate provision is made for the expansion and contraction of all
pipelines.

Where expansion fittings become necessary they must be anchored and guided in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations and/or these Specifications.

The Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed fittings for approval, together with all
calculations and details of loading imposed on the structures.

Where branch connections are made to mains remote from anchor points on the latter, the take off
shall be so arranged as to form a radius arm whereby the axial movement of the main is allowed to
take place without imposing a bending stress upon the branch.

With a view to reducing strain due to expansion on plant and equipment of any description, whether
indicated on Drawings or otherwise, the Contractor shall ensure that the connecting pipes are
suitably set and include such expansion fittings as required. The fixed point is being taken at the
plant or equipment.

The Contractor shall ensure that the required “cold draw” is provided. The jointing of the loops and
expansion fittings shall not proceed until it is shown, to the satisfaction of the Supervisor‟s
Representative, that restraint has been correctly applied and that the runs are guided to provide for
true axial movement.

Expansion loops or bends shall be of one piece and preferably made at the tube or fitting
manufacturer‟s works. If the total length of the tube or bend is such as to prohibit this, welds may
be made in the long arm as near the centre as possible. No welds will be permitted in the crown of
the bend or in the short arms and any seams shall be arranged at the side of the side of the bends.
All loops or bends shall be flanged and arranged to vet and drain naturally.

All expansion loops and bends shall be so proportioned to accommodate the total stress set up in the
material of the pipe wall, taking into account the stress components due to internal pressure, torsion
and bending.

All expansion loops and bends shall be fabricated from similar materials to the pipework systems in
which they are installed, with flanged ends, erected in a horizontal plane and supported at the crest.



                                                                                                 226
All expansion loops and bends of joints shall be erected cold drawn to the extent of one half of the
total expansion to be taken up and shall be assembled before pipes are anchored.

The cold draw shall be pulled by means of long bolts through the flanges. Bolts shall be pulled up
diagonally to prevent uneven stressing and after the flanges are tight the bolts shall be replaced one
with bolts of the correct length.

In the event that the fitting of expansion loops and bends can not be immediately possible,
necessary distance pieces shall be inserted.

Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be of the straight bellows type and of axial pattern or as otherwise indicated.
They shall be provided with screwed union or flanged ends as appropriate to facilitate replacement
unless otherwise approved. They shall incorporate internal lines if required and shall be
manufactured from 18/8 stainless steel or other approved material appropriate to the duty and shall
be designed to withstand the test pressure of the system. Bellows shall be capable of not less than
2.000 complete cycles of movement over the designed working range without failure. Pipework
supports shall be arranged as near as possible to the joints.

Expansion joints shall be selected to accommodate the maximum working temperature and
temperature range of the systems. Rods or hangers shall be provided to take imposed end thrusts.

Joints up to 38 mm. shall have screwed ends and 50 mm. and upwards flanged ends. All
compensators shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations.

All expansion joints shall be provided with external protection where exposed to damage. For axial
joints this shall comprise an external sleeve. Joints shall be installed so that they are not subjected to
stresses other than those for which they are designed. Unless otherwise indicated they shall be
installed so that they are in their free position at a temperature midway between the high and low
limits of normal service.

All connections between bellows and pipework shall be aligned prior to and during welding by
means of welding clamps.

Axial joints shall be installed in line with the axis of the pipe and shall not be subjected to any
tension during installation other than that approved by the manufacturers.

Flanged joints shall be pulled up diagonally across the flanges by means of long bolts after the
joints are made the long bolts shall be removed diagonally one at a time and replaced with standard
bolts, nut and washers.

Joints with flanges ends shall be installed during the erection of pipework if possible. Otherwise,
temporary distance places of accurate dimensions shall be provided. Each such distance piece shall
be exactly equal to the “installed” length of the compensators and shall have flanges precisely
                                                                                                     227
square with the pipe and flanges bolt holes of the compensator. All expansion joints shall be
securely locked in position prior to and during hydraulic testing. Should joints be unable to with
standart test pressures they shall be isolated from the piping systems.

End fittings for expansion joints on mild steel pipelines shall be of steel.

Axial expansion joints shall be cold drawn during installation to an agreed amount not exceeding
the manufacturer‟s recommendations.

When installing manufactured expansion loops or bellow joints, the manufacturer‟s installation
recommendation shall be observed in every respect.

When pressure testing pipework distribution mains, the Contractor shall ensure that the pressure
will not damage the bellows, where the test pressure exceeds the maximum operating pressure.

All cleats, brackets and steel work required for building-in shall be supplied by the Contractor,
unless stated otherwise elsewhere in the Specifications.

Details of all anchors shall be submitted to the Supervisor for approval before manufacture.

The bellow shall be installed with due allowance having been made for cold draw, which will vary
according to the type and length of bellows proposed and the temperature of installation. Where
“installation bars” or fittings are incorporated with the bellows during delivery and erection, these
must removed before heat is applied.

Care shall be taken when installing flanged end bellows to line up the bolt holes on joint and mating
flanges and to ensure that the joint is not twisted in any way or any torsional stress applied.

Guides

Free guide sleeves shall be fitted on each side of the expansion joint, unless surc joint be installed
adjacent to an anchor point when guides shall be fitted on the free side only.

Guides shall consist of a tube of diameter not more than 3 mm. greater than the outside diameter of
the main and length four and half times the diameter of the main with a minimum length of 300
mm. unless an alternative design is shown on the Tender Drawings.

Guides shall be installed not more than one and half pipe diameter from the expansion joint to the
fist tubular guide and not more than 15-20 pipe diameters between this guide and the next pipe
support.

Further pipe guides shall be provided along each pipeline at intervals equivalent to not more than 75
pipe diameters and where shown on the Drawings.



                                                                                                 228
The Contractor shall provide all provide all necessary pipe guides to prevent long pipe spans from
buckling and to ensure alignment and linear free movement of pipes from anchor points towards
expansion joints constructed to prevent transverse movement and carefully installed so that axial
movement is not hampered. Means for lubrication shall be provided where necessary.

Each pipe guide on sections of pipework incorporating axial joints shall be of the tube type with
rods tack welded to the guide, and arranged to locate and restrain the pipe in all planes.
Alternatively pipe guides can be made on Site with two roller supports as shown on Drawings.

Special supports and fixing accessories shall be provided at all heavy items of pipeline equipment.
I.e. valves, etc. to ensure that no undue strain is placed upon the pipeline at their incidence.

After fabrication, all ferrous fixing and supports shall be thoroughly wire brushed to remove dirt,
scale, rust etc. and then given two coats of red oxide primer prior to bolting to or building into the
building structure.

Detailed drawings of pipe guides and supporting frames shall be submitted to the Supervisor for
written approval prior to manufacture.

Air Vents

Automatic Air Vents

Automatic air vents shall be vertically oriented brass housing, on which an air chamber mounted,
the housing accommodating special rings to ensure a very large contact surface to remove air from
water, float operated, with screwed end.

Air Tubes

Air tubes shall be constructed from black steel pipe, welded construction, with ½” drain valve and
piping connections.

Flexible Metal Hoses

Flexible metal hoses shall be constructed from annularly corrugated metal bellows formed from
butt-welded tubes. Bellows shall be made of austentic stainless steel AISI 316L and AISI 316T as
per bright conforming DIN 17440. Braiding made of stainless steel wire AISI 304, end connections
stainless steel, connections flanged, male or female threaded ends, swivel unions, welding ends.




                                                                                                 229
Gages
Pressure Gages and Compound Gages:
      Outside diameter of gages shall be 100 mm and shall be equipped with a siphon tube and
       gage valve.
      Scale of gauges shall indicate working pressure of system; and highest scale shall be 150
       percent to 300 percent of working pressure.
      Vacuum scale of compound gauges shall be 760 mm Hg

Thermometer shall be protected with sleeve.

Auxiliary Materials
Pipe Hangers

General: Specially designed assembly for intended purposes shall be used. Such structure shall be
in accordance with requirements in this specification approved by the Supervisor.

Rods: solid steel; sizes not less than as follow:

Supported Pipe                  Rod Diameter Size (mm)
80 and smaller                         M10
100 thru 125                           M12
150 and larger                         M16

Support Materials Requirements:

      Support materials shall have strength of not less than 5 times of actual weight of pipe filled
       with water.
      Entire hanger assembly shall be able to connect or fasten to structures.
      Number of rods or connection sizes shall be increased where such assemblies does not meet
       these requirements.

When supporting multiple pipes :

       Hanger rods shall be 16 mm or greater.
       Hanger width shall not exceed 1.2 meters.
       Spacing between hangers shall not exceed 2 meters.

Gaskets

      Rubber: Durable and suited for pressure, temperature and water for the intended service.
      Liquid: Synthetic rubber compound specially formulated for intended service.

Sealing Tapes

                                                                                                  230
Teflon tape suitable for temperature from minus 50°C to 180°C shall be used for threaded
connections.

Welding Rods

Welding rods shall be coated arc welding rods.

Execution
Installation

Chilled Water Piping

      Horizontal piping graded uniformly to avoid unnecessary bends or offsets.
      Provide high point vent and low point drain.

Condensate Drain Piping

       Piping shall be level and no traps.
       Avoid unnecessary bends or detours.

Drip Drain Piping

       Grade uniformly horizontal and run straight as possible.
       Grade shall be 1 mm per 10 cm or larger.

Foundation And Vibration Isolation
    All equipment, piping,etc., shall be mounted on or suspended from approved foundations
     and supports, all as specified herein.
    All concrete foundations and supports (and required reinforcing therefore) shall be provided
     by the head contractor. Furnish shop drawings and templates for all concrete foundations and
     supports, and furnish for setting all required bolts and other appurtenances necessary for the
     proper installation of his equipment. All such work shall be shown in detail on the shop
     drawings, which drawings shall be submitted to the Supervisor showing the complete details
     of all foundation, including the necessary concrete and steel work, vibration devices etc.
    All floor mounted equipment shall be erected on 4 inch high concrete pads over the complete
     area of the equipment unless specified to the contrary herein. Wherever hereinafter
     vibrations eliminating devices and/or concrete inertia blocks are specified, these items shall,
     in all cases, be in mounted upon raised concrete pads unless specified to the contrary herein.
    Mounting systems and components of the isolation mounting shall not be resonant with any
     of the forcing frequencies of the supported equipment or piping. Mounting sizes shall be
     determined by the mounting manufacturer and mounting shall be installed in accordance
     with manufacturer‟s instructions.
    All mounting systems exposed to weather and other corrosive environments shall be
     protected with factory corrosion resistance. All metal parts of mountings (except spring and
                                                                                               231
    hardware) to be hot dip galvanized. Springs shall be cadmium plated and neoprene coated.
    Nuts and bolts shall be cadmium planet.
   Where supplementary steel is required to support piping and/or ductwork, this steel shall be
    designed to provide a maximum deflection of 0.08 inch at the mid span under the supported
    load. The piping shall be rigidly supported form the supplementary steel and the
    supplementary steel isolated from he building structure by means of isolators described in
    paragraphs entitled “support of piping and boiler breaching-mounting type XT”.
   Where steel spring isolation systems are described in the following specifications, the
    mounting assemblies shall utilise bare springs with the spring diameter not less than 0.8 of
    the loaded operating height of the spring. Each spring isolator shall be designed and installed
    so that the ends of the spring remain parallel during and after installation. The spring
    specified minimum deflection from loaded operating height to spring solid height shall be
    50% of the rated deflection. The maximum motion of any resiliently supported equipment at
    start-up or shutdown shall be ¼ inch. Approved resilient lateral restrains shall be provided as
    required to limit motions in excess of ¼ inch.




                                                                                              232
10.3 Air Conditioning and Ventilation Duct

Air conditioning and ventilation ducts shall consist of rectangular galvanized steel sheet duct and
circular galvanized spiral duct.

Rectangular Ducts
Rectangular ductwork shall be suitable for low velocity system as specified herein. Unless
otherwise approved, duct shall accurately conform to the dimensions indicated and shall be straight
and smooth on the inside, with joints neatly finished.

Duct Construction

Rectangular ducts shall be constructed with galvanized steel sheets and structural steel angle or
equivalent materials approved by the Supervisor.

Ducts shall be made substantially air tight, and dust mark from air leaks shall not be seen at duct
joints, connections to grilled registers and diffusers.

The duct work shall be constructed from strip mild cold reduced continuously hot dipped
galvanized steel sheet to TS 822.

The nominal sheet thickness of the ductwork shall be shown below. No ductwork shall be
constructed from sheets less than 0.6 mm.

The sheet metal shall be two sided hot dipped galvanized to TS 822.

Steel sheet thickness:

TABLE 1 : Rectangular Ducts – Low & Medium Pressure

DUCT SIZE                           NOMINAL SHEET THICKNESS

(Longer Side)                                      mm.
Up to 300 mm.                                      0.6
301 mm. to 800 mm.                                 0.8
801 mm. and over                                   1.0

All ducts over 400 mm. longer side shall be stiffened by beading at 300 mm. centres or cross
breaking at not more than 1220 mm. spacing. Duct above 800 mm. longer side to have transverse
joints flanged in accordance with DW/142, with maximum spacing of 1 mm.

*None if tube is helical beaded of site made angle reinforced or angle flanged all at 300 mm.
maximum spacing.

Flat oval ducts shall be as scheduled in Table 22 of DW 142.
                                                                                              233
All low velocity ductwork shall generally be rectangular section, except where indicated.

Flange:

Flanged joints shall be formed of steel angles welded at corners, and face shall be ground smoothly.
Steel angle flanges of the largest duct dimension shall be as follows:

  Size of Duct                  Size of Angle          Max Spacing
1)     Not over 750 mm :        25 x 25 x 3 mm.        3,600 mm.
2) Over 750 to over :           35 x 35 x 3 mm.           2,700 mm.

Bracing:

     Longitudinal Corner Seams: Pittsburgh Lock or Button Punch Snap Lock.
     Cross Joints: Plain "S" Slip joint or standing "S" slip joint as required.
     Joints In direction of flow: Permitted only the case where standard size metal sheet is used;
      and shall be Acme Lock-Grooved Seam.
     Spacing of seams on the same plane: 900 mm. minimum on plane center and kept at least
      300 mm away from the edge seam.
Reinforcing:

      Ducts 450 through 750 mm: Reinforcing with 25 x 25 x 3 mm angles at center lines between
       joints.
      Ducts over 750 through 1,500 mm: Reinforcing with 30 x 30 x 3mm angle at center lines
       between joints.
      Ducts over 1,500 mm to 2,250 mm: Reinforcing with 40 x 40 x 3 mm angle of center lines
       between joints.
      Ducts over 2,250 mm: Reinforcing with 40 x 40 x 5 mm angles at center lines between
       joints.
      Ducts not insulated: Reinforcing with diamond brake or reinforcing ribs spaced maximum
       300 mm at center.

Rivet: Rivet flange on duct shall be made with 4.5 mm diameter rivets spaced 65 mm.

Bolt: Bolts used for bolt connection of ducts shall be 8 mm diameter unless otherwise specified.

Duct Bend
Radius: Duct bend shall have a centerline radius not less than 1-1/2 times the width or diameter of
the duct.

Turning vane: Turning vane shall be used in the following portions:
     For all elbows with largest dimension 460 mm and over and for all turns over 45 degrees.
     For radius turns, provide single guide vane as shown on drawings.
                                                                                                   234
      For square elbows, provide airfoil type double vanes manufactured specially for purpose;
       spacing as shown on drawings.

Air Extractor
     Air extractor shall be provided at all branches from main supply duct at supply air diffusers
      and registers at right angles to air flow.
      Air extractor shall be of standard products designed for specific purpose. It shall be a type
      to distribute air uniformly throughout branch ducts, and vibration shall be a minimum.
     Extractor vanes shall be adjustable at all locations.

Flexible Connection
      Attachment to duct shall be flange connection.
      Longitudinal seams shall be stitched tightly.
      Space between duct ends shall not be less than 150 mm.

Flexible Ducts
Flexible ducts shall be made of aluminum polyester 70 micron; fite resistance shall be as for DIN
4102 Class B2 and have flexibility and strength.

Non-Insulated flexible ducts
Permissible maximum air velocity shall be 30m/sec,temperature range shall be –30to+140deg C.
Maximum working pressure shall be 3000Pa Bending radius shall be 0.56*D. Material shall be
aluminum polyester 70 micron and shall be constructed from five layers laminate.

Insulated flexible ducts
Insulated flexible duct shall be as for 6.3.1.6.1 in addition Factory insulated flexible duct insulation
material fiber glass thickness shall be 25 mm. with the density 16kg/m³.0.58*D+25mm.

Ductwork Accessories
Volume Control Damper

General:
     Volume dampers shall consist of frame, movable vanes and operators.
     Vanes shall have low air flow resistance and shall not vibrate or generate noise.

Construction:

      Vanes: steel sheet metal; thickness not less than 1.2 mm.
      Number of Vanes: One each 200 mm of duct height or fraction thereof.
      Lap vanes not less than 15 mm.
      Vanes and frame shop prime painted.

Operators: Cast Iron or bronze; with stops and open and close indications.


                                                                                                   235
Motor Dampers: Provide with ball bearing fittings and motor base.

Manual Dampers: Provide with operating handles and open and close position indicator.

Fire Damper
General:
      Fire dampers shall be provided and installed at all positions where ducts pass through fire
      rated walls, floors and where they enter vertical masonry shafts and where indicated on the
      drawings or required by the Fire Code.
     All fire dampers required to be supplied and installed under this contract shall have approval
      of all authorities having jurisdiction.
     Fire damper shall be 1.5 hour fire rated unless otherwise indicated.

Construction:

       Similar to volume dampers, except as specified.
      Fixed in full open position by fusible link to close automatically with parting of link; and
       without outside operators.
      Frame and Vanes: Sheet metal; thickness not less than 1.6 mm.
      Fusible links accessible from outside duct.
      Fusible Link Ratings: Kitchen exhaust and other dampers subjected to high temperatures:
       120 C All others: 72 C.
      All fire dampers shall be equipped with factory fitted single pole micro switch to provide
       remote electrical indication of damper status, unless otherwise stated.

Diffuser and Register
General:
       Low noise generating type.
      Gaskets: Sponge rubber or felt; thickness not less than 5 mm; continuous around full
       perimeter of each outlet.
      Dampers and Shutters: Formed of sheet metal; adjustable for easy control of air volume and
       without need of removing unit from outlet.
      Finish Paint: Factory finished with baked enamel or melamine resin paint; color as selected
       by Supervisor.

Ceiling diffuser:
      Aluminum construction; with dampers.
      Thickness of outer core not less than:
Neck Diameter Less Than 250 mm: 0.6 mm.
Neck Diameter 250 mm and Larger: 0.8 mm.

Supply and return air register:
     Frame and Adjustable Vanes: Aluminum.
     Frame: Thickness not less than 1.0 mm.
                                                                                               236
      Shutters: Role-formed steel or other material approved by Supervisor.
      Shutters: Adjustable in both directions.
      Low noise generating type.

Disc Valves:
     Construction Material           : Aluminum thickness not less than 1.0 mm
     Finishing                       : Electrostatic powder coating
     Installation                    : Screw type
     Low noise generating type.

External Louvre:
     Function              : Both air intake and discharge
     Construction Material : Extruded 6063 aluminum profile
     Finishing              :Electrostatic powder coating
     Installation          : Screw type
     Accessories           : PVC Coated Galvanized steel wire mesh

Transfer Grille:
      Construction Material : Extruded 6063 aluminum profile
      Finishing             : Electrostatic powder coating
      Installation          : Screw type

Access Door
     Provide where specified and where required for access and cleaning.
      Where ducts have acoustical lining, also line access doors with matching material.
      All Doors: Hinge type as shown on drawing; gasketed all around; each with suitable locking
      device or devices to maintain positive air seals.

Duct Hanger
General:
     Contractor may, at his option, use various hanger systems for ducts at all systems and
      components shall be approved by Supervisor prior to installation.
     Construction :
      Hanger Spacing       : Not exceeding 3.6 meters for 1500 mm duct or smaller and 2.7
      meters for over 1,500 mm.
     Supports and Hangers: Steel angles same as specified for Duct Flanges.
     Hanger Rods: Where not required to be angles; diameter not less than 9 mm. for 2,250 mm.
      or smaller and 12 mm. for over 2,250 mm.

Air Filter
      Filter shall be permanent washable for pre filter and high efficiency type for secondary filter.
       Holding frames shall be fabricated from steel or aluminum sheet.
       Steel sheet shall be inhibitor coated.

                                                                                                  237
       Filter shall be non-combustible type and filter inserts each of which having their own frame
       shall be mounted on the unit frame satisfying air leakage of at most %0,5 of total air
       according to EN1886.Filter efficiencies shall satisfy EN 779 and have certificates according
       to the specified standard

10.4 Insulation

10.4.1 General

The insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Appendix-3
Air conditioning system shall be provided with insulation work for equipment piping and ducts.
This clause specifies insulation works.

Glass Wool lacquered aluminum foil secured
Glass wool insulation for duct shall be 24 kg/m3 in Air Conditioning Area and 50 Kg/m3 in non Air
Conditioning Area. Glass wool Board for Chamber shall not less than 50 Kg/m3.The thickness will
be 25 mm.

Elastomeric rubber foam insulation material aluminum foil secured
Self adhesive, elastomeric rubber board 50 micron thick aluminum foil secured. Vapor diffusion
resistance 7000, fire class 0 BS 476 Part 6. The thickness will be 13 mm.

Thermal Insulation In Voids, Shafts And Ducts
Where pipes and ducts are installed in buildings voids, shafts and ducts in any position otherwise
indicated on the tender drawings, they shall be insulated as follows:

Pipe work :
The insulation thickness shall be in accordance with the table below.

The physical properties of the insulating materials shall be as follows :

Fibrous insulation shall be long fiber resin-bonded mineral wool ( BS 3533).

Minimum nominal density and maximum “k” values shall be as follows:

              Description                              Physical Properties

              Rigid pipe sections prefabricated        60-95 kg/m3
              glass wool with aluminum foil            k = 0.034 W/m K
              Fire resistance                          A Class DIN 4102
              Flexible pipe sections prefabricated     16 kg/m3
              glass fibre with aluminum foil           k = 0.4 W/m K
              Fire resistance                          B Class DIN 4102
              Rigid pipe sections prefabricated rock   110-140 kg/m3

                                                                                               238
              wool with aluminum foil                 k = 0.04 W/m K
               Fire resistance                        A2 Class DIN 4102
              Elastomeric rubber insulation           k = 0.036 W/m K
              Vapour diffusion resistance             µ=7000
              Fire resistance                         Class 0 BS 476 Part6
              Maximum system temperature glass 250 °C
              wool                                    650 °C
              Maximum system temperature rock 105 °C
              wool
              Elastomeric rubber insulation
              (“k” values relate to cold surface 20°C Hot surface 80°C)

Aluminum bands shall be applied to all insulation at approx. 300 mm. centers.

Where bends and offsets occur, the insulation shall be tailored to suit.

Polished aluminum and cappings shall be provided to close all insulation terminations.

Minimum pipe work insulation thickness shall be in the table below:

Hot Water Services Inside Building

  Dimensions                  Rubber
    (mm)                        (0.036 W/mK)


       15                                  19
        20                                 19
       25                                  19
       32                                  19
       40                                  25
       50                                  25
       65                                  25
       80                                  25
       100                                 32
       125                                 32
       150                                 40
       200                                 40
Chilled Water Services Within Building

  Dimensions                      Rubber
    (mm)                   (0.036 W/mK)
       15                             25
       20                             25

                                                                                         239
       32                          25
       40                          32
       50                          32
       65                          32
       80                          32
       100                         32
       125                         32
       150                         40

Condensation Insulation Chilled Water Services

     Dimensions                   Rubber
    (mm)                   (0.036 W/mK)
      15                                  13
      20                                  13
      25                                  13
      32                                  13
      40                                  19
      50                                  19
      65                                  19
      80                                  19
      100                                 25
      125                                 25
      150                                 25
      200                                 25



                                 Domestic Hot Water Services

    Dimensions                            Rubber
    (mm)                  (0.036 W/mK)
      15                                  13
      20                                  13
      25                                  19
      32                                  19
      40                                  19
      50                                  25
      65                                  25
      80                                  25
      100                                 32
      125                                 32
      150                                 32
      200                                 32


                                                               240
Pipework Fittings :
All valves flanges, unions and all other items requiring access for maintenance shall be insulated as
follows:

Chilled Water Fittings:

Insulated in accordance with (a) above with mitered removable sections to provide a continuous
vapor barrier.

All Other Fittings:

Adjoining pipe insulation to be fitted with aluminum end caps.

Valves
Insulation shall be provided for all valves in chilled water piping.

Insulation shall be made with polyethylene foam valve covering.

Thickness of insulation shall be as follows:

Valve size    Thickness of ins.
20 to 25               15 mm
32 to 200              25 mm

Finishing of valve insulation shall be as follows:

      Interior, exposed:      Vinyl tape and finish with aluminum covering.
      Concealed:              Vinyl tape and finish with asphalt jute cloth.
      Exterior, exposed:      Vinyl tape and finish with galvanized steel sheet covering.

Ductwork
All supply, recirculation ductwork and ductwork fittings, shall be insulated with 25 mm. glass fiber
with aluminum foil cladding.

Glass wool insulation for duct shall be 24 kg/m3 in Air Conditioning area and 50 Kg/m3 in non Air
Conditioning area. Glass wool Board for Chamber shall not less than 50 Kg/m3.

Ductwork Fittings
All ductwork fittings shall be insulated.

Duct not requiring insulation
     Ventilation ducts.
     Outside air intake ducts.
     Flexible ducts and joints.
                                                                                                241
Ducts and chamber lined with acoustical lining.

Thermal Insulation Externally
Where pipes and ducts are installed externally on roof top or in external underground trenches or in
other wet areas internally, (i.e. showers, bath areas, etc.) and in any other positions otherwise shown
on the tender drawings, they shall be insulated as follows:

Thermal Insulation Protection
Any pipe work or ductwork, which is insulated but which is likely to be accidentally damaged
during maintenance or in gaining access to an area of void or at low level plant rooms shafts (Open
in Tunnel) Tunnel and Roofs etc., shall be additionally protected with 0.8 mm thick stucco
embossed aluminum sheeting. Any damage within the contract period, which may occur as a result
of non-compliance with the requirements, shall be made good at no cost to the Employer.

Valves
Insulation shall be provided for all valves in chilled water piping.

Insulation shall be made with polyethylene foam valve covering.

Thickness of insulation shall be as follows:

Valve size    Thickness of ins.
20 to 25               15 mm
32 to 200              25 mm

Finishing of valve insulation shall be as follows:

      Interior, exposed:             Vinyl tape and finish with aluminum covering.
      Concealed:              Vinyl tape and finish with asphalt jute cloth.
      Exterior, exposed:      Vinyl tape and finish with galvanized steel sheet covering.

Ducts
All supply and return air ducts of air conditioning system shall be insulated as specified below.

Sequence of insulation:

Ducts:
     Glass wool insulation with aluminum foil.
     Tape all joints.

Chamber:
     Glass wool insulation with aluminum foil.
     Tape all joints.
Thickness of insulation shall be 25 mm.
                                                                                                    242
Acoustic Standards for Mechanical Installation
General
All building equipment (plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditationing, electrical and elevators)
including piping and ductwork shall be installed to produce sound pressure levels within occupied
spaces not to exceed limits as specified in section 3.

All such building equipment, including piping, ductwork, shall be so installed that its operation
causes no objectionable structure-borne noise or vibration transmission to occupied space. Isolation
hangers, pads, insulation layers, airspace will all be required in different cases. Each potential
source of vibration must be reviewed and means of isolation specified.

All building equipment including fresh air intake, spill or exhaust louver faces or gratings shall be
so and installed that they result in no objectionable noise transmission to adjoining proprieties or
neighbors, and comfort to local codes and regulations.

All operating equipment, including mechanical plant and engineering maintenance, shall produce
noise levels in their respective areas not to exceed 85 dB., measured on an A scale.

Grilles, Registers And Diffusers
The maximum permissible sound power levels in octave bands of grilles, registers and diffusers
shall be as follows:

Maximum PWL re 10-12 Watts

          Octave Bands        NC-35          NC-40          NC-45          NC-50

               1                62             66             68             70
               2                56             60             63             66
               3                49             54             58             62
               4                46             51             56             61
               5                43             48             53            58
               6                42             47             52             57
               7                41             46             51             56
               8                42             47             52             57

Manufacturers shall be required to submit to the Supervisors representative guaranteed sound power
level data in octave bands of grilles, register and diffusers

Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be tested in accordance with EN or ASHRAE Standart 3 6B-63.

Acoustical Treatment Of Duct Systems
Acoustically lined with 25 mm. (1”) thick, 0.68 kg. (1 ½ l b) glass fibre duct lining the following :



                                                                                                  243
      All conditioned air ductwork within mechanical equipment spaces, but not less than 7.5
       meters, (25 ft.) from fan outlet.
      A minimum distance of 6 meters (20 ft) upstream of all toilet exhaust fans.
      A minimum distance of 6 meters (20 ft) upstream of all supply air fans.
      Downstream of all exhaust fans, or return air fans, except kitchen and laundry systems,
       aluminum distance of 6 meters (20 ft)
      Supply and return ductwork in function rooms equipped with folding or operations as
       required controlling sound transmission during simultaneous usage of the divided spaces.

In certain conditions, packaged factory-built sound traps may provide more effective sound control
than acoustical lining, or may be economically advantageous. Such determination shall be made by
the acoustical engineer in consultation with the mechanical designer.

Pumps Systems’ Piping Noise
Since piping system will resonate with the pump and pulsations will be carried much further
through the piping system that would normally be the case. Each pump shall include double
convolution, rubber, flexible connectors in the suction and discharge of all the pumps at the outset.

10.5 Painting

10.5.1 General

All items of painting covered by this section of the Specifications shall be carried out by approved
specialist painters. Only skilled Operatives in this field of work shall be employed. The Contractor
shall be deemed to have included for all works specified to be carried out by the aforementioned
specialist.

The contractor shall ensure that the specialist painting contractor is acquainted with all the
conditions of the work, specification, hours of working, completion date (s), etc., and he shall
complete all Works within the program specified. The painting work shall not be commenced
unless otherwise approved in writing, until the whole or part of the installation has been completed
and tested as set out in the pipe work, plant and air distribution of the Specification.

All painting shall be as detailed hereafter, unless specifically detailed otherwise under this Clause of
the Technical Specification.

All painting materials shall be as manufactured by an approved manufacturer and shall be delivered
in sealed containers, clearly labelled with type of material and intended use The following surface
treatments shall be applied to all areas details under this Section of the Specification unless stated
elsewhere in the Specifications.

Painting In Plant Room
      All uninsulated pipework shall be painted with synthetic paint.
      All steel pipework to be insulated shall be treated as indicated above.

                                                                                                   244
      All supports shall be painted with galvanized paint.

Painting Externally
Painting externally shall be in accordance with that detailed for Plant Rooms with the following
exceptions:

      Where supports are installed in concealed positions, i.e. underground trenches and tunnels
       trenches etc., they shall be hot dip galvanized only.
      Insulated ductwork shall be treated as detailed under „insulation‟.

Protective Painting
Provide a heavy field coat of blank asphalt paint on all steel pipe, cradles, vibration isolating
mounts, and the like that will be encased or partially encased in building construction , set in
cement or fill, before items are built into the general construction. Kitchen range hood ducts and
bolier breeching shall be painted with heat resistant paint.

Coat interior of each outdoor air chamber with two coats of odorless, rust resisting, nonscaling
paint.

Coat interior of ducts at register boxes with two coast of black paint, to a dull finish.

All pumps, motors, fans and all other factory manufactured and assembled apparatus shall be
factory coated with one coat of primer and one coat of machinery enamel, and after installation
shall be cleaned and touched up to repair any damage incurred during construction.

10.6 Identification Of Systems

Provide three sets of charts or diagrams, on cloth, showing outline plans of structures and essential
features of the several systems, including all piping, ducts, equipment, valves, dampers and
controls.

All valves, dampers, and controls shall be designated by distinguishing numbers on the chart or
diagrams, provide stamped aluminum tags for all designated items with numbers corresponding to
those on the charts. The nomenclature to be used on these tags shall be submitted for approval.

The tags shall be not be less than 50 mm (2in) in diameter with depressed black numbers of 15 mm
(1/2 in) height, prefixed by the letters “HVAC”. They shall be fastened to valves and controls with
approved brass chains and hooks.

Piping identification shall be in conformance with the following:

      Provide and affix approved adhesive bands identifying the service, by stem and zone, and
       direction of flow to the various piping systems. Such bands shall be provided in all occupied
       and unoccupied rooms as well as in all the other spaces (such as shafts) in which piping may

                                                                                                245
    be viewed. A set of such bands shall be affixed to each pipe not less frequently than every
    forty feet and there shall be at least one set of identifying bands per pipe in each space
    requiring identifying bands. Identifying bands shall also be provided adjacent to each valve.
    Valves at equipment and pumps do not require separate identification.

   Each set shall consist of one and on which the name of the service is printed in black letters
    not less than 50 mm (2in) high for pipe 65 mm (2/1/2 in) and smaller and one band on
    which is printed a black directional arrow. Bands shall be applied where they can be easily
    read and with their one dimension parallel to the axis of the pipe. Bands shall have
    backgrounds of different colors for the various service groups as follows:

                                                Colour              Stripe
     Water, Air Cond. Chilled                   Blue         Green
     Water, Air Cond. Tower, Condens.           Green        Blue
     Condensate (steam) Returns                 Green        Orange
     Boiler Blow Down                          Green         Yellow&White
     Cold Water                                Green         White/Blue/
     Hot Water                                 Green         White/Grimson/
     Heating                                    Green        White/Grimson/
     Fire Protection Service                    White        Red
     Fire Extinguishing                        Green         Safety Red
     Compressed Air                             Light Blue   White
     Gas                                        Yellow Ochre Emerald/ Green
     Steam,Low Pressure-
     (under 137.6 kPa/20 psi)                   OrangeWhite
    Steam, Medium Pressure –
    (137.6-668 kPa/20-100 psi)                  OrangeGreen
    Steam, High Pressure –
    (over 688 kPa/100 psi)                      OrangeBlack
    Refrigerants                                Purple




                                                                                             246
11. Buıldıng management & automatıon system

11.1 General

An engineer's building automation system shall be installed to cover all controls as required by
control point list, schematic diagrams and as called for in the specifications of equipment. The
central console and associated equipment shall be located in the Control Room or as directed by the
Supervisor.

Contractors shall submit for the Supervisor approval three complete sets of documentations
including:

Manufacturer's Product Data.

Workshop drawings representing:

      System wiring diagrams with sequence of operation for each system as specified.
      Manufacturer's product information on all hardware items along with descriptive literature
       for all software programs to show compliance with specifications.
      System configuration diagram showing all panel types and locations as well as
       communications network and workstations.

Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accord with the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these
recommendations shall be furnished to the Supervisor prior to installation. Installation of the item
will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received.

Building automation and temperature control system shall control and / or monitor the following
systems.

       Air handling systems, including, but not limited to, single and multiple zone 100% outdoor
       air ventilation systems, and constant and variable volume air conditioning systems.
      Central utility plant, including chillers, boilers, chilled water pumps, etc.
 (Note: Chillers and boilers shall be provided with their own            operating controls. Interface
 points shall be provided for remote monitoring and setpoint adjustment via building automation
 and temperature control system).
      Plumbing: Miscellaneous monitoring and alarm points as described herewithin and in the
       Plumbing Specifications.
      Electrical: Miscellaneous monitoring and alarm points as described herewithin and in
       Electrical Specifications.
      Elevators: Alarm point monitoring as described in the elevator section of the specifications.
      Refrigeration/Cold Rooms/Deep Freezers: Remote temperature indication.
      Medical gases equipment: Alarm point monitoring and control as described in the elevator
       section of the specifications.

                                                                                                 247
      Lighting :- Service areas and plant rooms lighting , monitoring and control
      Submetering:
      Electrical metering point as defined in Electrical Specifications.
      Water, chilled water, heating, steam and gas flow rate metering point as defined, in the
       Plumbing Specification.

All building automation equipment and automatic temperature controls shall be the responsibility of
one manufacturer and shall be installed complete in all respects by competent mechanics, regularly
employed by him.

A totally direct digital control (DDC) system with electric actuation of control valves and dampers
is the preferred type. A DDC system utilising pneumatic control of valves and dampers is not
acceptable. Sensors shall, generally, be located in the spaces they control. Return air sensors are
only to be used where specified hereinafter.

All building automation equipment and automatic temperature controls shall be the responsibility of
one manufacturer and shall be installed complete in all respects by competent mechanics, regularly
employed by him.

Complete shop drawings are required to be submitted for approval by the designing engineer prior
to starting field installation. Such drawings shall give a complete description of all equipment,
controls, operating sequences, control wiring diagram, etc.

After completion of the automation and control installation, the manufacturer shall regulate and
adjust all sensors, control valves, damper motors, etc., and place the entire system into complete
operating condition subject to the approval of the Owner's representative(s). Complete instruction
shall be given to the operating personnel for a period of six days. Installation shall be guaranteed for
a period of one year.

11.2 Building Automation Equipment

Central Console
A central console located in the Engineer's Control Room or as directed, shall function as the
primary means of overall system control and monitoring. The following components shall be
mounted on the console:
     PC based network computer.
     Colorgraphic CRT.
     Logging and alarm, receive only printer.

Desk mounted direct line telephone for communications with the life safety system personnel.

The network computer shall include the following:
     256.0 MB RAM.
     One 1.4 MB diskette drive.

                                                                                                   248
      One CD muti media drive
      Serial port , parallel port.
      A 80 GB internal hard disk drive.
      Modem
      Processor shall be minimum 1,6 GHz Pentium 5
       (or latest industrial standard).
      Mouse port. & Mouse.
      21 SVGA video outputs 0.24 resolution low radiation non interlaced (1600 x 1200 pixels
       true colors).

Audio tone generator to activate on reception of an alarm. Audio tone shall be capable of being
enabled or disabled on operator command.

Provide two printers, one printer shall be dedicated for alarms and the other for normal prints and
reporting.

      The printers shall be wide carriage color ink jet heavy duty type with 132 characters per line.
       Printers shall be provided with alarm tone sound.
      The output typed copy shall be paper and shall be suitable for easy insertion into ring binder
       with calendar date and time of day automatically typed at beginning of each log.
      The alarm printer supplied with the system shall operate when messages and alarms fall due
       irrespective of the network computer if off-line. The printer shall be used for the recording
       of information associated with system logs requested by the operator, binary off-normals of
       analogue indication, and operator changes introduced through the keyboard. A descriptive
       format shall be used, for ready interpretation by the operator without use of an index or other
       reference.
      The alarm printer shall utilise two-color printing or an alternative approved means to
       distinguish between alarm conditions and return to normal. The alarm printer shall print
       alarm and system messages even the network computer switched off.

The colorgraphic display terminal (CRT) shall be of large capacity, 48 lines with 80 characters per
line. The CRT capacity shall be capable of displaying colorgraphics and text. The display area shall
have a resolution of 1600 horizontal by 1200 vertical resolvable pixels. The CRT shall be capable
of displaying of 16 million colors. The minimum screen diagonal measure shall be 21 inches.

A digital display clock shall display on the monitor at all times. Provision for manually resetting it
shall be provided. It shall be a 24 hour real time clock and seven day calendar to provide data for
logging.

Software passwords shall allow automatic functions of the system to continue, but prevent
unauthorised tampering with any keyboard push buttons while the network computer is unattended.
This shall not disable the scanning or alarming functions. When the network computer is in
operation, it shall continuously store in memory alarm functions transmitted from local direct digital
control (DDC) units regardless of what software programs are currently operating. On a loss of
                                                                                                 249
power to the network computer or communication with the DDC units, the DDC units shall store
their respective alarm function in memory. On return of power and communication, the DDC units
shall transmit their alarms to the network computer.

The network computer shall be capable of remote communication through a dedicated auto dial-
out/auto answer dial-in modem.

The modem shall be capable of interface with the network computer through a standard EIA
RS232-C connection. Speed/data communication rate shall be 19200 baud minimum. An operator
accessing the system via a modem shall be capable of executing all commands permissible by his
access level. Modem communication shall at no time interfere with the operation and performance
of the network computer or the direct digital field control units.

The network computer keyboard and colorgraphic CRT shall be the primary means of operator
access to the system, providing the operator interface for the entire system.

Network computer software shall be user friendly and run under Windows 2000 or XP Professional
Software, with pull-down menus, pop-up windows, on-line help, etc.

Network computer software shall include a fully implemented and operational color graphic
software package which shall minimise the use of a typewriter style key board through the use of a
mouse. The software package shall contain a library of standard symbols and templates of typical
configurations which shall be used for Owner operator generated graphics. A graphic shall be
provided for each system, indicating all field devices with dynamic data displayed. In addition, a
Graphic shall be provided for each floor plan indicating zone temperatures. Alarm conditions shall
be indicated by a change in color of the equipment in alarm. Each graphic shall indicate if a system
is in manual or automatic mode.

Network computer software shall include operator definable report generation. Reports shall
include, but not be limited to, energy usage, alarm status, trend logs and point status.

Network computer software shall include user pages, which allow an operator to define technical
equipment data sheets, create messages, define maintenance instructions, etc.

Network computer software shall contain a trend logging feature consisting of:

      Operator selected variables (e.g., temperatures) displayed simultaneously or individually
       with operator adjustable parameters.
      Operator adjustable time intervals (15 seconds, one minute, one hour, daily, monthly).
      Continuous storage of totalized points or groups for archive on hard disk.

Direct Digital Controllers
Stand-alone Controllers shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum word size of 16 bits. They
shall also be of multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors consisting of modular

                                                                                                 250
hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and
input/output point modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this
specification and the attached point list. Each DDC unit shall have at least 3 MB memory.

Each DDC unit shall be housed in a key locked metal cabinet and shall have battery backup for
memory for ten years and real time clock for 1 year minimum, with automatic restart and battery
recharge.

Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory, to support its own operating system and
databases, including:

      Control processes
      Energy management applications
      Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level alarm for
       each point in the system.
      Historical/trend data for points specified
      Maintenance support applications
      Custom processes
      Operator I/O
      Dial-up communications
      Manual override monitoring

The DDC shall be provided by 25% spare points of the total number of points as stand by, but not to
be less than 4 points.

The type of spares shall be in the same proportion as the implemented I/O functions of the panel,
but in no case shall there be less than two spares of each implemented I/O type. Provide all
processors, power supplies and communication controllers complete so that the implementation of a
point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output termination module and
wiring.

Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and have at least 25% of the
memory available for future use.

DDC Controller shall provide at least two serial data communication ports and one Ethernet
network port for operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator
terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC Controllers shall allow
temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently
connected modems, printers or terminals.

As indicated in the point I/O schedule, the operator shall have the ability to manually override
automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC Controller via local, point discrete, on-board
hand/off/auto operator override switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for


                                                                                                 251
analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel processor
is operational or not.

Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC Controllers key-accessed enclosure, or externally
mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorised overrides.

DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator that automatic
control has been inhibited. DDC Controllers shall also collect override activity information for
reports.

 DDC Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and output for
constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.
Graduated intensity LEDs or analogue indication of value shall also be provided for each analogue
output. Status indication shall be visible without opening the panel door.

 Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and
diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC Controller shall provide both local and remote
annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to
establish communication.

Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all field point
terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standards 587-1980.

In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all DDC Controllers
to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be
incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to
support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 10 years.

      Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC Controller shall automatically resume full
       operation without manual intervention.
      Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of
       reloading the DDC Controller via the local RS-232C port.

Provide a separate DDC Controller for each AHU or other HVAC system as indicated in Section 3.
It is intended that each unique system be provided with its own point resident DDC Controller.




                                                                                                 252
11.3 DDC Controller Resident Software Features

General:

           All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this
           specification shall be provided.
           The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of
           DDC Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.

Control Software Description:
The DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:

          Two-position control
          Proportional control
          Proportional plus integral control
          Proportional, integral, plus derivative control
          Control loop tuning

The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by
automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
Upon the resumption of normal power, each DDC Controller shall analyze the status of all
controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling and turn equipment on or off
as necessary to resume normal operations.

DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform any or all the following energy management
routines:

     1.     Time-of-day scheduling
     2.     Calendar-based scheduling
     3.     Holiday scheduling
     4.     Temporary schedule overrides
     5.     Start-Stop Time Optimization
     6.     Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover
     7.     Night setback control
     8.     Enthalpy switchover (economizer)
     9.     Peak demand limiting
     10.    Temperature-compensated duty cycling
     11.    Fan speed/CFM control
     12.    Heating/cooling interlock
     13.    Cold deck reset
     14.    Hot deck reset
     15.    Chilled water reset
     17.    Chiller sequencing


                                                                                               253
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention and shall be
flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as
described in the Sequence of Operations.

DDC Controllers shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by the user, to
automatically perform calculations and special control routines.

1.    It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process:

     a.   Any system measured point data or status
     b.   Any calculated data
     c.   Any results from other processes
     d.   User-defined constants
     e.   Arithmetic functions (+, -, *, /,square root, exp, etc.)
     f.   Boolean logic operators (and/or, exclusive or, etc.)
     g.   On-delay/off-delay/one-shot timers

2.    Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following:

     a.   Time interval
     b.   Time-of-day
     c.   Date
     d.   Other processes
     e.   Time programming
     f.   Events (e.g., point alarms)

3.    A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other
      DDC Controllers on the network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands
      to points in any and all other DDC Controllers on the network.

4.    Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator I/O devices.
      A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device or cause the execution
      of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager.

5.    The custom control programming feature shall be documented via English language
      descriptors.

Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator devices.
Each DDC Controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to
minimise operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimise network traffic and prevent
alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC Controllers ability to report alarms be affected by
either operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or communications with other panels
on the network.



                                                                                                 254
1.   All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description and the
     time and date of occurrence. Each DDC Controller shall be capable of storing a library of at
     least 50 alarm messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the
     Controller.

2.   The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be
     prioritised to minimise nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A
     minimum of six priority levels shall be provided for each point. Point priority levels shall be
     combined with user definable destination categories (PC, printer, DDC Controller, etc.) to
     provide full flexibility in defining the handling of system alarms. Each DDC Controller shall
     automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up.
     Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point.

3.   Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user-defined list of operator devices or PCs.

4.   In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display
     or store alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response.

5.   In dial-up applications, operator-selected alarms shall initiate a call to a remote operator
     device.

A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or automatically
sample, store and display system data for points as specified in the I/O summary.

1.   DDC Controllers shall store point history data for selected analog and digital inputs and
     outputs:

     Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point, regardless of
     physical location in the network, may be collected and stored in each DDC Controllers point
     group. Two methods of collection shall be allowed: either by a pre-defined time interval or
     upon a pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals of l minute to 7 days shall be provided.
     Main DDC Controller shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be
     capable of storing a minimum of 25,000 data samples.

2.   Trend data shall be stored at the Main DDC Controller and uploaded to the workstation when
     retrieval is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either user-defined interval, manual
     command or when the trend buffers are full. All trend data shall be available for use in 3rd
     party personal computer applications.

DDC Controllers shall also provide high resolution sampling capability for verification of control
loop performance. Operator-initiated automatic and manual loop tuning algorithms shall be
provided for operator-selected PID control loops as identified in the point I/O summary. Provide
capability to view or print trend and tuning reports.



                                                                                                    255
     a. In automatic mode, the controller shall perform a step response test with a minimum one-
     second resolution, evaluate the trend data, calculate the new PID gains and input these values
     into the selected LOOP statement.

     b. For troubleshooting in manual mode, the operator shall be able to select variables to override
     default values. Calculated PID gains shall then be reviewed before they are inserted into the
     selected LOOP statement.

     c. Loop tuning shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the DDC Controller, from a
     network workstation or remotely using dial-in modems. For all loop tuning functions, access
     shall be limited to authorised personnel through password protection.

DDC Controllers shall automatically accumulate and store run-time hours for digital input and
output points as specified in the point I/O summary.

1.   The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.

2.   The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for run-time totalization. Unique, user-
     specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.

DDC Controllers shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily,
weekly or monthly basis for user-selected analogue and digital pulse input type points as specified in
the point I/O summary.

1.   The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.

2.   The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall
     be generated when the limit is reached.

DDC Controllers shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a pump or fan
system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a daily, weekly or monthly
basis for points as specified in the point I/O summary.

1.   The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall
     be generated when the limit is reached.

2.   If a control unit or the network computer fails, all other devices on the communications
     network shall be notified of the failure and the communications network shall automatically
     adjust to reflect the failure. When the failed control unit(s) or network computer re-establishes
     communications, all other devices on the Network shall be notified and normal
     communications shall resume.

3.   The building automation and temperature control system shall interface with the fire protection
     alarm panel described in the Electrical Section.

                                                                                                 256
4.    Portable Operating Unit (POT)

Provide two portable operator terminals with a minimum LCD display of 20 characters by 4 lines
and a full-featured keyboard. The POT shall be hand held and plug directly into individual
distributed control panels as described below. Provide a user-friendly, English language-prompted
interface for quick access to system information, not codes requiring look-up charts.

Functionality of the portable operator's terminal connected at any DDC Controller:

1.     Access all DDC Controllers on the network.

2.     Display all point, selected point and alarm point summaries.

3.     Display totalization information.

4.     Command, change set point, enable/disable any system point.

5.     Program and load custom control sequences as well as standard energy management
       programs.

The portable operator terminal shall be capable of performing any of the following functions:

1)     Display the status of any point.
2)     Change set points.
3)     Command points on or off, with feedback verification.
4)     Enable or disable existing points.
5)     Report status of all points in the system.
6)     Report all failed points.
7)     Report all points being trended (90 minimum trend intervals).
8)     Report all points being totalized.
9)     Report command priority of all points.
10)    Report all points in alarm status.
11)    Add a new point.
12)    Modify an existing point.
13)    Remove an existing point.
14)    Copy an existing point.
15)    Adjust control settings (proportional band reset rate, etc.).
16)    Initiate energy management programs.
17)    Define control algorithms via standard function blocks and without the knowledge of
       computer language.
18)    Acknowledge alarms.
19)    View equipment operating time in hours.




                                                                                                257
11.4 Application Specific Controllers (ASC)

Each DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of
remote application specific controllers (ASCs).

Each ASC shall operate as a stand-alone controller capable of performing its specified control
responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a
microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.

Provide the following types of ASCs as a minimum:
1.     Central System Controllers
2.     Terminal Equipment Controllers

Central System Controllers:
1.     Provide for control of central HVAC systems and equipment including, but not limited to,
       the following:
       a. Rooftop units
       b. Packaged air handling units
       c. Built-up air handling systems
       Chilled and condenser water systems
       Steam and hot water systems

2.     Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified
control sequences. Provide a hand/off/ automatic switch for each digital output for manual override
capability. Switches shall be mounted either within the controller's key-accessed enclosure, or
externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorised overrides. In addition, each
switch position shall be supervised in order to inform the system that automatic control has been
overridden. Allowing for additional system flexibility inputs and outputs, provide a minimum of
50% spare points of each type via additional point termination boards or controllers.

3.     Each controller shall support its own real-time operating system. Provide a time clock with
battery backup to allow for stand-alone operation in the event communication with its DDC
Controller is lost and to insure protection during power outages.

4.      Provide each central system controller with sufficient memory to accommodate point
databases, operating programs, local alarming and local trending. All databases and programs shall
be stored in non-volatile EEPROM or a minimum of 72-hour battery backup shall be provided. All
programs shall be field-customised to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements. Central
System controllers utilising pre-packaged or canned programs shall not be acceptable. As an
alternative, provide DDC Controllers for all central equipment in order to meet custom control
strategy requirements.




                                                                                              258
5.       Programming of central system controllers shall utilise the same language and code as used
by DDC Controllers to maximise system flexibility and ease of use. Should the system controller
utilise a different control language, provide an DDC Controller to meet the specified functionality.

6.     Local alarming and trending capabilities shall be provided for convenient troubleshooting
and system diagnostics. Alarm limits and trend data information shall be user-definable for any
point.

7.      Each controller shall have connection provisions for a portable operator's terminal. This tool
shall allow the user to display, generate or modify all point databases and operating programs. All
new values and programs may then be restored to EEPROM via the programming tool.

Terminal Equipment Controllers:
          a. Constant Air Volume (CAV) boxes
          b. Heat Pumps

Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control
sequences. As a minimum, 50% of the point outputs (except for unit ventilator controllers) shall be
of the Universal type; that is, the outputs may be utilised either as modulating or two-state, allowing
for additional system flexibility. In lieu of Universal outputs, provide a minimum of 50% spare
outputs of each type via additional point termination boards or controllers. Analogue outputs shall
be industry standard signals such as 24V floating control, allowing for interface to a variety of
modulating actuators. Terminal equipment controllers utilising proprietary control signals and
actuators shall not be acceptable. As an alternative, provide DDC Controllers or other ASCs with
industry standard outputs for control of all terminal equipment.

Each controller performing space temperature control shall be provided with a matching room
temperature sensor. The sensor may be either RTD or thermistor type providing the following
minimum performance requirements are met:

                   -   Accuracy                            (±0.2°C)
                   -   Operating Range:                    (0° to 50°) and 85% rH
                   -   Set Point Adjustment Range          (0° to 50°C)
                   -   Calibration Adjustments:            None required
                   -   Control Algorithm :                 PID
                   -   Installation:                       Up to 100 ft. from
                                                           controller

 a.    Each room temperature sensor shall include a terminal jack integral to the sensor assembly.
       The terminal jack shall be used to connect a portable operator's terminal to control and
       monitor all hardware and software points associated with the controller. In lieu of an internal
       jack, provide a separate terminal jack mounted on a stainless steel wall plate adjacent to the
       sensor to facilitate direct access to the controller via the terminal.

b.     Each room sensor shall also include the following auxiliary devices:
                                                                                                  259
       -       Set point Adjustment Dial
       -       Temperature Indicator
       -       Override Switch

c.     The set point adjustment dial shall allow for modification of the temperature by the occupant.
       Set point adjustment may be locked out, overridden or limited as to time or temperature
       through software by an authorised operator at the central workstation, DDC Controller, or via
       the portable operator's terminal.

d.     The temperature indicator shall be a bi-metal or mercury thermometer and shall be visible
       without removing the sensor cover.

An override switch shall initiate override of the night setback mode to normal (day) operation when
activated by the occupant. The override function may be locked out, overridden or limited as to the
time through software by an authorised operator at the central workstation, DDC Controller or via
the portable operator's terminal. In lieu of an integral switch, provide a separate momentary contact
switch mounted on a stainless steel wall plate adjacent to the sensor to perform the specified
functionality.

Each controller shall perform its primary control function independent of other DDC Controller
LAN communication, or if LAN communication is interrupted. Reversion to a fail-safe mode of
operation during LAN interruption is not acceptable. The controller shall receive its real-time data
from the DDC Controller time clock to insure LAN continuity. Each controller shall include
algorithms incorporating proportional, integral and derivative (PID) gains for all applications. All
PID gains and biases shall be field-adjustable by the user via terminals as specified herein. This
functionality shall allow for tighter control of space conditions and shall facilitate optimal occupant
comfort and energy savings. Controllers that incorporate proportional and integral (PI) control
algorithms only shall not be acceptable.

Provide each terminal equipment controller with sufficient memory to accommodate point
databases, operating programs, local alarming and local trending. All databases and programs shall
be stored in non-volatile EEPROM, EPROM and PROM, or minimum of 72-hour battery backup
shall be provided. The controllers shall be able to return to full normal operation without user
intervention after a power failure of unlimited duration. Provide uninterruptible power supplies
(UPSs) of sufficient capacities for all terminal controllers that do not meet this protection
requirement. Operating programs shall be field-selectable for specific applications. In addition,
specific applications may be modified to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements,
allowing for additional system flexibility. Controllers that require factory changes of all
applications are not acceptable.

Constant Air Volume (CAV) Box Controllers: Shall support the following types of pressure
independent terminal boxes as a minimum.
-      CAV with hot water reheat



                                                                                                  260
a.     Each controller performing space heating control shall incorporate an algorithm allowing for
       modulation of a hot water reheat valve or cycling up to three (3) stages of electric reheat as
       required to satisfy space heating requirements. Each controller shall also incorporate an
       algorithm that allows for resetting of the associated air handling unit discharge temperature if
       required to satisfy space cooling requirements. This algorithm shall function to signal the
       respective DDC Controller to perform the required discharge temperature reset in order to
       maintain space temperature cooling setpoint. Control of the terminal unit damper to maintain
       cooling setpoint shall not be permitted. As an alternative, DDC Controllers or other ASCs
       controlling associated air handling equipment shall also directly control all CAV terminal
       units in order to provide the specified reset capability.

b.     Each controller performing space pressurization control shall incorporate algorithms
       allowing for pressurization via the following methods as a minimum:

1.     Fixed air volume set points of supply and exhaust terminal units
2.     Updating of air volume set points of supply and exhaust terminal units

c.     Each supply and associated exhaust terminal controller may be set at a fixed air volume set
       point which is within a percentage of each other or an actual CFM differential to meet space
       pressurisation requirements. The controllers shall incorporate provisions for independent
       occupied and unoccupied mode set points and differentials, allowing for additional
       flexibility. Applications requiring updating of air volume set points depending on a variable
       volume of air leaving the space either through the exhaust terminal(s) or other exhaust ducts
       shall utilise supply terminal unit controllers incorporating algorithms to allow for "tracking"
       of space exhaust(s) to maintain the required air volume differential.

Terminal unit tracking shall be accomplished via actual measurement of terminal unit air volumes as
previously specified. Controllers which track within a range of CFMs versus actual CFM set points
shall not be acceptable. As an alternative, provide an DDC Controller or other ASC (one per room)
for each space requiring pressurisation control should terminal unit controllers be unable to perform
the specified tracking functionality.

d.      Calibration of the differential pressure transducer shall be accomplished as previously
specified for CAV box controllers. This method of stroking the terminal unit damper to a 0%
position shall not be permitted, however, should the controlled space(s) require constant
pressurisation or 24-hour per day operation. Controllers performing under these requirements shall
incorporate an auxiliary device(s) which functions to automatically calibrate the transducer without
changing the damper position. This shall be accomplished by temporarily disengaging the transducer
for the air velocity sensor so that a 0 cfm air volume reading is sensed. This shall automatically
occur on a once per 24-hour basis, thus ensuring system accuracy as previously specified. Provide
auxiliary devices and programming as required to perform this function.

e.      Should a failure occur within the controller, the terminal unit damper shall automatically be
positioned fully open or fully closed as previously defined by the operator. Controllers that revert to
a pressure-dependent control mode during failure shall not be acceptable.
                                                                                                 261
Networking Communications:

The design of the BAS shall network operator workstations and stand-alone DDC Controllers. The
network architecture shall consist of two levels, a high performance peer-to-peer network and DDC
Controller specific local area networks. Main network communication speed shall be 115200 bps.

Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the building
automation system. The hardware configuration of the BAS network shall be totally transparent to
the user when accessing data or developing control programs.

Peer-to-Peer Network Level:

     Operator workstations and DDC Controllers shall directly reside on a network such that
      communications may be executed directly between DDC Controllers, directly between
      workstations and between DDC Controllers and workstations on a peer-to-peer basis.

     All operator devices either network resident or connected via dial-up modems shall have the
      ability to access all point status and application report data or execute control functions for
      any and all other devices via the peer-to-peer network. Access to data shall be based upon
      logical identification of building equipment. No hardware or software limits shall be
      imposed on the number of devices with global access to the network data.

     Network design shall include the following provisions:

       o    Provide high-speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from
            multiple controllers and upload/download efficiency between network devices. System
            performance shall insure that an alarm occurring at any DDC Controller is displayed at
            workstations and/or alarm printers within 5 seconds.

       o    Support of any combination of DDC Controllers and operator workstations directly
            connected to the peer-to-peer network. A minimum of 60 devices shall be supported on
            a single network.

       o    Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost.

       o    Error detection, correction and retransmission to guarantee data integrity.

       o    Synchronisation of real-time clocks, to include automatic daylight savings time
            updating between all DDC Controllers shall be provided.

DDC Controller Local Area Network (LAN):




                                                                                                262
      1.     This level communication shall support a family of application specific controllers
      and shall communicate bi-directionally with the peer-to-peer network through DDC
      Controllers for transmission of global data.

      2.      Application specific controllers shall be arranged on the LANs in a functional
      relationship manner with DDC Controllers.

      3.   A maximum of 32 application specific controllers may be configured on individual
      DDC Controller LANs to insure adequate global data and alarm response times.

Telecommunication Capability:

      1.     Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow main DDC
      Controller to communicate with remote operator stations and/or remote terminals on an
      intermittent basis via telephone lines, as indicated in the sequence of operations.

      2.      Auto-dial main DDC Controller shall automatically place calls to workstations to
      report alarms or other significant events.

      a.   Main DDC Controller shall be able to store a minimum of 10 phone numbers of at least
           20 digits. Retry a single primary number at a fixed interval until successful.

      b.   The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, "no answers"
           and incomplete data transfers. Provide as a minimum 3 secondary numbers when
           communications cannot be established with the primary device.

      3.      Operators at dial-up workstations shall be able to perform all control functions, all
      report functions and all database generation and modification functions as described for
      workstations connected via the network. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer
      calls from remote DDC Controllers. The fact that communications are taking place with
      remote DDC Controllers over telephone lines shall be completely transparent to an operator.

      a.   An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selection of any facility by its
           logical name. The workstation dial-up program shall store the phone numbers of each
           remote site, so the user shall not be required to remember or manually dial telephone
           numbers.

      b.   A PC workstation may serve as an operator device on a network, as well as a dial-up
           workstation for multiple auto-dial DDC Controllers or networks. Alarm and data file
           transfers handled via dial-up transactions shall not interfere with network activity, nor
           shall network activity keep the workstation from handling incoming calls.

      4.      Dial-up communications shall make use of Hayes compatible modems and voice-
      grade telephone lines. Provide modems rated at 19200 baud.

                                                                                              263
11.5 System points

The minimum requirement for remote points which shall be transmitted to the central control
console for display alarm and/or specified operation are listed herewithin for guidance only. Other
points may be required depending upon the intended operation of the facility for its location or the
"System Control Types" listed herewithin. Operator defined "Special Instructions" shall be
simultaneously displayed with the alarm. Number of alarms shall be recorded at the network
computer by alarm type and system for further analysis. The network computer software shall be
configured so that nuisance alarms shall be suppressed when failures occur (i.e., power loss,
communication loss, DDC unit malfunctions, etc.).

11.6 Control Materials :

Actuators
General:

Shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations.

Shall have a sufficient torque to open and close valves and dampers against the maximum out of
balance pressure across them.

Shall have position indicators unless fitted to terminal units.

Control Damper Actuators: Shall be of the type where the damper spindle passes through the
actuator and is secured by a U clamp.

Actuator Additional Features: where required.

 i.     Auxiliary Switches: shall have changeover contacts suitable for 240V a.c. 2 amp rating.

        Modulating Motors

        Auxiliary switch packs containing at lest two electrically independent switches one for each
        end of motor travel, adjustable for operation over at least half the motor travel.

        Two-Position Motors

        One electrically independent switch

 ii.    Feedback Potentiometers

 One potentiometer whose resistance varies proportionally with the actuator travel.

 iii.   Fail Safe

                                                                                                  264
          Auxiliary spring or power pack for fail-safe conditions.

          The spring shall be rated for a minimum of 1000 operations.

       The power packs shall have their batteries trickle charged and each full charge shall be
       capable of operating the actuator ten times. The battery shall require no maintenance and
       shall have a life of at least 5 years.

Both fail safe devices shall have sufficient torque to open or close valves and dampers against the
maximum out of balance pressure across them.

Control Valves
All valves with the exception of unit valves shall be fitted with valve position indicators clearly
marked to show the fully open and fully closed positions.

All valves shall be tested to a pressure of at least 200% of their standard rated working pressure.

Valve Bodies:

Up to 50mm shall be screwed to BS 21 and including 50 mm and above, shall be flanged. The body
construction and flanges shall be suitable for the medium, temperature and pressure of the systems.

Construction: with the exception of butterfly valves, shall be of the single seated plug or rotating
shoe types. No plugs, shoes or trims shall be constructed of materials liable to corrode or cause
sticking.

Let-by:

On liquid applications let-by shall not exceed 0.5% of full duty for plug type valves, or 1% for shoe
types.

Characteristics:

The valves when used to control heater exchangers shall have equal percentage or modified
parabolic characteristic and their rangebility shall be not less than 40:1.

Three and four port valves shall give a constant total flow characteristics, within ±10%, for all vale
positions.

Authority:

All two-port modulating valves shall be selected to have an authority between 0.3 and 0.5.

All three and four-port valves shall be selected to have an authority of not less than 0.5.

                                                                                                  265
Two-Port Valves: shall be selected to ensure that each valve is capable of opening and closing
against the maximum differential head which may be applied across the valve in its circuit.

Three-Port Valves:

Only the bottom port shall be used for bypass connections except on terminal unit valves.

Rotary shoe valves may be used up to a maximum size of 50mm provided that the shoes are of one
piece construction.

Spring loaded shoe valves are not acceptable.
Rotary shoe valves may only be used on closed circuit systems.

Where three-port valves are used to separate flow between two independent circuits, the selection
shall be checked to ensure that the valve is capable of opening and closing against the maximum
differential head which may be applied across the valve.

Four-Port Valves: shall have a reduced kv on the bypass port such that its resistance simulates the
resistance of the heat exchanger.

Modulating butterfly valves shall be selected so that full flow rate is achieved at the 60 open
position unless a “fishtail” pattern butterfly is used when the valve shall be 90 open for full flow
rate. The actuator stroke shall be set accordingly.

Automatic Control Valves:

All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning with modulating plug or V-port inner
guides, unless specified otherwise: The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe in either
normally open or normally closed position in the event of control failure. All valves shall be
capable of operating at varying rates of speed to correspond to the exact dictates of the controllers
and variable load requirements. The valves shall be capable of operating in sequence when required
by the sequence of operation. All control valves shall be sized by the Contractor and shall be
guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads as specified. All control valves shall be suitable
for the pressure conditions and shall close against the differential pressures involved. All control
valves shall have throttling guides and renewable seats and discs. Body pressure rating and
connection type (screwed or flanged) shall conform to pipe schedule. Control valve operators shall
be sized to close against a differential pressure equal to the design pump head plus 10 percent.
Where pressure and flow combinations exceed ratings for commercial valves and operators,
industrial class valves and operators shall be provided.

All motorized valves shall be provided with manually operated and wheels for overriding the
operator.




                                                                                                266
Hot water control valves shall be single seated type with equal percentage flow characteristics.
When used on reheaters, they shall be as specified under system control types. The valve discs shall
be composition type with bronze trim.

Chilled water valves shall be of three or two port as specified and shall be of throttling type. Three-
way type and bypass valves shall have equal percentage flow characteristics. Valves shall be single
seated type, except where pressure and flow combination exceed rating for commercial valve
operators, industrial class valves and operators shall be used.

Damper Operators:
All damper operators shall be electric spring-return type such that damper will fail-safe upon
interruption of electric power. The failure position shall be as specified or as required to suit job
conditions. The operators shall be capable of operating in sequence when required by the sequence
of operation. The operators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the stroke in either
direction. The operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit normally open or normally
closed positions of the dampers as required.

A sufficient number of damper operators shall be installed to operate single and multiple damper
sections smoothly and in unison at the maximum rated static pressure and air velocity, and to
provide the close-off torque required to meet damper leakage criteria. Provide auxiliary drive shafts
with pillow block bearings and bearing support brackets rigidly attached to the damper frame
assembly on damper banks more than one damper section wide.

Dampers
Dampers Which Require opposed Blade Action:

     1) Dampers in modulating service such as outdoor air return air and spill air dampers in air
        conditioning systems.
     2) Outdoor air intake, exhaust air, and recirculation air dampers in ventilation systems which
        are under modulating control.

Dampers Which Require Parallel Blade Action:

     1) Dampers in two position service such as outdoor air intake and exhaust air dampers in
        ventilation systems which are under two-position control.
     2) Fan discharge dampers.

Floor isolation dampers in supply and return air ducts.

Room Thermostats
When of the bimetal detector type they shall be fitted with a shunt accelerator heater.

Scale ranges shall cover a band of at least 5°C and no more than 15°C on either side of the set point
detailed in the controller and regulator schedules. The operating differential shall not exceed 1°C,

                                                                                                  267
under all load conditions, for rates of temperature rise and fall within the controlled space of 3°C
per hour, and 2°C for rates of 14°C per hour.

Duct Mounted and Immersion Thermostats
Shall have rigid stems or capillaries terminated in sensing bulbs. Stems shall have a minimum
length of 300mm. Capillary and bulb assemblies shall have a minimum length of 1.5m.

Scale ranges shall cover a band of at least 5°C and no more than 15°C on either side of the set point.

The operating differential shall not exceed 3°C for all load conditions.

Immersion and Duct Mounted Temperature Detectors:
Duct mounted averaging element detectors shall have a minimum sensing length of 5m.

Multiple thermistor beads will not be acceptable.

Duct Mounted Low Limit Temperature / “Frost” Protection Thermostats
May be any of three types:

   i. Rigid Stem: shall be used on ducts having a cross-sectional area of up to and including
      0.6m2. They shall be as specified for duct mounted thermostats.

   ii. Capillary: shall be used on ducts having a cross-sectional area exceeding 06.m2.

Shall have a minimum capillary length of 5m and shall operate when any 300mm length of sensing
element falls below the set point.

The capillary element shall be serpentined across the whole duct.
Where the span of the element is less than 1m then it shall be supported on Unistrut or similar rigid
support.

   iii. Electronic Clamp-on Type: shall be used as an alternative to rigid stem and capillary types.

The thermistor element shall be clipped to the heater battery return tube within the ductwork by
means of a phosphor bronze clip.
The unit shall be arranged for automatic reset after power failure.

Humidisdats
Humidistat shall not require regular maintenance, recalibration or regeneration.

Scale ranges shall cover a band of at least 10% R.H. on either side of the set point. Operating
differentials, under all load conditions, shall not exceed 5% R.H.

Duct Mounted Humidity Detectors
Shall operate on extra-low voltage.
                                                                                                 268
Shall not require regular maintenance, recalibration or regeneration.

Pressure Detectors: shall be suitable for the medium and the working temperatures and pressures.
The pressure detector shall be capable of withstanding a hydraulic test pressure of 1.5 times the
working pressure.

Ductwork versions shall be supplied with air connections permitting their use as static or
differential pressure detectors.

Pressure Switches for Pipework:
Shall be bellows operated, the bellows being suitable for the medium and the working temperatures
and pressures. The pressure switch shall be capable of withstanding a hydraulic test pressure of 1.5
times the working pressure.

Shall be supplied suitable for pipe or wall mounting.

Pressure Switches for Air systems
Shall be diaphragm operated. Switches shall be supplied with air connections permitting their use as
static or differential pressure switches.

Shall be supplied suitable for wall mounting or mounting on ducts in any plane.

Air Flow Switches
Shall be selected for the correct air velocity, duct size and mounting attitude and shall be suitable
for mounting in any plane.

11.6.1 Water Flow Switches

Shall be selected for the correct water velocity and pipe size and mounting attitude.

11.6.2 Level Switches

Shall be selected for the fluid type, system pressure and have adjustable differentials.

They may be:

       i.      Conventional float type
       ii.     Capacitance type
       iii.    Conductivity type

Where conductivity types are offered they shall include all probes (including earth).




                                                                                                269
Duct Smoke Detectors:
These detectors shall have output of two signals, one signal relayed to the BMS and the other to be
relayed to the fire detection system, through input modules specified under electrical section.

Gas Detectors
The detectors shall be arranged for automatic reset after a power failure.

Single Channel:

High gain, wall mounted gas detection unit supplied complete with 910 sensor housing, collecting
cone and pellistor bead suitable for natural gas.

Multi Channel:

Control cards to accept three sensor housings, collecting cones and pellistor beads suitable for
natural gas. Wall mounted enclosure and all interface relays and transformers to from a functioning
system.

Single, Two or Three Channel:

High gain, wall mounted gas detection unit supplied complete with sensor housings, collecting
cones and mark 3 DCP heads suitable for natural gas.

Multi Channel:

Card based, panel mounted gas detection unit to accept fifteen sensor housings, collecting cones and
mark 3 DCP heads suitable for natural gas.

Watt-Hour Transducers
Watt-hour transducers shall include a 2 wires, 4-20 mA transmitter and transducer.

Potential and current transformers will be provided under the Electrical Section of the
Specifications. Mount transmitter and transducer in a single nema enclosure, suitable for 1, 2, 3
element, single-phase and/or three phase service at the a.c. line voltage level. Nominal potential
input shall be as indicated on electrical drawings.

Each transmitter shall be factory adjusted to a calibrated accuracy of .1% over the operating span.
Provide certified calibration sheet from manufacturer with 2 year warranty. Wiring between current
transformers, potential transformers and the kwh transducer, and between the kwh transducer and
the DDC system, shall be provided by this Contractor.

Differential Pressure Transmitters
Differential pressure transmitters shall be variable capacitance type arranged for 2 wire, 0-10 v
control signal output.

                                                                                               270
The transmitter shall be fully compensated for both process and ambient temperature variations and
a calibrated accuracy of 7+0.25% of calibrated Span.
Annubars:
Annubars shall be industrial type.

Assembly shall consist of an averaging pilot tube (annubar) flow element and a differential pressure
transmitter. Assembly shall be provided with insertion/retraction mechanism complete with 1 inch
cast steel ball Value, compression fitting nipples, contoured weld coupling required for installation.
Annubar flow element shall be installed so that the total head pressure ports are set in line with the
pipe axis facing upstream and the static pressure port is facing downstream.
Annubars shall be installed in plane with upstream elbow, with a minimum of 10 upstream and 5
down stream pipe diameters of straight run. If a modulating valve is installed upstream of the
annubar, 25 pipe diameters of straight run are required.

Accuracy shall be +0.1% of actual value. Repeatability shall be +0.1% of actual value. Annubars
shall be suitable for the design pressures and temperatures involved.

Annubars shall be provided with all necessary mounting hardware to allow for the removal of the
flow sensor under pressure without shutting down the pipeline. The annubar shall be provided with
a 1/8 inch female NPT by 1/2 inch male NPT adaptor for the future connection of 1/2 inch impulse
tubing and 1/2 inch pipe-to-tube connector.

Frequency Inverter:

Frequency Inverter drives shall be suitable for use on standard squirrel cage motors as specified and
be of the pulse width modulation type. The control range shall be 0.5 to 120Hz. The motor
nameplate current shall not be exceeded on start up.

Frequency Inverter drives shall be capable of connection to a motor already rotating in the correct
direction at any speed up to the specified maximum without braking the motor to a standstill, and
connection to a motor driven fan wind milling in reverse direction without causing tripping, and
returning the fan correctly to the set conditions of speed and direction .

Drives shall withstand 500 milliseconds mains interruption without causing tripping and be fully
protected against any electrically induced disorders without operating fuses.

Drives shall be suitable for local and remote control and provide means of running at a fixed
(selectable) speed on closure of a remote volt-free contact, overriding the speed control reference.

Frequency inverters shall have digital display of all operating conditions and recall of design limits.
These shall be keyboard adjustable where applicable.

Volt-free contacts shall be provided to monitor all alarm functions.



                                                                                                  271
A4-20mA analog output signal shall be provided, programmable for, but not limited to, the
following:

         (i) output frequency
         (ii) reference signal
         (iii) output current
         (iv) motor torque
         (v) motor power .

The manufacturer of the frequency Inverter drive shall ensure that the Inverter and motor are
entirely compatible and shall provide details regarding the production of harmonics, mains borne
and airborne (radiated, magnetic or electro-static) interference. Written guarantees shall be given
that disturbance levels will not exceed the limits of the EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Standards.

Frequency inverters shall comply in all respects with the UL or equal British and European
Standards .

11.7 Electrical Wiring And Materials

Supply, install, connect and wire the items included under this Section. This work includes
providing required conduit, wire, fittings, and related wiring accessories. All wiring, except plenum
cable, shall be installed in conduit.

Provide wiring and conduits between all field control and alarm devices and unit controllers and
DDC‟s and Building Management System.

 Provide primary voltage power supply to every direct digital control unit, CRT, network computer,
transmission power supply, annunciator module, modem, intercom module, printer, and to other
devices as required in this Section. It is the intent that the entire building automation system and all
peripheral devices, alarms etc., shall be in the building. The power supplies are to be extended in
conduit and wire from available spare circuit in emergency panel boards.

Provide status function conduit and wiring for equipment covered under this Section.

Provide conduit and wiring between the direct digital control system panels and the temperature,
humidity, or pressure sensing elements, including low voltage (under 100 volt) control wiring and
coaxial cable in conduit.

Provide conduit and control wiring for devices specified in this Section.

Provide conduit and signal wiring between motor starters in motor control centers and high and/or
low temperature relay contacts and remote relays in direct digital control units located in the
vicinity of motor control centers.

                                                                                                   272
Provide conduit and wiring between the network computer, electrical panels metering
instrumentation, indicating devices, miscellaneous alarm points, remotely operated contractors, and
direct digital control unit, as shown on the drawings or as specified.

Provide control and signal conduit and wiring between the DDC system and the chiller control
panels, and all control and signal interwiring between the chillers and their local control panels.

All conduit shall be in accordance with the Electrical Section and all local Codes.

Wires and cables shall be as follows:

     a. Single Conductor (primary voltage/a.c.):
           1.5 mm.2 (No.12 AWG) stranded copper with 600 volt insulation color coded red for hot
          leg, white for neutral, black for all others, for use in conduit. Larger gauge cables shall be
          provided where necessary to limit the voltage drop to 3% or 3.6 volts. 1.5 mm.2 (No. 12
          AWG) shall be used for instrument heat tracing feeders.

     b. Signal Cables ( 4-20 mA Analog) :
       1) For Use in Areas Other Than Air Plenums :
           2/C 1.0 mm.2 (No. 16 AWG) shielded and multi-pair 0.75 mm.2 (No. 20 AWG)
           individually shielded.

       2) For Use in Air Plenums:
          Plenum type teflon insulated, 2/C 1.0 mm.2 (No. 16 AWG) shielded and multipair 1.0
          mm.2 (No. 20 AWG) individually shielded.

       NOTE:
       The cables listed above have conductors with 300 volt insulation ratings. Similar cables with
       600 volt insulation ratings must be provided for any cable terminating within or occupying an
       enclosure containing conductors operating at a voltage greater than 240 volts (i.e., 415 volt
       motor starter enclosure).

     c. Alarm, Digital input/output and Control Cables (C24 volt a.c.) :

       1) For Use in Areas Other Than Air Plenums:2/C 1.0 mm.2 (No. 16 AWG), and multi-pair
          0.75 mm.2 ( No. 20 AWG ).

       2) For Use in Air Plenums: Plenum type teflon insulated, 2/C 1.0 mm.2 (No. 16 AWG) and
          multi - pair 0.75 mm.2 (No. 20 AWG).

       3) Larger gauge cables shall be provided where necessary to limit the voltage drop to 1.2
          volts.

       NOTE:
                                                                                                  273
       The cables listed above have conductors with 300 volt insulation ratings. Similar cables with
       600 volt insulation ratings must be provided for any cable terminating within or occupying an
       enclosure containing conductors operating at a voltage greater than 240 volts (i.e., 415 volt
       motor starter enclosure).

     d. RTD Wiring :


       1) For Use in Areas Other Than Air Plenums: 3/C 1.0 mm.2(No. 16 AWG).


       2) For Use in Air Plenums: Plenum type teflon insulated 3/C 1.0 mm.2 (No. 16 AWG).

     e. DDC Communications Cables:

        DDC communications wiring between the local control unit and the network computer shall
        be 1.0 mm.2 (No. 16 AWG) shielded cable, and shall be run in trays where available,
        otherwise in approved raceways.

Tags for wires and cables shall be clip-sleeve type nonmetallic wire markers or equivalent.

For conduit fittings, conduit hangers and supports, terminal junction boxes, expansion joints, sleeves
and wiring devices, see applicable paragraph of the Electrical Section.

11.8 Electrical Wiring Installation

All wiring in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, communications or electrical closets shall be in
approved raceways (cable tray, conduit, etc.). Open wiring strung above ceilings shall be plenum
rated cable, bundled together and protected from mechanical damage. Wiring shall be independently
supported from the building structure with bridal rings and clips. The supporting of wiring from
mechanical ductwork or piping is not acceptable.

Cables for primary voltage a.c. wiring and low level signal wiring (i.e., 4-20 mA analog) shall
always be run in separate raceways.

Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit, 1/2 inch minimum size, for making connections at
instruments and devices mounted on piping or vessels or on equipment subject to vibration.

Low level signal wiring homeruns to local control stations may be by means of multi-pair cables.
The number of pairs in such cables shall be uniform throughout the installation, and, in general,
there shall be at least 20% spare pairs in each such cable.

Primary voltage a.c. circuits used for control and instrumentation shall be taken from panel boards
connected to the emergency power distribution system, With the exception of circuits powered from
motor starters. Panel board and circuit breakers shall be provided under the Electrical Section, but


                                                                                                274
the wiring and raceway materials and installation for ATC system power requirements shall be
furnished under this Section.
Primary voltage a.c. circuits used for control and instrumentation shall be dedicated to the ATC
system and shall not be used for any other purposes.

Conveniently located terminal junction boxes shall be used for the transition from the single pair
local signal cables to the multi-pair home run cable. These boxes shall have "terminal schedules"
attached to the inside of their covers displaying the terminals and the service tags of the cables
terminated there.

        Conduits shall be run exposed in mechanical spaces, concealed in occupied space, and
parallel or perpendicular to structural members or architectural features.

Bends in conduit shall not have a radius less than six (6) times the diameter of the conduit, nor bend
more than 90 degrees, and shall be in accordance with local Codes.

Provide junction boxes or pull boxes as required and necessary to avoid excessively long runs or too
many bends between outlets.

Fittings in conduit containing multi-conductor cables shall be oversized to accommodate 3 times
cable bending radius for 90 degree bends and 4 times bending radius for straight runs.

Expansion fittings shall be provided with bonding jumpers. Expansion joint fittings shall be
provided at each point where conduits cross expansion joints and conduit is rigidly attached to
structure on both sides of joint. Where there is a 45 degree or greater bend and five feet of
unconfined conduit on one side of the joint, the fittings may be omitted.

For conduit supports and installation of wires and cables, see applicable paragraphs of the Electrical
Section.

Conduit entering a cabinet, box, trough, etc., shall be secured with a locknut on the outside and on
the inside, such that the conduit system is electrically continuous throughout. A bushing shall also
be provided on the inside. Bushings shall be mortal with insulated throats. Locknuts shall be the type
designed to bite into the metal, or on the inside of the enclosure shall have a grounding wedge lug
under the locknut. Top or side of any enclosure in a nonfinished area such as Garages, Substation
Rooms, etc., shall be terminated with screw tape waterproof hubs.

Conduit box type connectors for conduit entering enclosures shall be the insulated throat type.

Conduits shall be offset where they enter surface mounted equipment. Wiring installed in panels and
other enclosures shall be neatly looped and laced.

Conduit runs which extend from the interior to the exterior of a building shall be sealed to prevent
the circulation of air. This shall be accomplished by the installation of sealing fittings.

                                                                                                  275
All signal wires shall be tagged with their wire designations and all signal cable pairs shall be tagged
with their service designations where terminated at devices and in terminal boxes.

Wires shall be terminated with insulated spade type lugs on screw terminals. Soldered connections
shall only be made at instruments where no other means of termination is practical.

Perform continuity testing for all wiring installed.

Control raceways shall not be hung from electrical raceways or attached to ceiling grid hanger wires.

Percent fill of conduit shall not exceed Code maximum, regardless of service.

No 300 volt insulated wiring shall terminate within or occupy any enclosure containing conductors
operating at a voltage greater than 300 volts. This particularly applies to any analog or digital I/O
wiring entering 208 volt motor starter enclosures or motor control centers.

Provide, install and wire receptacles for control room devices.

a.     Exhaust Fans Sequence:

       1)      Fan Off: Discharge damper closed.

       2)      Fan On: Discharge damper open.

       3)      High temperature sensor or smoke detector on suction side of fan stops when air
               temperature rises above 51 ‫ه‬C.(125 ‫ه‬F.).

11.9 On-Site Testing

Provide Supervisor -approved operation and acceptance testing of the complete system.               The
Supervisor will witness all tests.

Field Test: When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify transmission
media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting and final field
tests shall be completed by the installer. Provide a detailed cross-check of each sensor within the
system by making a comparison between the reading at the sensor and a standard traceable to the
National Bureau of Standards. Provide a cross-check of each control point within the system by
making a comparison between the control command and the field-controlled device. Verify that all
systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of
power. Submit the results of functional and diagnostic tests and calibrations to the Supervisor for
final system acceptance.

Compliance Inspection Checklist: Submit in the form requested, the following items of information
to the Owner's Representative and Supervisor for verification of compliance to the project

                                                                                                  276
specifications. Failure to comply with the specified information shall constitute non-performance of
the contract. The contractor shall submit written justification for each item in the checklist that he is
unable to comply with. The Owner's Representative and the Supervisor will initial and date the
checklist to signify contractor's compliance before acceptance of system.

 1.    Verify to the Owner's Representative and Supervisor in letter form that supplier has in-place
       support facility. Letter shall show location of support facility, name and titles of technical
       staff, supervisors, fitters, electricians, managers and all other personnel responsible for the
       completion of the work on this project.

 2.    Submit in data sheet form or official government approval form compliance to F.C.C.
       Regulation, Part 15, and Section 15.

 3.    Manually generate an alarm at a remote DDC Controller as selected by the Supervisor to
       demonstrate the capability of the workstation and alarm printer to receive alarms within 5
       seconds.

 4.    Disconnect an operator workstation in the central control room and manually generate an
       alarm at a remote DDC Controller to demonstrate the capability of the system printer to
       receive alarms when the workstation is disconnected from the system.

 5.    Disconnect one DDC Controller from the network to demonstrate that a single device failure
       shall not disrupt or halt peer-to-peer communication. Panel to be disconnected shall be
       selected by the Supervisor.
 6.    At a DDC Controller of the Supervisor‟s choice, display on the portable operator's terminal:

       a. At least one temperature set point and at least one status condition, i.e., on or off for a
          system or piece of equipment attached to that panel as well as for points at another DDC
          Controller on the network.

       b. The diagnostic results as specified for a system or piece of equipment attached to that
          panel as well as for a system or piece of equipment attached to another DDC Controller.

       c. The ability to add a new point to the DDC Controller with the POT and have it
          automatically uploaded to the workstation to modify that panel's stored database.

 7. At an ASC of the Supervisor‟s choice, disconnect the LAN connection to demonstrate its lack
    of reliance on a DDC Controller to maintain full control functionality.

11.10 Service and Guarantee

General Requirements: Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful
operation of the entire BAS system for a period of one year after completion of successful
performance test. Provide necessary material required for the work. Minimize impacts on facility
operations when performing scheduled adjustments and non-scheduled work.
                                                                                                   277
Description of Work: The adjustment and repair of the system includes all computer equipment,
software updates, transmission equipment and all sensors and control devices. Provide the
manufacturer's required adjustments and all other work necessary.

Personnel: Provide qualified personnel to accomplish all work promptly and satisfactorily. Owner
shall be advised in writing of the name of the designated service representative, and of any changes
in personnel.

Schedule of Work: Provide two minor inspections at 6 month intervals and two major inspections
offset equally between the minor inspections to effect quarterly inspection of alternating magnitude,
and all work required as specified (Schedule major inspections in June and December). Minor
inspections shall include visual checks and operational tests of all equipment delivered. Major
inspections shall include all work described for minor inspections and the following work:

   1.   Clean all equipment, including interior and exterior surfaces.
   2.   Perform signal, voltage and system isolation checks of system workstations and peripherals.
   3.   Check and calibrate each field device. Check all analog points and digital points.
   4.   Run all diagnostics and correct all previously diagnosed problems.
   5.   Resolve and correct any previous outstanding problems.

Emergency Service: Owner will initiate service calls when the system is not functioning properly.
Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service to the complete system. Furnish owner
with a telephone number where service representative can be reached at all times. Service personnel
shall be at the site within 24 hours after receiving a request for service. Restore the control system to
proper operating condition within 3 days.

Operation: Performance of scheduled adjustments and repair shall verify operation of the system as
demonstrated by the initial performance test.

Systems Modifications: Provide any recommendations for system modification in writing to Owner.
Do not make any system modifications, including operating parameters and control settings, without
prior approval of Owner. Any modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the
operations and maintenance manuals, and other documentation affected.

Software: Provide all software updates and verify operation in the system. These updates shall be
accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with the system operators, and shall be
incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and software documentation.

11.11 Training

The Contractor shall provide competent instructors to give full instruction to designated personnel in
the adjustment, operation and maintenance of the system installed rather than a general training
course. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to

                                                                                                   278
teach. All training shall be held during normal work hours of 8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. weekdays as
follows:

Provide 250 hours of training for Owner's operating personnel.

Training shall include:

 1.   Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals.
 2.   Walk-thru of the job to locate control components
 3.   Operator workstation and peripherals
 4.   DDC Controller and ASC operation/function
 5.   Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel programming
 6.   Operation of portable operator's terminal.
 7.   Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures.

Provide 50 hours of additional training quarterly for a period of one year from final completion of
the project.

Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of the hardware
and software, additional training must be available from the Contractor. If such training is required
by the Owner, it will be contracted at a later date. Provide description of available local and factory
customer training.

12. Testıng adjustıng and balancıng

12.1 General

The Supervisor shall witness all testing and commissioning and shall have access at all reasonable
times to such parts of the Contractor‟s and Suppliers‟ work as may be necessary for the purpose of
inspecting, examining and testing the materials, workmanship and performance.

The Contractor shall give the Supervisor seven days‟ written notice of his intention to carry out a
test and shall have carried out all necessary adjustment prior to commencing the test.

The Contractor shall allow for testing and commissioning the installation in sections as may be
required in order to conform with the program. All pipework and ductwork in these sections shall
be sealed and tested as specified below, so that the insulation can be applied and the section
completed to assist the program.

The Contractor shall at the time of the test present copies of the certificate for signature by the
Supervisor and one to be retained by the Contractor.

Insurance company certificates of hydraulic test held at the Manufacturer‟s work shall be submitted
for boilers, radiators and cylinders.

                                                                                                 279
Manufacturers‟ certificates, of test at the specified duties held at the manufacturers‟ work shall be
submitted for pumps and fans. No item of equipment shall be delivered to Site before the Supervisor
has given his approval of the test certificate.

Where no test pressures at factory are given, the test shall be carried out on Site in accordance with
the appropriate Turkish Standard or equivalent and subject to the Supervisor‟s approval.

Section Includes
This document covers testing, adjusting and balancing of Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
system and equipment.
The Contractor shall execute these works in accordance with this specification.

Related Work
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment
Fire Fighting System
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Equipment
Air Distribution
Building Works Instrumentation and Control

References
ISO -         International Standard Organization

Submittals
a.    Test Reports
b.    Manufacturer‟s Data

12.2 Execution

General
 a. After installation and before hydrostatic test are carried out, the piping shall be thoroughly
     cleansed out.
 b. Piping shall be disconnected from tank, control valves and equipment before the piping is
     washed out.
 c. Tests and inspection
     All water piping shall be tested by the contractor according to the governing regulations and
     standards. No part of piping works shall be covered concealed until properly tested in the
     presence of Supervisor. If at any time during the tests, any defects are found in materials or
     the work is found to be unsatisfactory in any way, such defects work shall be repaired or
     replaced and tests shall be repeated.
 d. Water piping system

       After completion of the piping connection and before pipe covering, the openings shall be
       closed before installing equipment. The entire hot and cold water piping system shall be
       tested at hydrostatic pressure not less than 2 times the operating pressure for 8 hours.

                                                                                                280
          The test shall be made with the pressure test apparatus with pressure gage and before
          proceeding the test ends with all branching pipes shall be plugged .The pressure gauge shall
          be placed at the lowest point of the installations, if the pressure does not disclose downward
          inclination in 6-8 hours, it shall mean that all the pipes and joints are proper, otherwise the
          defective place should be traced and after remedying the defects, the test shall be repeated.
          When a portion of the piping system is concealed before completion of the entire system, the
          portion shall be tested separately as specified for the whole system; the system shall be
          vented of all air before testing

e.        Duct system

 After completion of the duct connection and before duct covering, the openings shall be closed
 before installing equipment. The entire ducting shall be tested according to European norm
 class B or CL6 according to ASHRAE and SMACNA. Tighter ducting shall be required by
 controller where equipment emission is dangerous to human health.

Pressure Test For Water Pipe Work
The pressure shall be maintained for a period of eight hours in each case, and due allowance shall be
made for attendance by the Supervisor during the progress of such tests. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for arranging for the water authority to witness this test should they require to do so.
Any equipment fitted not suitable for this pressure shall be adequately protected or isolated from the
system during the test.

The test pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated test pump or, in the case of long
main or mains of large diameter, by a power driven test pump which shall not be left unattended. In
either case precaution shall be taken to ensure the required pressure is not exceeded. Pressure gage
should be recalibrated before the tests.

The Contractor shall provide all the test pumps and other equipment required to carry out the
pressure tests.

     a.   Following the pressure tests on the pipework systems, operational tests shall be carried out on
          the system as a whole to establish that special valves, gages, controls, fittings equipment and
          plant are functioning correctly to the Supervisor‟s approval.

     b.   The test pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated test pump or, in the case
          of long main or mains of large diameter, by a power driven test pump which shall not be left
          unattended. In either case precaution shall be taken to ensure the required pressure is not
          exceeded. Pressure gage should be recalibrated before the tests.

          The Contractor shall provide all the test pumps and other equipment required to carry out the
          pressure tests.

     c.   The test pressure shall be two times the maximum working.


                                                                                                   281
Sterilization And Flushing Of Installation
All underground water main and above ground water distribution systems, cisterns, tank, calorifier,
pumps, etc., shall be thoroughly sterilized and flushed out after the completion of all tests and before
being fully commissioned for hand over.
The sterilization procedures shall be carried out by the Contractor or specialist employed by the
Contractor to the Supervisor‟s approval, and shall include but not be limited to the following:

 a.    The tank shall be scrubbed down and flushed out with water containing a solution of chloride
       of time.
 b.    The tank and pipe shall then be filled with water and a sterilizing chemical containing
       chloride added mixing.
       Sufficient chemical shall be used to give the water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one
       million parts of water ( 50 PPM ).
 c.    When the tanks are full the supply shall be shut off. All the taps on the distributing pipe shall
       than be opened successively, working progressively away from the tanks.
 d.    Each tap shall be closed when the water discharged begins to smell of chloride.

 e.    The tanks shall then be topped up and the whole system whereupon a test shall be made for
       residual chlorine. If none is found, the sterilization shall be carried out again.
 f.    Finally the tanks and pipe shall be thoroughly flushed out until the residual chlorine is a
       maximum of 2ppm. before any water is used for domestic purposes.
 g.    All tank openings, including tank drain and overflow pipe ends, shall have suitable provision
       for preventing the entry of vermin and insects to the requirements of the Environmental
       Public Health Authority.

Underground Drainage System
 a. A site test shall be carried out on all drainage pipes before concrete hunching or surrounds
     are applied. These tests shall be carried out preferably from manhole to manhole.
     Short branch drain connected to a main drain between manholes shall be tested as one system
     with the main drain. In long branches a testing junction shall be inserted next to junction with
     the main drain and the branch tested separately. After the test has been passed, the testing
     junction shall be effectively sealed.

 b.    All openings below the top of the suction to be tested shall be hermetically sealed and the
       pipe line shall be allowed to stand full of water for a period of fifteen (15) minutes prior to
       testing.
 c.    The test pressure shall be maintained for a period of one hour during which time the pipe and
       joints shall be inspected for sweating and leakage. Any leak discovered during the tests shall
       be made good by the Contractor and the section re-tested to the approval of the Supervisor.
       The time period between making good and re-testing shall be at least 24 hours.
 d.    The hydraulic test pressures shall be applied as follow:

       (1)     Downstream end of test section: Not more than 3000 mm head.

       (2)     Upstream end of test section: Not more than 200 mm head.
                                                                                                  282
 e.    If the difference in level between consecutive manholes exceeds 1800 mm, the maximum
       head on the down stream end may be increased to 4500 mm.
       Where the difference in level is greater than the above, the Contractor shall install approved
       testing equipment to carried out the test as required. The test shall be carried out on as long a
       length as possible consistent with the above.

Above Ground Drainage System

All soil, waste and ventilating pipe system forming part of the above ground installation shall be
tested with water.

Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections

If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be filled with water to the point of
overfow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section
under test shall be tightly plugged and each section shall be filled with water and tested at least 3m.
head of water.

In testing successive sections, at least the upper 3m of the next preceding section shall be tested so
that each joint or pipe in the building except the uppermost 3m. of the system has been submitted to
a test of at least a 3m head of water

The water shall be kept in the system or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before the
inspection starts, the system shall then be tight at all joints.

Waste and soiled water pipe shall be inspected and tested before and after installation. The complete
discharge service shall be tested for soundness and performance to the Supervisor.

Any defects revealed by the tests shall be made good by the Contractor and the test repeated to the
Supervisor‟s approval.

12.3 Testing, Balancing and Commissioning.

Performance of testing
Testing, balancing for air and hydraulic systems shall be performed by independent body who is
specialized in this field.
The contractor shall submit to the Supervisor full documentation for performing the test with all
necessary sheets for approval prior to commencing testing. The contractor shall also submit to the
Supervisor all necessary information for approval of the independent body for testing

General

Upon completion of the installation work, the installation shall be put into trial run required for the
following tests: Cleaning, testing, measurements and adjusting for demonstrating the performance in
                                                                                                       283
accordance with the design requirements and for providing instruction and training of the employers
personal. The complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems shall be tested, adjusted
and commission according to EN applicable standards
Flow rate shall be adjusted according to design. Flow in mains and branches shall be measured by
pressure differential manometer across balancing valves or use other suitable device All automatic
system elements, such as motorized valves, sensors, etc. shall be simulated to provide correct
response. The contractor shall provide and install any device if found necessary to complete the job
of testing, balancing and commissioning even if is not indicated in contract documents.

Measurements
The following tests are required to be performed. These tests do
not represent all necessary tests. Test types and method and no. of tests are according to NEEP and
ASHRAE requirements. Air Flow shall be measured and adjusted in main and branch ducts to
provide the required in each space.

Air System

Fresh air quantity                              L/S
Extract air quantity                           L/S
Return air quantity                              L/S
Supply air quantity                              L/S
Supply air temps. dry and wet bulb        °C
Extract/Return air temps. dry and wet bulb °C
Fresh air temps. dry and wet bulb                 °C
Mixed air temps. dry and wet bulb                 °C
Room air temps. dry and wet bulb for selected
areas (allow four per floor)                      °C
Air temp. of last supply diffuser/grille on each
system at each floor                             °C

Chillers:

Chilled water temps. at full load and through       °C
unloading range
Chilled water flow on chiller                L/S
Chilled water pressure drop                  m/water
Compressor/Motor power (name plate FLA)          Amps
Compressor/Absorbed elect. power at full load Amps
Ambient Temp.                                      °C
Oil pressure/differential(s)                       bar
Evaporating pressure(s)                            bar
Condensing Pressure(s)                             bar
High pressure cut-out setting                bar
Low pressure cut-out setting                 bar
Low water temperature setting                      °C
                                                                                               284
Oil pressure setting                             bar
Loading and unloading system at partial and      OK/Not
full load                                        OK
Duty                                            KWT

Return and Extract Fans

Air flow                                   L/S
Total and static pressure                  mm
Fan speed                                  Rpm
Fan power (absorbed) / phase              Amp/Amp/Amp
Motor speed                               Rpm
Motor Power (name plate) FLA               Amp

Pumping equipment

Water flow rate                            L/S
static pressure                            m/water
Suction pressure                           m/water
Discharge pressure                         m/water
Pump speed                                R.P.M.
Pump power (absorbed)/phase               Amp/Amp/
Motor speed                               R.P.M.
Motor power (name plate) FLA              Amp

Heat exchangers:

Primary water flow                         L/S
Primary water on/off temps.                °C
Primary water pressure drop                m/water
Secondary water flow                L/S
Secondary water on/off temps.              °C
Secondary water pressure drop              m/water
Duty                                       Watt

Water systems (piping & Control Valves)

Flow through main and sub-circuits               L/S
Flow through control valves                      L/S
Pressure drop through control valves       m/water
Pressure drop across strainers                  m/water
Supply temperature                              °C
Return temperature (after coil)                 °C
Return temperature (after mixing valve)          °C

                                                          285
Motor data

Name plate power (FLA)                               Amp
Voltage                                              V
Motor absorbed power/phase                Amp
cycles
Starting current                                     Amp

Controls

Set values of all control devices
Control bands on all control devices
Set values of all protection devices

Sound Levels

(Free field sound full spectrum)                     dB(A)Hz

Adjacent to :

       - Chillers and A/C Split and Packaged Units
       - Fans and air handling plant
       - Air intake and discharge louvers
       - Refrigeration condensing units




                                                               286
                          Technical Specifications for Electrical Works
13. Electrical Work General Instructions

13.1 General

13.1.1 Scope of Work

    The scope of work shall include the supply; manufacture installation, erection, delivery,
    storage, testing, commissioning and handing over in perfect and operative condition of all
    materials and equipment of the following electrical systems as specified in this specification
    and shown on the electrical drawings:

    -   MV cable from the point defined by BEDAŞ,
    -   MV prefabricated Building including MV cubicles, batteries with charging units, all cable
        terminations and cabling,
    -   Power Transformers,
    -   LV Panels,
    -   LV Cables,
    -   Cable Trays and Ladders and all cable carrying systems,
    -   Lighting Fixtures,
    -   Lighting and Socket Outlet circuits including conduits, cables, boxes and all accessories
        for complete system,
    -   Outdoor Lighting,
    -   Grounding and Lightning protection,
    -   Data and Telephone system as Structural Cabling,
    -   Telephone PABX,
    -   Fire Alarm System,
    -   Sound System,
    -   SMATV system,
    -   Security system,
    -   CCTV System,
    -   Card Access system,
    -   Turnstiles and car barrier system.
    -   All infrastructure for UPS and Generator system (UPS and Generator are not in the scope
        of this tender)

13.1.2 Definitions

    The following are definitions of words found in sections of the specification governed by this
    section, and on associated drawings:

    "Concealed" - hidden from normal sight in furred spaces, shafts, ceiling spaces, walls and
    partitions,

    "Exposed" - all mechanical and electrical work normally visible to building occupants,

    "Provide" (and tenses of "provide”) - install and connect complete,

    “Install" (and tenses of "install”) - install and connect complete,

    "Supply” - supply only.

                                                                                               287
13.1.3 Electrical Work Standards

   All electrical work shall confirm fully to the latest European Codes EN, IEC, the National Fire
   Protection Association codes and all Local codes and authorities having jurisdiction.
   Electrical works will at least satisfy the following standards last issues. The applied standards will
   not be limited to those listed below but will cover all the latest related standards as generally
   described above.
   IEC - 38 Standard voltages
   IEC - 56 High-voltage alternating-current circuit breakers
   IEC - 76-2 Power transformer - Part 2: Temperature rise
   IEC - 76-3 Power transformer - Part 3: Insulation levels and dielectric tests
   IEC - 129 Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches
   IEC - 146 General requirements and line commutated converters
   IEC - 146-4 General requirements and line commutated converters - Part 4: Method of
   specifying the performance and test requirements of uninterruptible power systems
   IEC - 265-1 High-voltage switches - Part 1: High-voltage switches for rated voltages above 1
   kV and less than 52 kV
   IEC - 269-1 Low-voltage fuses - Part 1: General requirements
   IEC - 269-3 Low-voltage fuses - Part 3: Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by
   unskilled persons (fuses mainly for household and similar applications)
   IEC - 282-1 High-voltage fuses - Part 1: Current limiting fuses
   IEC - 287 Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables (100% load factor)
   IEC - 298 AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages above 1kV and up
   to and including 52 kV
   IEC - 364 Electrical installations of buildings
   IEC - 364-3 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 3: Assessment of general characteristics
   IEC - 364-4-41 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 4: Protection of safety - Section 41:
   Protection against electrical shock
   IEC - 364-4-42 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 4: Protection of safety - Section 42:
   Protection against thermal effects
   IEC - 364-4-43 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 4: Protection of safety - Section 43:
   Protection against overcurrent
   IEC - 364-4-47 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 4: Application of protective measures
   for safety - Section 47: Measures of protection against electrical shock
   IEC - 364-5-51 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical
   equipment - Section 51: Common rules
   IEC - 364-5-52 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical
   equipment - Section 52: Wiring systems
   IEC - 364-5-53 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical
   equipment - Section 53: Switchgear and controlgear
   IEC - 364-6 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 6: Verification
   IEC - 364-7-701 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 7: Requirements for special
   installations or locations - Section 701: Electrical installations in bathrooms
   IEC - 364-7-706 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 7: Requirements for special
   installations or locations - Section 706: Restrictive conductive locations
   IEC - 364-7-710 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 7: Requirements for special
   installations or locations - Section 710: Installation in exhibitions, shows, stands and funfairs
   IEC - 420 High-voltage alternating current switch-fuse combinations
   IEC - 439-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 1: Types-tested and
   partially type-tested assemblies
   IEC - 439-2 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 2: Particular
   requirements for busbar trunking systems (busways)


                                                                                                    288
   IEC - 439-3 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 3: Particular
   requirements for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies intended to be installed in
   places where unskilled persons have access for their use -Distribution boards
   IEC - 446 Identification of conductors by colours or numerals
   IEC - 479-1 Effects of current on human beings and livestock - Part 1: General aspects
   IEC - 479-2 Effects of current on human beings and livestock - Part 2: Special aspects
   IEC - 529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
   IEC - 644 Specification for high-voltage fuse-links for motor circuit applications
   IEC – 664 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems
   IEC - 694 Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and controlgear standards
   IEC - 724 Guide to the short-circuit temperature limits of electrical cables with a rated voltage
   not exceeding 0.6/1.0 kV
   IEC - 742 Isolation transformer and safety isolation transformer. Requirements
   IEC - 755 General requirements for residual current operated protective devices
   IEC - 787 Application guide for selection for fuse-links of high-voltage fuses for transformer
   circuit application
   IEC - 831-1 Shunt power capacitors of the self-healing type for a.c. systems having a rated
   voltage up to and including 660 V. - Part 1: General - Performance, testing and rating - Safety
   requirements - Guide for installation and operation


    Governing codes and regulations will be considered as minimum standards for the electrical
    work and where these are at variance with the drawings and specification, priority will be
    given to local codes.

    Where only code, regulation, by-law or standards is queried it shall mean the current edition
    including all revisions on amendments at the time of tender. Where references are made to
    printed directions or recommendations, it shall mean the current edition of such directions and
    recommendations.

14. Basic Materials and Methods


14.1 General

    This section includes specifications for products, common criteria and characteristics and
    methods, execution, and it is intended as a supplement to each section and shall be read
    accordingly.

14.2 Products


14.2.1 Conduits

    Rigid Halogen free PVC conduits and conduit fittings shall be resistant to distortion from heat
    and to sunlight and to low temperatures, moisture and corrosive agents. Factory made bends
    or site made bends for conduits up to 50 mm diameter and factory made elbows for conduit
    larger than 50 mm diameter shall be made by proper and suitable connector and adapters
    Conduits shall be installed such that a reliable water tight joint is made between the conduits
    and fittings. For permanent joints vinyl solvent cement shall be used. Halogen free PVC
    conduit and fittings shall have adequate mechanical strength and thermal stability. They shall
    show no cracks and shall not be deformed such that the cables may be damaged. Halogen free
    PVC conduits shall fire retardant and comply with standards.

                                                                                                289
14.2.2 Outlet Boxes

    Steel boxes shall be galvanized or aluminum stove enameled and have suitable knock-outs for
    conduit entries and grounding terminal. Minimum depth of steel boxes shall be 35 mm and
    shall be of concealed type mounting.

    Cast outlet boxes shall be cast ferroalloys and aluminum for outdoor use Cast boxes shall
    have grounding provision and suitable female threads for threaded steel conduit connection.

    Rigid halogen free PVC outlets boxes shall be suitably sized for any switches, sockets, etc to
    and have round or rectangular shape.



14.2.3 Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes

    Rigid Halogen free halogen free PVC boxes shall be used as pull boxes and junction boxes.



14.2.3 Floor Boxes

    Floor boxes shall be steel, rigid halogen free PVC or approved equal, water and concrete tight
    fully adjustable before and after concrete pour, with brushed chrome, stainless steel or
    suitable approved face plate. Boxes shall be deep rectangular or round type, to confirm with
    construction requirements and the service to be provided.

    Carpet and tile flanges shall be provided on floor boxes where carpet or tile is to be provided.

    Floor outlet shall be provided with suitable screwed brass or approved type of protection
    cover from dust and water.



14.2.5 Cable Tray

    Hot dip galvanized steel cable tray systems shall be provided for support of cables above
    ceilings and in areas without ceilings wherever conduits are not used. Trays shall be of
    perforated metal minimum 1.5 mm thick, 100 mm wide, and 40 mm high side bends,
    furnished complete with standard fixing accessories, elbows, tees, crosses, branch and reducer
    sections and cable dropper accessories.

    Cable tray shall have sufficient width to carry the number and size of cables to be contained
    there in.

    Cable trays will be earthed in every area.




                                                                                                  290
14.2.6 Branch Circuit Conductors and Connectors

    For Branch circuits following types of conductors shall be used:

    "07Z1-U 450/750" type single core, colour coded, halogen free PVC insulated, copper
    conductor, manufactured in accordance with Standards.

     “(N)HXMH 300/500” type multi-core, colour coded, halogen free PVC insulated, copper
    conductor, manufactured in accordance with Standards.

    Branch circuit conductors up to and including 6 mm² shall be solid. Branch circuit conductors
    in sizes larger than 6 mm² shall be stranded. All branch circuit conductors shall be constructed
    of 99% conductive copper and shall be approved for 600 volt.



14.2.7 Switches and Receptacles

    Approved specification grade premium quality A.C quiet action, rocker or toggle type 10
    ampere 220 volt switches and 3-wire, grounded 10 ampere, 220 volt, single or duplex
    receptacles, colour as approved.



14.2.8 Faceplates for Switches and Receptacles

    Faceplates shall be brown, ivory or as approved, complete with matching screws.

14.2.9 Identification Nameplates

    Laminated plastic black-white-black with bevelled edges and proper identification engraving
    identification plates shall be used. Each nameplate shall be sized to suit the equipment for
    which it is provided, and the required wording.



14.3 Execution


14.3.1 Conduit Installation

    Provide conduit for all electric service distribution and branch circuit conductors with the
    exception mentioned in this part of the specification.

    Conduit shall be as follows,

    1. For conductors in poured concrete work on grade, rigid halogen free PVC plastic,

    2. For branch circuit conductors underground outside for crossing roads beneath concrete,
    asphalt, and similar paving material, heavy gauge steel conduit,

    3. For branch circuit conductors underground outside the building clear of concrete, asphalt
    and similar paving material, flexible polyethylene plastic conduit,
                                                                                                 291
4. At points where distribution and/or branch circuit conductors cross building expansion
joints, halogen free PVC flexible conduit,

5. For conductors for all other application, rigid halogens free PVC, unless otherwise noted.

Provide a fish wire in all plastic conduits unless otherwise noted.

All conduits shall be concealed wherever possible.

Conduit in floor slab shall be installed at the lower portion of the slab as much as practicable.
The placement of reinforcing steel in structural concrete work will take precedence over the
placement of conduit.

Minimum conduit size shall be 16 mm O.D., unless otherwise noted.

Conduits shall be clean and swabbed out and free from damp and moisture before wiring is
started.

All burrs and sharp edges shall be removed before installation and the end of the conduit
reamed so that there are no projections.

Install conduit to avoid obstructions and minimize crossovers. Conduit offsets and bends shall
be free of flattening, dents and bruises.

Conduit shall be supported from building structural members using approved fasteners
designed for this purpose. Conduit shall not be supported from mechanical piping, ductwork,
suspended ceiling members or from their supports. Attach surface mounted conduits with
clamps manufactured for such use.

Allow a minimum of 15 cm of clearance between conduits and flues, steam and hot water
pipes and all heat sources.

All underground conduits outside the building shall be buried a minimum of 60 cm below
finished level.

Surface mounted conduits shall be supported by proper saddles up to and including 28mm
diameter shall have saddles spaced at not more than 50cm. Conduits larger than this shall
have saddles spaced at not more than 1 meters.

Angle bends shall use the above sized saddles one on each side of the bend and as close to it
as possible.

Conduits shall be installed with straight runs as much as practicable. Conduit runs shall not
have more than (4) four 90º bends.

Provide fish wires in all empty conduits unless otherwise noted.

Conduits and conduit fittings shall be so designed and manufactured that they ensure reliable
mechanical protection to cables contained therein and shall withstand both the stresses and
high temperature liable to occur during transport, storage and installation.

Site made bends shall have minimum radius of 4d (d: internal diameter of conduit)


                                                                                              292
14.3.2 Provisions for Services Crossing Building Expansion Joints

    Wherever services (conduit, cables, etc.) cross building expansion joints, install the services
    in such a manner to permit free movement without imposing additional stress or loading upon
    the support system, and to prevent excessive movement at joints and connections.



14.3.3 Installation of Outlet Boxes

    Provide an outlet box for each lighting fixture, wiring device, telephone outlet, fire alarm
    system components communications system components, and each other such outlet.

    Outlet boxes where the connecting conduit is rigid shall be cast boxes, or approved equal,
    unless otherwise noted.

    Do not install outlet or back boxes “back-to-back" in walls and partitions such outlets must be
    staggered and sealed against noise transmission. "Thru-wall" type boxes will not be permitted
    for any application.

    Outlet boxes where the connecting conduit is Halogen free PVC shall be approved rigid
    Halogen free PVC or steel.

    Boxes shall be recessed in walls, ceilings and floors wherever practicable, installed flush with
    finished surfaces.

    Boxes shall be supported from building structural members using approved means. Boxes
    shall not be supported from mechanical piping, ductwork, suspended ceiling members or from
    their supports.

    Install outlets parallel and perpendicular to adjacent walls and ceilings where outlets are
    indicated above each other, install on same vertical centerline. Where outlets are indicated
    besides each other, install on same horizontal enter line.

    Where thermostats and other wall devices are installed by other trades, coordinate work to be
    on same horizontal or vertical centre line.

    Unless otherwise indicated, following height of outlets shall prevail. Dimension is centre of
    outlet to finished floor.

    Receptacles                       :        30 cm

    Switches                          :       120 cm

    Desk type telephone               :        30 cm

    Wall type telephone               :       150 cm

    Fire alarm button                 :       150 cm

    Fire alarm horn                   :       230 cm
                                                                                                 293
    Bells                             :      220 cm

    Clocks                            :      220 cm

    Wall speakers                     :      220 cm

    Volume controls                   :      120 cm

    Disconnect switch                 :      140 cm

    Thermostats                       :      150 cm

    Where ceiling height is over 3 meter, height of bells, clocks, wall speakers shall be 75 % of
    wall height and less than 275 cm. Where these devices are shown above doorways, they shall
    be centered between top of door and ceiling. Receptacles, shown above tables, counters or
    work benches, shall be 110 cm above finished floor or 10 cm. above back splash, unless noted
    otherwise. Receptacles in all shops, storage and mechanical areas shall be 110 cm above
    finished floor.



14.3.4 Installation of Pull boxes and Junction Boxes

    Provide pull boxes in conduit systems wherever shown on drawings, and/or wherever
    necessary to facilitate conductor installations. Generally, conduit runs exceeding 30 m in
    length, or with more than (4) 90 degree bends shall be equipped with a pull box installed at a
    convenient and suitable intermediate accessible location.

    All pull boxes and junction boxes must be accessible after the building is completed.

    Clearly identify main pull or junction boxes (excluding obvious outlet boxes)



14.3.5 Installation of Branch Circuit and Low Voltage Conductors

    Provide all required branch circuit conductors.

    Branch circuit conductors, unless otherwise noted, shall be as follows:

    -   In conduits inside and outside, the building type "07Z1-U" or “(N)HXMH”
    -   In cable trays - "(N)2XMH" or “(N)HXMH”,
    -   Inside cable risers - "(N)2XMH" or “(N)HXMH”,
    -   For other applications - "07Z1-U"

    Generally, branch circuit conductor sizes are indicated on the drawings. Such sizes are
    minimum requirements and must be increased where required to suit the length of run and
    voltage drop.

    Minimum size of conductors shall be 1.5 mm² for lighting circuits and 2.5 mm² for power
    circuits in systems over 30 volts unless otherwise noted.



                                                                                               294
    Colour code conductors throughout to identify phases, neutrals and ground, by means of self-
    laminating colour tape, colour conductor insulation, or properly secured colour plastic discs.

    Control conductors, in addition, shall be numbered with markers.

    Colour code conductors for communications systems in accordance with the system
    component manufacturer‟s recommendations.

    For terminating multi-core cables, suitable approved cable glands with sealing rubber ring
    gasket and locking nut of proper size shall be used.

    Current carrying capacities for voltage cables and wires shall be computed in accordance with
    standards or Electrical equipment installation rules in Turkey.

    Conductor lengths for parallel feeder shall be identical.

    Conductors shall be tied with plastic tie-wraps in switchgear, panel boards, wire ways, cable
    trays and other common enclosures. Wiring inside cabinets for mounted control and pilot
    devices shall be enclosed in plastic spirals.

    Conduit sizes shall be determined that maximum 40% of the conduit shall be filled by
    conductors.

    Water solution of non-caustic soap or special wire pulling Lubricant shall be used for pulling
    conductors in conduit. Any petroleum based oils or greases shall not be used as pulling
    lubricant.

    Wires shall be installed after concrete and masonry work is complete and after moisture, dirt
    and debris have been swabbed from the conduits.

    A 3 phase circuit shall be pulled in a separate conduit and separate conduit shall be used for
    separate circuits.

    No joints shall be permitted in any wire installed in conduit.

    Adequate allowance must be made for all derating and grouping factors or any other reason
    which may affect the loading of cables of wires.

14.3.6 Cable Tray

    Cable tray assembly shall be supported by rods or by other approved method from building
    structure. Cables shall be strapped to tray on intervals of not more than 3 m in horizontal trays
    and 2 m in vertical trays, with minimum of two straps per cable. Trays shall be grounded at
    beginning of each run.

14.3.7 Installation of Switches and Receptacles

    Provide switches and receptacles where indicated on the drawings.

    Install wiring devices after all concrete any masonry work is complete and protect while
    painting and other finish work is being done. Wiring devices found damaged marred or paint
    splattered shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced.


                                                                                                  295
    Provide grounding conductor and connect to each wiring device which has a grounding
    terminal.

    Outlet boxes shall be cleaned before installation of any wiring device.

    Colour of switches and receptacles shall be in accordance with architect requirements and
    subject to approval.

    Switches and receptacles circuited to critical and/or essential power shall be of different
    appearance and technology than others as applicable.

    Equip each switch and receptacle with a faceplate with an opening or openings suitable for the
    device it conceals. Secure faceplates to the device frames with screws to match the faceplates.

    Faceplates for flush wall mounted switches and receptacles shall be subject to approval.

    Faceplates for weatherproof denoted "WP" on the drawings shall be weatherproof insulated
    plates with hinged and gasketed receptacle access flaps, or approved equal.



14.3.8 Installation of Sleeves

    Where conduits, raceways and conductors pass through structural poured concrete, provide
    galvanized steel sleeves unless otherwise noted.

    Sleeves in waterproof concrete slabs and in other slabs where waterproof sleeves are required
    shall extend 10cm above the floor.

    Size sleeves, unless otherwise noted, to leave 12 mm clearance around the conduit, raceway,
    conductor, etc. Pack and seal the void between the sleeves and the conduit raceway,
    conductors. etc., for the length of the sleeves as follows:

    -   Pack sleeves set in interior concrete slabs, masonry walls, fire rated partitions, etc., with
        proper fire rated packing material packed and secured in such a manner that the packing in
        vertical sleeves will not fall out.
    -   Pack sleeves set in exterior walls with lead wool or oakum and seal ends of the sleeves
        watertight with an approved non-hardening caulking compound.

    Submit to the concrete reinforcement detailer at the proper time, drawings indicating all
    required sleeves recesses and formed openings in poured concrete work. Such drawings shall
    be completely and accurately dimensioned and shall relate sleeves, recesses and formed
    openings to suitable grid lines and elevation datum.



14.3.9 Supply of Access Doors

    Supply access doors to give access to all junction boxes conductor joints and other similar
    electrical work which may need maintenance or repair but which is concealed in inaccessible
    construction.



                                                                                                  296
14.3.10 Installation of fasteners for Conduit, Raceway, etc., and Equipment Hangers and Supports

    Provide all fasteners and similar hardware for conduit, duct raceway, conductor, etc., and
    equipment hanger and/or support materials unless otherwise noted.

    Explosive power actuated fasteners will not be permitted unless specific written approval for
    their use has been obtained from the Architect.

    Under no circumstances, use ceiling suspension hangers or grids for suspension of conduit
    and conductors.



14.3.11 Installation of Identification of Nameplates

    For each piece of electrical distribution equipment from the electrical source of supply up to
    and including panel boards, for special control panels and cabinets, and for each other piece of
    electrical equipment, provide engraved identification nameplates secured to apparatus with
    stainless steel screws. Nameplates shall indicate the source of electrical supply.

    Provide warning signs or at distribution equipment as required. Secure the signs to the
    equipment with stainless steel screws.



14.3.12 Equipment Bases and Supports

    Set all floor mounted equipment on 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pads 100 mm wider
    and longer than the equipment base dimension.

    Provide dimensioned drawings, templates and anchor bolts for proper setting of equipment
    on bases and pads. Provide all structural steel frames, brackets, etc., for equipment bases and
    supports unless otherwise noted, and be responsible for all required levelling, alignment, and
    grouting of the equipment.

15. Electrical Service and Distribution


15.1 General

    Supply all labour, tools, services and equipment, and provide all materials required to
    complete electric service and distribution work in accordance with this Section of the
    Specification and the drawings.



15.2 Product


15.2.1 Secondary Switchboard

    Indoor type 220/380 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 cycle A.C., metal enclosed, free standing, front
    operated, secondary switchboard for use in a solidly grounded system.
                                                                                                 297
    The switchboard shall be as shown and scheduled on the drawings and shall be manufactured
    in accordance with TSE and electrical equipment installation rules in Turkey.

    The switchboard shall consist of individual cells bolted together to form an enclosed, self
    contained, self supporting structure with all necessary provisions for proper ventilation. Main
    bus bars shall be constructed of high strength, high conductivity, and flat copper.

    A continuous ground bus shall be provided for the length of the switchboard and solidly
    bolted to the steel framework. The ground bus shall be constructed of the same material as the
    main bus.

    The lowest conductor in the switchboard shall be at least 300 mm above the finished floor.

    Bracing of main switchboard shall withstand the stresses due to the maximum short circuit
    current.

    The current density in the bus bars shall be according to electrical equipment installation rules
    in Turkey.

    The main switchboard shall be sized to allow 10 % spare capacity and 10 % over current
    device.

    The switchboard shall be complete with fire stop barriers between each vertical section.



15.2.2 Distribution Panel boards

    Provide factory assembled fused switch or circuit breaker distribution panel board with
    copper bus, 20 % spare capacity and free standing or surface wall mounting type enclosures
    as shown or required.



15.2.3 Lighting and Power Panel boards

    Factory assembled, surface or flush mounted, indoor type manufactured from min. 1.5 mm
    thick cold rolled sheet steel, dust proof, oven baked painted panelboards each complete with
    moulded case bolt-on main circuit breaker or approved fused switch. Branch circuit breakers
    shall be Miniature Circuit Breakers with adequate short circuit breaking capacity. Certain
    panel board breakers as scheduled.

    Panel boards shall provide 20% spare over current devices and 20% spare capacity.



15.2.4 Circuit Breakers

    Branch circuit breakers shall be single pole, bolt-on type with fixed magnetic and thermal trip
    manufactured in accordance with standards

    Ground fault circuit breakers for panel boards shall be bolt-on, single pole, thermal magnetic
    ground fault circuit breaker.
                                                                                                 298
15.2.5 A.C. Contactors

    Full voltage, non-reversing type contactors shall be used for heating, motor loads and lighting
    loads. Each contactor shall be suitable in all respects for the application and shall be complete
    with an enclosure with the necessary accessories.



15.2.6 Disconnected Switches

    Front operated with a handle suitable for operation. Fusible units shall be complete with fuse
    clips suitable for HRC fuses unless otherwise noted. Enclosures for disconnects located in the
    sprinkled areas shall be drip-proof type. Enclosures for disconnects located outdoors shall be
    weather-proof outdoor type. All other enclosures shall be indoor general purpose enclosures
    unless otherwise noted.

15.2.7 Fuses

    Unless otherwise noted fuses shall be HRC Type, comply with HRC fuses for constantly
    running equipment that cycles "ON" and "OFF"



15.3 Execution


15.3.1 Description of Electrical Service and Distribution Work

    Secondary Electric Distribution:

    From the Building's main secondary switchboard, 220/380 volt, 3 phases, 4 wire power, as
    required, will be extended to:

    -   Larger mechanical equipment such as refrigeration plant, heating ventilation and air
        conditioning plant, and all 3 phase motors ;
    -   Elevators ;
    -   Building lighting and small power.

    Each flush mounted lighting and appliance panel board shall be provided with two 20' mm
    empty conduits up to the suspended ceiling above.

    Multiple panel boards on a common feeder shall have individual over current protective
    devices at each panel.

    All devices and feeders shall have the capacity to carry 125 % of the maximum requirement
    for continuous loads. A load is continuous if the maximum current for 3 hours or more.

    Lighting and appliance panel boards branch circuit requirements are:

           o Loading - maximum 70 % of circuit capacity ;
           o Corridor lighting - circuit alternate fixtures to allow 50 % lighting;
                                                                                                  299
            o Fan-coils will be connected as a separate circuit.

    For emergency case exit lights and battery back-up lights will be used.



15.3.2 Work Required For Incoming Electric Service

    The local Utility Company will perform the following work in connection with the electrical
    service for the building:

    -   Provide all required primary service cables up to 34.5 kV cubicles.

    As part of the electrical work, contractor will perform the following electrical services.

    -   Provide 34.5 kV cubicles and transformers in a pre-fabricated building,
    -   Provide all required secondary service cables and connect to the secondary of the
        transformers,
    -   Provide secondary service bus duct or cables.
    -   Provide lighting and power outlets in the transformer building;

15.3.3 Installation of Switchboard

    Provide a main switchboard as indicated on the drawings and secure to a concrete
    housekeeping pad or steel U profiles. Connect complete as shown scheduled.

15.3.4 Installation of Utility Meters

    Main utility meter shall be provided in HV Room.

15.3.5 Installation of Distribution Panel boards

    Provide factory assembled distribution panel board where shown and connect complete.

15.3.6 Installation of Lighting and Power Panel boards

    Provide factory assembled lighting and power panel boards as indicated on the drawings.

    Secure wall mounted panel boards in place, independent of connecting conduit or conductors.

    Identify all panel board breakers: by panel board circuit directories.

15.3.7 Installation of Ground Fault Breakers

    Provide combination circuit breaker/ground fault interrupters for socket circuits in panel
    board as scheduled, and for any other circuit directories.

    Upon completion of the installation of the ground fault breakers, demonstrate that all
    protected circuits will "trip" when a simulated ground fault is applied to the "load" side of
    each circuit breaker/ground fault interrupter combination. Submit a written report verifying
    that on each protected circuit the "ground" has been verified, and that the A.C. "natural" or
    "standing" leakage is normal, and where a reading is possible, state the leakage current.


                                                                                                 300
15.3.8 Grounding

    Provide a complete system of electric service grounding which complies with the
    requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.

    From the street side of the water mater, make all required ground connections to all electrical
    apparatus. Ground conductors shall be minimum 50 mm² copper wire connected with
    approved fittings.

    Main grounding is done around the pre fabricated transformer building by solid copper
    grounding rods. Grounding rods shall be 3 m and the distance between two grounding rods
    are 7m. The resistivity of soil is considered as 50 ohm per meter during design. During
    installation grounding rods will be added to the system until the earthing resistance will be
    less than 2 ohms

    Where conduit systems are used for grounds, provide all necessary bushing, studs and
    jumpers as may be required to maintain the effective continuity for ground. Provide ground
    conductors in all non-metallic conduits, concrete encased conduits and conduit below grade.

    For metallic conduit systems, used in plumbing and in other systems, provide jumpers across
    the fittings, which are electrically isolated from the conduits, to provide the effective
    continuity for grounding.

    Provide a main grounding equipotential bus bar where shown for the incoming service. Main
    Grounding shall consist of interconnected copper ground rods. A separate grounding
    conductor shall be extended from the equipotential bus bar to the transformer vault perimeter
    ground bus. Exact grounding requirements shall be to the local Utility's requirements shall be
    to the local Utility's requirements.

    Grounding rods shall be interconnected with conductors welded to ground rods.



15.3.9 Lightning Protection System

    Provide a complete lightning protection system serving the building according to the Local
    norms.



15.3.10 Electric Service and Distribution Testing and Coordination Study

    Complete on-site engineering inspection, testing and co-ordination study shall be performed
    for the following distribution equipment:

    -   Main switchboard
    -   Distribution panel boards

    The engineering inspection, testing and co-ordination study shall be performed prior to the
    system being energized.




                                                                                                301
15.3.11 Installation of Safety Switches (Disconnect Switches)

    Provide safety switches (disconnect switches) as follows:

    -   Wherever shown on the drawings and/or specified herein;
    -   Wherever required by starter schedule drawings;
    -   For motorized equipment which cannot be seen from the motor starter location or is more
        than 10 m from the starter location;
    -   For all "packaged" equipment fed from a motor starter panel.

    Ensure that enclosures for safety switches located outside the building are weather-proof.
    Ensure that enclosures for safety switches located in sprinkler areas are sprinkler-proof. All
    other enclosures shall be general purpose type unless otherwise noted.

    A disconnect switch at the motor is not required if any of the following conditions holds.

    -   The motor is within the sight of it‟s over current device.
    -   The motor starter of combination disconnected type is within the sight of the motor.
    -   The over current device for the motor can be locked in an open position.

    The cords and plugs furnished as part of the equipment shall be considered a disconnect
    means.



15.3.12 Installation of Fuses

    Provide a complete set of fuses for each piece of fusible equipment provided or supplied by
    you.

    Furnish three (3) spare fuses of each size and type used on the project, mount the fuses on
    painted and identified plywood rack, and secure the rack in a location where later directed.



15.3.13 Electrical Connections for Mechanical and Laboratory Equipment

    Provide electrical connections to equipment provided and/or supplied by mechanical trades,
    and for kitchen and laundry equipment.

    Mechanical trades will supply some of the starters for motorized apparatus supplied by them
    and will provide identification plates throughout. Starters generally will be supplied in the
    following manner:

    -   Loose starters for mounting adjacent to apparatus or o motor starter panels ;
    -   Mounted starters on factory assembled pre-wired packaged equipment ;
    -   Factory mounted starters in motor control centres.

    Be responsible for:

    -   Mounting loose starters and providing "line" and "load" power connections;
    -   Making "line" side power connections to starters on "packaged" equipment;
    -   Coordinating feeder entries to starters and starter assemblies with Mechanical Trades;
                                                                                                 302
     -   Providing motor starter panels complete with splitter trough ;
     -   Providing disconnect switches on motor starter panels for package type equipment, and
         for providing additional disconnect switches (complete with identification for apparatus
         which can not be seen from its starter or is in excess of 10 m from its starter);
     -   Making "line" and "load" side wiring connections to motor control centres.
     -   Providing motor control centres which are not supplied by mechanical trades.

     Secure motor starter panels to walls where shown.



 15.3.14 Elevator Equipment Power Connections

     Provide splitter trough; disconnect switches, outlet boxes, etc., as indicated on the drawings
     for elevators.

     Generally power wiring shall terminate at input switch installed at the entrance of the elevator
     controllers for final connection to elevator equipment as part of Elevator contractor.

     Obtain accurate roughing-in information and carefully co-ordinate all work with Elevator
     Contractor. The placing of elevating device apparatus will take precedence over the work of
     this Contractor and, with the exception of fire alarm devices, all work in hoist ways,
     equipment rooms, and pits shall be confined to work serving the elevating devices only.

     Failure to comply with the above will render you responsible for all relocations and
     adjustment required.



15.3.15 Uninterruptible Power Provisions

     Provide Uninterruptible power supply system to serve the building's computers and laboratory
     equipments which under the manufacturer guarantee and complete with the required
     connections and special ground for the computer.

 16. Lighting


 16.1 General

     Supply all labour, tools, services and equipment, and provide all materials and equipment
     required to complete lighting work in accordance with this Section of the Specification and
     the drawings.

 16.2 Products


 16.2.1 Lighting fixtures and lamps

     Compact fluorescent bulbs will be used where necessary and fixture ballasts shall be as
     manufactured by Phillips or approved equal.



                                                                                                  303
    Outdoor fixture ballasts in unheated inside areas shall be high output type capable of reliable
    lamp starting in temperatures of -28 degrees C.

    Ballasts for fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with Standards.

    High pressure sodium and metal halide fixture ballasts shall be high power factor type of not
    less than 90 % quiet in performance and shall be capable of delivering rated performance with
    an input voltage of + 10 % of rated line voltage. Luminescent bulbs will be with semi-
    conductor start-up and adjustment equipment.



16.2.2 Wall Box Dimmers

    Linear rotary control dimmers, each complete with a white handle and faceplate.



16.2.3 Photo Cells and Timers

    Timers shall be time switches, each suitable for outside lighting control and complete with
    seven (7) day "ASTRO-DIAL" and "SKIP-A-DAY" seasonal adjusting features.

    Photo cells shall be suitable for outside lighting.



16.2.4 Lighting Dimming Equipment

     Dimmers are electronic solid state with the following characteristics:

    -   Smooth flicker less lighting control from full brightens to 5 % brightness.
    -   No electron tube type equipment

    The emergency lighting is not to interfere with the operation of the dimmer system. The
    emergency lighting system shall not introduce into dimmed areas any lights that can not be
    dimmed and that are under normal operation.

16.3 Execution


16.3.1 Installation of Lighting Fixtures and Lamps

    Provide all required lighting fixtures and lamps.

    Install fixtures in accordance with reflected ceiling plans or as directed by the architect. In
    Equipment Rooms, shafts and similar secondary areas install fixtures after the mechanical and
    other major work is roughed-in and just fixture locations as required.

    If requested, demonstrate the operation of special applications of fixtures such as decorative
    fixtures, and just their locations within a reasonable distance to obtain the effects desired.
    Align and position all adjustable fixtures, and ensure that fixtures with adjustable lamp
    holders are properly positioned to correspond to the lamps specified.
                                                                                                304
    Parking lot lighting shall be minimum 1 foot-candle.

    Generally, individual rooms shall be switched on a room by room basis with corridors
    equipped with central switching of the normally powered lighting circuits for energy
    conservation.



16.3.2 Installation of Wall Box Dimmers

    Provide wall box dimmers where shown. Connect complete. Confirm exact locations prior to
    roughing-in.



16.3.3 Outside Lighting Control

    Provide completely automatic systems for controlling designated exterior lighting as shown.
    The designated lighting shall be controlled "ON" by photocell operation and "OFF" by time
    switch though a new magnetic contactor connected to the panel mains. Provide the contactors
    and wall mount adjacent to the panels.

17. Telephone System


17.1 General

    Supply all labour, tools, services and equipment, and provide all materials and equipment
    required to install, program and maintain a telephone PABX in accordance with this
    specification and drawings.



17.1.1 System Description

    A digital telephone PABX with 20 External trunk lines and 200 internal lines is planned for
    the building. 20 internal lines will be digital and 180 lines will be analogue. Feature
    telephones are planned for managers. Fiber Optic external lines connection will be possible
    and PABX will have the possibility of extension. If required, voice mail boxes will be added
    to the system. Telephone system shall include digital processor controlled SPC PABX system,
    conduits, cables and telephone sockets.

    Stored program controlled PABX shall comprise:

       -   Switching system (Exchange),
       -   Attendant consoles,
       -   Power supply unit with battery back-up for 8 hours.
       -   Main distribution frame with solder less connections (1 each)

    The system shall be accordance with CCITT recommendations.

    System design and construction shall be in state-of-the-art telephone engineering, i.e.


                                                                                              305
           -   All electronic, microprocessor-controlled digital SPC system with non-blocking time-
               division multiplex network,
           -   Cabinet design with plug-in modules (pc board and plug-in connecting cables),
           -   Integrated and discrete components of high level of reliability, so that system
               availability of better than 99.98 % can be guaranteed over a 20-year operating period.
           -   Integrated security system which optimizes system availability when faults occur,
               simplifies cutover and system maintenance and enables an automatic restart to take the
               place maintenance and enables an automatic restart to take place if there is a power
               outage of disconnection,
           -   The system shall be expandable with minimum if possible without an interruption of
               service.

        The system shall function under the following environmental conditions:

        Ambient temperature : 5°C - 40°C

        Relative humidity                         : 20 % - 80 %



17.1.1 Design Characteristics of PABX

        The telephone PABX shall be capable of expansion to a final configuration of at least:

           -   100 connecting elements for trunk circuits
           -   800 connecting elements for stations
           -   4 attendant consoles

        Required configuration, simplex control unit with PABX equipped with:

           -   20 each         2 wire both way analogue trunks
           -   180 each        Analogue Subscriber Lines.
           -   20 each         Digital Subscriber Lines
           -   176 each        Normal office telephones (analogue)
           -   20 each         Manager telephones (digital)
           -   4 each          Wall type telephones (analogue)
           -   2 each          Attendant Consoles.
           -   1 lot           Power Supply System.
           -   1 lot           Battery Back-up, Maintenance free, dry type.
           -   1 lot           Main Distribution Frame with slot type connections (3x800    pair

        The system tendered must have at least the following traffic-carrying capacity:

           -   0.40 erlangs / station for total traffic

        The number of simultaneous calls possible must be stated.

        To enable traffic observation integrated traffic metering equipment must be provided which
        can produce the following information over a given period:

           -   Attendant console :
                   o Number of seizures
                   o Seizure time of call store, divided according to
                                                                                                   306
            o Incoming trunk calls
            o Station - to - station calls
            o Recalls
    -   Switching system :
           - Number of seizures
           - Traffic to be handled (seizure time
           - Utilization of various features
    -   Trunk groups :
           - Number of seizures
           - Traffic to be handled (seizure time

Activation of traffic metering shall be possible locally at the exchange and by remote control
(optional). The metering period to be specified should be between 15 minutes and 24 hours.

The results of traffic metering shall be displayed on a service terminal and printed on a
service printer.

The following types of connections should be possible:

-   Incoming trunk traffic
-   Outgoing trunk traffic fully-automatic and via an attendant console if required
-   Tie trunk traffic (tandem trunking 4 wire connection)
-   Station-to-station traffic analogue
-   Station-to-station traffic digital-with interface for voice and data communication
-   (Interface V24 / RS 232)
-   Connection to special facilities such as paging system, cordless telephone and voice
    processing system.

The system design shall be meet the following requirements:

-   Simplex mode of operation up to final system configuration and optional
-   Duplex mode of operation with automatic changeover of control (hot stand-by without a
    break in operation in the event of a fault
-   Automatic restart in the event of a power outage.
-   Supervision and control of the entire system as an integral part of the operating software
-   Maintenance must be possible with a minimum of cost and effort; when faults are detected
    functional units are indicated and automatically barred from further seizure

System software must be written a CCITT high level language.

The system tendered must have the following system data:

               Feeding bridge in call status :          2 x 400 ohms
               Functional range station side            2000 ohms
               Leakage resistance between a/b wires and ground (star circuit at least 3x25
                kohms)
               Nominal input impedance trunk side:      900 ohms
               Nominal input impedance station side:    1190 ohms
               Crosstalk attenuation                    300 ... 3400 Hz 70 dB
               Idle channel noise measured

                by psophometer trunk and station side:      70 dBmOp


                                                                                           307
17.2 Products


17.2.1 System Features

    The pabx shall offer the service features described below.

    ATTENDANT CONSOLE

    -   Operation with several attendant consoles
    -   Connection of the attendant console via a digital interface with up to 4 wires
    -   Alphanumeric display

    The attendant console must have an alphanumeric display to indicate switching information
    (internal/external telephone numbers, classes of service, busy / idle status, etc.)

    -   Operation by means of handset or headset. Two handsets/ headsets can be plugged in per
        attendant console.
    -   Digital clock with date
    -   Diagnostic display divided as follows:
            o Alarm display in the event of power outage (battery operation)
            o Urgent alarm when central units display abnormal functioning or fail
            o General alarm when models of which several exist display abnormal functioning
                 or fail, or when cut-outs are defective. The type of fault must be indicated on a
                 display.
    -   Push-button set
            o For dialling internal/external destinations
            o For activating features
    -   Tone ringing audible signalling of calls shall have a volume control and must be able to be
        disconnected during operation.
    -   Non-delayed assigning of dialled or undialled lines to station users shall be possible
        without the station user having to cradle the handset.
    -    Attendant loop transfer. Each attendant shall be able to transfer calls to other attendant
        positions by dialling the console number.
    -   Auto-timed diversion of incoming calls. Incoming calls that are not answered by the
        attendant within a fixed time shall be rerouted automatically to a defined station or to the
        night answering station.
    -   Inter-console calling. It shall be possible to reach any attendant console from any other
        console by dialling the console number.
    -   Call hold (parking). The attendant shall be able to put calls on hold and attend to them
        later. If a call is held for a long time attendant receives a recall.
    -   Automatic call hold. Whenever the attendant changes to another answering unit the
        existing call is held automatically.

    -   Automatic call distributed automatically to all the attendant consoles currently in
        operation.

    -   Attendant override. The attendant shall be able to break into any connection that does not
        have data protection.
    -   Automatic recall redials. On recall at the attendant console, the connection to the same
        station shall be switched through by pressing a key, without having to redial the station
        number.
    -   Attendant conference. The attendant shall be able to set up a conference call.

                                                                                                 308
  -   Series calling. When the station user has cradled the handset the outside caller shall be
      intercepted by the attendant console so that he can be extended to another station.
  -   Last number redials. The attendant shall be able to store an outside call number for
      subsequent redialling.
  -   Display indicating the waiting calls. The display indicates the number of calls of each type
      waiting in the call store.
  -   Console-less operation. The function can be taken over by one or more stations as per
      night answering arrangements.
  -   Night answering arrangements. Several different night answering arrangements shall be
      possible, such as:
  -   Assigned night answer. All trunks can be switched through to individual stations.
  -   Special night answer position. Several or all trunks can be assigned to one station which
      functions as night station.
  -   Combined assigned/universal night answer. Some of the trunks should be able to be
      operated under the assigned night answer arrangement, the rest under universal night
      answer.
  -   Listed directory number to assigned night answer. Automatic changeover to night
      answering arrangement shall be possible if the attendant console does not answer a call
      within a fixed time.

SYSTEM FLEXIBILITY

  The flexibility of the system shall enable the following:

  -   Flexible assigning of call numbers/services codes. 1-4 digit call numbers and codes.
  -   Alerting tone if a non-existent call number or code is dialled or interception by the
      attendant console.
  -   Flexible connection of station line circuits with telephone sets of different dialling
      methods (dial pulsing / DTMF signalling)
  -   Connection of telephones on a 2 and 3 wire basis.
  -   DID flexible station numbering.

  It shall be possible to adapt the DID numbering plan to the numbering scheme of the public
  exchange.

STATION-RELATED FEATURES

  -   The system provides for at least 30 classes of service. Each station user shall be allocated
      to one of these classes.
  -   Access restriction of stations for outgoing calls to
           o Other stations
           o Trunks
           o Tie trunks shall be possible
  -   Access restriction of stations for incoming calls from certain;
           o Trunk groups
           o Station user groups shall be provided
  -   Toll denial: For certain stations outgoing calls can only be set up with the aid of the
      attendant.
  -   Class of service blocking: Restrictions in station traffic shall be possible between station
      user groups or between stations within a group.
  -   It shall be possible to block of features by means of the flash key or transfer button.
  -   Toll restrictions: It shall be possible to use entered digit strings as


                                                                                               309
             Disable digits
             Enable digits.

    -   Fifteen - digit code restriction: It shall be possible to set up 4 restriction groups each 8
        fifteen-digit dial codes.
    -   Eight-digit code restriction: It shall be possible to set up 16 restriction groups each with
        16 eight-digit dial codes.
    -   Station hunting: It must be possible to include all stations in hunting groups.

    Capability shall be provided to incorporate up to 30 stations in each hunting group. The
    number of hunting groups can be formed shall be unlimited. It shall also be possible to link
    terminal and circular hunting groups.

    -   Station hunting – terminal: Station ringing shall always start at the first idle station in the
        hunting group; if a station is busy the second station the group is rung, etc.
    -   Station hunting – circular: Station ringing shall always be distributed evenly to the
        hunting group stations.
    -   Station hunting - non – consecutive: The call numbers of hunting group stations do not
        have to be consecutive.
    -   Stop hunt: Stations can be disconnected from the hunting group by dealing a code.
    -   Secretarial hunting: It shall be possible for an overflow at one or more hunting groups to
        be passed to another station or hunting group.
    -   Conference calls: The system shall be capable of conferencing minimum of 8 parties. At
        least 3 each eight-way conference setups at the same time should be possible.
    -

17.2.2 Numbering plan

    Office Rooms:

    The numbers of the telephones in the office rooms shall be suited to the floor and room
    numbers.

    Service numbers:

    The call numbers of the service departments shall be one or more lines shall be provided as
    required for each service call number.



17.2.3 Documentation

    All documents shall be available in Turkish.

    Documentation shall include:

    - Technical description of the PABX tendered

    - Service manual for maintenance personnel

    - Operating instructions for station users

    - Operating instructions for the attendant console
                                                                                                   310
17.2.4 Training

    The contractor shall train the customer's personnel in the maintenance of the PABX system.

    Personnel operating the attendant console shall be trained in operation and monitoring of the
    PABX system.



17.2.5 MDF (Main Distribution Frame)

    MDF shall be in two parts, with the capacity of connecting up to 800 lines on the PABX side
    and 800 lines on the building side.

    Modular type MDF is required with slot-type connection blocks. Trunk lines shall have over
    voltage protection with fuses.



18. Fire Alarm System


18.1 General

    Supply all labour, tools, services and equipment, and provide all materials and equipment
    required to complete fire alarm system work in accordance with this section of the
    specification and the drawings.



18.1.1 System Description

    This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the
    microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a
    complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm
    initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control panels, auxiliary control devices,
    anunciators, power supplies, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

    The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 and local
    codes. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors.

    The fire alarm manufacturer must have following licences to execute all works which is
    defined as his scope.

    -   Licence for material
    -   Licences for design
    -   Licences for execution
    -   Licences for start-up and commissioning




                                                                                                311
18.2 Products


18.2.1 Equipments

    MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL:

        CPU:

    The main FACP Central Console shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing
    Unit. The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to
    make up the system: intelligent detectors, addressable modules, local and remote operator
    terminals, printers, annunciators, voice communication system and other system controlled
    devices.

    The main FACP shall perform the following functions:

        -   Supervise and monitor all intelligent addressable detectors and monitor modules
            connected to the system for normal, trouble and alarm conditions.
        -   Supervise all initiating signalling and notification circuits throughout the facility by
            way of connection to monitor and control modules.
        -   Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarm condition.
            Operate all notification appliances, such as audible alarm signalling devices and
            loudspeaker and auxiliary devices as programmed.
        -   Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble, supervisory or alarm condition on
            operator's terminals, panel display, and annunciators.

    All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without
    special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm
    control panel.

    All texts on the displays and printers will be in Turkish.

    Filtering of false signals will be possible.

    The equipments will be easy to use.

    Check of a condition of switched off addresses before restoration.

        POWER SUPPLY:

    -   The Main Power Supply shall operate on 220 VAC, 50 Hz, and shall provide all necessary
        power for the FACP.
    -   It shall provide battery charger for 24 hours of standby using dual-rate charging
        techniques for fast battery recharge.
    -   It shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect circuit, capable of detecting earth
        faults on sensitive addressable modules.

        PRINTER:

    -   Printers shall be of the automatic type, printing code, time, date, location, category, and
        condition.


                                                                                                 312
-   The printer shall provide hard-copy printout of all changes in status of the system and
    shall time-stamp such printouts with the current time-of-day and date.

    REMOTE INDICATOR:

-   Provide local energy as required.
-   The system shall be capable of operating a local energy fire alarm transmitter for
    automatically transmitting fire information to the fire department.
-   Provide capability and equipment for transmission of zone alarm and trouble signals to
    remote operator's terminals, system printers and annunciators.
-   Transmitters shall be compatible with the systems and equipment they are connected to
    such as timing, operation and other required features.

    SYSTEM EXPANSION:

Design the main FACP and transponders so that the system can be expanded in the future to
include the addition of twenty percent more circuits or zone without disruption or replacement
of the existing control panel. This shall include hardware capacity, software capacity and
cabinet space.



    FIELD PROGRAMMING:

-   The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the
    need for special tools or electronic equipment and shall not require field replacement of
    electronic integrated circuits.
-   All programming shall be accomplished through the standard FACP keyboard or through
    the video terminal.
-   All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
-   The programming function shall be enabled with a password that may be defined
    specifically for the system when it is installed. Two levels of password protection shall be
    provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet. One level shall be used for status level changes
    such as zone disable or manual on/off commands. A second (higher-level) shall be used
    for actual change of program information.

    SPECIFIC SYSTEM OPERATIONS

-   Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity
    of any or all analogue intelligent smoke detectors in the system from the system keypad or
    from the keyboard of the video terminal.
-   System Point Operations: Any addressable device in the system shall have the capability
    to be enabled or disabled through the system keypad or video terminal.
-   System output points shall be capable of being turned on or off from the system keypad or
    the video terminal.
-   System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status report
    will be generated and printed, listing all system status:
-   System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain a
    history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 400 system output/input/control
    activations. Each of these activations will be stored and time and date stamped with the
    actual time of the activation, until an operator requests that the contents be either
    displayed or printed. The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one
    event at a time, and the actual number of activations may also be displayed and or printed.

                                                                                             313
           The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory for
           history storage are not acceptable.
      -    Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automatically
           interrogate each intelligent system detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a
           period of time.
      -    To operate with the help of programmed outputs the systems of ventilation, air supply,
           and automatic installations of fire extinguishing, lifts, fire prevention doors, emergency
           exits etc.



18.2.2 System Components

  AUDIBLE ALARM SIGNALLING DEVICES:

  Audible signalling devices to be cone, re-entrant type speakers as shown on the plans. All
  loudspeakers must be special types rated for the fire alarm systems. They must be listed UL for
  this purpose.

  ADDRESSABLE DEVICES:

  -       Addressable devices shall provide an address-setting means.
  -       Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable.
  -       Smoke detector sensitivity shall be set through the fire alarm control panel and shall be
          adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may be
          automatically adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis.
  -       Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation
          and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance.
  -       The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base which
          includes a tamper proof feature. An optional base shall be available with a built-in local
          sounder rated at 85 dBA minimum.

   ADDRESSABLE PULL BOX (manual station):

  Addressable Pull Boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
  representing the state of the manual switch. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and
  shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use
  except by the use of a key.

  Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi flush mounting as shown on the plans.

  INTELLIGENT PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DEDECTOR:

  The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density
  and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analogue
  level of smoke density.

  INTELLIGENT THERMAL DEDECTOR:

  Thermal Detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit (58
  Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F. (9.4 C.) per minute.



                                                                                                    314
The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions caused by a fire and
shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analogue level
of such thermal measurements.

An optional intelligent heat detector shall be available for applications which do not require a
rate-or-rise element.

INTELLIGENT DUCT SMOKE DEDECTOR:

In-Duct Smoke Detector Housing shall accommodate either an intelligent ionization sensor or an
intelligent photoelectric sensor, of that provides continuous analogue monitoring and alarm
verification from the panel.

When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and appropriate action
taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke
and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system.

ADDRESSABLE DRY CONTACT MONITOR MODULE:

Addressable Monitor Modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of
conventional Alarm Initiating Devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the Fire Alarm
Control Panel Signalling Line Circuit (SL Loops).

TWO WIRE DEDECTOR MONITOR MODULE:

Addressable Monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of
conventional 2-Wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device).

ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE:

Addressable Control Modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one
conventional Notification Appliance Circuit, 24 VDC powered, polarized Audio/Visual
Notification Appliances. For fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control
module may be set to operate as a dry contract relay.

ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS:

Wall mounted units shall be aluminium moulded containing a reliable electromagnet providing a
minimum holding force of 16 kN with no residual magnetism.

Units to power by a separate supply fed through specific control contacts of the fire alarm
control unit.

Cast aluminium door portion to contain a stainless steel holding plate securely fastened to the
door. Provide a template for drilling mounting holes. The holding plate assembly contains a
pivoting adjustment as well as a shock absorbing nylon bushing.




                                                                                               315
18.2.3 Batteries and External Charger

   Battery:

   -     Shall be 12 volt, Dry type.
   -     Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than four
         hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.
   -     The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level
         checks refilling, spills and leakage shall not be required.



18.2.4 Emergency and Exit Luminaries

   Exit Signs:

       - Shall be single sided or double sided.
       - Shall have a power capacity of 1x8 W for single side and 2x8 W for double side.
       - Batteries of exit signs shall have sufficient capacity to power exit signs for not less than 1
          hour.

   Emergency Luminaries:

       - Shall have a power capacity of 2x8 W.
       - Built-in batteries ofshall have sufficient capacity to power the luminaries for not less than 1
          hour.



18.2.5 Spare Parts and Tools

   Necessary tools, measuring devices, software, and necessary amount of spare parts shall be
   supplied.

18.3 Execution


18.3.1 Installation

   Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, the local norms, as shown on the
   drawings, and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

   All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas
   and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the
   system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures
   shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage.

18.3.2 Typical Operation

   Actuation of any manual station, smoke detector heat detector or water flow switch shall cause
   the following operations to occur unless otherwise specified:

          -   Activate all programmed notification circuits until silenced.
                                                                                                      316
       -   Actuate all strobe units until the panel is reset.
       -   Annunciate the active initiating devices and zones.
       -   Release all magnetic door holders to doors to adjacent zones on the floor from that the
           alarm was initiated.
       -   Return all elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress.
       -   A smoke detector in any elevator lobby shall, in addition to the above functions, return
           all elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress.
       -   Smoke detectors in the elevator machine room or top of hoist way shall return all
           elevators in to the primary or alternate floor.
       -   Duct type smoke detectors shall, in addition to the above functions shut down the
           ventilation system or close associated control dampers as appropriate.
       -   Activation of any sprinkler system flow switch or valve tamper switch shall cause a
           system supervisory alarm indication.

  Auxiliary Control System Normal Operation:

       -   "On/Auto/Off" switches and status indicators shall be provided for monitoring and
           manual control of fans, dampers, door unlocking, door holder release, HVAC Control
           Units, Elevator Status, Stairwell pressurization, Smoke Exhaust Fans.
       -   Positive feedback shall be employed to verify correct operation of the device being
           controlled. Systems that indicate on/off/auto by physical switch position only are not
           acceptable.
       -   A single yellow trouble LED shall be provided with each switch to indicate a trouble in
           the monitor and control point associated with that switch.



19. Satellite Main Antenna TV System (Smatv)


19.1 General

    Work includes providing all materials, labour, equipment, accessories, services and tests
    necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, a complete operational
    “SMATV” system including, but not limited to FM, VHF, UHF antennas, antenna amplifiers,
    antenna supports structure, line extender amplifiers signal dividers, transmission cables,
    connectors, band separators, multiplexers, accessories, required power supplies to amplifiers,
    pre-amplifiers, etc.. All required terminal and strip cabinets, all conduit, sleeves, and fish wire
    in all conduit runs, and all outlet boxes with wall plates.



19.2 Products


19.2.1 General

    The system is used as a single source from which signals are distributed throughout building by
    a cable system for multi set operation.

    The system is required to produce pictures on a television receiver with PAL, SECAM, NTSC,
    etc., formats connected to any outlet, with no visible cross modulation, ghosting, or beat
    interference when tuned to any of the distribution channels.

                                                                                                  317
19.2.2 Equipment
   System Performance:

   System to provide for reception of monochrome colour TV transmission system signal at every
   equal to or superior to that obtainable on a signal standard receiver connected directly to the
   system antennas

   For outlets, located as shown on the drawings, system to provide minimum signal levels as
   follows:

      +6 dBmV, VHF-TV (Channel)

   Equipment rating: 220 V, 50 HZ, AC operation.



19.2.3 VHF Antennas

   Master antennas: Of the signal channel yagi type, having at least five elements for channel 2
   through 4 and at least ten elements for channels 5 through 12.

   Antenna supporting hardware: Of galvanized steel, stainless or aluminium except utilize
   galvanized tubular steel not less than 38mm (1-1/2”) in diameter for the mast.

   Antennas: Of corrosion resistant chrome aluminium alloy construction and design for SMATV
   service; domestic antennas sold to the general public for home use are not acceptable; make
   dipole elements of one piece, not collapsible or hinged, and when ever six feet long, sand
   loaded for damping vibration; 74 ohm gamma-matched coaxial feed types.

   Where antennas of different frequency are mounted on a single mast vertical space antennas at
   least 0,65 wavelength at the visual carrier frequency.

   Cover coaxial fittings to the antennas with a weather sealing device supplied by the antenna
   maker and with silicone grease.

   As Certified by the manufacturer Antenna construction shall withstand wind velocities of 150
   MPH.



19.2.4 UHF Antenna

   Type: Slot-fed, 12 element log periodic driver and an array to 13 directors with maximum
   signal obtained by the precise 75 ohm match produced by slot-fed driver output; 13 directors,
   which are cut to frequency, to offer high gain and yagi performance characteristics.

   Construction: Heavy duty seamless chrome-aluminium tubing; end sealed against entry of
   moisture; protected with a special anti-corrosion finish for all weather resistant installation.

   Gain: 12 dB with a front to back ratio of 20 dB.

   Wind Load Rating: Capable of withstanding 150 mph winds.

                                                                                              318
19.2.5 FM Antenna

    Omni directional, of turnstile design, and supplied with a 300/75 OHM matching transformer.



19.2.6 VHF Pre-amplifiers

    Utilize pre-amplifiers especially designed for mast mounting for each VHF TV channel and the
    FM bank as required.

    VHF channel pre-amplifier noise figure: not to exceed 3 dB and have an “F” type output
    connector; VHF channel pre-amplifier to meet or exceed the following electrical specifications.

       a. Gain:

          Channel 2 through 4; 27 dB minimum, 30 dB typical.

          Channel 5 through 12; 24 dB minimum, 26 dB typical.

       b. Bandpass Flatness:

          Channel 2-12; 6 MHz +/- 0.25 dB.

       c. Noise Figure:

          Channel 2 through 4; less than 3.0 dB,

          Channel 5 through 12; less than 2.5 dB.

       d. Input/output Impedance 75 ohms.

          Connectors: input, output monitor all type F.

       e. Input Match:

          Channel 2 through 4; 14 dB minimum, 20 dB typical.

          Channel 5 through 12; 6 dB minimum, 8 dB typical.

       f. Input Impedance: 75 ohms.
       g. Selectivity: 12 dB minimum, down 9 MHz from channel centre frequency 14 dB typical.
          Minimum recommended input for TASO Grade 1 (excellent)

          Picture: 300 uv (-10 dBmV).

       h. Overload Rejection: Maximum input for just receptacle cross modulation:

          23 dBmV Low Band

          26 dBmV High Band
                                                                                              319
       i. Output Match:

          Channel 2 through 4; 8 dB minimum, 10 dB typical.

          Channel 7 through 12; 4 dB minimum, 8 dB typical.

       j. Output Monitor Jack: 20 dB lower than output signal level (back matches)
       k. Operating ambient temperature range: - 40 F to + 140 F.
       l. Power Requirement: - 21 VDC at 40 ma, regulated power supply.



19.2.7 UHF Pre-amplifiers

    Utilize pre-amplifiers for each UHF channel as required. Each UHF channel pre-amplifier to
    meet or exceed the following electrical specifications:

    Centre Frequency: Any channel 14-38 bandpass +/- 1/4 dB over specified channel.

          Minimum Gain                  20 dB

          Maximum Input Signal          + 22 dBmV

          Input/Output Impedance       75 ohm “F” connectors or

                                        300 ohm twin lead

          Operating Ambient

          Temperature                   - 40 F to + 140 F

          Power supply                 - 21 VDC regulated power supply



19.2.8 Active channel Combiner (High Output)

    Head-end combiner/amplifiers: 45-450 Mhz solid state types, having 12 input channel capacity
    with band widths of 5 Mhz with a flatness of response +/- 1 dB or less and an output capability
    of + 52 dBmV (3 or more than 0.5 dB; skirt selectivity not less than -60 dBc at the adjacent
    channel edge.

    Amplifier Gain: 15 dB or more at full capacity of 12 channels.

    Channel capacity: Up to 12 Channels.

    Input and Output impedance: 75 ohm nominal, and VSWR of 1.50 or less.

    Output circuits to provide test output of -20 dB less than RF system output.

    Amplifier to contain integral automatic gain control circuits output variations within 1 dB input
    variations.

                                                                                                320
19.2.9 Outlets and Termination

    Outlets, Flush mounted, recessed TV coaxial receptacle to accommodate a 75 ohm plug-in
    solder less cable connector and available in four values of receiver isolation; network of the
    cable loss compensating type to distribute equal levels on all channels to all receivers;
    minimum isolation between receivers of 23 dB; outlets matched to the coaxial cable and source
    matched to the TV receiver; isolation network completely sealed proof, using coaxial connector
    for input and outputs.

    Install at unused ports and feeder line ends; terminating resistors with 75-ohm impedance
    designed to cover the frequency range from 5 Mhz to 450 Mhz and 30 dB across the VHF
    band.



19.2.10 Coaxial Cable

    75 ohms impedance and market with the manufacturer‟s name; sweep tested by the
    manufacturer and certification available on request; no discontinuity to exist within TV
    frequency bands 45-450 MHz on the cable.

    Drop cables of RG-6 and RG-59 shall be used. RG-6 will be used at risers and RG-59 will be
    used between taps and wall outlets where usually small conduits are also used. The shielding
    shall be of at least 80 dB.

    Cable construction: copper-clad centre conductor, foam polyethylene dielectric, aluminium
    braid shield and polyvinyl chloride jacket; individual drain wires are not acceptable in lieu of
    braid provides the dual function of shielding and drain.



20. Sound System


20.1 General

    Supply all labour tools, services and equipment, provide all materials and equipment required
    to complete sound systems work in accordance with this section of specification and the
    drawings.



20.2 Products


20.2.1 Central Sound System

    All sound system equipment shall be solid state.




                                                                                               321
    Speaker in public areas shall be suitable for flush ceiling mounting. The maximum average
    power rating shall be minimum 6 watts, with a uniform frequency response range of 50 Hz to
    15.000 Hz.

    Speakers for outdoor use shall be of the coaxial horn weatherproof type. The frequency
    response is 20 Hz. to 20.000 Hz.

    FM / AM tuners shall be high quality receivers with a total harmonic distortion of less than
    0.15 %.

    The background music tape player shall provide unattended play with signal noise ratio
    greater than 45 dB and wow and flutter each less than 0.36 %.

    The microphone shall have a frequency response from 70 Hz to 10.000 Hz with an omni-
    directional pick-up pattern. An activating switch (push-to-talk) controls the microphones,
    which have a shock mounted desk stand base.



20.3 Execution


20.3.1 Central Sound System

    One channel of sound will be distributed to the lobby, cafeteria and corridors



21. CCTV System


21.1 General

 A Coloured CCTV system will be provided for the security of the building. Cameras will be placed in
 the entrances to the building. Cameras will be continuously recorded by digital recorders.



21.2 Products


21.2.1 Digital Recording and switching Unit

             Video Switching Unit features:

       -   16 camera inputs
       -   Monitor outputs
       -   Electronic switching
       -   Automatic sequential switching
       -   Manual switching
       -   Number generator for the camera inputs
       -   Adjustable sequential time
       -   Auto alarm and multi sequential auto alarm VTR start

                                                                                                  322
       -   Sync through the coax cable

 The video switcher shall be provided with:

       -   Manual selection push button cameras
       -   Selection facilities for manual/automatic scanning
       -   Zooming control



21.2.2 Monitor

    Monitors features:

       -   Coloured screen 19”
       -   Resolution: better then 500 lines in the centre of the pictures
       -   Lines: 625 CCIR
       -   Video input 1 Vpp



21.2.3 Camera

    Camera features:

       -   Indoor installation with wall or ceiling mounting bracket
       -   Operation illuminance min 1 lux
       -   Colour
       -   TV standard CCIR or EIA
       -   Lines: better than 500
       -   Signal to noise ratio 38 dB at 100 nA
       -   Video tube 1” or 2/3”
       -   Video output 1 Vpp VBS
       -   Normal room ambient temperature
       -   Self-contained power supply facilities for 220 V, 50 Hz mains



22. Card Access, Security and Car Barrier System


22.1 General

    At the main entrance and at some laboratory entrance as shown on drawings card readers will
    be used for incoming and outgoing. In the same doors and some unmanned doors magnetic
    switches will ensure the monitoring of these doors and electrical locks will provide the
    opening of the doors. In case of fire these doors will be opened automatically.

    In main entrance of the building 2 turnstiles with card readers on both sides will be installed.
    For security also a door type metal detector shall be used to detect metals.

    In order to control the entrance/passage to the car park of the building, a car barrier system
    will be placed. There will two barriers at the main entrance and one at the service entrance.

                                                                                                 323
22.2 Products

    The system will be consisting of (but not limited with) the following components:


22.2.1 Central System
    The integrated security control system shall be based on proven computer technology
    consisting of hardware and software to implement a complete functional system designed to
    meet the requirements. All system hardware and software shall be based on types already
    widely used for this field of application with full service and support facilities available.
    Central system should include the necessary software, computer, and a laser A4 printer. The
    software should provide the monitoring, recording and controlling of the each card access
    point.
    The access permissions and limitations of the each card owner will be programmed from this
    central computer.
    The central system should also include a card preparation unit including all the relevant
    information for the card owner like personal identification, authorised entry zones etc.
    according to ISO standards. The registered card is then ready for issue and use with the access
    card reader units operating turnstiles or doors. Card life shall be greater than 100,000 passes.

22.2.2 Proximity Card Reader
    This unit shall comprise a card reader capable of interfacing with the application software to
    put into the computer database all the relevant information associated with a particular card.
    (E.g. personal identification, authorized entry zones, authorized entry times, etc.....)

    The card readers for the indoor doors will be at least 12 cm proximity type card readers. For
    car park barriers 60cm proximity outdoor type card readers will be used.


22.2.3 Electrical Lock Fail Safe/Fail Secure
    Doors shall generally be secured and released utilizing fail safe low voltage electromagnetic
    locking devices unless specified otherwise. All locks shall be of the highest quality with a
    minimum holding force of 1200 lbs for use on external doors and 600 lbs holding force when
    used on internal doors.



22.2.4 Siren with Flashing Lamp
    Local audio/visual alarm indicators /alarm sounders shall be capable of maintaining a
    minimum sound level of 70 dBA and a maximum of 100 dBA. The sound produced shall be
    distinctive, unlike any other sound produced by equipment or other alarms (e.g. fire alarm).
    The sounders shall be capable of giving both continuous and intermittent signals and the
    output volume shall be adjustable within the specified range. The audible alarm shall be
    silenced when acknowledged by the operator in the Security Control Room, but no local
    silencing shall be available on the unit. The alarm signal lamp shall be of the Xenon strobe
    type with an output of minimum 15 candela seconds. The flashing rate shall be once every
    two seconds. The lens cover shall be blue. The combined audio/visual alarm unit shall be
    suitable for both outdoor and indoor mounting.


                                                                                                 324
22.2.5 Addressing Units for Security Equipment
    The interface unit shall be provided to enable communications between the computer and the
    various parts of the integrated security system.


22.2.6 Magnetic Contacts for Doors
    Door contact sensors shall be of the hermetically sealed magnetic switch with contacts.

    The manufacturer‟s switching voltage shall be implemented by the manufacturer. The
    complete switch installation shall be designed for operation without failure for a minimum of
    10,000 operations. The Contractor shall supply all necessary mountings and cabling.

    Where double doors are installed and each leaf is moveable, each moveable part shall be fitted
    with its own independent protection switch and alarm circuit.



22.2.7 Car Barriers
    In order to control the entrance/passage to the car park of the building, a car barrier system
    will be placed. This barrier shall operate at 220 V 50 Hz. This car barrier system will operate
    in parallel with the card access system. It will operate and lift its arm when a signal comes
    from the car readers. After the passage of the car barrier shall close automatically with
    adjustable time property.

    There shall be magnetic loops sensing the car and prevent the arms from descending during
    the passage of the car.

    It shall be also possible to operate the barrier manually by the guards.

    In order to increase the wind resistance aerodynamic rounded pipes shall be used for arms.

    The barrier arms will be painted according to the relevant standards and it will be easily seen
    even at bad weather conditions.

23. Data and Voice System


23.1 General

    Data and Telephone system will be constructed as a structured cabling system. This part
    explains the specifications of this system.

23.2 Products

    The structured cabling is recommended as they can support several technologies.

    The system is designed as CAT6 and it will be sufficient for the future technological
    advantages in IT systems.




                                                                                                 325
    Each station cable run of the horizontal building wiring is limited to a maximum of 90 meters.
    This includes an allowance for 4 meters in the work area and 6 meters for equipment patch
    cables in the 19" Rack.

    The office cable within the user's working area connects to the network interface card that
    resides inside the Personal Computer. At the wiring closet, the equipment room cable
    connects to the active equipment.

    Active equipments are not a part of this design. They will be selected and procured by the
    owner. But necessary place for installation of these in 19” rack shall be foreseen.

    Telephone cables of Cat6 4 pair UTP shall be ended at work places at RJ 45 Cat6 sockets. In
    this way any telephone socket can be used for also data just by changing the cross connections
    at patch panel of the floor.



23.2.1 Horizontal Distribution

    Two wiring closet in ground floor shall each include one 19" Rack to install patch panels and
    active equipment.

    The Horizontal Distribution provides the physical layer media connection from the work area
    to the wiring closet and to the main patch panel.

    Each UTP cable terminates in a RJ45 connector according to EIA/TIA 568 Standard.

    In the wiring closet, all individual office data cables end / attach behind an RJ45 patch panel
    (several panels if needed).

    Appropriate surface mounted trunking on the wall according to the outlets distribution shall
    be provided in the laboratories. RJ45 sockets shall be mounted in wall channels but they can
    also be wall flush-mounted where wall channels are not possible.



23.2.2 Vertical Distribution – Backbone

    The backbone cabling of data network shall be also CAT UTP.

    The backbone cabling of voice network shall be in copper multi pair backbone cable. This
    cable shall be mounted on cable ladders separated from power cables in vertical shaft.

    For cabling management consistency, the cables for the vertical distribution are also attached
    to the 19" Racks used for the horizontal distributions.




                                                                                                326

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Stats:
views:565
posted:4/25/2010
language:English
pages:326